LHR Technical

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.
10
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.
9600LSY/LHR REL.1.0/2.0 TECHNICAL HDBK
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
17
HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
HANDBOOK STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18
SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
19
QUICK GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . .
25
11 INTRODUCTION TO THE 9600LSY RADIO SYSTEM FAMILY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.2 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.3 Main features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.4 System usage in MW links and networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11.5 9600LSY basic configurations and Network Element types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
27
27
27
28
31
33
12 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2 Introduction to system configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.2 Station types and configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.3 Channel configurations and protection schemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3 General block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4 Hardware components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.2 Rack and Top Rack Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.3 Transceiver subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.4 Baseband subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.5 ADM 1650SMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.6 FANS Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.7 System wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35
35
36
36
36
39
40
41
41
41
42
44
49
52
53
05
050208
S405011401
S.SOLIMENA ITAVE
E.CORRADINI ITAVE
04
040629
S404062101
V.RODELLA ITAVE
E.CORRADINI ITAVE
01
011115
validated
G.CONSONNI ITACO
E.CORRADINI ITACO
F.BUTORI, G.MAISTO
ED
DATE
CHANGE NOTE
APPRAISAL AUTHORITY
ORIGINATOR
9600LSY REL.1.0/2.0
LHR
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
1 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
53
54
54
54
57
60
60
60
61
62
63
72
72
72
72
72
77
77
77
78
80
80
81
13 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2 System Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.1 General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.2 99% power channel bandwidth and Emission Designator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.3 Power supply characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.4 Mechanical characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3 Transceiver characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4 Regenerator and Modem characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.1 Modem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.2 XPIC & Combiner (XPIC STM1 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.3 Regenerator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.4 Power consumption (Regenerator only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.5 Branching interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.6 Protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.7 Environmental characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.7.1 General characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.7.2 Mechanically active substances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.8 Optical Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.8.1 Related Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.8.2 Hazard Level classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.8.3 Incorporated laser sources characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.8.4 Labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.8.5 Aperture and fiber connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.8.6 Engineering design features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.8.7 Safety instruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.9 1650SMC characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
83
83
84
90
91
92
93
95
95
97
98
99
100
100
101
101
101
102
102
102
102
103
104
104
104
104
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
2 / 542

12.4.8 Installation materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12.5 Radio Transmission features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5.2 Frequency reuse technique (CCDP) and XPIC Cross Polarization Canceller . . . . .
12.5.3 Transmitted power control: static and ATPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6 Signal Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.2 STM0 & STM1 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.3 SDH mapping adopted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.4 SDH interface usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.6.5 SOH bytes and service channel access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.7 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.7.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.7.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.7.3 Synchronization in Regenerator station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.7.4 Synchronization in WMSN station by means of 1650SMC ADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.8 Equipment Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.8.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.8.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.8.3 The NE architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.8.4 The F interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.8.5 The Qecc/QB3 interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.8.6 ECT and RECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

21 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.1 Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.2 Station configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.3 Radio channel configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.4 System configuration for network solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.5 Branching configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.6 Rack configurations for frequency reuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
21.6.1 Interconnections in reused systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
121
121
121
126
134
135
140
143
22 EQUIPMENT PART LIST AND PROVISIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

22.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
22.2 Part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
22.3 Equipment provisioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
22.3.1 Rack and shelves summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
22.3.2 Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
22.3.3 Base Band shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
22.3.4 Transceiver shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
22.3.5 FANS shelf and FANS assembled units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
23 OPERATIVE INFORMATION ON EQUIPMENT BOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

23.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
23.2 Cautions to avoid equipment damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
23.3 Boards of BaseBand shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
23.3.1 PSU and PSF units operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
23.3.2 SYSTEM CONTROLLER and FLASH CARD unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . 172
23.3.3 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
23.3.4 RRACHANNEL unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
23.3.5 RRASTANDBY unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
23.3.6 MODEM unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
23.4 TRANSCEIVER unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
23.4.1 Composition of transceiver units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
23.4.2 Assembly views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
23.4.3 Internal composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
23.4.4 Hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
23.4.5 Internal interconnection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
23.4.6 Front connectors usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
23.5 Branching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
23.5.1 Branching drawings and BranchingTransceivers connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
23.5.2 Branching Front Plate Kit (Rx branching area) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
23.6 FANS SHELF and FANS assembled unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
23.7 Boards of TRU shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
23.7.1 Top Rack Unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
23.7.2 Kit Loudspeaker operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
23.8 Additional Housekeeping unit operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
24 SYSTEM CABLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
24.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
24.2 Shelves connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
24.2.1 TRU connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
24.2.2 Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
24.2.3 Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST connector layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
24.2.4 Transceiver shelf connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
24.3 Cable kits and cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
3 / 542
218
218
219
221
230
230
230
230
230
231
235
236
236
SECTION 3: FREQUENCY PLANS, TRANSCEIVER P/N & HW SETTING . . . . 243
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
31 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
31.1 Channel plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
31.2 Transmitter specialization for a frequency plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
31.3 Transceiver hardware settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
31.3.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
31.3.2 Hardware setting dipswitches on transceiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
31.3.3 Frequency setting by HW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
31.3.4 Hardware setting of the transceiver Tx and Rx frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
31.3.5 Settings for reuse configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
31.3.6 Example of hardware setting of two transceivers in a radio link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
31.3.7 Propaedeutic explanations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
32 9640LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.1 9640LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.2 9640LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.2.1 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR Recommendation F.635. fig.3/Annex 1 . . . . . . . . . .
32.2.2 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.635 recommends 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.2.3 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR Recommendation F.382 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.2.4 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR F. 382 (Extended) Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.2.5 9640LSY Channel plan: DTI channel plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
32.2.6 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR Recommendation F.635, Annex 1, fig.6 . . . . . . . . . .
32.2.7 9640LSY Channel plan: O.I.R.T. (Russia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
259
259
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
33 9647LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33.1 9647LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33.2.1 9647LSY Channel plan: ITUR Recommendation F.1099, Annex 1, fig. 2 . . . . . . . .
33.2.2 9647LSY Channel plan: Spain UN56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
33.2.3 9647LSY Channel plan: Austria Defence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
267
267
267
268
269
270
34 9662LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34.1 9662LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34.2.1 9662LSY Channel plan: ITUR F 383 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
34.2.2 9662LSY Channel plan: O.I.R.T. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
271
271
271
272
273
35 9667LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
35.1 9667LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
275
275
275
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
4 / 542

24.4 Power supply distribution connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24.5 Connections between TRU and input housekeepings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.6 Signal connections between shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.7 ModemTransceiverBranching connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.8 External interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.8.1 Power Line Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.8.2 SDH interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.8.3 Input / Output Unprotected WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.8.4 Input / Output Protected WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.8.5 Auxiliary Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.8.6 Management interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.8.7 Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24.8.8 Summarizing / Housekeeping alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35.2.1 9667LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.384, CEPT T/R 1402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

35.2.2 9667LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.384 IRAN STM1 6U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
276
277
36 9674LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36.1 9674LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36.2.1 9674LSY Channel: ITUR F.385 Annex 3 L&H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36.2.2 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Annex 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36.2.3 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Annex 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36.2.4 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36.2.5 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
36.2.6 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
279
279
279
280
281
283
284
286
288
37 9681LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
37.1 9681LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
37.2 9681LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
37.2.1 9681LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
37.2.3 9681LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 POLAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
37.2.4 9681LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 IRAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
38 9610LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38.1 9610LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
38.2.1 9610LSY Channel plan: MEDIASET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
299
299
299
300
39 9611LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39.1 9611LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39.2.1 9611LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.387 rec. 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39.2.2 9611LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.387 ANNEX 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
301
301
301
302
303
310 9613LSY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
310.1 9613LSY part list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
310.2 9613LSY frequency plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
310.2.1 9613LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.497 Rec.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
310.2.2 9613LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.497 rec.1 IRAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
305
305
305
306
308
SECTION 4: MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
41 MAINTENANCE POLICY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41.1 Classification of maintenance levels and operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41.2 First Level Maintenance Personnel skill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
41.3 Second Level Maintenance Personnel skill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
311
311
312
312
42 SET AND USE OF EOW FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

42.1 Telephone kit and telephone set operative information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
42.2 EOW Channel use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
42.2.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
42.2.2 Call Setup/End by Telephone Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
42.2.3 Additional standard Party lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
42.3 TPH Channel use (Additional Voice) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
42.3.1 General Information and usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
42.3.2 Additional Party lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
5 / 542
317
317
317
317
318
322
322
324
324
324
44 FIRST LEVEL MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

44.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44.2 Procedure summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44.3 System state display by visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44.3.1 Inspection of station alarm lamps on TRU (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44.3.2 Inspection of alarm lamps on SYSCO unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
44.4 Checks by Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
325
325
325
326
326
327
328
45 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.1 Preventive Maintenance every year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
45.1.1 Preventive Maintenance for Fans Assembled Units (if equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
331
331
332
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
46 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
46.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
46.2 General flowchart of corrective maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
46.3 Alarm acknowledgment and attending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
46.3.1 Alarm acknowledgment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
46.3.2 Alarm Attending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
46.4 TroubleShooting starting with visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
46.4.1 Problems with the Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
46.4.2 CARD FAIL red led on SYSCO Unit turned on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
46.5 TroubleShooting via Craft Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
46.5.1 Alarm Surveillance (1330AS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
46.5.2 Operators Controls of the protection switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
46.5.3 Loopbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
46.5.4 TX mute function (local and remote) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
46.5.5 Not Intrusive BER measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
46.5.6 J0 Section Trace management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
46.5.7 Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
46.5.8 Radio Performance Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
46.5.9 Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
46.5.10 Additional information on other handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
47 UNIT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
47.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
47.2 Summary information on FPGA upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
47.3 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
47.3.1 EMC norms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
47.3.2 Safety rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
47.3.3 Cautions to avoid equipment damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
47.3.4 PSU replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
47.3.5 PSF replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
47.3.6 SYSCO replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
47.3.7 FLASH CARD replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
6 / 542

43 MAINTENANCE TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

43.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43.2 Instruments and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43.2.1 Software tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43.2.2 System and Maintenance Tool Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43.3 Set of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43.3.1 Types of Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43.3.2 Number of spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43.3.3 General rules on spare parts management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
43.3.4 Spare Flash Card management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

47.3.8 SERVICE replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

47.3.9 RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.3.10 OPTICAL MODULE replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.3.11 MODEM replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
47.3.12 FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
357
359
362
364
367
48 TRANSCEIVER REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

48.1 Choice of the procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48.1.1 Transmitter specialization for a frequency plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
48.2 Transceiver replacement with a preassembled transceiver assembly . . . . . . . . . . . .
48.3 Transceiver repair and replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
369
369
369
370
373
49 FAULTY UNIT REPAIR AND REPAIR FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

49.1 Faulty unit sending back to repair center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49.2 Repair Form filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
395
395
395
SECTION 5: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

51 SIGNAL MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.1 STM1 frame structure and WST mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.2 STM0 frame structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.3 RFCOH services structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.4 SOH management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.5 DCCR Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.6 ATPC Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.7 Sub STM1 framing processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.8 SOH handling in normal operation condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.9 Alarms detected in RST section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.10 Regenerator Section trace management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.10.1 J0 management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.10.2 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
51.10.3 K0 management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
399
399
399
401
402
406
409
410
416
417
420
421
422
423
52 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52.2 Power supply subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52.3 Equipment Control Subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52.3.1 Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52.3.2 System Controller unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52.3.3 Flash Card description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52.3.4 Additional Housekeeping unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52.4 Baseband subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52.4.1 Interconnection general block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52.4.2 N+1 switch logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52.4.3 1:N switch logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52.4.4 RRACHANNEL STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52.4.5 RRASTANDBY STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52.4.6 STM1 optical module description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52.4.7 MODEM STM1 1WST and STM0 0WST description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52.4.8 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52.5 Transceiver subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52.5.1 Interconnection general block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52.5.2 DC/DC converter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52.5.3 Transmit and Service module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
52.5.4 Receive & IF Rx module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
425
425
426
430
430
435
441
442
443
443
445
452
454
456
459
460
464
469
469
471
472
476
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
7 / 542
477
479
53 ALARM MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

53.1 Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SYSCO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
53.2 Visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
53.2.1 Centralized Equipment Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
53.2.2 Alarm visual indications on units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
53.2.3 Status of radio protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
53.3 Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
53.4 Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SECTION 6: APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

APPENDIX A : SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.1 : Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.2 : Compliance with International Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.3 : Safety Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.3.1 : General Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.3.2 : Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.3.3 : Dangerous Electrical Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.3.4 : Harmful Optical Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.3.5 : Risks of Explosions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.3.6 : Moving Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.3.7 : Heatradiating Mechanical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.3.8 : Equipment emitting RF power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.3.9 : Specific safety rules in this handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.4 : Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.4.1 : EMC General Norms Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.4.2 : EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.4.3 : EMC General Norms Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.5 : Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.6 : Suggestions, notes and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.7 : Labels affixed to the Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.7.1 : Label specific for 9600LSY Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.7.2 General use labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
491
491
491
492
492
493
494
495
497
497
498
499
499
500
500
500
500
501
501
502
502
503
APPENDIX B : INFORMATION ON FORMER VERSION TRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

B.1 : T.R.U. connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2 : Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.3 : Power supply distribution connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
511
512
513
514
APPENDIX C : DOCUMENTATION GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C.1 : Handbook guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.1.1 : Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.1.2 : Purpose of the handbook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.1.3 : Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.2 : Documentation set description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.2.1 : 9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0 productreleaseversion handbooks for LHR version . . . . . .
C.2.2 : 9600LSY Rel.2.0 productreleaseversion handbooks for LHRC version . . . . . . . . . .
C.2.3 : Documentation of 9600LSY for both LHR and LHRC versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.2.4 : Optional handbooks and CDROMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3 : General on Alcatel Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.1 : CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.2 : Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
515
515
515
516
517
522
523
525
527
529
531
531
532
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
8 / 542

52.5.5 Local Oscillator module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

52.6 Fans subsystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
534
APPENDIX D LIST OF SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
535
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

C.3.3 : Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
9 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FIGURES
Fig. 1. New radio infrastructures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 2. STMN ring closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 3. N x STM1 radio backbones and fibre optic backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 4. STM1/STM0 radio spurs of stmn backbones or rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 5. Regenerator and WMSN station rack configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 6. LHR system (N+1 / N+0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 7. WMSN system (N+1 / N+0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 8. Transceiver subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 9. Single channel transceiver block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 10. Baseband subrack equipped for 7+1/8+0 configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 11. Single channel regenerator block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 12. Baseband functional protection scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 13. Baseband board positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 14. WMSN terminal rack equipped with 1650SMC ADM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 15. 1650SMC add drop multiplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 16. MST single channel functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 17. FANS Subrack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 18. XPIC operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 19. Frequency reuse system architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 20. ATPC Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 21. General Multiplexing Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 22. General European Multiplexing Structure with addition of 45 Mbit/s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 23. 1650SMC and unit SERGI front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 24. G.703 64 Kbit/s codirectional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 25. RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contradirectional interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 26. RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 27. Synchronization Reference Source Priority Algorithm Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 28. SSM Algorithm Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 29. DCC management: Regenerator case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 30. DCC management: WMSN case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 31. ETSI Reference points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 32. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 33. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 34. STM1 128 QAM typical RF spectrum (measured at point C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 35. STM0 128 QAM typical RF spectrum (measured at point C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 36. STM1/STM0 128 QAM IF RX Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 37. Post demodulation filter STM1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 38. Post demodulation filter STM0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 39. STM1 /STM0 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for cochannel
interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 40. STM1 BER 1*103 and1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 40 MHz
digital interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 41. STM1 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 28, 29,
29.65 and 30 MHz digital interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 42. STM0 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 14 MHz
digital interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 43. Typical signature for 128QAM / STM1 capacity @ BER=1 X 10 E4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 44. Typical signature for 128QAM / STM1 capacity @ BER=1 X 10 E6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 45. Typical signature for 128QAM / STM0 capacity @ BER=1x10e4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 46. Typical signature for 128QAM / STM0 capacity @ BER=1x10e6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
31
31
32
32
37
40
40
42
43
44
45
45
46
49
49
50
52
55
56
58
61
61
68
70
70
71
75
76
79
79
83
105
106
107
107
108
109
109
110
110
111
111
112
113
114
115
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
10 / 542

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 47. Typical and guarantee signature for 64QAM / STM1 capacity @ BER=106; t=6.3 ns . .
Fig. 48. Typical and guarantee signature for 64QAM / STM1 capacity @ BER=104; t=6.3 ns . .
Fig. 49. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0 regenerator configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 50. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0 WMSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 51. 9600LSY 7+1 Regenerator configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 52. 9600LSY WMSNOS 7x STM1 configuration with radio protection for 7+1 STM1
transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 53. 9600LSY WMSN Two Sides configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 54. Channel arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 55. 3+1 terminal basic station layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 56. Terminal station layout: extension starting from A) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 57. Terminal station layout: extension starting from B) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 58. Terminal station layout: extension starting from C) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 59. Terminal station layout: extension starting from D) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 60. Terminal station layout: extension starting from E) basic layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 61. 4+0/4+1 EAST/WEST terminal basic station layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 62. Schematic diagram of transceiver to branching connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 63. 1 polar per rack branching version for 8 RF channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 64. Branching version for 8 RF channels, arranged in 2 polar per rack configuration . . . . . . . .
Fig. 65. Branching version for 3+1 configuration with Space Diversity, arranged in 2 polar per
rack version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 66. 7+1 reused terminal with single protection (ch. 1H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 67. 2 x (7+1) reused terminal with double protection (on ch. 1H and 1V) in 1PPR solution . .
Fig. 68. Expansion from 7+1 single protection to 2 x (7+1) reused terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 69. Main / slave LO mutual protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 70. Branching interconnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 71. Rack and shelves layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 72. Layout of max 8 channels in single polarization configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 73. Layout of max 8 channels in double polarization configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 74. Single polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 75. Two polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with the H
channels on the left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 76. 2 polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with V channel on
the left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 77. Expansion procedure with reused channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 78. Unequipped Base Band shelf layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 79. Base Band shelf board equipment (slot numbering and board type and numbering) . . . . .
Fig. 80. Transceiver shelf equipment (slot numbering and board types and numbering) . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 81. Fan shelf (slot numbering and board types) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 82. PSU and PSF units front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 83. System Controller assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 84. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 85. System Controller front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 86. Service unit assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 87. Service unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 88. RRACHANNEL assembly view and front connector numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 89. RRACHANNEL unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 90. RRASTANDBY unit front view (particular) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 91. Modem unit assembly view and front connector numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 92. Modem unit assembly internal view and CANCCOMB equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 93. Modem unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 94. Transceiver assembly physical views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 95. Transceiver internal view: standard components and Main Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
116
117
123
123
124
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
135
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
152
154
155
156
157
158
158
159
160
165
166
171
172
172
173
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
186
187
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
11 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
188
188
189
190
193
194
195
196
197
198
200
202
203
206
208
209
212
213
214
215
216
217
217
223
225
227
229
249
250
252
253
313
314
320
320
321
325
326
327
334
335
336
338
342
342
342
364
375
377
379
382
383
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
12 / 542

Fig. 96. Transceiver internal view: without Diversity Receiver and with TR.Frequency Reuse
Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 97. Transceiver internal view: with Diversity Receiver and without TR.Frequency Reuse
Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 98. Transceiver internal view: with Diversity Receiver and with TR.Frequency Reuse Kit .
Fig. 99. Transceiver internal connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 100. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR without Rx diversity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 101. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR with Rx diversity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 102. Transceiver front view meaning of access points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 103. Branching Front Plate Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 104. FANS SHELF, FANS ASSEMBLED and substitutive COVER assembly views . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 105. Front view of FANS SHELF equipped with both FANS ASSEMBLED units . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 106. Top Rack Unit front view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 107. Kit Loudspeaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 108. Additional Housekeeping unit assembly view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 109. Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 110. Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST front connector layout and numbering . . . . .
Fig. 111. Transceiver shelf connector numbering at reartop side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 112. System cabling: types of used cables (A, B, C, D, E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 113. System cabling: types of used cables (F, G, H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 114. System cabling: types of used cables (K, N, P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 115. System cabling: types of used cables (KK, NN, PP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 116. System cabling: types of used cables (Q, R) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 117. System cabling: types of used cables (S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 118. System cabling: types of used cables (T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 119. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: without Reuse and without Diversity . . . .
Fig. 120. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: without Reuse and with Diversity . . . . . . .
Fig. 121. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: with Reuse and without Diversity . . . . . . .
Fig. 122. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: with Reuse and with Diversity . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 123. Position of Hardware setting dip switches for transceivers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 124. Choice of frequency setting by HW or SW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 125. HW setting of go and return channel frequencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 126. HW setting of MASTER/SLAVE Rx Local Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 127. DTMF Telephone kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 128. Telephone set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 129. Special cord for PRx measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 130. Cord for use with SIBDL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 131. Special extractors and holder bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 132. First Level Maintenance procedure summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 133. Station Alarms on TRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 134. System Controller front view (particular) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 135. Corrective Maintenance general flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 136. System Controller front view (particular) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 137. TroubleShooting starting with visual indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 138. Indications on SERVICE and RRASTANDBY for protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 139. RRA line loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 140. RRA internal loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 141. RFCOH Internal loopback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 142. PSU to be switched off/on for MODEM replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 143. General flow chart of Transceiver repair procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 144. Spare Local Oscillator subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 145. Spare Receiver subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 146. Spare Frequency Reuse kit module subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 147. Spare Transmitter + Main Receiver subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fig. 148. Spare Frequency Reuse kit 3connector flat cable subassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 149. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 1/6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 155. Repair form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 156. SOH management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 157. Service channels functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 158. DCCR management (ADM towards RADIO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 159. DCCR management (RADIO towards ADM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 160. DCCR management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 161. ATPC management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 162. VC4 generation from 3 TUG3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 163. Sub STM1 terminal functional block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 164. TIM algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 165. The 16_BYTE machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 166. The 1_BYTE machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 167. Power Supply distribution from Top Rack Unit and Transceiver shelf Power Supply
distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 168. Power Supply distribution in Baseband shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 169. LHR control subsystem architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 170. LHR communication interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 171. WMSN control subsystem architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 172. System Controller block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 173. DCCR and summarizing/housekeeping alarms management block diagram . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 174. Remote inventory subsystem architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 175. Additional Housekeeping block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 176. Block diagram of Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Tx side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 177. Block diagram of Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Rx side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 178. Switch logic at Tx section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 179. Switch logic at Rx section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 180. Rx section alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 181. Tx section alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 182. Switching criteria forwarding to switching logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 183. RRACHANNEL block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 184. RRA STANDBY block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 185. STM1 optical module block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 186. MODEM block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 187. SERVICE block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 188. DSI channel implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 189. Input/output command signals of the Switch logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 190. Functional block diagram of Transceiver without Rx Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 191. Functional block diagram of Transceiver with Rx Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 192. Signals exchanged among Transceiver internal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 193. Transmit and Service module block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 194. Block diagram of upconversion and amplification unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 195. Block diagram of Receive & IF Rx module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 196. Block diagram of Local Oscillator module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 197. Fan subsystem block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 198. FANS ASSEMBLED unit block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 199. Station Alarms on TRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 200. Antistatic protection device kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ED
386
391
392
393
393
394
394
396
402
404
406
407
408
409
411
414
422
423
423
426
428
431
432
434
436
438
440
442
443
444
445
446
448
449
450
455
458
459
463
466
467
468
470
470
471
472
474
476
477
479
480
482
501
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
13 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
502
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
510
512
532
533
TABLES
Tab. 1. Quick guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
20
Tab. 2. 9600LSY radio family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
Tab. 3. 9600LSY user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
30
Tab. 4. LHR Terminal Regenerator System Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
39
Tab. 5. Couples of Radio Channels that can be used for protected service channels and WST . .
39
Tab. 6. OH bytes suitable for handling on MST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
63
Tab. 7. OH bytes suitable for handling on RST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
Tab. 8. RFCOH byte structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
64
Tab. 9. Reg. AUX/EOW user interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
66
Tab. 10. Hazard level classification of different optical interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Tab. 11. 9600LSY Part list Common parts (frequency independent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Tab. 12. Notes to Tab. 11. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Tab. 13. Rack and shelves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Tab. 14. System Controller card equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Tab. 15. Additional Housekeeping unit equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Tab. 16. Service card equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Tab. 17. RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Tab. 18. Modem cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Tab. 19. PSU cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Tab. 20. Dummy plates for RRAModem and PSU equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Tab. 21. PSF cards equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Tab. 22. Kit Loudspeaker equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Tab. 23. Transceiver units and substitutive dummy plates equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Tab. 24. Fans unit & cover equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Tab. 25. ESC DipSwitch Bank I4 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Tab. 26. ESC DipSwitch Bank I1 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Tab. 27. Branching Front Plate Kit equipping rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Tab. 28. TRU breaker utilization in 9600 LSY/LHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Tab. 29. Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tab. 30. Cable kits and cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Tab. 31. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Tab. 32. Signal connections: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT and FANS UNIT
EXTENSION CABLE KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Tab. 33. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL FOR
WMSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Tab. 34. Signal connections: Cables belonging to ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Tab. 35. Summary of auxiliary channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Tab. 36. Aux channel G703 and RS232 BB shelfs M182 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Tab. 37. Out party line OW, TPH and loudspeaker BB shelfs M190 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . 233
Tab. 38. Aux channel V11 BB shelfs M191 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
14 / 542

Fig. 201. LSY equipment identification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fig. 202. Largesubrack labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 203. Smallsubrack labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 204. Labels on units with standard cover plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 205. Modules label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 206. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 207. Back panels internal label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 208. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 209. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 210. Former version Top Rack Unit connector numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 211. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fig. 212. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Tab. 39. RJ45 Connector for 10baseT interface on System Controller unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Tab. 40. RS232 for F interface connection table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Tab. 41. Out Remote alarms (GA1GA20) BB shelfs M193 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Tab. 42. Out Remote alarms (GA21GA40) BB shelfs M183 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Tab. 43. Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms (GA41GA48) BB shelfs M192 connector
pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Tab. 44. Input Housekeeping BB shelfs M185 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Tab. 45. Input Housekeeping Additional Housekeeping units M1 connector pinout . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Tab. 46. Implemented radiofrequency channel arrangements and list of Chapters . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Tab. 47. 9640LSY Transceiver Part List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Tab. 56. LSY System Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Tab. 57. LSY Maintenance Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Tab. 58. Spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Tab. 59. Normal condition (no alarms) of LEDs on equipments units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Tab. 60. Indications on SERVICE for Rxside protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Tab. 61. Indications on RRASTANDBY for Txside protections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Tab. 62. Relationship between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm
severity terminology used for the System Controller unit remote alarm connector pins. . . . . . . . . 341
Tab. 63. FPGA list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Tab. 64. Transceiver internal cabling diagram according to configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Tab. 65. DCC Mapping & Interleaving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Tab. 66. Channels protectable for RFCOH bytes and 2 x 2Mbit/s WST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Tab. 67. Relationship among remote alarms, housekeeping outputs and alarm primitives . . . . . . . 483
Tab. 68. Relationship between Remote and Station Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Tab. 69. Label references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Tab. 70. Station Alarms Connector pinout of former version TRU for LHR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Tab. 71. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS . . . . . . . . . 514
Tab. 72. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Tab. 73. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT . . 514
Tab. 74. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL
FOR WMSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Tab. 75. Handbook history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Tab. 76. 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 product release handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Tab. 77. Handbooks related to LHR version only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Tab. 78. 9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 product release handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Tab. 79. Handbooks related to LHRC version only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Tab. 80. Additional handbooks for installation, commissioning and maintenance purposes . . . . . . 527
Tab. 81. Handbooks related to the specific product SWP management and local product control . 527
Tab. 82. Documentation on CDROM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Tab. 83. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Tab. 84. Documentation on CDROM for 1320CT platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
Tab. 85. List Of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Tab. 86. List Of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
15 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
16 / 542
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
a)
Warranty
Any warranty must be referred exclusively to the terms of the contact of sale of the equipment this
handbook refers to.
ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable
for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or
special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
b)
Information
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of ALCATEL.
c)
Copyright Notification
The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied,
reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
d)
Safety recommendations
The safety recommendations here below must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or
damage to the equipment:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
e)
ED
1)
Service Personnel
Installation and service must be carried out by authorized people having appropriate technical
training and experience necessary to be aware of hazardous operations during installation and
service and of measures to avoid any danger to them, to any other people and to the equipment.
2)
Access to the Equipment

Access to the Equipment in use must be restricted to Service Personnel only.
3)
Safety norms
Recommended safety norms are indicated in this manual as described in para.A.3 on pages
492 on.
Local safety regulations must be used if mandatory. Safety instructions in this handbook should
be used in addition to the local safety regulations. In the case of conflict between safety
instructions stated in this manual and those indicated in local regulations, mandatory local
norms will prevail. Should not local regulations be mandatory, then safety norms in this manual
will prevail.
Service Personnel skill

Service Personnel must have been an adequate technical training on telecommunications and in
particular on the equipment this handbook refers to.
Without an adequate training, reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in
para.C.2 on page 522 is usually not enough to properly install, operate and maintain equipment.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
17 / 542
HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY
HANDBOOK STRUCTURE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Information in this handbook is divided into the following parts:

a)
FRONT MATTER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
PRELIMINARY INFORMATION
HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY
HANDBOOK STRUCTURE
SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING
QUICK GUIDE
It allows to access immediately the most frequently needed operative pieces of information
contained in this handbook and in other related handbooks.
b)
SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS on page 25

This section provides the 1st level description of the equipment and sumsup its technical
characteristics.
c)
SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATIONS on page 119

This section contains the whole logical and operative information for the equipment provisioning and
system configuration, including the setting up of logical/physical connections.
d)
SECTION 3: FREQUENCY PLANS, TRANSCEIVER P/N & HW SETTING on page 243

This section gives the Part Numbers and the Remote Inventory Labels of the frequencydependent
items (transceiver components), describes the envisaged channel plans utilized with 9600LSY
radios and explains how to manage the transceiver hardware settings.
e)
SECTION 4: MAINTENANCE on page 309

This section contains the whole logical and operative information for the equipment maintenance.
f)
SECTION 5: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION on page 397

This section provides the 2nd level description of the equipment.
g)
SECTION 6: APPENDICES on page 489

In this section some additional information and instructions are given:
Appendix A SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling
Appendix B Information on former version TRU
Appendix C Documentation guide
Appendix D List of symbols and abbreviations
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
18 / 542

Please refer to para.C.1 on page 515.
SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING

a)
Please refer to Appendix A on page 491 to obtain details regarding following information:
Compliance with European norms
Safety rules:
TOPIC
WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT
General rules
Dangerous Electrical Voltages
Harmful optical signals
Risk of explosion
Moving mechanical parts
Heatradiating mechanical parts
Equipment emitting RF power
Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges:
TOPIC
WARNING LABEL ON EQUIPMENT
Device sensitive to electrostatic discharges
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
b)
ED
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)
Other Labels affixed to the Equipment
Identical or similar information on Personal Computer, WorkStation etc., other than ALCATELs,
loaded with software applications described in this or other Handbooks, is supplied in the
Constructors technical documentation.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
19 / 542
QUICK GUIDE
Tab. 1. Quick guide
If you need immediate operative information on how to:
GENERAL TOPICS
get information on system
documentation
read Appendix C on page 515
have a very short description of the

system
read para.12.4 on pages 41 thru 53

for:
logically configure a station (or

change its configuration) and
logically provision equipment boards
have details on system cabling
system as a whole, read chapter 21 on page 121
BaseBand and Transceiver shelves as a whole, read

para.22.3.2 on page 154
units in BaseBand shelf, read para.22.3.3.1 on page

160
units in Transceiver shelf, read para.22.3.4.2 on page

165
units in FANS shelf, read para.22.3.5 on page 166
units in ADM shelf, refer to handbooks cited in

para.C.2.4.2 on page 530
read chapter 24 on page 205

for:
common parts (frequency independent), read chapter

22 on page 145
frequency dependent items, refer to the specific chapter

listed in Tab. 46. on page 246
get item P/Ns
read:
choose channel plan or get
information on channel plan used in
your system
para.31.1 on page 245
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tab. 1. continues ..
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
20 / 542

9600LSYLHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 TECHNICAL HANDBOOK

.. continues Tab. 1.
GENERAL TOPICS FOR INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND MAINTENANCE
get information on safety, EMC,
ESD norms and equipment labelling
read Appendix A on page 491
acknowledge cautions to avoid

equipment damage
read para.23.2 on page 168

read following paragraph according to the unit / area type:
get operative information regarding

the units (connectors, leds, buttons,
hardware setting)
PSU and PSF: para.23.3.1 on page 171
SYSCO and FLASH CARD: para.23.3.2 on page 172
SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE: para.23.3.3 on

page 176
RRACHANNEL: para.23.3.4 on page 178
RRASTANDBY: para.23.3.5 on page 180
MODEM: para.23.3.6 on page 181
TRANSCEIVER: para.23.4 on page 184
Branching: para.23.5 on page 196
FANS: para.23.6 on page 197
TRU: para.23.7.1 on page 200
Kit Loudspeaker: para.23.7.2 on page 202
Additional Housekeeping: para.23.8 on page 203
for:
carry out unit hardware setting
set and use the EOW functions of

the equipment
TRANSCEIVERS, read para.31.3 on page 248
other units, refer to hardware setting documents

present in the handbook 9600LSY Hardware setting
documents REF.[K] on page 527
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
21 / 542
INSTALLATION AND COMMISSIONING

get:
physically install and cable the
equipment hardware
LHR Installation Handbook (Ref.[C] on page 524)
Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook

(Ref.[L] on page 527)
and proceed as specified by them

according to SWPversion used, get associated CT Operators
Handbook:
install or update Craft Terminals
and/or equipments software
for SWP 1.0 : Ref.[N] on page 527
for SWP 2.0 V.2.0.1 : Ref.[O] on page 527
for SWP 2.0 V.2.0. 2 on : Ref.[P] on page 527
and read read its QUICK GUIDE (same topics)

according to SWPversion used, get associated Lineup
Guide:
commission equipment
for SWP 1.0 : Ref.[D] on page 524
for SWP 2.0 : Ref.[E] on page 524
and proceed as specified by it

expand the number of channels of a
LHR system both from hardware
and software points of view
get 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Expansion procedures

(Ref.[F] on page 524) and proceed as specified by it
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
22 / 542


MAINTENANCE
provision and manage spare parts
read para.43.3 on page 322
carry out First Level Maintenance

(system state display)
carry out Preventive Maintenance

read:
carry out Corrective Maintenance

(troubleshooting and repair)
chapter 46 on page 333 (troubleshooting)
chapter 47 on page 347 (replacement of all units,

except transceivers)
chapter 48 on page 369 (transceiver repair and

replacement)
chapter 49 on page 395 (faulty unit repair and repair

form)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To find any other kind of information not listed in the above table, please refer to the TABLE OF
CONTENTS of this handbook.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
23 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
24 / 542
SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

This section provides the 1st level description of the equipment and sumsup its technical characteristics.
ED
SECTION CONTENT
PAGE
Chapter 11 Introduction to the 9600LSY radio system family

It explains briefly the characteristics of the 9600LSY Radio System Family, for both
LHR and LHRC configurations
27
Chapter 12 System description

It gives the firstlevel description of 9600LSY equipment in the LHR configuration
It introduces the equipment network applications, the hardware components, the
system and radio configurations. Moreover, it describes in detail the main radio
Transmission features and the description of the Equipment Control.
35
Chapter 13 Technical specifications

It describes the technical characteristics of the 9600LSY, for both LHR and LHRC
configurations
83
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
25 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
26 / 542

11 INTRODUCTION TO THE 9600LSY RADIO SYSTEM FAMILY

11.1 Foreword
This chapter explains briefly the characteristics of the 9600LSY Radio System Family, for both LHR and
LHRC configurations, and comprehends the following main paragraphs:
para.11.2 herebelow
General
Main Features
System usage in MW links and networks
9600LSY basic configurations and Network Element types
11.2 General
The 9600LSY digital radio relay system belongs to the second generation of the Alcatel SDH
(Synchronous Digital Hierarchy ) radio family that has been developed aiming to match the demand of
high quality microwave transmission links and following the SDH standards defined by International
Organizations as ITUT, ITUR and ETSI. Special attention concerning the network management
standards and its integration into a SDH based network has been paid.
Big efforts have been done to expand as much as possible the versatility of the new radio family and the
full compatibility with the optical systems to ensure the utilization of the radio media as natural complement
to the optical fibre transmission.
A 9600LSY radio system can be in fact utilized either with multiplex section termination (MST) or
regenerator section termination (RST) functionality, can be used for optical loop closures or for fibre optic
backup, for spurs or for backbone links and, in general, in all the network interconnections where the
advantages due to an easy installation, a fast commissioning operations and time and cost saving solution
are requested.
The family supports radio transmission of STM0 (51 Mbps) and STM1 (155 Mbps) signals as well
STM4 (622 Mbps) or STM16 (2.4 Gbps) connections, using a proper number of radio frequency
channels in various configurations.
A full set of synchronous and plesiochronous interfaces is available.
By means of the new 9600LSY family, Alcatel intends to answer the growing demand of transmission
capacity either for traditional telephone services or for the new dataoriented services (including ATM +
IP networks, LAN/WAN networks) or for the evolution of the cellular market.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Alcatel 9600LSY system architecture, based on a full indoor structure, covers all the frequency bands
from 4 to 13 GHz in a complete set of equipment configurations from 2 to 8 channels in protected (N+1)
or unprotected (N+0) radio configurations.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
27 / 542
Th Alcatel 9600LSY family exploits the experience gained with the previous SDH generations of radio
equipment and provides an innovative answer to the most recent market requirements:
Total interworking with other kinds of network elements present in the network aiming to make the
network independent from transmission medium.
Full integration in the Alcatel network management platform able to manage different types of
network elements belonging to different technologies: OMSN, LT, OMSG, microwave radios, optical
systems and submarine systems. 9600LSY is included in Alcatel network release plan, guaranteeing
consistent feature support and allowing, in case of existing SDH NEs, not to change TMN platform,
thus saving investments already done.
Double identity of the equipment that can be inserted in the SDH network as:
Radio regenerator to be easily introduced in transparent mode without affecting any
modifications to the network.
Wireless Multi Service Node (WMSN) One Side or Two Sides that can be considered as full
performance OMSN or LT with different synchronous physical interface: radio instead of fibre.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Transmission capacity easily selectable between STM0 and STM1 according to the bandwidth
availability and, if necessary, following an incremental approach.
Bit rate capacity: the 9600LSY family allows the transmission of STM1 signals for all frequency
bands from 4 to 13 GHz and STM0 for 7, 8 and 13 GHz bands, according to the customer needs.
The system allows an easy migration from STM0 to STM1 (only hardware and software
presettings are necessary) when the traffic and the band requirements are going to change.
Auxiliary traffic can be added by means of RFCOH bytes corresponding to one 2 Mbit/s Way Side
Traffic in STM1 case. Way Side Traffic in STM0 case is not available.
Usage of:
128 QAM as standard modulation for all frequency bands. The high number of levels utilised
allows to obtain a high spectrum efficiency that permits the utilisation of the following channel
spacing :
28 MHz, 29 MHz, 29.65 MHz, 30 MHz and 40 MHz for STM1 capacity
14 MHz for STM0 capacity,
64 QAM modulation with 40 MHz channel spacing and STM1 capacity for some frequency
bands,
as depicted in Tab. 2. on page 30.
Adoption of frequency reuse technique as option for all the supported frequency bands, allowing
the transmission of 2x STM1 per channel: the way utilised to improve the spectrum efficiency is
based on the CoChannel Dual Polarisation (CCDP) technique.
This technique, consisting in transmitting two different STM1 channels on each radio channel
utilising two different antenna polarisation, has been consolidated in the recent past by means of field
proven results.
In order to meet ITUR transmission quality objectives also in unfavourable propagation condition
causing XPD degradation, Crosspolar Interface Canceller (XPIC) device is adopted to minimise the
negative effects of the crosspolar interference signal, assuring an improvement factor of approx.
18 dB to the cross polar antenna discrimination.
The function is implemented in an optional additional card to be plugged on each couple of
demodulator boards of reused channel.
Particular attention has been paid to the scalability of the system, allowing the extension of a
deployed alternate polar (AP) system to a CCDP reused system only when necessary and
consequently to a progressive investment.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
28 / 542

11.3 Main features

Two possible ways of extension and configurations are available:
CCDP configurations using 2 protection channels up to 2 x (8+1)
CCDP configurations using only 1 protection channel up to 7 working channels plus 1 standby.
The frequency reuse is applicable to STM1 streams in all the frequency bands and with all the
channel spacing foreseen in the ITUR recommendations, while it is not available in case of STM0
transmission.
Space Diversity reception as countermeasure against fading exploiting the new baseband
combiner.
Further powerful multipath countermeasures: multichannel hitless switch, transversal equaliser,

configurable ATPC functionality, multileved coded modulation.
High reliability in order to minimise field intervention.
Fully software configurable terminals with software download capabilities.
Protections:
Different protection types are available for the 9600LSY systems: Radio Protection and Network
Protection:
Radio Protection (RPS).

The high capacity long haul radio systems utilises, to perform the automatic protection of the
radio channels, a multichannel switching device moving the channel to be protected on a spare
bearer (standby channel). The function, implemented on the RX side is N+1 hitless type; it is
transparent to other types of protection and in particular to network protection.
The switch supplies the protection of the link either in case of failure of the equipment or for
improving the quality performances of the link. In this last case the Early Warning criteria are
utilised to achieve an error free changeover.
Network Protection.
For network protection the radio system in regenerator section configuration (RRA) will be fully
transparent to APS channel and criteria allowing the OMSNs present in the network to perform
the network protection activity. On the other hand the radio system in multiplex section
configuration (WMSN) implements, as embedded function, network protection features like
Trail protection and subnetwork protection (APS, SNCP etc.).
High integration of the full indoor structure with very compact size: configurations up to 8+0/7+1
terminal are housed inside a single N3 ETSI rack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The characteristics Alcatel 9600LSY are compliant with current SDH standards defined within the
International Organisations ITUT, ITUR and ETSI, with special attention to those standards concerning
the network management and its integration into SDH based network.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
29 / 542
The 9600LSY series features the 128/64 QAM modulation offering excellent spectrum efficiency and
covering the following frequency bands, according to following Tab. 2.
SYSTEM
FREQUENCY (GHz)
9640 LSY
(L4)

Tab. 2. 9600LSY radio family

MODULATION & CAPACITY
128QAM
64QAM (N.B.)
3.64.2
STM1
STM1
9647 LSY
(U4)
4.45.0
STM1
STM1
9662 LSY
(L6)
5.96.4
STM1
not available
9667 LSY
(U6)
6.47.1
STM1
STM1
9674 LSY
7.17.7
STM1 / STM0
not available
9681 LSY
7.78.7
STM1 / STM0
not available
9610 LSY
1010.7
STM1
not available
9611 LSY
10.711.7
STM1
STM1
9613 LSY
12.75 13.25
STM1 / STM0
not available
64QAM is supported starting from SWP Version 2.0.2.
N.B.
In general, the equipment of this family may work, in case of for STM1 stream, in cochannel frequency
reuse operation (CCDP), utilizing the XPIC optional kit, allowing the transmission of 2 x STM1 signals
on a single RF channel.
Reused configurations are not foreseen for STM0 capacity.
In the following Tab. 3. the available users interfaces are listed.
Tab. 3. 9600LSY user interfaces
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
INTERFACES
REGENERATOR
WMSN
STM1
STM0
STM1
STM0
STM1 ELECTRICAL G.708
STM1 OPTICAL S1.1 G.957
STM1 OPTICAL L1.1 G.957
STM1 OPTICAL L1.2 G.957
140 Mbit/s
G.703
3 x 45 Mbit/s
G.703
X
(1 x 45 Mbit/s)
3 x 34 Mbit/s
G.703
X
(1 x 34 Mbit/s)
63 x 2 Mbit/s
G.703
X
(21 x 2 Mbit/s)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
30 / 542

11.4 System usage in MW links and networks

The new generation of radio transmission system Alcatel 9600LSY family is specifically designed to
provide a radio solution suitable for a large number of applications, including:
New full radio infrastructures

Closure of STM1, STM4 and STM16 fiber optic rings
Backup to fiber optic trunk links
Radio spurs of fiber/radio at STMn level
Utilization as backbone link in national trunk networks.
Interconnection of cellular networks with public switched networks.
In the following , with the aid of a few figures , the most common applications of 9600LSY radios within
different types of network exploiting radio technology are shown, together with examples of possible
configurations and station types that can be used in the network nodes.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 1. New radio infrastructures
Fig. 2. STMN ring closure
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
31 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 3. N x STM1 radio backbones and fibre optic backup
Fig. 4. STM1/STM0 radio spurs of stmn backbones or rings
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
32 / 542
11.5 9600LSY basic configurations and Network Element types

The 9600LSY Long Haul system is based on the following configurations:

a)
Regenerator (Network Element type LHR)

This radio system is basically composed by a rack containing up to eight transceivers, eight
modemodulators and eight RRA, and can be configured as follows:
CONFIGURATION
MIN
MAX
N+1
with/without occasional traffic
1+1
7+1
N+0
2+0
8+0
b)
Regenerator Compact (Network Element type LHRC)

This radio system is basically composed by one subrack containing up to two transceivers, two
modemodulators and two RRA, and can be configured as follows:
1+0 Terminal Regenerator
1+1/2+0 Terminal Regenerator
1:1 (with occasional traffic) Terminal Regenerator
1+1 HST (Hot Stand By) Terminal Regenerator
c)
Wireless Multi Service Node (WMSN)

This radio system consists of a Regenerator and operates together with the MUX of ALCATEL ADM
family, named 1650SMC. The assembly is called WMSN (Wireless Multi Service Node).
This handbook deals with the LHR and related WMSN configurations only. For
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LHRC please make reference to the specific handbook (that has a different P/N, (see para.C.2.2 on page
525).
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
33 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
34 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

12 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
12.1 Foreword
This chapter gives the firstlevel description of 9600LSY equipment in the LHR configuration, and
comprehends the following main paragraphs:
Introduction to system configurations

This paragraph introduces the system composition of the 9600LSY Radio
System Family, LHR configuration.
General block diagrams
Hardware components
This paragraph describes the different assemblies and shelves that can
be used to compose the available configurations of 9600LSY family, LHR
configuration.
Radio Transmission features

This paragraph describes in detail the Radio Transmission features of
9600LSY family.
Signal Transmission
This paragraph describes in detail the Signal Transmission features of
9600LSY family.
Synchronization
This paragraph describes in detail the Synchronization features of
9600LSY family.
Equipment Control
This paragraph introduces the Equipment control features of 9600LSY
family.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
35 / 542
12.2.1 Foreword
This paragraph introduces the system composition of the 9600LSY Radio System Family, and
comprehends the following main paragraphs:
para.12.2.2 herebelow
Station types and configurations
Channel configurations and protection schemes
The handbook part that should be read before starting this paragraph is:
chapter 11 on page 27
Introduction to the 9600LSY Radio System Family
12.2.2 Station types and configurations

Station types
A complete terminal station utilizing a maximum of 8 radio channels is housed inside a single ETSI rack
that, depending on the customer request, can be 2200 or 2000 mm high. The 1800 mm rack cannot be
utilized.
The structure of the equipment has been developed aiming to obtain a very simple structure, with an
integration as high as possible and reducing at the minimum the number of different functional blocks
and, inside each of them, reducing the number of different units and cards.
These concepts have led to obtain an equipment structure only composed by the following functional
blocks (see Fig. 5. on page 37):
a radio assembly containing all the radio frequency and medium frequency circuits (transceiver shelf)
a baseband subrack containing all the unit devoted to the modulation and demodulation functions,
RRA functions, services management, radio protection switching and system controlling.
a branching unit deployed at the top and bottom sides of the transceiver subrack.
a Top Rack Unit (T.R.U.) for D.C.. primary power distribution and battery protection.
a fan subrack, foreseen for all the configurations.
a compact ADM 1650SMC with its additional fan subrack, that , when required, can be installed into
the rack to perform all the functionalities managed by a multiplex section.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The configurations are easily expansible, passing from a lower one to a higher one simply adding, inside
each functional block, the units needed to support the new radio channels utilized.
In particular, the branching unit is equipped in advance with the channel circulators needed for the
expansion up to 7+1, to consent to expand the radio terminal just connecting the RF filters to the branching,
without the necessity to disassemble the branching itself.
Thanks to a new design of narrow RF filters , the frequency reuse, available in all the frequency bands,
can be obtained avoiding the utilization of the 3 dB hybrids for all the bands and all the frequency
spacings, including 28 MHz.
Despite to the new high integration of the LSY systems and thanks to volume decrease obtained on the
branching, the space diversity optional functionality is supplied in all the configuration up to 7+1/8+0.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
36 / 542

12.2 Introduction to system configurations

TRU
RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS
AREA
(BASEBAND
SHELF)
ADDITIONAL
HOUSEKEEPING
(optional)
FANS FOR
RRA/MODEM
TRU
1650
SMC
SHELF
RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS
AREA
(BASEBAND
SHELF)
Rx
BRANCHING
Rx
BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER
SHELF
TRANSCEIVER
SHELF
Tx
BRANCHING
Tx
BRANCHING
REGENERATOR
WMSN
FANS FOR
1650SMC
Fig. 5. Regenerator and WMSN station rack configuration

The Alcatel 9600LSY systems offer a full set of system configuration and protection schemes to meet any
specific need in a network with a high degree of flexibility.
Two are the envisaged station types, each supplying different functionality:
Regenerator station (RST):

is needed when the RSOH termination and MSOH transparency are requested. I/O network
interface is STM1 electrical or optical.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Multiplex station (MST):

is necessary when a Wireless Multiservice Node (WMSN) (one side or two sides) has to be
implemented. In this case the MST station is used at the terminal ends of the radio link and it gives
the possibility to provide synchronous STM1 electrical and optical interfaces and plesiochronous
140 Mbit/s, 3x45 Mbit/s, 3x34 Mbit/s, 63x2 Mbit/s interfaces.
It is possible to implement a full multiplex section features like synchronization, SOH termination,
network protection (SNCP/I, SNCP/N and linear MSP), VCs cross connection, tributary adddrops.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
37 / 542
up to 3 cards 4x140 Mb/s. In this case the limitation is introduced by the LSY radio system that
can transmit up to 8 x STM1 channels.
up to 3 cards 3x34 Mb/s , utilizing 3x STM1 (or 3+1 STM1 in case of protection) channels radio
side.
up to 3 cards 3x34 Mb/s, utilizing 3x STM1 (or 3+1 STM1 in case of protection) channels radio
side.
up to 3 cards 21x2 Mb/s , utilizing 1x STM1 (or 1+1 STM1 in case of protection) channels radio
side.
In the last three cases, if a single stream 34 Mb/s or 45 Mb/s or 21x2 Mb/s is required, an
underequipped STM1 is utilized toward the radio baseband and a STM0 can be adopted for
transmission on air.
Station configurations
The 9600LSY family allows the radio transmission of both STM1 and STM0 utilising protected and
unprotected heterofrequency configurations N+0, N+1 type or 2x (N+1) CCDP.
The basic configurations are named as follows:
Long Haul extendible version N+1/N+2/N+0 terminal regenerator configuration (LHR)
Long Haul extendible version N+1/N+2/N+0 terminal WMSN configuration (LHR + 1650SMC)
The high integration level allows to provide several types of configurations allowing to address different
network applications :
7+1
Terminal regenerator
in 1 ETSI rack
8+0
in 1 ETSI rack
7+1
Terminal WMSN
in 1 ETSI rack
8+0
Terminal WMSN
in 1 ETSI rack
An already operating terminal regenerator can be reconfigured as a terminal WMSN simply adding a
1650SMC device to the radio regenerator equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Each configuration is easily expansible to a higher capacity just adding the foreseen expansion kits.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
38 / 542

The maximum number of plesiochronous interfaces that are alternatively allowed by 1650SMC are
as follows:

12.2.3 Channel configurations and protection schemes

The LHR system can interface from two up to eight channels (STM0/STM1 Electrical or Optical signals
and the corresponding Radio parts) and up to eight WST channels. The system configurations allowed
are with Radio Protection Switching (N+1 without/with Occasional Traffic) or without Radio Protection
Switching (N+0), according to the following table:
Tab. 4. LHR Terminal Regenerator System Configurations
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
N+0
N+1
N+1 &
Occasional
(1:N)
ALL
CH
CH
CH
max WST
2+0
1+1
1+1
& Occ.
2 unpr.
or 1 prot.
3+0
2+1
2+1
& Occ.
3 unpr. or
1 prot.+1 unpr.
4+0
3+1
3+1
& Occ.
4 unpr. or
1 prot.+2 unpr.
5+0
4+1
4+1
& Occ.
5 unpr. or
1 prot.+3 unpr.
6+0
5+1
5+1
& Occ.
6 unpr. or
1 prot.+4 unpr.
7+0
6+1
6+1
& Occ.
7 unpr. or
1 prot.+5 unpr.
8+0
7+1
7+1
& Occ.
8 unpr. or
1 prot.+6 unpr.
NR. of
channels
unpr.= unprotected
prot.= protected
Occ.= occasional
In N+0 configurations, channels are without protection.

In N+1 configurations, channel 0 is always the standby channel.
In N+1 & Occasional configurations (also known as 1:N protection architecture), channel 0 carries the
occasional traffic, that is cut off whenever it becomes the recovery channel for any (faulty) of the protected
channels.
As indicated in Tab. 4. above, the WST configuration is independent from N+0 / N + 1 / 1:N system
configuration. The couple of radio channels which carry both the protected service channels and WST
ones (if any) is defined via software. These channels can be chosen among the following five couples:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tab. 5. Couples of Radio Channels that can be used for protected service channels and WST
CHx
0
0
1
1
8
Further information regarding protection schemes is given in para.52.4.2 on page 445 and
para.52.4.3 on page 452.
N.B.
ED
CHy
1
9
2
9
9
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
39 / 542
The general block diagrams for LHR and WMSN configurations are respectively shown in following
Fig. 6. and Fig. 7.
CMI 9
RRA
SW
RFCOH
DCCR
MD
TR
WST 2Mb/s
RRA
RFCOH
SW
MD
TR
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s
CMI 1
RRA
DCCR
ECT
RFCOH
SW
QB3
TR
DCCR
OS
MD
EOW
DCCR
SC
WST 2Mb/s
DCCR
DCCR
CMI 0
64 Kb
SERVICE
RRA
DISTRIB.
MD
RFCOH
TR
RADIO
PROTECTION
Fig. 6. LHR system (N+1 / N+0)
RRA
SW
RFCOH
MD
TR
CMI 7
DCCR
RRA
WST 2Mb/s
RFCOH
SW
MD
TR
DCCR
WST 2Mb/s
1650SMC
CMI 2
RRA
CMI 1
RFCOH
SW
DCCR
EOW
Nx64
Kb
SC
DCCR
RRA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SERVICE
OS
64 Kb
WST 2Mb/s
DCCR
DCCR
ECT
TR
DCCR
CMI 0
QB3
MD
DISTRIB.
RFCOH
MD
TR
RADIO
PROTECTION
Fig. 7. WMSN system (N+1 / N+0)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
40 / 542

12.3 General block diagrams

12.4 Hardware components

12.4.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes the different assemblies and shelves that can be used to compose the available
configurations of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the following main paragraphs:
Rack and Top Rack Unit

Transceiver subrack
Baseband subrack
ADM 1650SMC
FAN Subrack
System wiring
Installation materials
As far as Branching configurations are concerned, refer to para.21.5 on page 135.
N.B.
The handbook part that should be read before starting this paragraph is:
12.4.2 Rack and Top Rack Unit

For all the foreseen system configurations the new WTD ETSI rack is available for both heights 2200 mm
and 2000 mm and it is usable either with standard (LHR) or with compact version (LHRC) for both
regenerator terminal and WMSN.
The new WTD ETSI racks substitute in the item list the previously used Optinex rack, in order to have a
standard rack solution for all WTD radio equipment (LSY, USY and also AWY radios).
In the 9600LSYLHR application, WTD ETSI rack must be usually supplied with the TRU unit (see
para.23.7.1 on page 200).
The new WTD ETSI rack P/Ns do not include TRU, that must always be separately ordered for standard
version (LHR) and could be unnecessary for compact version (LHRC).
For particular cases, the OPTINEX 2200 mm and 2000 mm rack can also be utilized, however for new
deliveries only the the new WTD racks are utilized.
In general, both OPTINEX and ETSI WTD racks can house 19 and 21 subracks. They are compliant
with ETSI 300 1193 standard. Using 19 subracks, they must be installed utilizing mechanical adapters.
However, In the case of 9600LSY radios, the two main subracks (transceiver and baseband) of the
standard version (LHR) and the unique subrack of the compact version (LHRC) are 21 wide, so they do
not need adapters to be installed in the racks.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
All the racks (WTD ETSI and Optinex) for all the heights can host the terminals including the ADM
1650SMC and its fan unit, allowing their utilization also for WMSN configurations.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
41 / 542
12.4.3 Transceiver subrack

12.4.3.1 Mechanical assembly
The transceiver mechanical assembly has the following dimensions:

530 mm (w) x 470 mm (h) x 240 mm (d)
A complete view of the structure, fully equipped with 8 transceivers, is shown in Fig. 8.
Fig. 8. Transceiver subrack
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Each transceiver module is inserted in a vertical dedicated slot. The coaxial connections with Rx and Tx
branching units are located at the top and bottom positions of each transceiver.
Each module is equipped with the following units:
Transmitter
Receiver
Tx Local Oscillator
Rx Local Oscillator
DC/DC converter
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
42 / 542

12.4.3.2 Transceiver block diagram

A simple block diagram, illustrating the main functions performed by transceiver module, is shown in the
following Fig. 9.
Fig. 9. Single channel transceiver block diagram

The transmitter includes an IF amplifier, a SSB up converter, a local oscillator and a RF power amplifier.
The utilization of a high rejection SSB upconverter permits to avoid the use of a RF filter at the output,
allowing a wideband utilization of the unit.
The Automatic Transmitted Power Control (ATPC) function is included in the transceiver in order to
decrease the Tx power output and dissipation in case of normal propagation and to push the maximum
power up in deep fading conditions. This function may be disabled and the level of the transmitted RF
power can be manually set by Craft Terminal configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The receiver includes a low noise RF preamplifier, an automatic imagine rejection down converter, an IF
filter, a main amplifier with AGC and a local oscillator.
A space diversity receiver, to be used in junction with a baseband signal combiner, is also available as
countermeasure to the selective fading due to the multipath propagation of the signal.
The advantages obtained by the baseband combiner utilization are mainly due to a higher reliability,
thanks to the adopted digital technology, to the possibility of recovering very high delays between the two
received signals and to the very reduced signature of the combined signal.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
43 / 542
The baseband subrack is used both in regenerator terminal stations and in WMSN stations. In the first case
it is the sole baseband equipment installed in the rack; in the second it has to be associated with
1650SMC device that has to be installed in the upper right area of the rack just above the baseband
subrack.
It is mainly subdivided in three different areas:
the upper area (access area) is devoted to host the interface connectors of WST , Service channels
and remote alarms.
in the centre of the subrack the channeldepending units (RRA and Modems, up to ten) are
accommodated, together with the two common units : System Controller (SC) and the Service unit.
in the bottom part, the DC/DC converters for supplying the d.c. voltages to the RRAModem units
are allocated just under the relevant powered units. Two battery filters (including the DC/DC
converters supplying the DC power for the common units ) are also installed in this area.
12.4.4.1 Mechanical assembly
The physical dimensions of the subrack are: 490 mm (w) x 500 mm (h) x 250 mm (d).
In the following Fig. 10. , the baseband subrack is shown.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 10. Baseband subrack equipped for 7+1/8+0 configuration
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
44 / 542

12.4.4 Baseband subrack
12.4.4.2 Regenerator Terminal Block Diagram

Hereafter, the block diagram relevant to a single channel is pointed out.
REGENERATOR
MODEM BOARD
RRA BOARD
ELET./OPT.
INTERFACE
STM1
RRA
TX
HTL
SW
AUX.
SERV.
DCCR
SYSTEM
CONTROLLER
WST
SERVICE
RT
RX
ATPC
SERVICE &
ATPC
Aux.SERV.
CH.
2x2 Mb/s
MODEM
MODEM
RFCOH
UNIT
QB3
DC/DC
CONVERTER
V batt.
OS
ECT
Fig. 11. Single channel regenerator block diagram

The baseband subrack does not allow the protection neither of the physical interface (optical or electrical)
of the channel, neither of the RRA function, because the embedded switching section, included inside
each RRA unit is inserted between the RRA and modem function and therefore it protects only the radio
section (modem and transceiver). See next Fig. 12.
CH1
O/F int
RRA1
CH2
O/F int
RRA2
CH3
O/F
RRA3
CH0
O/F
RRA STBY
HITLESS SWITCH
BASEBAND SUBRACK
MODEM 1
TRANSCEIVER 1
MODEM 2
TRANSCEIVER 2
MODEM 3
TRANSCEIVER 3
MODEM STBY
TRANSCEIVER STBY
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(occasional)
Fig. 12. Baseband functional protection scheme
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
45 / 542
CONNECTOR
AREA
NOT USED
SERVICECEC
E STBY
RRA
RRA
MODEM
SYSTEM
CONTROLLER
MM
CONTROLLE
R
POWER
SUPPLYSUPPL
Y
NOT USED
BATTERY
FILTER
FILTER
Fig. 13. Baseband board positions

In the following, the main characteristics of each unit is reported.
12.4.4.3 RRA board
It performs the following main functions :
STM1 bidirectional interface, electrical or optical selectable by means of interchangeable

plugins
Extraction/Insertion RSOH line side to/from Aux. Service Board
Hitless Switch functionality.

Just one unit has been developed for utilization with both STM1 and STM0 capacity.
Each RRA unit is equipped with an embedded STM1 electrical interface. As an option, a S 1.1
STM1 optical interface can be used instead. This optical interface is realized by a plugin unit that
can be installed in the RRA through the front panel.
12.4.4.4 RRA Standby board
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The unit performs the same functionalities of RRA board but, moreover, the hitless switch circuits
(Tx/Rx distributors and a switching logic unit) are is installed on board and dedicated to the radio
section protection.
The protection supplied is N+1 type and it is also utilized in 1+1 configuration .
Only one RRA STBY has been developed for utilization with both STM1 and STM0 capacity.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
46 / 542

Fig. 13. herebelow indicates the slot position of the baseband subrack where the units can be installed
in the various radio configurations.
12.4.4.5 Modem unit

It performs the following main functions:
Terminal modulator
Terminal demodulator
XPIC
Baseband signal combiner

Two different 128 QAM modems have been developed, according to the two capacities that can be
transmitted:
STM1 Modem with one 2 Mbit/s WST service stream: to be used in both alternate and copolar
frequency arrangements with all the spacings including 28 MHz.
The STM0 Modem without WST service stream: utilized in 7 , 8 and 13 GHz bands with 14
MHz channel spacing in both alternate and copolar frequency arrangements.
One 64 QAM modem has been developed (it is supported starting from SWP version 2.0.2) with the
capacity of STM1 with one 2 Mbit/s WST service stream, to be used in both alternate and copolar
frequency arrangements with 40 MHz channel spacing.
Each modem can be equipped with an optional plugin board . This board gives the access to the
IF signals necessary to the demodulator for XPIC or for Space Diversity functionalities. In case of
presence of both functions the modem must be equipped with two identical plugin boards.
12.4.4.6 Service Unit
The Service board provides an external access to the auxiliary service channels, utilizing SUBD
connectors in the subrack connector area. Moreover the unit manages the ATPC functionality.
Service unit consents the terminal to transmit one WST 2 Mb/s service stream in Radio Frame
Complementary OverHead in protected way on channels x and y (that can be chosen among the
couples specified in Tab. 5. on page 39), and contains the logic switching unit. The WST interface
is present on the unit front panel. The accesses to the other WST service streams that can be
transmitted one for each channel in nonprotected way are in the connector area.
12.4.4.7 System Controller
The System Controller is devoted to the equipment management. It exchanges alarms, commands
and management information with the other units of the equipment and provides the following
interfaces for local and remote management:
Channel communication for TMN utilizing a QB3 interface (BNC connector) info model based
F interface (RS232 toward the local PC) (SUBD 9 pin connector) towards Local Craft
Terminal
QECC interface for remote management through DCC channels.

12.4.4.8 Additional Housekeeping unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This optional unit (equipped as depicted in Fig. 5. on page 37) increases by 18 the number of
Housekeeping inputs available.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
47 / 542
PSU units are grouped in 2units groups (i.e. PSU0+PSU1, PSU2+PSU3, ...). Each PSU pair
converts and then distributes, through the backpanel, power supply to the correspondent pair of
RRA, whereas each PSU board supplies only the associated MODEM board (i.e. PSU0 supplies only
MODEM0 board, etc.) If not utilized, the P.S. slots are provided with a front plate cover.
Each P.S. gets the primary voltage from both batteries, connected in parallel.
The P. S. units supply the secondary power voltage to all the units starting from the primary voltage:
48 to 60 Vdc ( 20%);
The system can also be powered by batteries with different voltage: 24 Vdc ( 20%). In this case,
onpurpose designed DC/DC converters are available and have to be installed in the lower area
of the rack.
12.4.4.10 Battery filter
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Two battery filters, located in the lower side positions of the subrack, supply the DC power to the
common units (System Controller, Service) in 1+1 protected way.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
48 / 542

12.4.4.9 Power Supply
12.4.5 ADM 1650SMC

12.4.5.1 WMSN rack configuration

When the Wireless Multi Service Node functionality is requested, an additional 1650SMC ADM has to
be installed in the upper position of the LSY rack, just above the baseband regenerator subrack .
WMSN provide the mapping functionality (STM1 frame creation), synchronization management and
tributary adddrop, network protection and VCs crossconnection.
Fig. 14. WMSN terminal rack equipped with 1650SMC ADM

12.4.5.2 ADM 1650SMC mechanical assembly
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A detailed view of the 1650SMC adddrop multiplexer is shown in Fig. 15.
Fig. 15. 1650SMC add drop multiplexer
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
49 / 542
12.4.5.3 WMSN block diagram

In Fig. 16. , the block diagram of the MST functionality, relevant to a single channel, is shown.
Fig. 16. MST single channel functional block diagram

This configuration, in particular, gives the possibility to manage up to 8 STM1 channels lineside and to
transmit them radio side with or without radio protection, in the following configurations:
Up to 7+1 or 8+0 configuration in one direction (OS). The obtained functionality is the one
corresponding to a Line Terminal (LT).
Up to 4+0 or 4+1 configuration in two different directions (TS). The terminal is configured as a
Wireless Add Drop Multiplexer .
The 1650SMC equipment consist of the following subsystem units:
Compact ADM
Access module
Auxiliary and overhead
Power supply
The Compact ADM is built upon a matrix that can accept, through an access module providing the physical
interface for the asynchronous or synchronous signals, a maximum of 63x2 Mb/s, 3x34 Mb/s, 3x45 Mb/s,
140 Mb/s or 155 Mb/s streams.
Inside the ADM, a synchronization unit provides the timing reference needed by all the components of the
network element, with a max. daily drift of 0.37 ppm.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A control subsystem realizes the Synchronous System Management Function (SEMF), according with
ITUT G.783 recommendation. The subsystem operates with a double controlling system utilizing an
Equipment Controller (EC) for DCC networking and a Shelf Controller (SC) for alarm detection and
reporting, performance monitoring and equipment protection switching.
A wide range of auxiliary service channels is offered according to SDH standards utilizing SDH and POH
bytes. These bytes are used for alignment word, parity check, network management operations,
performance monitoring; some data and orderwire channels are available to the user.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
50 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The unit utilizes a power supply distributed architecture where the 48/60 V battery voltage is distributed
to all the cards and here is DC/DC converted to the voltages necessary to each card.
Two batteries can be used at the input, with automatic selection on the one with higher voltage.
The distribution is protected against single converter failure.
This handbook gives no detailed information on 1650SMC equipment. For this purpose,
please refer to 1650SMC specific documentation (see para.C.2.4.2 on page 530) with the
following exception:
In the application for 9600LSY, the FAN SHELF used for 1650SMC is not
that described in the 1650SMC documentation, but that described in this
handbook.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
51 / 542
The usage of the fan unit inside the rack is mandatory to respect Safety international standards, either in
regenerator and WMSN case (refer to para.22.3.5 on page 166 for further information on equipping
rules).
The FANS subrack is developed to be used both in regenerator and in WMSN configurations. In the first
case it is installed only between the baseband subrack and the transceiver assembly, just above the
receiving branching.
In the second case a second fan subrack is moreover installed in the higher part of the rack, just under
the 1650 MC unit.
The subrack, 600mm wide and 50 mm high, can contain one or two subunits with 4 fans each as shown
in the Fig. 17. herebelow.
SUBUNIT A
SUBUNIT B
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 17. FANS Subrack
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
52 / 542

12.4.6 FANS Subrack
12.4.7 System wiring

a)
b)
Internal connections
Four different connection kits have been designed to cover all the needed system configurations:
Common kit
This cable kit is utilized in all the configurations in quantity 1. It includes the cables for :
Can bus
Unit presence
Rack lamps
Battery cables
Channel dedicated kit

It includes all the connections among the units relevant to each single channel.
It has to be foreseen with quantity equal to the total number of radio channels present in the
terminal, including the spare channel.
Two different codes are present in this category: one for channels without space diversity, a
second one for channels with space diversity.
Optional kit for reused channels

It includes the cables needed for the frequency reuse operation. They are the IF cables and
RF cables for the synchronization of the Rx local oscillators. One kit is used for one couple of
reused channels.
Two different codes are envisaged: one kit foresee short length cable needed for reused
channels connection inside the same rack.
The second must be used when the interconnections are relevant to two different racks.
Interconnection cables to 1650SMC

Three dedicated cable kits have been developed for the interconnection from the radio
regenerator to the 1650SMC unit:
Common part cable kit (including rack lamp cable)
1+1/2+0 basic cable kit (signal cables)
1 cable kit for one extension channel (signal cables, one for each added channel besides
1+1/2+0))
External connections
Main signal interfaces of the terminal are present on the front panel of each RRA unit.
Alarm interconnections are directly present in the access area of baseband subrack and no
distributor board is foreseen neither in baseband nor in TRU subrack.
12.4.8 Installation materials
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This handbook gives no detailed information on Installation materials, as well as on Installation

procedures and Commissioning procedures and related Acceptance Test documents. For this
purpose, please refer to the Installation Handbook and to the LineUp Guide (see Tab. 77.
on page 524).
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
53 / 542
12.5.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes in detail the Radio Transmission features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends
the following main paragraphs:
Frequency reuse technique (CCDP)

and XPIC Cross Polarization Canceller
Transmitted power control: static and ATPC
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this paragraph are:

Hardware components
12.5.2 Frequency reuse technique (CCDP) and XPIC Cross Polarization Canceller
12.5.2.1 Introduction
Efficient bandwidth is a relevant issue in the digital radio application.
Multilevel signalling is a standard mean to get high spectral efficiency.
Unfortunately its sensitivity to channel impairments increases with the number of modulation levels. In
radio links carrying several channels, additional bandwidth saving is usually achieved by using both
horizontal and vertical polarization, with cross polarized adjacent channels to minimize interference.
A further improvement of transmission capacity can be obtained by the simultaneous use of the RF
channel for two independent digital transmissions on orthogonal polarization, which is commonly
addressed to as Crosspolarized cochannel frequency reuse technique.
Frequency reuse systems actually result in doubling the spectral efficiency of conventional transmissions.
However this is paid in terms of additional signal distortion, because of inevitable crosscoupling of dual
polarized channels. This is due both to propagation conditions (notably rain and ground reflections) and
imperfections in the antennae and waveguide feeders. The result of reduced cross polarization
discrimination (XPD) is cross polarization interference (XPI) , which sums up with intersymbol
interference generated by channel dispersions and give rise to potentially serious impairments in
detection.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
XPI and intersymbol interference can be jointly contrasted by resorting to adaptive processing techniques.
Baseband equalizations together with cross polarization interference canceller (XPIC) allow signal
distortion to be kept within tolerable limits, thus making frequency reuse a viable option.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
54 / 542

12.5 Radio Transmission features

12.5.2.2 XPIC Operating principle and receiver architecture

The idea behind the XPIC operation is that of adjusting the amplitude and phase of the received signal
samples of the opposite polarization, so as to provide an estimate of the XPI corrupting the desired copol
signal. This estimate can then be subtracted from the main signal, producing crosspol interference
cancellation. Taking into account the timevarying nature of the channel, the XPIC operation must be
adaptively adjusted according to a proper rule to track the variation in both copolar and crosspolar
channels parameters.
To counteract both XPI and multipath fading, the joint use of XPIC and adaptive equalization is advised.
Following this approach, the adopted crosspol cofrequency receiver structure results in an arrangement
of four adaptive bandspaced transverse filters, as show in Fig. 18.
H pol.
received signal
EQUALIZER
H data
XPIC
H error signal
V error signal
XPIC
V pol.
received signal
V data
EQUALIZER
Fig. 18. XPIC operating principle

In the same figure the XPIC updating criterion is also addressed. The XPIC tapweights are adjusted so
as to minimize the correlation between crosspol received signal and copol error signal.
This operation minimizes the correlation between error signal and cross polarization interference.
A fundamental issue in a frequency reuse system design is the receiver recover capability. As a matter
of fact, deep fading occurrences, which can produce a system loss of lock, are usually of short duration,
so that also moderate hysteresis effects on system lockin can severely increase the total outage time (C/I
typical values 2 5 dB).
Therefore, care must be taken in the choice of the receiver synchronization strategies, in order to avoid
any interaction between dualpol sections of receiver during the recovery process.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The adopted frequency reuse system architecture is sketched in Fig. 19. on page 56.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
55 / 542
H IF
RX
H
UP
MOD
DATA
CONV
TX
DOWN
CONV
MOD
DATA
UP
CONV
DATA
synchr.
LO
master
LO
DEM
+
XPIC
IF
slave
TX
RX
DOWN
CONV
DEM
+
XPIC
IF
LO
V
DATA
V IF
Fig. 19. Frequency reuse system architecture

The only design constraint is that a common RF local oscillator is used for both dualpol signals, while
two independent decision directed carrier recovery loops are employed for the demodulation from IF to
baseband for each equalizer canceller pair input signals.
This approach preserves the precise phase and frequency relationship between the received signal and
the crosspol signal used for XPI cancellation.
And this is true even when the carrier associated with the received signal is out of lock. Such coherence
has very important implications because without cancellation, when the terminal is out of lock, XPI
distortion will be so severe that the terminal will not easily regain lock.
Another advantage of such an arrangement is that no constraints are imposed on Tx oscillators. In
addition, a joint recovery process of crosspol carriers is avoided.
The equalizer/canceller system operation is based on dualpol received signal samples. Therefore, a
critical point of receiver design is to devise the proper signal sampling strategy. We chose to employ a
separate symbol synchronizer for each crosspol branch of the receiver. As indicated in Fig. 19. , the
same clock is used to sample the input signal of an equalizer and of the associated XPI canceller. This
makes the XPIC operation independent of the synchronization of dual polarized transmitted data streams.
It is of great importance to observe that the above synchronization strategies result in a complete
independence of operation of the receiver branches on opposite polarization. This allows operation even
when the receiving digital terminal on the opposite polarization is out of service.
12.5.2.3 XPIF Factor
The receiver performance can be assessed in term of the XPI rejection capability of the canceller. This
is quantified by the crosspolarization improvement factor (XPIF), which is the difference of the carrier
to XPI ratio (C/XPIs) corresponding to a predefined error performance in a dual polarized system with and
without XPIC, respectively.
Typical values (optimum phase) for a 128 MLC system is 22 dB.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
12.5.2.4 XPIC Card

The XPIC card is a daughter board that has to be inserted in both modem units of the main and reused
channel of each bearer that is reused. This unit is installed in the system only if the reuse of frequency is
implemented. It can be also added to the modem in second step if a expansion of the system utilizing the
reuse of a frequency is required after the first installation.
The unit has a second utilization, again as daughter board, as baseband combiner when the space
diversity functionality is implemented in the link.
In case of both functionality presence (XPIC and Space diversity), two units are necessary and both must
be installed inside the modems.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
56 / 542

LO

12.5.3 Transmitted power control: static and ATPC

The product allows two ways to adjust the transmitted power: the first one in a static way, the second one
under automatic control loop (ATPC function).
12.5.3.1 Transmit power static adjustment
The capability to adjust transmitted power in a static and fixed way has been introduced for those countries
where, due to internal rules, the ATPC function is not accepted or for those hops in which, due the short
length and interface problems, a fixed reduced transmitted power is preferred.
The range of the possible attenuation depends on the frequency band involved and is detailed in chapter
Technical Specifications.
The step for adjustment is 1 dB, with an accuracy of 0.5 dB. The setting of the transmitted power can
be performed locally by means of ECT.
12.5.3.2 ATPC function
The automatic control of the transmitted power (ATPC) function allows to regulate the transmitted power
in order to supply a reduced power in situation of normal propagation and the maximum power in
conditions of fading.
In synchronous radio link systems, the ATPC device is considered a very important function taking into
account the following advantages:
reduction of the internal interferences of the radio system and with other systems
reduction of the average consumption of the transmitter considering that the maximum power is
supplied for small percentages of time
improvement of the averages conditions of the transmitter about the linearity and consequent
reduction of phenomena of background error due to non linear distortion that with ATPC could be
revealed only in conditions of fading
possibility to increase the System Gain as a consequence to the reduction of the Backoff on the
power transmitted taking into account what above mentioned
substitution of a possible microwaves attenuator to realize different range of power.
As far as concern the values relative to the operating range of the ATPC, refer to chapter Technical
Specifications.
[1]
ATPC working principle
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The ATPC system is based on a control loop of the power transmitted between a TX transmitter and
a RX receiver connected in a radio link.
With reference to Fig. 20. on page 58, the receiver furnishes through the AGC voltage the
information of the received power to the ATPC controller; it compares the voltage with threshold
values (presettable) and according to the obtained result send through to the ATPC controller on the
remote station of the link the orders of increase/ decrease of transmitted power. These orders are
processed and therefore transferred to the associated transmitter.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
57 / 542
PRX
IF
MOD
RX
IF
DEM
VATPC
COMATPC
ATPC
CONTROL
AGC
RFCOH
INSERT
RFCOH
EXTRACT
PRX ATPC
RX FAILURE
ATPC DATA
ATPC DATA
DEM
IF
RX
PTX
PRX
TX
IF
MOD
ATPC regulation shown in one direction of transmission only and valid for each channel
N.B.
Fig. 20. ATPC Functionality

The information of control of the transmitted power is exchanged between the two stations of a link
utilizing service channel at 64 Kbit/s inserted in RFCOH bytes (avoiding to touch standard SOH
bytes).
In the protected configurations these information are transmitted 1+1 protected.
The information regarding the ATPC functionality can be resumed in the following (for each channel):
received power (absolute digital value to be transmitted towards the remote station in order to
move the Tx output power).
Rx failure (for remote Tx inhibition with reused system configuration)
ID_channel (for identification of ATPC channel, in order to avoid problems in case of

crosstalk/interference).
These information are organized in registers of SPRI (Serial Peripheral Register Interface) where the
PRx and ID_ch information are transmitted with higher priority than Rx fail.
The information for each channel received in remote station is sent to the relevant transmitter where
the PRx information received is compared to the thresholds set and it is decided to send up or down
or hold commands to the RF transmitter.
The Rx failure received in the Tx remote station is used to switch off the relevant transmitter in case
of frequency reuse or to set the Tx at low Pout in case of standard configuration (no frequency reuse
application).
The service channel above mentioned is a point to point type and in the SDH systems is terminated
in each RRA/Modemodulator.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[2]
Organization of the control system

The ATPC control system is replied for each channel without any centralized function.
The system control is organized in two parts for each channel and for each direction:
the Rx system control implementing PRx detection, eventual Rx failure detection and insertion
of the above data in RFCOH bytes
the Tx system control implementing extraction of data from RFCOH bytes and PTx drive.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
58 / 542

STATION B
STATION A
[3]
ATPC Threshold management

The transmitter is able to change the output power in the range MAX TL (max level) and MIN TL (min
level). The transceiver has an its own default value for MAX TL, MIN TL and NOM TL (nominal level).
It is possible to set the following values:
A MAX TL
(max level ATPC)
where
A MAX TL MAX TL
A MIN TL
(min level ATPC)
where
A MIN TL MIN TL
with the constrain:

MIN TL A MIN TL NOM TL
A MIN TL A MAX TL MAX TL
The extreme thresholds MAX TL and MIN TL are reported in the data sheet (see par. 3.3.2)
It means that:
the ATPC range is not fixed but variable according to the values set for A MAX TL and A MIN
TL
the max ATPC output power can be different from the max output power of the transmitter and
the ATPC functionality can be maintained with reduced range
The receiver has an its own default value (not changeable) for a receive power threshold called
EXTRA POWER threshold depending on the signal (STM1 or STM0) corresponding to guaranteed
threshold 10E6.
On the receiver it is possible to set a received power Low threshold for loop activation within the
following limits:
LOW threshold: in the range from 40 dBm to EXTRA POWER threshold dBm
When the received signal decreases and overcomes the LOW threshold the transmitter increases
the output power up to the nominal value. Only if the received signal overcomes the EXTRA POWER
threshold the transmitter increases the output power reducing its backoff (if LMA>LN only). The
hysteresis for both thresholds is 3dB.
The PRx value sent to the transmitter is refreshed with 10ms time interval.
In case of loss of Tx_Rx ATPC signal, exchanged between Tx and Rx, the output power is frozen and
an ATPC loop alarm must be activated (no other actions are taken); when the communication is
restored the ATPC loop alarm is disactivated after an hysteresis to be defined.
It is possible to enable or to disable ATPC function: when ATPC is disabled the output power can be
driven normally according to 3.3.2.
Every power change, from manual to automatic and viceversa, is performed at the speed of
1dB/20ms.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To be sure that a decreasing of Rx power of one receiver corresponds to a PTx increasing of the
relevant Tx in remote station an identifier station code must be used. The same identifier station
code should be set on the two station involved in the ATPC functionality avoiding that in
crosstalk/interference or RFCOH bypass in repeater the Tx in one station can be driven by a not
relevant Rx.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
59 / 542
12.6.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes in detail the Signal Transmission features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends
the following main paragraphs:
STM0 & STM1 Transmission

SDH mapping adopted
SDH interface usage
SOH bytes and service channel access

Hardware components
12.6.2 STM0 & STM1 Transmission

One of the most important peculiarity of the 9600LSY family is to allow the selection of the system capacity
according to the customer needs (and allowing band saving utilizing STM0 capacity, if it can be useful).
In particular, this feature can be applied to 7, 8 and 13 GHz bands, utilizing well defined channel
arrangements for medium capacity transmission. Please refer to section FREQUENCY PLANS & PART
NUMBERS to analyze the frequency arrangements and the channel steps foreseen for the various
frequencies in case of STM0.
Of course, the STM0 transmission is suitable to transport also plesiochronous signals with capacity 21x2
Mbit/s, 1 x 34 Mbit/s or 1 x 45 Mbit/s and the systems have been studied to allow an easy migration from
STM0 to STM1 (or viceversa) when the traffic and the band requirements are going to change.
As far as concerns the Way Side Traffic capacity, it is possible to transmit a single 2 Mbit/s WST stream
for each channel carrying STM1, whether in case of STM0 it is not possible to transmit any WST.
It is necessary to underline that no direct interfaces at STM0 level are foreseen. In case of STM0, the
interface user side is always at STM1 level but only the first VC3 is mapped ; in this way it is possible
to maintain the same electrical or optical interface (part numbers) independently from the signal capacity.
The real transformation between STM1 interface and STM0 signal takes place inside the RRA/Modem
unit before modulation (or after demodulation) function.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In case of migration from one capacity to the other, no RRA change is necessary. Only the modem has
to be substituted inside the baseband assembly; simple hardware and software presettings (with a new
software configuration) are sufficient to upgrade the system.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
60 / 542

12.6 Signal Transmission
12.6.3 SDH mapping adopted

Generalized Multiplexing structure

Fig. 21. shows the more generalized multiplexing structure obtained merging the ITUT G.707
multiplexing figure with the correspondent figure of ITUR F.750 (that shows also the RRRP functional
reference point for STM0 transmission).
Note that in European Standard only a subset of the generalized multiplexing structure is adopted, where
only plesiochronous interfaces at 2, 34 and 140 Mbit/s are used, but also the multiplexing of 3xAU3 into
AUG is forbidden (see Fig. 22. ).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 21. General Multiplexing Structure
Fig. 22. General European Multiplexing Structure with addition of 45 Mbit/s
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
61 / 542
The system can provide several kinds of user interfaces that may be synchronous (SDH) or
plesiochronous (PDH) and depend on the type of stations involved (Regenerator or WMSN) and the type
of transmitted bit rate (STM1 or STM0)
All the available interfaces are summarized, according to the different possible situations In Tab. 3. on
page 30. Details about electrical characteristic of each interface are reported in chapter Technical
Characteristics.
It is important to point out that in case of WMSN station (obtained coupling a 9600LSY Regenerator with
a 1650SMC device) inside the same rack), the interface between 9600LSY Regenerator and 1650SMC
is electrical and the equipment is represented by two separated N.Es .
Some general information that are valid for each version (line rate, physical interface) of the SDH and PDH
traffic interfaces are herewith outlined:
a)
b)
general rules for SDH unit:
SOH/POH bytes management according to the standard TTP or CTP rules (see also NERM)
Optical interfaces according to the standard G.957 short and long haul (see also NERM)
Automatic Laser Shutdown in compliance with G.958
general rules for PDH unit:
POH bytes management according to the standard TTP rules: (see also NERM)
Asynchronous bit mode mapping into the relevant VC payload.
Structure and /or notstructured PDH signals are transparently transported. The frame
structure information (e.g. : CRC,E,A,S bits) are neither handled nor monitored: bidirectional
passthrough at the PDH/SDH interfaces; furthermore, any potential PDHAIS condition is
transparently forwarded into the relevant VC.
Detection of VC signal fail conditions set to all 1 the outgoing PDH stream.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Detection of the incoming PDHAIS conditions (G.706 standard, detection time = 4 frames) can be
enabled/disabled, without consequent actions at VC layer.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
62 / 542

12.6.4 SDH interface usage
12.6.5 SOH bytes and service channel access

12.6.5.1 Overview
In the SDH system some SOH bytes (of SDH frame) are used to transmit the service channels. So we
can distinguish:
c)
RSOH bytes, that can be inserted/extracted both in multiplex and in regenerator station,
and
d)
MSOH bytes that can be inserted/extracted only in multiplex station.
Moreover, radio side, the transmission of 1 Way Side Traffic service stream (only in case of STM1
transmission) is performed mapping it on the bytes of two columns of the RFCOH. The AUX/EOW bytes
handled by the Regenerator and by the WMSN support two types of applications:
1)
Local access as termination: the auxiliary bytes of a trail termination can be bidirectionally
interconnected to the voice/data interfaces of the local service unit embedded in the equipment
itself.
2)
Crossconnection: the auxiliary bytes of two different trail terminations can be bidirectionally
interconnected providing an auxiliary channel passthrough between every couple of STM1
ports or different OH sections; it means each single byte can be configured to be
passedthrough from one direction (i.e. line side) to another one (i.e. radio side).
The auxiliary bytes connections are always unprotected and the selection of the bytes and the ports are
performed by CT/OS. The dashed cells in Tab. 6. herebelow show the set of potential OH bytes suitable
to be processed as auxiliary channels at the section or the path terminations, with the associated meaning.
RFCOH is a proprietary function implemented to transmit radio specific information (DSI, ATPC,
MC, WST) and to reroute over radio hop a few RSOH byte terminated.
Tab. 6. OH bytes suitable for handling on MST
RSOH
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MSOH
ED
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
J0
J1
B1
E1
F1
B3
D1
D2
D3
C2
G1
B2
B2
B2
K1
D4
D5
D7
D8
D10
D11
S1
M1
K2
F2
VC4/3
D6
H4
OH
D9
F3
D12
K3
E2
N1
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
63 / 542
RSOH
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
J0
B1
E1
F1
D1
D2
D3

Tab. 7. OH bytes suitable for handling on RST
4
5
6
MSOH
PASS THROUGH
8
9
Tab. 8. RFCOH byte structure

Column 1
Column 2
DSI
MC
ATPC
MC
D1
MC
D2
MC
D3
MC
E1
FAIL serv + K0
F1
d,n,f
d,n,f
d,n,f
d,n,f
d,n,f
where the meaning of the bytes is summarized as follows:

for RSOH bytes:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A1A2:
J0:
d:
n:
f:
B1:
E1:
F1:
D1D2D3:
ED
6 bytes: A1= (11110110) A2=(00101000) for frame alignment;

RS Trace for STM identification;
6 bytes for media specific usage;
4 bytes reserved for National Use;
4 bytes reserved for Future international standardization;
RS Error checking (BIP8) for regeneration section.
RS Voice for order wire channel;
data channel as user channel;
RS DCC data communication channel [192 Kb/s (TMN bytes for regenerator
section)];
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
64 / 542

for MSOH bytes:

B2:
E2:
n:
f:
K1K2:
D4..D12:
S1:
M1:
MS Error checking (BIP24) for terminal station.

MS Express channel.
2 bytes reserved for National Use;
26 bytes reserved for Future international standardization;
MPS channel K1(b1..b8) and K2(b1..b5), MSFERF/AIS K2(b6..b8):
110 indicates that the receive end is detecting a section failure or is receiving
MSAIS;
MS DCC data communication channel [576 Kb/s (TMN bytes for multiplex section)];
SDH Synchronization Quality Level: S1 (b5..b8)
Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication
for POH bytes:

J1:
B3:
C2:
G1:
F2:
F3:
H4:
K3:
N1:
Path trace (check end to end path connection)

Performance monitoring (BIP8 of VC4)
Signal label (full or empty VC)
Path status (FERF,FEBE) backward to the origin
Path user service channel
Path user service channel
Multiframe alignment (indicates tributary location)
4 bits for APS channel, 4 bits spare
Network operator byte for Tandem Connection Monitoring (TCM) function
for RFCOH bytes:

Proprietary channels
MC:
k0:
DSI:
ATPC:
Monitoring channel:EWL, EWH, HBER, RTF, FAIL SERV.

Proprietary radio channel identifier
Digital Switching Information channel for RPS
Data channel for automatic transmitting power control
RSOH bytes rerouted over radio hop
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
E1:
F1:
D1D2D3:
ED
radio Order Wire

radio data channel
RS DCC data communication channel [192 Kb/s (TMN bytes for regenerator
section)];
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
65 / 542
12.6.5.2 Regenerator Case
Termination of RSOH or RFCOH bytes to auxiliary ports

RSOH RFCOH bytes cross connection
The following Tab. 9. shows for the Regenerator the possible AUX/EOW user interfaces suitable to
access the terminated channels:
Tab. 9. Reg. AUX/EOW user interfaces
USER INTERFACES
QUANTITY
9600 baud with interface V24/V28 (selectable)
64 Kb/s G.703 (one is 64/128Kb/s selectable)
64 Kb/s V11
64/128 Kb/s V11 (SW configurable)
64 Kb/s G.703 (Party line)
Voice frequency (E1) (EOW)
Voice frequency (E1) (Party line)
Voice frequency (point to point between adjacent radio sections)
Among them it is possible to choose, by software presetting, up to six 64 Kbit/s channels plus one voice
frequency channel (EOW), to be transmitted radio side in 1+1 protected way and to be dropped and
inserted in every radio station.
With reference to Tab. 7. on page 64, the RSOH bytes terminated line side may be in principle mapped
upon software configuration control in the following interfaces as summarized in the following table:
USER INTERFACES
RFCOH bytes (line side) [1]
V.11
V.24
G.703
EOW
(Q 23)
E1
F1
d,f,n [2]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Notes:
[1]
[2]
ED
For the DCCR (D1D3) and J0 the interfaces is towards SC

max 14 bytes d,n,f.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
66 / 542

As far as the 9600LSY Regenerator, it allows the management of:

With reference to Tab. 8. on page 64, the RSOH bytes terminated radio side through the RFCOH function
may be in principle mapped upon software configuration control in the following interfaces as summarized
in the following table:
USER INTERFACES
RFCOH bytes (radio side) [1]
V.11
V.24
G.703
EOW
(Q 23)
E1
F1
5 bytes out of d,f,n
Note:
[1] For the DCCR (D1D3) and k0 the interface is towards SC
Practically common usage of user interfaces and possible mapping is:
E1 always terminated on the EOW two ways (line side and radio side)
F1 plus max 3 bytes accessible (normally radio side) through the user interfaces 2 x 64 Kb/s, 1 x
V11 and 1 x V24.
Each interface (with the exception of the voice type ) supports only one direction; the same byte can
be assigned to different direction (for example line side and radio side) using 2 interfaces.
Way Side Traffic (WST)

Additionally, the regenerator allows the transmission, radio side, of one 2 Mb/s Way Side Traffic (WST)
that represents a service traffic in addition to the main one.
Both the WST and service channels are transmitted using the radio frame complementary overhead
(RFCOH, an arbitrary and unstandardized extra SDH frame overhead).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The main features of the 2 Mbit/s WST Channels management are the following:
STM1 capacity:
One 2 Mbit/s Way Side Traffic can be inserted in each STM1 channel whatever is the channel
spacing (28, 29, 29,65, 30, 40 MHz) used in the channel plans.
STM0 capacity:
No 2 Mbit/s Way Side Traffic can be inserted.
WST protection:
WST can be transmitted in unprotected way, one for each radio channel, by means of the interfaces
(1.0/2.3 75 Ohm coax male connectors) allocated in the access area of the subrack.
The possibility to transmit one 2Mb/s WST stream in protected way (on channels 0 and 1 ) is also
given. In this case the access is located on the front panel of Service unit that hosts the WST switching
functionality.
Automatic switching criteria are : Signal Fail (SF), HBER, LBER and EW.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
67 / 542
WMSN functionality is realized utilizing a1650SMC adddrop multiplexer .

When WMSN functionality is implemented, all the accesses to services are located on the 1650SMC unit,
and the ones located on the regenerator section no longer are no longer utilized.
For the description of the available service channels relevant to this unit, please refer to 1650SMC
Technical Handbook.
For an easy clarification about the service accesses, hereafter the front view of the 1650SMC view is
reported in Fig. 23. herebelow. The service access ports are located on the SERGI card:
for the DCCR (D1D3) and J0 the interfaces is towards SC

for the DCCM (D4D12) , S1 and M1 the interface is towards SC.
POH bytes of terminated VC4
In particular, the SERGI unit supplies the access to the auxiliary channels (A) and to the 2 Mb/s Service
stream (B) . Moreover, the connection for the telephone jack is present (C).
(A)
(B)
(C)
1650SMC
SERGI
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 23. 1650SMC and unit SERGI front view
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
68 / 542

12.6.5.3 WMSN Case

12.6.5.4 Engineering Order Wire characteristic

The EOW Channel allows the access to the phone services of the system.
It is interfaced with the telephone set with DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) Tones and with association
circuits, branching, exchange and receiving of the phone signal.
The EOW Channel allows the following types of linking:
between two station (selective call)
between one station and all the others (omnibus call)
between one and more stations called in selective mode (multi selective call).
Numbering System
The compatibility with the actual generation of devices is guaranteed by the type of numbering used, with
the two digits that identify the actual
The above statement, limited the max number of devices linked in 90.
Is important to remember that the numbers available are from 10 to 99.
The omnibus call number is identify in the number 00, as in the actual boards.
The multiselective call can be utilized connecting in conference mode up to the maximum number of
available telephone numbers (90).
This new release is full compatible with the current systems, except few new features here below
described:
Introduction of the time checks during a phones call.
Automatic ring management (Routing)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A second voice channel is also available for voice transmission in point to point link between adjacent
regenerator terminals. The interface is present on the connector area of the baseband equipment and
the channel can be addressed on one byte of RFCOH .
In case of WMSN configuration it is possible also to connect by cable the service to 1650SMC unit to be
inserted in MSOH and to be available in MST sections.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
69 / 542
a)
In case of G.703 64 Kbit/s codirectional interface the timing signals (64 KHz and 8 KHz) are derived
from the data stream.
Fig. 24. G.703 64 Kbit/s codirectional interface

b)
In case of RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contradirectional interface the timing signal (64 KHz and 8
KHz) are directed towards the user. The code is NRZ.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 25. RS422 A V11/V24 64 Kbit/s contradirectional interface
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
70 / 542

12.6.5.5 Data Channel Characteristics
In case of RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous up to 9600 baud no timing signals are required. The signal
is internally over sampled up to 64 KHZ. The code is NRZ.

c)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 26. RS232C V24/V28 asynchronous interface
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
71 / 542
12.7.1 Foreword
This paragraph describes in detail the Synchronization features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the
following main paragraphs:
Introduction
Synchronization in Regenerator station
Synchronization in WMSN station by means of 1650SMC ADM

Hardware components
12.7.2 Introduction
SDH transmission operates on general principles that implies the existence of timing devices that form
part of a synchronizing network.
Different behaviors for synchronization are present depending from the type of station either Regenerator
or WMSN.
12.7.3 Synchronization in Regenerator station
In this case each incoming STM1 stream takes the network synchronization that is recovered by the
equipment and forwarded to the radio hop or to the line retiming the transmitted signal by means of the
recovered clock.
The regenerator does not need any other synchronization circuit.
12.7.4 Synchronization in WMSN station by means of 1650SMC ADM
The synchronization requirements implies that a WMSN equipment must include a synchronization
subsystem for a slave clock which functions are specified in ITUT Rec. G.783 as the Synchronous
Equipment Timing Source (SETS).
The Alcatel 9600LSY radio families are provided with 1650SMC ADM unit that supplies such
functionalities.
By selecting the external or internal reference source, the equipment works synchronized to the reference.
The 1650SMC unit can automatically change the reference involved if the selected one is not correct
or can holdover the operation mode if no input reference is available.
1650SMC supplies the synchronizing and timing signals to all the equipment units (N.B.) by selecting
the synchronizing signal among the available input references.
To this purpose the unit can:
select the reference source involved;
change the reference (or mode) when it losses synchronism;
lock the Local Oscillator to the reference available;
work in Hold Over/Free Running LO mode when all references are lost.
In a radio terminal only the ADM takes directly the synchronism from the internal
synchronization path, while units of other subracks take indirectly the synchronism by means
of its own phase locked oscillators (e.g. modemodulators). Finally there are units that do not
need synchronism at all (e.g. units of transceiver).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
72 / 542

12.7 Synchronization

The Compact ADM unit also provides an output synchronization signal at 2.048 MHz with an interface
according G.703 (T4 signal in G783)
This signal is squelched when the unit is working in Free Running or in Hold Over modes.
A maximum of 6 independent references can be defined by mixing type and PDH/SDH parts (the selection
is accomplished by means of craft terminal).
The selection may happen between:
timing reference signals coming from the TTF blocks on CompactADM (T1 signal in G783)
timing reference signals coming from the SDH ports (T1 signal in G783)
2.048 MHz signal coming from the PDH ports (T2 signal)
2.048 MHz clock coming from external source (T3 signal in G783)
The choice of the sources can be made in independent manner for the internal clock reference output and
for the external 2 MHz output.
By Craft Terminal it is also possible either to enable or to disable the Timing Marker algorithm.
The automatic selection of one of the possible synchronization sources is performed on the base of quality
(SSM algorithm) or priority criteria:
a)
Priority Algorithm
See flow chart in Fig. 27. on page 75.
The reference source choice is performed checking the signal quality by detecting for every STM1
synchronization source:
LOS (= LOS + MSAIS + LOF + EXCBER)
DRIFT
and for every 2 Bit/s interface or synchronous tributary selected as source:

LOS (= LOS + AIS + LOF)
DRIFT
LOF (+ LOM + CRC4 MISMATCH) For 2 Mbit/s interface only
b)
SSM Algorithm
See flow chart in Fig. 28. on page 76.
If the Timing Marker procedure is enabled, the CRU checks the S1 Bytes from the synchronous frame
of the selected sources and the preset value of the 2 Mbit/s sources then, by the SSM algorithm,
chooses the better source to be used.
The SSM algorithm is in compliance with ETSI DE/TM 10156.
The two Algorithms define synchronization source, by switching the reference.
The switch between the source is hitless.
The switch from one reference to the other one occurs without passing through the Holdover mode.
The reference, sent to the PLL circuits, generates the 622 MHz signal used for internal
synchronization.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The PLL can operates in these following different modes:
ED
Normal
The PLL output is frequency locked to one of the selected references.
Holdover
In absence of an external reference, the clock stored the frequency difference to the last
reference.
This information is used to fix the oscillator frequency value.
The holdover mode guarantees .37 ppm of frequency drift within the first 24 h
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
73 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Free running
Without any reference and information stored in memory, the VCO oscillates at its natural
frequency.
Frequency variations can be due to temperature variations, components degradation etc.
The free running stability is 4.6 ppm. The following setting can also be managed by Craft
Terminal:
Lock out
The command allows to disable/enable a timing input from being considered as possible source
of timing.
Forced switch
The command allows to force the selection of a timing input.
If the source forced becomes unavailable, the internal oscillator will be selected.
Manual selection of timing source

The command allows to force the selection of a timing input.
If the source manual selected becomes unavailable, the manual mode is terminated and
automatic selection algorithm is initiated.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
74 / 542


The allowable timing references, pointing by S, must be arranged according to decreasing priority
level (i.e. priority level of timing reference pointing by Sj is than priority level of Sj+1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 27. Synchronization Reference Source Priority Algorithm Flow Chart
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
75 / 542

The allowable timing references, pointing by S, must be arranged according to decreasing priority
level (i.e. priority level of timing reference pointing by Sj is >= than priority level of Sj+1).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 28. SSM Algorithm Flow Chart
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
76 / 542

12.8 Equipment Control

12.8.1 Foreword
This paragraph introduces the Equipment control features of 9600LSY family, and comprehends the
following main paragraphs:
para.12.8.2
para.12.8.3
para.12.8.4
para.12.8.5
para.12.8.6
herebelow
on page 78
on page 80
on page 80
on page 81
Introduction
The NE architecture
The F interface
The Qecc/QB3 interface
ECT and RECT
12.8.2 Introduction
9600LSY Digital Radio Relay Systems cannot operate correctly without Control and Management
Functions which are usually partially embedded as Synchronous Equipment Management Function
(SEMF) and Message Communication Function (MCF) in the involved Network elements..
Equipment control may be performed locally through an Equipment Craft Terminal (1320 CT) or remotely
through a Craft Terminal in a remote site.
External control units may be dedicated to a Radio subnetwork or may be the Control Elements of an SDH
Network including Radio Links, Fiber Optic Lines, Synchronous Multiplexers and CrossConnect
Equipment.
Inside an overall Managed Telecommunication Network, SDH Digital Radio Relay Systems are part of a
Managed Synchronous Network. The 9600LSY DRRS equipment interfaces the TMN according to ETSI
Standard and ITUT Rec G.784, G.773 and ITUR Rec 750.
The architecture of the management process, which is intrinsically a distributed process based on
Manager and Agent Functions, may influence in the design, the Equipment Control Architecture and the
identification of the Network Elements to be managed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To connect SDH Radio Equipment to a TMN System Qtype Interfaces are used, adopting the standard
Infomodel based QType Interfaces Qecc and QB3 for a full integration in a multivendor environment.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
77 / 542
A Digital Radio Relay Link identified as a Radio Switching Section is composed of two Radio Relay
Terminals (RRT). Each physical entity RRT is a SDH NEs and therefore according to ITUT Rec G.784
they must have TMN Q3 and Qecc Interfaces.
All the SDH NE must be able to terminate the Regenerator Section (RS).
Two types of RRT are available depending on the ability to terminate a Multiplex Section (MS) or a
Regenerator Section (RS) only. This ability is required when the RRT having PDH tributaries (140 Mb/s,
2, 34 or 45 Mb/s) behaves like an SDH Multiplexer (i.e. WMSN station composed at least by two NEs:
1650SMC + LHR). When the RRT has SDH tributaries this ability is not strictly required and therefore the
RRT may be equipped with an RRA (Radio Regenerator Adaptation) Assembly (Regenerator station
equal to the NE LHR/LHRC).
Associated to the RS and the MS there are in the SOH of the SDH frame two Embedded Control Channels
(having as physical interfaces the D1D3 bytes in the RSOH and D4D12 bytes in the MSOH) carrying
the management information between the ends of the RS and MS respectively. These channels are
terminated in the Message Communication Function (MCF), located in the Equipment Controller of the
NE, which behaves like a Packet Switching Node. The communication interface of these channels on the
physical interfaces D1D3 and D4D12 is a 7layer full OSI protocol stack as defined in ITUT Rec G.784
named Qecc.
While the intersite or interoffice communications links between SDH NEs will normally be formed from
the SDH ECCs, within a particular site (intrasite connections) or when the SDH NE is acting as Gateway
Network Element (GNE) towards a Data Communication Network connecting the NE with an Operation
System (OS) a 7layer full OSI protocol stack named QBX is used. QBX is a Q3 type interface and with
reference to the foreseen protocol suites: QB1 is a Connection oriented over X.25 (CONS1) interface, QB2
is a Connectionless Mode over X.25 (CLNS2) interface and QB3 is a Connectionless Mode over ISO 8802
LAN interface.
The previous Qtype interfaces in their standardized versions implies the use of a Management
Application Software based on an objectoriented Information Model and the use at the 7th layer of the
OSI stack of protocols as CMISE, ROSE and ACSE.
The availability on the NE of all these QType TMN interfaces do not imply the contemporary use of all
of them. Their use and the criteria for selecting them is the TMN network designer responsibility according
to the management traffic load and the network layout. The only limitation imposed by standards is that
in the RRRs (and obviously in the RRTs equipped with RRA) the only RSOH has to be terminated
whereas the MSOH has to be passedthrough.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
As far as the QB3 and Qecc interfaces is concerned the following criteria in their use have been adopted.
In the WMSN station equipped with the Mux assembly, on the line side the DCC bytes of the MSOH and
the RSOH are transferred to the MCF and then processed by the SEMF or rerouted by the MCF to their
destination. While the DCCM bytes of the MSOH are reinserted in the SDH frame, the DCCR bytes of
the RSOH are reinserted in the SDH frame through the RFCOH and MODEM units with 1+1 protection
(Radio Channel 1 and 0). In the Regenerator station, while the DCCR of the RSOH are processed in the
same way as previously described, the MSOH remains untouched and is carried transparently.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
78 / 542

12.8.3 The NE architecture

STATION A
TR
STATION B
TR
radio channels x,y

(N.B.)
D1D3
radio channels x,y

(N.B.)
MD
MD
RPS
RPS
radio channels x,y

(N.B.)
radio channels x,y

D4D12
D4D12
D1D3
RRA
SEMF
SEMF
MCF
1320CT
D4D12
D1D3
RRA
MCF
QB3
QB3
ECT for Station A

RECT for Station B
Fig. 29. DCC management: Regenerator case
STATION A (REG.)
TR
MD
RPS
STATION B (WMSN)
radio channels x,y

(N.B.)
D1D3
radio channels x,y

(N.B.)
TR
MD
RPS
D4D12
D4D12
D1D3
RRA
RRA
SEMF
SEMF
MCF
MCF
D1D3
MUX
D4D12
D1D3
SEMF
MCF
F
1320CT
QB3
ECT for Station A

RECT for Station B
1320CT
QB3
ECT for Station B

RECT for Station A
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 30. DCC management: WMSN case

The couple of radio channels (x,y in Fig. 29. and Fig. 30. above) which carry the protected
service channel (as well as the WST channels, if any) is defined via software. These channels
can be chosen among the five couples defined in Tab. 5. on page 39.
N.B.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
79 / 542
The F interface is the control interface connecting a Craft Terminal to a Equipment Controller.
The F interface is not a standard interface since in TMN there is only the F interface as reference point
between WSF (Work Station Function) and OSF (Operation System Function) and the F interface is not
yet standardized.
An F interface has been standardized for all the ALCATEL equipment and is using the following protocols:
Physical Layer:
Standard: EIA RS232C/ITUT V24V28
Type: Pointtopoint, Asynchronous full Duplex
Transmission rate: 38600 bit/s
Connector: 9 pin female Sub D
Data Link Layer:

Asynchronous HDLC standard protocol
ISO 3309 ISO 4335 ISO 7809
In 9600LSY terminal regenerator, F interface is located on the front panel of the System Controller unit.
In case of WMSN configuration, F interface available on 1650SMC unit is the one to be utilized as terminal
interface and represents the unique access to the terminal. In this case, by means of RECT software it
is possible to control, besides all the other terminals, also the functionality of the regeneration section
of the WMSN terminal. For this reason, the RECT option has to be always foreseen in case of WMSN
functionality.
12.8.5 The Qecc/QB3 interface
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In the TMN (Telecommunication Management Network) Architecture, while Qecc is the communication
interface on the DCCs (Data Communication Channel) used as ECCs (Embedded Control Channel) in a
SDH Subnetwork, the QB3 interface is used to interface the SDH Subnetwork to the OSs, usually through
a DCN (Data Communication Network). The Gateway Function performing the protocol conversion (from
Qecc to QB3 and vice versa) is carried out by the GNE (Gateway Network Element) of the subnetwork.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
80 / 542

12.8.4 The F interface
12.8.6 ECT and RECT

[1]
ECT

ALCATEL TMN management products 1320 CT called Craft Terminals (CT) consists of a compatible
personal computer and application software specially developed for monitoring transmission
equipment. The CT designed to monitor a single transmission equipment is called Equipment Craft
Terminal (ECT) or 1320 CT.
For each station an ALCATEL proprietary Software Package (SWP) is to be employed:
SWP REG. 9600LSY for the Regenerator station
and, additionally, SWP 1650SMC for the WMSN station.

The Equipment Craft Terminal, connected to the F interface of the Equipment Controller, enable an
operator to perform locally the following Element Management functions:
Equipment Management
Transmission Management
Test management
External points management
Alarm (fault) management
Synchronization management
Radio Management
Performance Monitoring Management
Event log manager
Overhead Management
Connection Management
Software Management
Communication and Routing Management
Security Management
Support Management
[2]
RECT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Remote Equipment Craft Terminal is a feature only present in the Single NE Link architecture
which allows the local operator, using an ECT connected to the F interface of the Equipment
Controller, to zoom and perform a complete set of management operations on all the reachable SDH
NEs in the SDH.
The Remote NE can be physically reached through QB3/Qecc.
The Remote Craft Terminal feature applies in NR5 to both Q3 and QB3* NEs, with the exception of
DXC. The feature is basically the same as for NR3 NEs, with the usual difference related to the
support of TSDIM interface for the management of Q3 NEs.
Despite the fact that this is supposed to be a NE related feature, it becomes a network feature
considering that the network can be composed of both Q3 and QB3* NEs and that an harmonization
is necessary between the two technologies.
The IMCT is able to manage both Q3 and QB3* NEs (in the sense that both QB3* and Q3 application
are working simultaneously), but it shall be connected to a Q3 NE. Viceversa Nectas CT will keep
on being able to manage only QB3* NEs, and it shall obviously be connected to a QB3* NE.
Its worth reminding that RECT can be connected to any NE pertaining to the same area of the local
NE and to any NE pertaining to different areas (assuming that the DCN network has been correctly
designed and hence interarea communication is possible from networking viewpoint).
As far as DXC is concerned, the RECT feature is not supported, i.e. a DXC CT can be connected
to only one DXC at a time.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
81 / 542
The RECT features and limitations are briefly the following:

1)
The RECT function provides a remote login facility similar to those offered by an OS to manage
several configured NEs, included the local one.
The contemporaneous presence of the RECT function and an OS is possible. The access
disable flag avoids access conflict between the OS and both RECT and ECT on some
operations as configuration modification and remote control with access filtering.
The NE which may be remotely controlled by a RECT must be configured and must be loaded
with the same SW version supporting the RECT function. A NE not supporting RECT function
shall refuse the incoming association issued by a RECT and the ECT displays only local
information.
Only three RECTs shall be active at a time over one NE. The coexistence of ECTs and RECTs
in the whole network is guaranteed since the conflict in configuring the QB3 NEs is solved locally
by the NE itself.
The operator, through the RECT function, is able to see the alarm synthesis of the whole
network .
In a SDH network the maximum number of QB3 NEs equipped with the RECT function are 32
and the maximum number of NEs (QB3* NEs and QB3 NEs) manageable by the RECT function
are 64. These figures identify what it is understood as small SDH network for which the RECT
function may substitute the Element Manager.
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
[3]
Security management
The security management allows to define the profile operator in order to access to all the Craft
Terminal functionality according to four different profiles:
Administrator
Constructor
Operator
Viewer: no modification are allowed

Refer to CT Operators Handbooks listed in Tab. 81. on page 527, Tab. 83. on page 529, and
para.C.2.4.2 on page 530 for further information on:
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
HW and SW requirement of the PC to be used as ECT and RECT

detailed description of ECT and RECT functionalities and operations allowed.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
82 / 542

Of course, due to the limitation of the physical resources in the Equipment Controller of the NE, some
network design constraints must be taken into account as the total number of managed NEs (64),
the number of the QB3 NEs (32), the number of the QB3* NEs (32), the number of associations
permanently open (31) between the CT and the remote NEs.

13 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
13.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the technical characteristics of the 9600LSY.
If not differently specified, characteristics are common to standard version 9600LSYLHR and compact
version 9600LSYLHRC.
Data indicated in the handbook must be considered as standard values
Data indicated in the contract must be considered as guaranteed values
This chapter is organized as follows:
System characteristics
on page 83, including:
General Characteristics
on page 84
99% power channel bandwidth and Emission Designator

on page 90
Power supply characteristics

on page 91
Mechanical characteristics
on page 92
Transceiver characteristics
Regenerator and Modem characteristics
Modem
XPIC & Combiner (XPIC STM1 only)
Regenerator
Power consumption (Regenerator only)
Branching interfaces
on page 100
Protections
on page 100
Environmental characteristics
General characteristics
Mechanically active substances

on page 101
on page 101
Optical Safety
on page 102
on page 93
on page 95
on page 97
on page 98
on page 99
13.2 System Characteristics

GENERAL NOTES ON FOLLOWING TABLES:
Points A A and C C according to what defined in the relevant ETSI specification:
A
TX
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RX
RF TX
FILTER
RF RX
FILTER
TX
BRANCHING
RX
BRANCHING
TX
FEEDER
RX
FEEDER
Fig. 31. ETSI Reference points
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
83 / 542
13.2.1 General characteristics

Characteristics applicable fully to 128QAM systems and partially to 64QAM systems
Refer to point [2] on page 89 for characteristics of 64QAM systems.
EQUIPMENT
9640
LSY
LSYC
9647
LSY
LSYC
9662
LSY
LSYC
9667
LSY
LSYC
Version
9681
LSY
LSYC
9610
LSY
LSYC
9611
LSY
LSYC
9613
LSY
LSYC
INDOOR
Mechanical
practice
See Hardware Components in chapter SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Station type
Regenerator Terminal Wireless Multiservice Node
Configurations
9600LSY :N+0 / N+1 9600LSYC : 1+0, 1+1 HST, 1+1/2+0 heterofrequency, 1+1/2+0 CCDP.
Space diversity
YES
Transmission
capacity
(2x
STM1
with
frequency reuse
with STM1 only)
1x
STM1
2x
STM1
(with
freq.
reuse)
1x
STM1
2x
STM1
(with
freq.
Reuse)
User Interface
155.520 Mb/s (STM1)

139.264 Mb/s (PDH)
3 x 34.368 Mbit/s
3 x 44.736 Mbit/s
63 x 2.048 Mbit/s
155.520 Mb/s (STM1)
Auxiliary channels
STM 1 :
STM0 :
Service channels
LHR Transit time

STM1
STM0
Tx Spectrum (C)
Spectrum
Scrambler/ Descr.
STM1
STM0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
9674
LSY
LSYC
ED
1x
STM1
2x
STM1
(with
freq.
reuse)
1x
STM1
2x
STM1
(with
freq.
reuse)
1x
STM1
2x
STM1
(with
freq.
reuse)
1x
STM0
1x
STM1
2x
STM1
(with
freq.
reuse)
1x
STM0
1x
STM1
2x
STM1
(with
freq.
reuse)
1x
STM1
2x
STM1
(with
freq.
reuse)
1x
STM1
2x
STM1
(with
freq.
reuse)
1x
STM0
Electrical ITUT Rec. G.703

Electrical ITUT Rec: G.703
Electrical ITUT Rec:. G.703
Optical ITUT Rec. G.957 G. 958
1X2 Mbit/s WST in RFCOH

no WST
Omnibus voice channel (E1) DTMF (rec. Q23) 600 Ohm Tx 0 Db, Rx4 selective call.
3 x 64 Kb/s V11 or 2x64 Kb/s + 1 x 128 Kb/s (SW configurable contradirectional)
1 x 9.6 Kb/s RS 232
TMN channel (D1 D3 regenerator terminal D4 D12 WMSN
Voice frequency party line (E1) (Four wire bal., 600 Ohm, level 3Db
1 voice frequency (point to point only)
Digital party line extension 64 kb/s, G.703 code
Output loudspeaker 400 mW, 4 Ohm
Telephone set driver for TPH desk 600 Ohm, Tx 0 dB, Rx 4dB
RRA + MODEM : 56 microsec. ; TRANSCEIVER : 300 nanosec.

tbd
STM 1 :
STM0 :
see Fig. 34. page 107

221.31
2201
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
84 / 542

[1]

EQUIPMENT
9640
LSY
LSYC
9647
LSY
LSYC
9662
LSY
LSYC
9667
LSY
LSYC
MODULATION
FREQUENCY BAND
[GHz]
(Channel plan)
9674
LSY
LSYC
9681
LSY
LSYC
9610
LSY
LSYC
9611
LSY
LSYC
9613
LSY
LSYC
7.47.7
F.385
annex1)
(**)
7.78.3
(F. 386)
10.010.
7 GHz
(**)
10.7
11.7
(F.387)
12.75
13.25
(F.497)
B
(**)
7.17.7
(F.385
annex3)
(**)
8.28.5
(F.386
annex3)
B
(***)
7.47.9
(F.385
annex4)
(**)B
7.98.4
(OIRT
Annex4)
B
(**)
128 QAM
3.64.2
(F.635)
4.45.0
(F.1099)
5.96.4
(F.383)
3.64.2
(F.382)
4.45.0
(Spain
Defence)
(**)
5.66.2
(OIRT)
(**)
3.64.2
(DTI)
(**)
4.45.0
(F.746)
Austria
(**)
6.47.1
(F.384)
3.64.2
(F.635)
7.27.6
(F.385
rec.1)
(**) B
3.43.9
(OIRT)
(**)
TRANSMITTER
OUTPUT POWER
(With ATPC) *
[dBm] (A)
32,0
32,0
32,0
32,0
32,0
32,0
30,0
30,0
28,0
TRANSMITTER
OUTPUT POWER
(Without ATPC) *
[dBm]
(A)
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
30.0
28.0
28.0
27.0
74,0
typ
73,0
gua
(**)
74,0
typ
73,0
gua
(**)
74,0
typ
73,0
gua
(**)
74,0
typ
73,0
gua
73,5
typ
72,5
gua
(**)
73,5
typ
72,5
gua
(***)
73,5
typ
72,5
gua
(**)
73,5
typ
72,5
gua
73.0
typ
72.0
gua
(**)
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
78,5
typ
77,5
gua
78,5
typ
77,5
gua
N.A.
N.A.
78.0
typ
77.0
gua
72,0
typ
71,0
gua
(**)
72,0
typ
71,0
gua
(**)
72,0
typ
71,0
gua
(**)
72,0
typ
71,0
gua
71,5
typ
70,5
gua (**)
71,5
typ
70,5
gua
(***)
71,5
typ
70,5
gua
(**)
71,5
typ
70,5
gua
71,0
typ
70.0
gua
(**)
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
76,5
typ
75,5
guar
76,5
typ
75,5
guar
N.A.
N.A.
76.0
typ
75.0
guar
1x103 BER
Threshold (A)
(Received power)
[dBm]
STM1
1x103 BER
Threshold (A)
(Received power)
[dBm]
STM0
1x106 BER
Threshold (A)
(Received power)
[dBm]
STM1
1x106 BER TH
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(A)
(Received
power) [dBm]
STM0
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
85 / 542
9640
LSY
LSYC
9647
LSY
LSYC
9662
LSY
LSYC
9667
LSY
LSYC
9674
LSY
LSYC
9681
LSY
LSYC
9610
LSY
LSYC
9611
LSY
LSYC
9613
LSY
LSYC
98.5
97.5
(**)
98.0
97.0
(**)
100.5
99.5
(**)
101.0
100.5
98.0
97.0
(**)
99.0
98.0
(***)
95.5
94.5
(**)
97.0
96.5
92.0
91.5
(**)
96.5
95.5
(**)
96.0
95.0
(**)
98.5
97.5
(**)
99.0
98.5
96.0
95.0
(**)
97.0
96.0
(***)
93.5
92.5
(**)
95.0
94.5
90.0
89.5
Net Syst. Gain (CC)

dB (*) (with branching
losses and with
ATPC) STM1
1x103
(Standard version)
1+1 Heterofreq.
3+1 Heterofreq.
Net Syst. Gain (CC)

dB (*) (with branching
losses and with
ATPC) STM1
106
(Standard version)
1+1 Heterofreq.
3+1 Heterofreq.
Dispersive Fade
Margin [dB]
STM1 1x103
STM1 1x106
STM0 1x103
STM0 1x106
Max input power at
antenna port
(Received
Field) [dBm] 103
/1010
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Background BER (at

nominal PRx level)
49.3
47.2
63.8
61.2
16.0 /21.0
1 x 1013
May support both STM1 and STM0 transmission
(*)
Tolerance: + 0.5 dB at ambient temperature; + 1.5 dB in temperature range 55C P 555C
Note:
Points A A and C C according to what defined in the relevant ETSI specification
(**)
Note: in case of channel plan with homopolar channel space 28 MHz, threshold value is 0.5 dB
higher and system gain is 0.5 dB less.
(***)
Note: for Channel plans 28 MHz and 8.2 8.5 GHz, frequency band, threshold value is 0.5 dB
higher and System Gain is 2 dB lower (due to higher branching losses).
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
86 / 542

EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT
9640
LSY
LSYC
9647
LSY
LSYC
9662
LSY
LSYC
Frequency reuse
(XPIC)
9667
LSY
LSYC
YES
9674
LSY
LSYC
9681
LSY
LSYC
9610
LSY
LSYC
9611
LSY
LSYC
9613
LSY
LSYC
(STM1 only)
NFD one adjacent

channels (guar)
STM1
[dB]
>50 @
40 MHz
>45 @
29 MHz
>50 @
40 MHz
>50 @
29.65
MHz
>50 @
40 MHz
>45 @
28 MHz
>50 @
29.65
MHz
>45 @
28 MHz
>50 @
40 MHz
>45 @
28 MHz
NFD one adjacent

channels (guar)
STM0 dB
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
>35 @
14 MHz
>35 @
14 MHz
N.A.
N.A.
>35 @
14 MHz
XPD antenna for

CCDP application
[dB]
30
XPIC filters
19 taps
XPI ratio lockin

[dB]
XPI ratio lockout

[dB]
4
Behavior vs
modulated digital
channel interference:
cochannel
STM1
1*103 and
Fig. 39. page 110
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
1*106
cochannel
STM0
1*103 and
1*106
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
Fig. 39.
page 110
Fig. 39.
page 110
N.A.
N.A.
Fig. 39.
page 110
adj.channel
STM1
40 MHz 1*103
and 1*106
Fig. 40.
page 110
Fig. 40.
page 110
N.A.
Fig. 40.
page 110
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
Fig. 40.
page 110
N.A.
adj.channel
STM1
30 MHz1*103
and 1*106
Fig. 41.
page 111
Fig. 41.
page 111
N.A.
Fig. 41.
page 111
N.A.
N.A.
Fig. 41.
page 111
Fig. 41.
page 111
N.A.
adj.channel
STM0
14 MHz1*103
and 1*106
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
Fig. 42.
page 111
Fig. 42.
page 111
N.A.
N.A.
Fig. 42.
page 111
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
87 / 542
C/I for 1 dB threshold

degrad. @ 1x103
[dB]
cochannel
STM1/STM0
adjacent ch.
mono lateral
STM1 40MHz
adjacent ch.
mono lateral
STM1 30MHz
adjacent ch.
mono lateral
STM0 14 MHz
C/I for 1 dB threshold

degrad. @ 1x106
[dB]
cochannel
STM1/STM0
adjacent ch.
mono lateral
STM1 40MHz
adjacent ch.
mono lateral
STM1 30MHz
adjacent ch.
mono lateral
STM0 14 MHz
C/I dB for Error Free :

cochannel
STM1/STM0
BER Curve:
STM1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
STM0
9640
LSY
LSYC
9647
LSY
LSYC
9662
LSY
LSYC
9667
LSY
LSYC
9674
LSY
LSYC
9681
LSY
LSYC
9610
LSY
LSYC
9611
LSY
LSYC
9613
LSY
LSYC
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
50
50
N.A.
50
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
50
N.A.
26
26
26
N.A.
26
26
26
N.A.
26
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
48
48
N.A.
48
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
48
N.A.
24
24
24
N.A.
24
24
24
N.A.
24
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
10
10
N.A.
N.A.
10
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
Fig. 32.
page
105
Fig. 32.
page
105
Fig. 32.
page
105
Fig. 32.
page
105
Fig. 32.
page
105
Fig. 32.
page
105
Fig. 32.
page
105
Fig. 32.
page
105
Fig. 32.
page
105
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
N.A.
Fig. 33.
page
106
Fig. 33.
page
106
N.A.
N.A.
Fig. 33.
page
106
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
88 / 542

EQUIPMENT

[2]
Characteristics applicable to 64QAM systems

The following table points out characteristics applicable to 64QAM systems that are different from
those stated in point [1] on page 84:
EQUIPMENT
9640
LSY
LSYC
9647
LSY
LSYC
Modulation: QAM states
9611
LSY
LSYC
64
Coding FEC
MLC 5/6 (24,23)
Redundancy
5.29/6 (redund 13.4 %)
RF channel
3.64.2
GHz
4.45
GHz
6.47.2
GHz
10.711.7
GHz
Transmitter output power Max nominal power
32 dBm
32 dBm
32 dBm
30 dBm
Transmitter output power Max available power (overdrive)
34 dBm
34 dBm
34 dBm
30 dBm
Minimum Transmitter output power
15 dBm
Symbol rate
30.04 MHz
Gross bit rate
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
9667
LSY
LSYC
180.2 Mbit/s
10E3 BER Threshold @RX input module

Gar. (ETSI point A)
76,7
76,7
76,5
76

Gar. (ETSI point A)
74,9
74,9
74,7
74,2

Gar (ETSI point C)
74,8
74,7
74,9
73,9

Gar. (ETSI point C)
73
72,9
73,1
72,1
XPIF @10E6
>17 dB
C/I Lockout
< 4 dB
C/I Lockin
> 6 dB
NFD @ 40 MHZ (one side)
>50 dB
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
89 / 542
ITUR/CEPT Rec.
Channel bandwidth
[MHz]
99% power channel

bandwidth [MHz]
Emission
Designator
9640LSY / 128QAM155
29
25.49
29M0D7W
9640LSY / 64QAM155
40
35.88
40M0D7W
9647LSY / 128QAM155
40
25.49
40M0D7W
9647LSY / 64QAM155
40
35.88
40M0D7W
9662LSY / 128QAM155
29.65
25.49
29M6D7W
9667LSY / 128QAM155
40
25.49
40M0D7W
9667LSY / 64QAM155
40
35.88
40M0D7W
9674LSY / 128QAM155
28
25.49
28M0D7W
9674LSY /128QAM51
14
8.50
14M0D7W
9681LSY / 128QAM155
29.65
25.49
29M6D7W
9681LSY / 128QAM51
14
8.50
14M0D7W
9610LSY / 128QAM155
28
25.49
28M0D7W
9611LSY / 128QAM155
40
25.49
40M0D7W
9611LSY / 64QAM155
40
35.88
40M0D7W
9613LSY / 128QAM155
28
25.49
28M0D7W
9613LSY / 128QAM51
14
8.50
14M0D7W
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Equipment
ED

13.2.2 99% power channel bandwidth and Emission Designator
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
90 / 542

13.2.3 Power supply characteristics
EQUIPMENT
9640
LSY
LSYC
9647
LSY
LSYC
9662
LSY
LSYC
9667
LSY
LSYC
9674
LSY
LSYC
9681
LSY
LSYC
9610
LSY
LSYC
9611
LSY
LSYC
9613
LSY
LSYC
48 to 60 Vdc
Input battery source
TERMINAL POWER CONSUMPTION (all frequencies)

Standard version
POWER
CONSUMPT.
from battery (W)
Without Sp. Div.
With SP. Div.
Without XPIC
With XPIC
Without XPIC
With XPIC
1+1 / 2+0
heterofrequency
200
207
217
224
2+1 / 3+0
280
290
305
315
3+1 / 4+0
360
374
393
07
4+1 / 5+0
460
477
501
518
5+1 / 6+0
540
561
589
10
6+1 / 7+0
620
644
677
701
7+1 / 8+0
700
728
765
793
Compact version
POWER
CONSUMPT.
from battery (W)
Without Sp. Div.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Without XPIC
1+0
100
1+1 / 2+0
heterofrequency
180
1+1 HST
180
ED
With SP. Div.
With XPIC
Without XPIC
With XPIC
108
187
197
204
180
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
91 / 542
EQUIPMENT
9640
LSY
LSYC
9662
LSY
LSYC
9667
LSY
LSYC
9674
LSY
LSYC
9681
LSY
LSYC
Rack dimensions
[mm]
9600LSY (all
configurations)
(Width x Depth x Height)

600 x 300 x 2200 mm
Subrack dimen. [mm]
9600LSYC
(Width x Depth x Height)

475 x 275 x 490 mm
Weight 9600LSY
1+1 Regen.
3+1 Regen.
Weight 9600LSYC
1+1 Regen.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
9647
LSY
LSYC
ED
9610
LSY
LSYC
9611
LSY
LSYC
9613
LSY
LSYC
TBD
35 Kg
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
92 / 542

13.2.4 Mechanical characteristics
13.3 Transceiver characteristics

[1]

EQUIPMENT
Tx output range with
ATPC guaranteed.
( A) ( * ) [dBm]
Tx output range w/o
ATPC (1dB step by
SW preset)
guaranteed.(A)
( * ) [dB]
Max. ATPC Range
With STD Amp. [dB]
NF guaranteed
[dB]
NF Typical
[dB]
9640
LSY
LSYC
9647
LSY
LSYC
9662
LSY
LSYC
9667
LSY
LSYC
9674
LSY
LSYC
9681
LSY
LSYC
9610
LSY
LSYC
9611
LSY
LSYC
9613
LSY
LSYC
+15 to
+32
+15 to
+32
+15 to
+32
+15 to
+32
+15 to
+32
+15 to
+32
+15 to
+30
+15 to
+30
+15 to
+28
+15 to
+30
+15 to
+30
+15 to
+30
+15 to
+30
+15 to
+30
+15 to
+30
+15 to
+28
+15 to
+28
+15 to
+27
17
17
17
17
17
17
15
15
13
2.3
2.3
2.5
2.5
2.8
2.8
3.0
3.0
3.5
2.0
2.0
2.2
2.2
2.5
2.5
2.7
2.7
3.2
IF freq.[MHz]
140
Nominal Received
level [dBm]
30
IF Nominal input/
output level [dBm]
5 1 dB
L.O. freq. stability

(p.p.m.)
10
AGC range [dB]
> 60
50
AGC response time

[dB/sec.]
Transmitted
spectrum
(Typical) (C)
STM1
STM0
Fig. 34. page 107

Fig. 35. page 107
ETSI normatives
Referred to spectrum
mask
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Referred class
STM1
Referred class
STM0
ETSI EN 300234, EN 301127, EN 301461

ETSI EN 301216
Spectral lines at
symbol rate (dBm)
Compliant with the relevant ETS (EN) specification according to the freq. arrangement
Tx and Rx spurious
signals emission
Compliant with the relevant ETS (EN) specification according to the freq. arrangement
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
93 / 542
9640
LSY
LSYC
9647
LSY
LSYC
9662
LSY
LSYC
IF filter selectivity
STM1/STM0
9667
LSY
LSYC
9674
LSY
LSYC
9681
LSY
LSYC
9610
LSY
LSYC
9611
LSY
LSYC
9613
LSY
LSYC
EQUIPMENT
See Fig. 36. page 108
Transceiver power
consumption [W]
(N+1 version ,
without Space Div.)
1+1 / 2+0
2+1 / 3+0
3+1 / 4+0
4+1 / 5+0
5+1 / 6+0
6+1 / 7+0
7+1 / 8+0
[2]
126
189
252
315
378
441
504

EQUIPMENT
9647
LSY
LSYC
9667
LSY
LSYC
9611
LSY
LSYC
ATPC down range
17 dB
t.b.d
ATPC overdrive
2 dB
t.b.d
Branching filter
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
9640
LSY
LSYC
Tchebyshev BW=32MHz @26dB equiripple 6 Cavity
RX loss between AC ETSI point Gar. (dB)
1,7
1,8
1,4
RX loss between AC ETSI point Typ (dB)
1,9
2,0
1,6
2,1
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
94 / 542
13.4 Regenerator and Modem characteristics

13.4.1 Modem
[1]

EQUIPMENT
9640
LSY
LSYC
9647
LSY
LSYC
9662
LSY
LSYC
9667
LSY
LSYC
9610
LSY
LSYC
TBD
Radio scrambler/
descrambler
2 7,3 1
0.21
Equivalent roll off factor

Gross symbol rate [Mbit/s]
STM1
STM0
24.458
8.153
140 +/ 50 ppm
IF impedance
(all modem ports)
75 Ohm
IF nominal modulator output

level [dBm]
5 +/ 1 dB
IF input/output Return Loss

(all modem ports)
25 dB in the band 140 MHz + 15 MHz

Raised cosine
Shaping filter (Tx side)
T/2 equaliser ( 19 taps )

36 taps
Digital filter
coherent
Demodulation
IF demodulator nominal input
level [dBm]
Post demodulation filter
STM1
STM0
9613
LSY
LSYC
MLC 6.5/7 (7.69 % redundancy)
Coding gain
Shaping filter and equalizer

(Rx side)
9611
LSY
LSYC
2/3 7/8 2423
Coding MLC
Intermediate mod .
frequency
[MHz]
5 (+1 6 dB)
Butterworth 9 poles
Fig. 37. page 109
Fig. 38. page 109
Demodulator bandwidth
recovery [MHz]
+/ 0.8
Clock recovery time after IF

interruption [msec.]
< 100
Synchronism recovery
[msec.]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
9681
LSY
LSYC
128 QAM CROSS
Modulation type
Error corrector
9674
LSY
LSYC
0.1
Signature STM1
BER =1*10E4
BER =1*10E6
Kn gua. = 0.9 ; Kn typ.= 0.4 9

Kn gua. =1
; Kn typ.= 0. 55
(6.3 nsec.)
(6.3 nsec.)
see also Fig. 43. page 112

Signature STM0
BER =1*10E4
BER =1*10E6
Kn gua. = 1.3 ; Kn typ.= 0.55

Kn gua. = 1.5 ; Kn typ.= 0.65
(6.3 nsec.)
(6.3 nsec.)

ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
95 / 542
9640
LSY
LSYC
9647
LSY
LSYC
9662
LSY
LSYC
9667
LSY
LSYC
9674
LSY
LSYC
9681
LSY
LSYC
C/N STM1 [dB]

BER =1*10E3
BER =1*10E4
BER =1*10E6
24.5 Guar 23.7 Typ

25.2 Guar 24.3 Typ
26.5 Guar 25.5 Typ
C/N STM0 [dB]

BER =1*10E3
BER =1*10E4
BER =1*10E6
24.5 Guar 23.7 Typ

25.2 Guar 24.3 Typ
26..5 Guar 25.5 Typ
RRA+Modem Transit time

Absolute delay
56 microsec.
Interleave block length
120 symbols
9611
LSY
LSYC
9613
LSY
LSYC
500 (STM1)
T.B.D. (STM0)
Carrier recovery (after RF

interruption) msec.
[2]
9610
LSY
LSYC

EQUIPMENT

EQUIPMENT
9647
LSY
LSYC
9667
LSY
LSYC
9611
LSY
LSYC
Signature @10E4
Kn=0.25 (Kn=0.37 guar) ; see also Fig. 48. on page 117
Signature @10E6
Kn=0.27 (Kn=0.42 guar) ; see also Fig. 47. on page 116
equivalent Rolloff factor
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
9640
LSY
LSYC
0,33
C/N @10E3
19.5 dB ( 20.2 dB guar.)
C/N @10E4
20 dB ( 20.7 dB guar.)
C/N @10E6
21 dB (22 dB guar.)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
96 / 542

13.4.2 XPIC & Combiner (XPIC STM1 only)
EQUIPMENT
Intermediate frequency
[MHz]
IF Nominal input
[dBm]
IF impedance
IF input Return loss
Post demodulation filter
Adaptive equalizer
Base Band static delay
equalization
[ns]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
XPIF Guar [dB]

@ 1x106
ED
9640
LSY
LSYC
9647
LSY
LSYC
9662
LSY
LSYC
9667
LSY
LSYC
9674
LSY
LSYC
9681
LSY
LSYC
9610
LSY
LSYC
9611
LSY
LSYC
9613
LSY
LSYC
140 + 1
5 (+1 6 dB)
75 Ohm
25 dB in the band 140 MHz + 15 MHz
Butterworth 9 poles
T/2 19 taps
0 to 140 step T/2
17 for symmetrical degradation
( 3 dB less for unbalanced degradation )
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
97 / 542
EQUIPMENT
Input/output signal
9640
LSY
LSYC
9647
LSY
LSYC
9662
LSY
LSYC
9667
LSY
LSYC
9681
LSY
LSYC
9610
LSY
LSYC
9611
LSY
LSYC
271
Electrical Optical
User interface
75 Ohm
Impedance
1V pp
Level
12.7 dB at 78 MHz as vf
Cable equalizer
NRZ+CK
Optical input
155.520 Mb/s
Bit rate
I/O signal elect. Interf.

Code
Impedance
Signal level
Return loss
Input cable equalizer
ITUT G.703
(Siemens 1.0/2.3 connector)

CMI
75 ohm unbal.
1 Vpp
15 dB from 8 to 240 MHz
12.7 dB at 78 MHz as vf
Max. input jitter
ITUT G.825
Max. output jitter
ITUT G.958
Jitter transfer function
ITUT G.958
I/O signal optical inter.

Operating wavelength.
Min. Sensitivity dBm
Min. overload dBm
Output mean launched
power dBm
ITUT G.957
(S1.1 type FCPC and SC connectors)

12601360 nm
28
8
8 (max.) ; 15 (min.)
Max. input jitter
ITUT G.825
Max. output jitter
ITUT G.958
Jitter transfer function
ITUT G.958
DCCr (D1 to D3)

bit rate Kbit/s
interface
192
Managed internally by the System Controller
DCCm (D4 to D12)

bit rate Kbit/s
interface
The entire MSOH is not managed and passedthrough

576
Not managed by pass condition
Unprotected 2Mbit/s
I/O access
I/O signal bit rate
I/O level
Signal Code
From backpanel access area

1.02.3 Siemens connectors 75 Ohm
2048 Kb/s G 703
2.37 V p
HDB3
ED
9613
LSY
LSYC
155.520 Mb/s 4.6 p.p.m. (standard payload )

155.520 Mb/s 20 p.p.m. (AIS payload )
Line Scrambler/ Desc.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
9674
LSY
LSYC
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
98 / 542

13.4.3 Regenerator

EQUIPMENT
9640
LSY
LSYC
9647
LSY
LSYC
Protected 2Mbit/s
I/O access
I/O signal bit rate
I/O level
Signal Code
9662
LSY
LSYC
9667
LSY
LSYC
9674
LSY
LSYC
9681
LSY
LSYC
9610
LSY
LSYC
9611
LSY
LSYC
9613
LSY
LSYC
From Service unit front panel

1.02.3 Siemens connectors 75 Ohm
2048 Kb/s G 703
2.37 V p
HDB3
AIS management
Regenerator
Tx and/or Rx side
MSAIS (Contains a valid RSOH and an all1 pattern on MSOH and payload in
case of LOS,LOF)
64 Kbit/s channels
Tx/Rx
All 1
Loss Of Frame : 3/1 (24 frames/8 frames)
Loss Of Signal : 0.625/0.250 (5 frames/2 frames)
Out Of Frame Detection : >1000 ones or zero s consecutively
Alarms detection/removal
[msec].
64 Kbit/s channel in RFCOH 1+1 protected
ATPC channel
13.4.4 Power consumption (Regenerator only)

REGENERATOR
POWER CONSUMPTION
(W)
9640
LSY
LSYC
9647
LSY
LSYC
9662
LSY
LSYC
9667
LSY
LSYC
9674
LSY
LSYC
1+1/2+0 Hetero
74
2+1/3+0 Hetero
91
3+1/4+0 Hetero
108
4+1/5+0 Hetero
145
5+1/6+0 Hetero
162
6+1/7+0 Hetero
179
7+1/8+0 Hetero
196
9681
LSY
LSYC
9610
LSY
LSYC
9611
LSY
LSYC
9613
LSY
LSYC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Note: Above power consumptions include fans.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
99 / 542
EQUIPMENT
RF feeder interface
9640
LSY
LSYC
9647
LSY
LSYC
9662
LSY
LSYC
9667
LSY
LSYC
9674
LSY
LSYC
9681
LSY
LSYC
9610
LSY
LSYC
9611
LSY
LSYC
9613
LSY
LSYC
UDR 40
UDR 48
UDR 70
UDR 70
UDR 70
UDR 84
UDR 100
UDR 100
UDR 120
Tx/Rx Antenna
circulator common
port input return loss
[dB] (C, C)
26
13.6 Protections
PROTECTION
Radio Protection Switching

(RPS) type
9640
LSY
LSYC
9647
LSY
LSYC
Tx/Rx Static delay

equalization bits
9681
LSY
LSYC
9610
LSY
LSYC
9611
LSY
LSYC
9613
LSY
LSYC
Hitless revertive and not revertive in 1+1

Hitless revertive in N+1
RRA/MODEM Failure
RRA/MODEM Missing unit
HBER: detection 7 ms
; restore 100 micros
LBER: detection 5 ms
EW: detection 5 ms
[ms]
Transfer time
9674
LSY
LSYC
Optional, available only in N+1 and 1:1
RPS Criteria /
Switching Time
RPS Switching time [msec.]

1+1
N+1 (and 1:1)
9667
LSY
LSYC
9600LSY:
N+1
9600LSYC: 1+1 (no occasional traffic )
1:1 (it is N+1 used for only 2 channels and includes occasional traffic
possibility)
Occasional traffic
RPS Switching Method
9662
LSY
LSYC
9600LSYC :
1 (from alarm detection)
9600LSY & 9600LSYC (*) :
13 (from alarm detection)
<< 1 bit
0256 ( 1 bit step )
Max. dynamic recoverable

delay bits
10
Regenerator user interface

protection
Not available
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(*) N+1 protection system can be used also with 9600LSYC version, obviously reduced to only two
channels (1:1).
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
100 / 542

13.5 Branching interfaces

13.7 Environmental characteristics

13.7.1 General characteristics
EQUIPMENT
Environment:
Stationery use
EMIEMC
Safety
Temperature:
Humidity
Transportation
Storage
9640
LSY
LSYC
9647
LSY
LSYC
9662
LSY
LSYC
9667
LSY
LSYC
9674
LSY
LSYC
9681
LSY
LSYC
9610
LSY
LSYC
9611
LSY
LSYC
9613
LSY
LSYC
Compliant to EN 300 019 13 , EN 300 01923 class 3.2

Compliant to EN 3014891 EN 3014894 EN 55022 Class A
Compliant with IEC 60950 add. IV and IEC 215
9600LSY:
5/+55C (with fans)
9600LSYC:
5/+50C (without fans)
5/+55C (with fans)
5 to 95 %
compliant with ETS 300 019 class 2.3
compliant with ETS 300 019 class 1.2
13.7.2 Mechanically active substances

The following environmental parameters are recommended:
Environmental Parameter
Value
a) Sand
30 mg/m3
b) Dust (suspension)
0.2 mg/m3
c) Dust (sedimentation)
1.5 mg/ (m2 h)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Overcoming these values could affect Fans Assembled Unit operation. For further information, see
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
101 / 542
This paragraph applies to LHR and LHRC systems only.

As far as 1650SMC is concerned, please refer to relevant Technical Documentation
(para.C.2.4 on page 529).
N.B.
13.8.1 Related Units

The Optical Safety characteristics and related precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser
radiation given herein, are relevant to the optical modules that can be housed on the equipment units with
STM1 interfaces:
in LHR and LHRC system: RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY units.
13.8.2 Hazard Level classification

The HAZARD LEVEL classification of the different optical interfaces of LHRC system is given in Tab. 10.
herebelow.
The hazard level was assigned in accordance with the requirements of IEC 608251 (1993) and IEC
608252 (1993).
Tab. 10. Hazard level classification of different optical interfaces
UNIT/PORT
STM1
OPTICAL INTERFACE
HAZARD LEVEL
S1.1 (short haul)
13.8.3 Incorporated laser sources characteristics
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Output optical interfaces data: the wavelength and the maximum optical power at the output connector
of incorporated laser sources is given in para.13.4.3 on page 98.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
102 / 542

13.8 Optical Safety

13.8.4 Labelling
The labels reproduced below are affixed during factory settings, except those (explanatory) concerning
the STM1 ports. In this case the labels are placed in a plastic bag and provided together with the optical
module. The customer shall affix the label on the fibre protection cover of the involved card, depending
on the particular interface of the module (STM1 port). In the following description it is specified when the
label shall be affixed by the customer.
[1]
Standard label for all modules
The label is put on the fibre protection cover of all the involved card (see para.13.8.1 on page 102).
According to stated norms, the presence of this label is not mandatory (for hazard level 1).
[2]
Multilanguage Label Kit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The multilanguage label kit, for STM1 ports, is placed in the same plastic bag provided together with
the module where explanatory labels (in English language), above mentioned, are put.
The multilanguage label kit contains a set of labels that reproduce the same (explanatory) above
depicted in the following languages:
Italian
French
Spanish
German
The customer, to its own discretion, may stick the labels with appropriate language upon the
preexisting ones or, in case of STM1 ports, directly on the fibre protection cover of the involved
card (see para.13.8.1 on page 102)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
103 / 542
The locations of apertures and fibre connectors are reported on topographical drawings of units front view
and access cards front view:
in para.23.3.4 on page 178 (RRACHANNEL unit)
in para.23.3.5 on page 180 (RRASTANDBY unit)

13.8.6 Engineering design features
In normal operating conditions, unless intentional manumission, the laser radiation is never accessible.
The laser beam is launched in optical fibre through an appropriate connector that totally shuts up the laser
radiation. Moreover a plastic cover is fitted upon optical connectors by means of screws.
In case of cable fibre break, to minimize exposure times, ALS procedure according to ITUT G.958 Rec.
is implemented either on STM1 ports.
ALS timing are not longer than maximum specified in G.958.
13.8.7 Safety instruction
The safety instructions for proper assembly, maintenance, and safe use including clear warning
concerning precautions to avoid possible exposure to hazardous laser radiation, are reported in para.A.3
on page 492.
13.9 1650SMC characteristics
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Please refer to relevant Technical Documentation (para.C.2.4.2 on page 530).
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
104 / 542

13.8.5 Aperture and fiber connectors

9600 LSY
STM1
1,E 02
1,E 03
1,E 04
1,E 05
B
E
R
1,E 06
STM1 TYP
STM1 GUAR
1,E 07
1,E 08
1,E 09
1,E 10
1,E 11
x5
x4
x3
x2
x1
x+1
x+2
x+3
x+4
x+5
PRx (dBm)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 32. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM1)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
105 / 542

9600 LSY
STM0
1,E 02
1,E 03
1,E 04
1,E 05
B
E
R
1,E 06
STM0 GUAR
STM0 TYP
1,E 07
1,E 08
1,E 09
1,E 10
1,E 11
x5
x4
x3
x2
x1
x+1
x+2
x+3
x+4
x+5
PRx (dBm)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 33. 9600 LSY BER curves (STM0)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
106 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 34. STM1 128 QAM typical RF spectrum (measured at point C)
Fig. 35. STM0 128 QAM typical RF spectrum (measured at point C)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
107 / 542

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 36. STM1/STM0 128 QAM IF RX Filter
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
108 / 542
STM1
LSY : postdem
filter

10
[dB]
20
30
40
50
60
60
40
20
20
40
60
[MHz]
Fig. 37. Post demodulation filter STM1
STM0
LSY : postdem
filter
10
[dB]
20
30
40
50
60
20
10
10
20
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[MHz]
Fig. 38. Post demodulation filter STM0
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
109 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 40. STM1 BER 1*103 and1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 40 MHz digital
interference
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
110 / 542

Fig. 39. STM1 /STM0 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for cochannel interference

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 41. STM1 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 28, 29, 29.65
and 30 MHz digital interference
Fig. 42. STM0 BER 1*103 and 1*106 threshold degradation for adjacent channel 14 MHz digital
interference
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
111 / 542
BER = 1 x 10 4

STM1/128QAM
Mask for signature shape only

Fs=24.46 MHz ;
T= 6.3 ns
Typical signature: DF = 25.4 MHz ; Bc = 22.7 dB
Guaranteed signature: Kn = 0.9
(Kn = 0.49)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 43. Typical signature for 128QAM / STM1 capacity @ BER=1 X 10 E4
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
112 / 542

STM1/128QAM
BER = 1 x 10 6

Fs=24.46 MHz ;
T= 6.3 ns
Typical signature: DF = 26 MHz ; Bc = 22 dB
(Kn = 0.55)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 44. Typical signature for 128QAM / STM1 capacity @ BER=1 X 10 E6
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
113 / 542
BER = 1 x 10 4

STM0/128QAM
Fs=8.15 MHz ;
T= 6.3 ns
Typical signature: DF = 8.2 MHz ; Bc = 31 dB
(Kn = 0.55)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 45. Typical signature for 128QAM / STM0 capacity @ BER=1x10e4
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
114 / 542

STM0/128QAM
BER = 1 x 10 6
Fs=8.15 MHz ;
T= 6.3 ns
Typical signature: DF = 8.2 MHz ; Bc = 29.3 dB
(Kn = 0.65)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 46. Typical signature for 128QAM / STM0 capacity @ BER=1x10e6
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
115 / 542
STM1/64QAM
BER = 1 x 10 6
15
dB
20
25
30
35
40
125
125
40
130
135
140
145
150
155
130
135
140
145
150
155
35
dB
dB
30
25
20
15
10
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 47. Typical and guarantee signature for 64QAM / STM1 capacity @ BER=106; =6.3 ns
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
116 / 542

10

STM1/64QAM
BER = 1 x 10 4
10
15
20
dB
25
30
35
40
125
125
40
130
135
140
145
150
155
130
135
140
145
150
155
35
dB
30
25
20
15
10
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 48. Typical and guarantee signature for 64QAM / STM1 capacity @ BER=104; =6.3 ns
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
117 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
118 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATION

This section contains the whole logical and operative information for the equipment provisioning and
system configuration, including the setting up of logical/physical connections.
ED
SECTION CONTENT
PAGE
Chapter 21 System configurations

It describes in detail the different configurations of 9600LSYLHR version taking into
account the various peculiar aspects: Station configurations, Radio channel
configurations, System configuration for network solutions, Branching configurations,
Rack configurations for frequency reuse
121
Chapter 22 Equipment part list and provisioning

It gives detailed information regarding the 9600LSYLHR equipments items (P/Ns,
equipping rules, labels for remote inventory) and their physical and logical position in
the system
145
Chapter 23 Operative information on equipment boards

It gives detailed operative information regarding the 9600LSYLHRs unit
assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, with the usage description of the
access points (connectors, visual indicators, buttons) and hardware setting
description.
167
Chapter 24 System cabling

It describes the 9600LSYLHR system cabling: location of access points for cabling,
types of cables used for internal connections, pointtopoint cabling of internal
connections, description of pinout of connectors for external connections.
205
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
119 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
120 / 542

21 SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
21.1 Foreword
This chapter describes in detail the different configurations of 9600LSYLHR version taking into account
the various peculiar aspects, and comprehends the following main paragraphs:
para.21.2 herebelow
Station configurations
Radio channel configurations
System configuration for network solutions
Branching configurations
Rack configurations for frequency reuse
As far as Fan subrack configurations are concerned, refer to para.12.4.6 on page 52.

Hardware components
21.2 Station configurations

The 9600LSY family allows the radio transmission of both STM1 and STM0 utilizing protected and
unprotected heterofrequency configurations N+0, N+1 or 2x (N+1) CCDP type.
Several types of configurations are available, allowing to address different network applications .
Referred to the maximum rack implementation, the list shows the widest allowed configurations:
7+1
8+0
7+1
8+0
2x(7+1)
Terminal WMSN
Terminal WMSN
Terminal regenerator or WMSN CCDP
in 1 ETSI rack
in 1 ETSI rack
in 1 ETSI rack
in 1 ETSI rack
in 2 ETSI racks
The complete list of the possible configurations foreseen for the 9600LSY family is hereafter indicated,
subdivided in several blocks:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
a)
Regenerator configuration utilizing copolar branching solution:
9600LSY REG. 1+1

9600LSY REG. 2+1
9600LSY REG. 3+1
9600LSY REG. 4+1
9600LSY REG. 5+1
9600LSY REG. 6+1
9600LSY REG. 7+1
9600LSY REG. 2+0
9600LSY REG. 3+0
9600LSY REG. 4+0
9600LSY REG. 5+0
9600LSY REG. 6+0
9600LSY REG. 7+0
9600LSY REG. 8+0
ED
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
1 RACK
1 NETWORK ELEMENT
1 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNEL
(only in N+1)
1 POLARIZATION PER RACK
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
121 / 542
Regenerator configuration utilizing alternatepolar branching solution:
9600LSY REG. 1+1

9600LSY REG. 2+1
9600LSY REG. 3+1
9600LSY REG. 4+1
9600LSY REG. 5+1
9600LSY REG. 6+1
9600LSY REG. 7+1
9600LSY REG. 2+0
9600LSY REG. 3+0
9600LSY REG. 4+0
9600LSY REG. 5+0
9600LSY REG. 6+0
9600LSY REG. 7+0
9600LSY REG. 8+0
c)
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
Regenerator configuration utilizing single protection channel, installed into a single rack and
with alternatepolar branching solution:
9600LSY REG. 1+1 FREQUENCY REUSE

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
d)
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1STBY
1 RACK
1 NETWORK ELEMENT
1 PROTECTION CHANNEL
4 CHANNELS MAX ON
H POLARIZATION
4 CHANNELS MAX ON
V POLARIZATION
4 DIFFERENT
FREQUENCIES MAX
8 CHANNELS MAX
Regenerator configuration utilizing double protection, installed into two racks and copolar
branching solution:
9600LSY REG. 2x(1+1)

9600LSY REG. 2x(2+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(3+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(4+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(5+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(6+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(7+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(2+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(3+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(4+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(5+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(6+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(7+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(8+0)
ED
1 RACK
1 NETWORK ELEMENT
1 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNEL
(only in N+1)
4 CHANNELS MAX ON H POLARIZATION
4 CHANNELS MAX ON V POLARIZATION
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
CP
2 RACKS
2 NETWORK ELEMENTS
2 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNELS
(only in N+1)
SECOND RACK ONLY FOR REUSED
CHANNELS
1 POLARIZATION PER RACK
8 CHANNELS MAX PER EACH RACK
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
122 / 542

b)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

e)
Regenerator configuration utilizing double protection, installed into two racks and
alternatepolar branching solution:
9600LSY REG. 2x(1+1)

9600LSY REG. 2x(2+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(3+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(4+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(5+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(6+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(7+1)
9600LSY REG. 2x(2+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(3+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(4+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(5+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(6+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(7+0)
9600LSY REG. 2x(8+0)
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
AP
2 RACKS
2 NETWORK ELEMENTS
2 RADIO PROTECTION CHANNELs
(only in N+1)
SECOND RACK ONLY FOR REUSED
CHANNELS
2 POLARIZATIONS PER RACK
4 CHANNELS MAX ON H POLARIZATION
PER EACH RACK
4 CHANNELS MAX ON V POLARIZATION
PER EACH RACK
NOTE:
The rack and the subracks have been designed to host up to 10 channels, even if the normal maximum
configuration is limited to 8 channels. In fact, the expansion of the systems without traffic interruption is
available only for this last maximum configuration.
However, it could be possible , for particular customer requirements or utilizing some channel plans, to
foresee even the possibility to get 10 channels per rack.
A terminal can be configured as a WMSN simply adding a 1650SMC device to the radio regenerator
equipment .
Each configuration is easily expansible to higher capacities just adding the foreseen expansion kits.
In Fig. 49. and Fig. 49. , a view of a 8 channel regenerator terminal and 8 channel WMSN are respectively
shown
Fig. 49. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0 regenerator

configuration
ED
Fig. 50. 9600LSY 7+1/8+0
WMSN
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
123 / 542
STM1
STM1
STM1
STM1
STM1
STM1
USER
INT/RST
USER
INT/RST
USER
INT/RST
USER
INT/RST
USER
INT/RST
USER
INT/RST
USER
INT/RST
RADIO PROTECTION SWITCHING
STM1
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
Fig. 51. 9600LSY 7+1 Regenerator configuration
REGENERATOR
OMSN
TRAF.PORT
AGGREG.
RST
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
TRAF.PORT
AGGREG.
RST
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
TRAF.PORT
AGGREG.
RST
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
TRAF.PORT
AGGREG.
RST
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
TRAF.PORT
AGGREG.
RST
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
TRAF.PORT
AGGREG.
RST
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
TRAF.PORT
AGGREG.
RST
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
MODEM
TRANSCEIVER
RADIO PROTECTION
SWITCHING
7X STM1or 140 or 3x45 or 3x34or 63x2 Mb/s
Next Fig. 52. shows a block diagram illustrating a Wireless Multiservice Node for 7 x STM1 channels
transmitted in only one direction (OS) and configured with radio protection implementing a 7+1 radio
configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 52. 9600LSY WMSNOS 7x STM1 configuration with radio protection for 7+1 STM1
transmission.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
124 / 542

In the next Fig. 51. , the block diagram of a 7+1 regenerator is shown.

In the next Fig. 53. a Wireless Multiservice Node (eastwest) two sides configuration (WMSNTS) with
four STM1 streams for each direction is presented with possibility to drop/insert each STM1 signal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 53. 9600LSY WMSN Two Sides configuration
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
125 / 542
21.3 Radio channel configurations
The following Fig. 54. shows the configurations supported according to the frequency arrangement.
.....
V (H)
.....
H (V)
Alternate channel dualpolarized, up to (7+1) / (8+0)

(ACDP operation)
.....
V (H)
.....
H (V)
Cochannel dualpolarized, up to (7+1) / (8+0)

(CCDP operation)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 54. Channel arrangement
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
126 / 542

Channel arrangement
Frequency Channel assignment according to station layouts

In the following the possible station layouts will be analyzed with the relevant evolutions.
Fig. 55. shows an example of basic configurations from which the possible evolutions are depicted in
following Fig. 56. thru Fig. 60.
channels
1357
BB
A)
O n e p o la r p e r r a c k
(3 + 1)
channels
1234
1 2 3 4
B)
BB
One polar per rack

(3 + 1)
channels
13
13
REUSED
C)T w o
p o l a r p e r rack
(3 + 1 )
BB
f r e q. R e u s e
REUSED
channels
12
REUSED
12
1 2
D)
Two polar per rack

( 3 +1)
BB
f r e q. R e u s e
channels
13
24
BB
1
2
E )Two
polar per rack
(3 + 1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 55. 3+1 terminal basic station layouts
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
127 / 542
channels
1357 1357
channels
1357
reused
BB
BB
One polar per rack
channels
1357 1357
2468
reused
channels
1357 2468
T w o p o l a r p e r rack 2* (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
channels
1357 2468
reused
BB
BB
reused
BB
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k (7+1 )
channels
2468 2468
BB
T w o p o l a r p e r rack (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
3+1
BB
channels
1357

Fig. 56. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case A) of previous
Fig. 55. on page 127.
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k 2 * (7+1 ) f r e q. R e u s e
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 56. Terminal station layout: extension starting from A) basic layout
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
128 / 542

Fig. 57. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case B) of previous
channels
channels
1234
12345678
BB
BB
One polar per rack
3+1
channels
12345678
reused
BB
channels
1234 1234
channels
12345678
reused
O n e p o l a r p e r rack 2 x (7+1) Freq.Reuse
channels
5678 5678
reused
reused
BB
BB
BB
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k (7+1) F r e q. R e u s e
BB
O n e p o l a r p e rr a c k (7+1)
channels
1234 1234
T w o p o l a r p e r r a c k 2 * (7+1) f r e q. R e u s e
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 57. Terminal station layout: extension starting from B) basic layout
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
129 / 542
channels
channels
13
1324
13
reused
1324
reused
BB
BB
Two polar per rack (3+1) Freq.Reuse
channels
1357
channels
1357
1324
reused
Two polar per rack (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
channels
1357
1357
5768
reused
BB
Two polar per rack 2* (8+0) Freq.Reuse
channels
2468
2468
reused
reused
BB
BB
5768
reused
channels
1324
BB
BB

Fig. 58. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case C) of previous
Two polar per rack 2* (7+1/8+0) Freq.Reuse
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 58. Terminal station layout: extension starting from C) basic layout
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
130 / 542

Fig. 59. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case D) of previous
channels
channels
12
1234
12
1234
reused
reused
BB
BB
channels
5678 5678
channels
1234 1234
reused
reused
BB
BB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 59. Terminal station layout: extension starting from D) basic layout
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
131 / 542
channels
channels
13
1324
24
channels
2468
channels
1324 2413
channels
5768 6857
BB
BB
channels
reused reused
BB
channels
1357 2468
2468
BB
Two polar per rack (7+1)
1357
reused
reused
BB
Two polar per rack (3+1)
1357
reused
2413
BB
BB

Fig. 60. shows channel assignment rearrangement starting from basic layout of case E) of previous
Two polar per rack 2* (7+1) Freq.Reuse
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 60. Terminal station layout: extension starting from E) basic layout
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
132 / 542

Fig. 61. shows an example of 4+0/4+1 EAST/WEST terminal basic configurations.

channels
135
135
24
24
1
2
BB
channels
135
135
13
13
T w o p o la r e a s tw e s t p e r r a c k
2*(4 + 1)
reused
reused
A)
B)
T w o p o la r e a s tw e s t p e r r a c k
2*(4 + 1) f r e q. R e u s e
BB
channels
123
123
12
12
reused
1 2 3
C) T w o
1 2 3 4 5
D) O n e
reused
p o la r e a s tw e s t p e r r a c k
2*(4 + 1) f r e q. R e u s e
BB
channels
12345
12345
p o l a r e a s tw e s t p e r r a c k
2*(4 +1)
BB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 61. 4+0/4+1 EAST/WEST terminal basic station layouts
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
133 / 542
Besides the radio configurations presented previously, the 9600LSY family supplies an answer to various
transmission problems supplying particular functional solutions.
The purpose of this paragraph is to describe these functionalities giving some simple system block
diagrams and/or short comments.
Space Diversity
All the available configurations in all the frequency bands of 9600LSY family may include the Space
Diversity protection. This feature is obtained adding to the system a second receiver connected,
through a dedicated branching, to the Space diversity second antenna.
This second receiver, exactly equal to the main one, is installed inside the transceiver unit, in the
dedicated area just aside the main one.
The two IF signals (coming from the main and diversity receivers) are sent to the modem, where are
processed by two demodulators and summed by a new designed baseband combiner.
To achieve this function, one plugin IF module with A/D converters must be added to the modem
unit.
Expansion procedure
9600LSY is a fully expansible radio system. It means that, starting from the minimum 1+1 / 2+0
configuration, it is possible to increase the traffic capacity adding to the station the units necessary
to increase the number of radio channels up to the maximum allowed by the configuration.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The expansion procedure is reported in para.22.3.2.2 on page 156.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
134 / 542

21.4 System configuration for network solutions

21.5 Branching configurations

The branching for N+0 or N+1 configurations is realized in two different ways to be connected to a single
or double polarized antenna (1 or 2 polarizations per rack versions) and can manage up to 8 RF channels.
In both cases, Tx and Rx filters and channel circulators are accommodated in two horizontal lines
respectively at the bottom side and at the upper side of the transceiver subrack.
They are connected to the antenna circulators sited over the top of the rack by means of branching
connections installed along one or both rack side walls.
Depending on the frequency band, the branching is realized utilizing coaxial connection (4 and 5 GHz
bands) or using waveguides (from 6 GHz to 13 GHz).
The branchings connected to the space diversity receiver (this function is foreseen in all the bands and
for all the configurations) follow the technological choice utilized for the main branching.
The utilization of narrow band RF branching filters allows to avoid the use of 3 dB hybrids ( 3dB couplers
previously used for CCDP application) in all the frequency plans and for all the frequency spacings
including 28 MHz.
In all configurations, the connections among transceivers and relevant channeldepending branching
units are realized by vertical parallel coaxial cables without any cross connection.
This realization permits to simplify the installation operations (see Fig. 62. herebelow).
Rx Diversity branching
Rx branching
Coaxial interconnections
Branching V or H
Branching H or V
Tx branching
Channel circulator block + RF filter

Channel circulator block without RF filter
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 62. Schematic diagram of transceiver to branching connections
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
135 / 542
More and more often customers require to expand installed systems without causing traffic interruption.
Following this requirement, a particular branching solution has been developed.
This solution consists in having all the channel circulators needed for the maximum rack configuration
installed in advance, even if , at first, only a few of them are really utilized.
Dedicated codes including four circulators have been inserted in the catalogue. These blocks, one code
for each frequency band, are usable for all the terminal configurations. The unused circulator port that
will be connected to the filter branching in the future when expanding of the system, is closed by a short
circuit device. This device consents the signal to flow toward the antenna in transmission side or toward
the first active receiver in receiving side.
During the expansion operation, the short circuits devices are removed and the branching filters are
connected to the open circulator port, with easy and very short operation.
In such a way the traffic interruption can be minimized at minimum.
Taking in account that operating in TX side the expansion is performed adding the new channels as last
respect to the existing ones, this operation could be considered safe from the traffic interruption point of
view.
In Rx side the new channel are inserted between the antenna circulator and the first existing channels.
For this reason removing the short circuit device and leaving open the antenna port can lead to a lack of
signal to the following Rx channels until the new filter in installed.
Moreover, if in the receiving side the space diversity functionality is present, operating the expansion in
separated time on the main receiver branching and on the diversity receiver branching , the traffic
interruption can be completely avoid.
The circulators blocks are available in the bands from 6 to 13 GHz included.
At these frequences, the additional cost due to the presence of all the circulators even not utilized can
be supported by the systems, even in case of simple configurations.
At 4 and 5 GHz, on the contrary, the cost of the circulators is much heavier. For this reason the described
solution is not applied, and the traditional method (addition of the needed circulators at the moment of the
expansion) is still utilized.
Whatever is the number of working channels present in the rack, the number of the circulator blocks to
be used is 4 if the space diversity is not present, and 6 if it is implemented. This rule is valid both with
copolar and alternate polar branching solution.
Balanced branchings
The so called balanced branchings consents to get a constant attenuation of the branching for all the
channels relevant to the same terminal. So, also the system gain is constant whatever channel it is referred
to.
To get this performance the rule that has been followed is to insert the successive transmitters to the first
following the first and , on the contrary, to insert the added receiver before the existing ones.
The next figures give an exemplification of the balanced branching connections in the two cases of one
polarization per rack and two polarization per rack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Solution for branching in 6L band ( 9662LSY)

ITUR F. 383 channel plan foresees a frequency distance between the innermost channel of 44.49 MHz.
This narrow distance between channels 8 and 1 has obliged to insert, inside the branching in transmission
side, a dedicated wideband filter to avoid local interference between said channels that supplies an
additional filtering to the residual spectrum power generated by the transmitter 8 or 1 at the frequency
of the receiver 1 or 8 .
This filter is always installed in the branching, in all configurations (copolar and alternate polar) and in
independent way respect to the channels effectively installed in the link. It means that even if channels
8 and 1 are not utilized, the branching contains the filter. In such a way, we are free to install successively
the channels 8 and 1 for expansions of the link, without necessity to add the filter and , at last, without
causing traffic interruption.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
136 / 542

Branching extension without traffic interruption

One polarization per rack branching

In Fig. 63. herebelow, the branching version for 8 RF channels arranged in 1 polar per rack configuration
is shown. The picture include the space diversity optional branching.
MAIN
SP.DIV.
SP.DIV.Rx
MAIN Rx BRANCHING
RX
0
RX
1
RX
2
RX
3
RX
4
RX
5
RX
6
RX
7
TX
0
TX
1
TX
2
TX
3
TX
4
TX
5
TX
6
TX
7
Tx BRANCHING
Fig. 63. 1 polar per rack branching version for 8 RF channels
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The first slot on the left of the transceiver subrack is used for the spare transceiver (TR 0).
All the transceivers present in this configuration are connected to the single polarized branching and are
housed utilizing the slots in sequence starting from left side.
Please note the branching positions utilized for transmitter and receiver filters in the balanced branching
solutions.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
137 / 542
In Fig. 64. herebelow, the branching version for 8 RF channels arranged in 2 polar per rack configuration
is shown. The example here reported includes the space diversity option.
SP.DIV. ANTENNA
MAIN ANTENNA
SP.DIV. Rx
BRANCHING
MAIN Rx
BRANCHING
RX
0
RX
1
RX
2
RX
3
RX
6
RX
7
RX
8
RX
9
TX
0
TX
1
TX
2
TX
3
TX
6
TX
7
TX
8
TX
9
Tx BRANCHING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 64. Branching version for 8 RF channels, arranged in 2 polar per rack configuration
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
138 / 542

Two polarizations per rack branching

In Fig. 65. herebelow, a 3+1 configuration, again with 2 polarization per rack, is reported, in this case
including the space diversity functionality.
Note that the expansion of the system is obtained progressively filling the transceiver subrack (and the
branching, as consequence) adding new units starting from the left and right external sides of the subrack.
Diversity Rx
Branching
Main Rx
branching
RX0
RX1
RX8
RX9
TX0
TX1
TX8
TX9
Tx branching
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 65. Branching version for 3+1 configuration with Space Diversity, arranged in 2 polar per rack
version
The first slot on the left of the transceiver subrack is reserved to the transceiver utilized for protection
(TR0).
It can work either on H or V polarization, depending on the RF channel utilized .
As a consequence, the branching installed in the left part of the rack can be connected either to the H
antenna polarization or the V one.
Once that the polarization (H or V) of the left side branching has been chosen, all the units that must be
connected to this antenna polarization will be installed on the left side and connected to this branching .
The others (connected to V or H polarization) will be installed and connected to the branching located on
the right side.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
139 / 542
Frequency reuse technique allows to double the transmission capacity of each radio channel; a certain
number of channels is then transmitted at the same frequency of the main one on the second antenna
polarization.
We can envisage two main different topologies of reused systems: with one spare channel and with two
spare channels.
a)
Reused systems with a single protection channel

Terminals with a single protection channel are installed in only one rack .
The maximum number of channels is 8 and up to 4 different frequencies can be utilized.
Each terminal is identified in the network as a single N.E.. Higher configurations are not allowed.
Fig. 66. hereafter reported shows an example of a reused terminal .
In the example all the channels are reused and the spare channel, transmitted by the first transceiver
installed on the left side of the shelf, is channel 1H. The configuration obviously utilizes double
antenna polarization.
TRU
RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS
AREA
(BASEBAND
SHELF)
Rx
BRANCHING
CROSSCORRESPONDENCE
OF HV CHANNELS
CHANNELS
1 2 3 4
HHHH
4 3 2 1
VVVV
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tx
BRANCHING
Fig. 66. 7+1 reused terminal with single protection (ch. 1H)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
140 / 542

21.6 Rack configurations for frequency reuse

b)
Reused systems with two protection channels

Two protection channels are available when a complete 2x(n+1) system is installed in two racks. In
this case there will be two n+1 systems , one for each rack, using n+1 frequencies. One spare channel
for each rack is present. Maximum number of channels for each polarization is 8 (including the spare
channel).
A terminal, configured as above, always consists of two independent Network Elements, one for each
rack.
Two different solutions are available: each rack can be configured with alternate polarization and with
only one polarization.
If the tworack system is foreseen since the beginning, a solution with only one polarization per rack
is recommended. In case of future expansion, in fact, there is no necessity to connect the branchings
of the two racks, avoiding heavy mounting operations and long traffic interruptions.
However, the with 2PPR solution is also available.
Obviously if an 1PPR or 2PPR existing system has to be expanded with reused channels utilizing
the second rack, the AP or CP solution, already adopted in the installed system has to be foreseen
also in the second rack.
In Fig. 67. below, a 7+1 reused terminal with double spare channels, with the 2 polar per rack
recommended solution, is shown.
RACK 1
RACK 0
CROSSCORRESPONDENCE
OF HV CHANNELS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
CHANNELS
TRU
TRU
RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS
AREA
(BASEBAND
SHELF)
RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS
AREA
(BASEBAND
SHELF)
Rx
BRANCHING
Rx
BRANCHING
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
HHHHHHHH
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
VVVVVVVV
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Tx
BRANCHING
Tx
BRANCHING
Fig. 67. 2 x (7+1) reused terminal with double protection (on ch. 1H and 1V) in 1PPR solution
In the figure, two other slots are available in each rack for future expansion.
The shown terminal layout foresees the side to side rack position, but the back to back solution
is also possible.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
141 / 542
Expansion of a single protection reused system to double protection

Fig. 68. herebelow shows the expansion of a single protection reused terminal to a higher
configuration. Taking into account the limitation concerning the maximum allowed configuration in
case of single protectionsingle rack terminal (7 working channels and 4 different frequencies), the
expansion utilizes a second rack .
In this case the system is modified into a double protection one. The second spare channel is housed
in the second rack (in the shown case on ch. 2H) .
The rack utilized for the expansion utilizes the 2PPR configuration used by the first rack.
This solution consents to expand a single rack double polarized terminal up to 7+1/8+0 reused
configuration. The new added rack will be identified as a second network element .
CROSSCORRESPONDENCE
OF HV CHANNELS
CHANNELS
TRU
TRU
RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS
AREA
(BASEBAND
SHELF)
RRA/MODEM
AND ACCESS
AREA
(BASEBAND
SHELF)
Rx
BRANCHING
Rx
BRANCHING
1 3 5 7
HHHH
7 5 3 1
VVVV
2 4 6 8
HHHH
8 6 4 2
VVVV
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Tx
BRANCHING
Tx
BRANCHING
RACK 1
RACK 0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 68. Expansion from 7+1 single protection to 2 x (7+1) reused terminal
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
142 / 542

c)

21.6.1 Interconnections in reused systems

The specific connections needed for the terminals equipped for the frequency reuse technique are
hereafter described:
Local Oscillator Synchronization

The two local oscillators connected to the two RF receivers (main and reused) working on each
reused frequency must be together synchronized. This function is obtained by a phase lock loop
system utilizing a 2 GHz reference signal transferred from the L.O. of the main receiver ( master
local oscillator) to the L.O. of the reused receiver (slave local oscillator). This connection is
performed by means of a coaxial cable between oscillators and a Frequency Reuse Kit (a special
module and associated cabling) inside the Master Oscillator. In case of failure of the main local
oscillator or lack of the synchronization signal due to whatever cause , the slave Rx L.O. of the reused
channel utilizes its own RF signal , obviously unlocked to the main LO, to feed the Rx down converter
and to maintain in service the reused channel.
In case of failure of the master LO, The slave one can assume the master functionality and to be
utilized as source of the reference signal to be used to feed the signal to the frequency multiplier
contained in the main LO and allowing the protection of the master LO .
Fig. 69. herebelow shows how the mutual protection between the two LOs can be obtained.
MASTER LO
SLAVE LO
2GHz
oscillator
2GHz
oscillator
FR
module
Synch. signal coaxial cable
XN
XN
multiplier
multiplier
RF OUT
RF OUT
Fig. 69. Main / slave LO mutual protection

If main and reused channels are located in different racks , cable interconnections between the two
racks are needed . The maximum loss acceptable is 10 dB and the cable length is 7 m .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
I.F. interconnection cables

The XPIC unit, to perform the interference cancellation, must receive the IF signal from both main
and reused receiver. For this reason, in addition to the standard cables (used in a nonreused
systems), a IF cable for each XPIC unit must be utilized to connect the main receiver to the
demodulator of the reused system and vice versa.
Two dedicated cable kits, including both the LO and IF connections, are foreseen. They are available
with different cable lengths depending on the connection necessity (inside the same rack or between
the two racks). Only one kit is needed for a couple of reused channels.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
143 / 542
RF branching interconnection
In case of single polarized rack used in two racks terminal, no branching interconnections are needed
between the racks, each of them being connected directly and independently to one antenna port.
On the contrary, in case of usage of alternate polarization on both racks, the transceivers utilizing the
same antenna polarization must be connected to the same branching. It means that the some
waveguides or cables (depending on the frequency band) will connect the two racks to send to the
two antenna polarization all the H and all the V channels. Following Fig. 70. shows how this is carried
out.
RX BRANCHING
RX BRANCHING
TX BRANCHING
TX BRANCHING
RACK 0
RACK 1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 70. Branching interconnections

All the branching configurations do not include passive hybrids. Their utilization has been avoided
thanks to the use of narrow channel filters that allows to transmit channels down to a minimum
distance of 28 MHz on the same branching .
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
144 / 542

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

22 EQUIPMENT PART LIST AND PROVISIONING

22.1 Introduction
This chapter gives detailed information regarding:
the equipments items (P/Ns, equipping rules, labels for remote inventory)
their physical and logical position in the system
and is organized as follows:

on page 145
Part list:
Equipment provisioning
Rack and shelves summary:

on page 152
Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves

on page 154
General equipping rules

on page 154
Channel provisioning/expansion guideline

on page 156
Base Band shelf

on page 159
Base Band shelf unit layout and equipping rules

on page 160
Transceiver shelf
on page 165
Transceiver shelf unit layout

on page 165
Equipping rules of Transceiver units or substitutive Dummy Plates on page 165
FANS shelf and FANS assembled unit

on page 166
FANS shelf equipping rules

on page 166
FANS assembled unit equipping rules

on page 166
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
145 / 542
22.2 Part list
lists all items and their P/N
indicates the max quantity envisaged for the item
indicates the figure where the position of the item is indicated
indicates the table or paragraph where detailed information regarding the equipping rules of the item
is given
This part list is relevant to the frequencyindependent items. For frequencydependent items
please refer to part lists specific for each frequency (i.e. specific chapter listed in Tab. 46. on
page 246).
N.B.
Tab. 11. 9600LSY Part list Common parts (frequency independent)

REF [x] is used in other parts of this handbook to refer to the item.
For NB see Tab. 12. on page 150
REF
NAME
(NB)
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
MAX
Qty
POS
EQUIP.
RULES
RACK AND TRU

[1]
ETSI RACK H 2200
3DB04656AA
282102003
[2]
ETSI RACK H 2000
3DB04657AA
282102004
[3]
TRU SUBRACK
3DB05652AA
593230046
CIRCUIT BREAKER 2A 72VDC
1AB162710002
001791352
1AB162710003
001791353
1AB162710005
001791355
1AB162710007
001791357
KIT FUSERBREAKER
3DB03114AA
299702945
[4]
(A) in Fig. 71.

page 152
para.
12.4.2
page 41
(B) in Fig. 71.

page 152
para.23.7.1 page 200
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Tab. 11. continues ...
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
146 / 542

9600LSYLHR part list is given through the Tab. 11. herebelow, which:

REF
NAME
(NB)
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
MAX
Qty
POS
EQUIP.
RULES
SUBRACKS
[5]
SUBRACK 2G LH
3DB02143AA
593230033
(D) in Fig. 71.

page 152
[6]
RT SUBRACK
3DB02294AA
593230034
(G) in Fig. 71.

page 152
[7]
FANS SUBRACK H=50
3DB03242AA
593230036
(E) , (L)
in Fig. 71.
page 152
[8]
FANS ASSEMBLED
3DB03238AA
411200559
(A) , (B)
in Fig. 81.
page 166
para.
2 235
22.3.5
page 166
SYSTEM WIRING
[9]
CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS
3DB02842AA
299702891
[10]
CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL NO

SPACE DIV.
3DB02843AA
299702892
[11]
CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL WITH

SPACE DIV
3DB02844AA
299702893
[12]
CABLE KIT FOR REUSE

(1 RACK)
3DB02845AA
299702894
[13]
CABLE KIT FOR REUSE

(2 RACKS)
3DB02846AA
299702895
[14]
CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN.

CHANNEL FOR WMSN
3DB03202AA
299702950
3DB03264AA
299702953
FANS UNIT EXTENSION

CABLE KIT
3DB03266AA
299702954
PLUGS KIT COMMON PART

(LSY)
3DB03213AA
299702951
PLUGS KIT 1 CHANNEL

EXTENSION (LSY)
3DB03214AA
299702952
[15] FANS UNIT CABLE KIT

[16]
para.24.3
p
on page 211
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
147 / 542
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
MAX
Qty
POS
[17] RRA CHANNEL
3DB02147AA
411200537
(C) in Fig. 79.

page 160
[18] RRA STANDBY
3DB02151AA
411200538
(G) in Fig. 79.

page 160
REF
NAME
(NB)
EQUIP.
RULES
RSA/RRA
[19]
MODEM LH STM1 1WST

(128QAM) (NBa) (NBb)
3DB02136AA
411200535
[20]
MODEM 32/64QAM LH
(NBa) (NBc)
3DB05190AA
411200607
[21]
MODEM LH STM0 0WST

(NBa) (NBd)
3DB02140AA
411200536
[22]
CANCCOMB 128QAM STM1

(NBb) (NBe)
3DB00829AA
487210334
16
[23]
CANCCOMB 32/64
(NBc) (NBf)
3DB04860AA
487210959
16
[24]
CANCCOMB STM0
(NBd) (NBg)
3DB03373AA
487210822
[25] SERVICE
3DB02155AA
411200539
[26] ADDITIONAL VOICE
3DB02158AA
483200156
[27] SYSTEM CONTROLLER
3DB02162AA
411200540
FLASH CARD ATA 48MB

40/+85C
Tab. 17.
pg 162
Tab. 18.
pg 163
(D) in Fig. 79.
page 160
Tab. 18.
pg 163
&
Fig. 92.
pg 182
(B) in Fig. 79.

page 160
Tab. 16.
pg 161
(A) in Fig. 79.

page 160
Tab. 14.
pg 161
1AB151770002
Fig. 83.
page 172
Tab. 14.
pg 161
[29] ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING
3DB02740AA
411200550
(H) in Fig. 71.

page 152
Tab. 15.
pg 161
[30] DC/DC CONVERTER BB 2G LH
3DB00619AA
478200004
(E) in Fig. 79.

page 160
Tab. 19.
pg 163
[31] FILTER P.S.U. 5.3/3.4V
3DB01806AA
478200006
[28]
(F) in Fig. 79.

page 160
Tab. 21.
pg 164
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
OPTICAL MODULES
[32]
S1.1 OPTIC.INTERF. FC/PC

(NBh)
3AL78815AA
474166420
[33]
S1.1 OPTIC. INTERF. SC/PC

(NBh)
3AL78815AB
474166424
(C) , (G)
in Fig
Fig. 79
79.
page 160
Tab. 17.
pg 162
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
148 / 542


ANV P/N
Factory P/N
MAX
Qty
POS
EQUIP.
RULES
3DB03382AA
299702965
(F) in Fig. 71.

page 152
Tab. 27.
pg 196
3AN49589AA
299701212
(C) + (D)
in Fig. 79.
page 160
3DB03010AA
299702912
(E) inFig. 79.

page 160
[37] RT FRONT PLATE KIT
3DB03190AA
299702947
(A) in Fig. 80.

page 165
Tab. 23.
pg 165
[38] COVER
3DB03609AA
261202666
Fig. 104.
page 197
Tab. 24.
pg 166
[39] KIT LOUDSPEAKER
3DB04125AA
299722014
(J) in Fig. 71.

page 152
Tab. 22.
pg 164
[40] TELEPHONE KIT (DTMF)
3CY07335AA
299702019
[41] LSY SYSTEM TOOL KIT
3DB03008AA
299702910
[42] LSY MAINTENANCE TOOL KIT
3DB03007AA
299702909

REF
NAME
(NB)
EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES
[34]
BRANCHING FRONT PLATE

KIT
[35] DUMMY PLATE W40 (RRA)
[36]
DUMMY PLATE L40 (DC/DC

CONV.)
Tab. 20.
pg 164
para.42.1
on page 313
para.4 3.2.2
para.43.2.2
on page 318
TRANSCEIVERS
[43] xx GHZ TRANSMITTER
[44] xx GHZ RECEIVER
[45] 96xxLSY L.O
[46] TR FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
Refer to p
part lists
specific for each
frequency (i.e.
specific chapter
listed in Tab
Tab. 46
46. on
page 246).
8
8
16
para.2 3.4
para.23.4
on page 184
Tab. 23.
pg 165
SOFTWARE AND SOFTWARE LICENCES: Refer to Operators Handbooks listed in Tab. 81. on
page 527
INSTALLATION MATERIALS: Refer to Installation Handbook ref.[C] on page 524
DOCUMENTATION: Refer to para.C.2 on page 522.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
end of Tab. 11.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
149 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NB
ED
MODEM LH STM1 1WST and MODEM LH STM0 0WST and MODEM 32/64QAM LH
in alternative
MODEM LH STM1 1WST and CANCCOMB 128QAM STM1 can be used only in
conjunction with frequency plans allowing 128QAM STM1 transmission (see Tab. 46. on
page 246)
MODEM 32/64QAM LH and CANCCOMB 32/64 can be used only in conjunction with
frequency plans allowing 64QAM STM1 transmission (see Tab. 46. on page 246)
MODEM LH STM0 0WST and CANCCOMB STM0 can be used only in conjunction with
frequency plans allowing 128QAM STM0 transmission (see Tab. 46. on page 246)
CANCCOMB 128QAM STM1 only with MODEM LH STM1 1WST
CANCCOMB 32/64 only with MODEM 32/64QAM LH
CANCCOMB STM0 only with MODEM LH STM0 0WST
S1.1 OPTIC.INTERF. FC/PC and S1.1 OPTIC. INTERF. SC/PC in alternative
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
150 / 542

Tab. 12. Notes to Tab. 11.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Page left intentionally blank
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
151 / 542

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
22.3.1 Rack and shelves summary
ED
J
955.203.292 Q
I
C
L
REGENERATOR
3DB 02839 AA AA
542

22.3 Equipment provisioning
H
WMSN
Legend on page 153

Fig. 71. Rack and shelves layout
05
152 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Tab. 13. Rack and shelves

POS in
Fig. 71. NAME
ETSI RACK H 2200
P/N
(REF in Tab. 11.
on page 146)
[1]
(A)
ED
DESCRIPTION
For details refer to
9600LSY/LHR
Installation Handbook
REF.[C] on page 524
ETSI RACK H 2000
[2]
(B)
TRU SUBRACK
[3]
(C)
ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING
[29]
(D)
SUBRACK 2G LH
[5]
(E)
(L)
FANS SUBRACK H=50
[7]
Area for Rx branching
(F)

KIT
[34]
(G)
RT SUBRACK
[6]
para.22.3.4.1 on page 165
(H)
Area for Tx branching
(I)
1650SMC
(J)
KIT LOUDSPEAKER
[39]
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
153 / 542
22.3.2 Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR shelves
According to Fig. 72. herebelow and Fig. 73. on page 155:

a)
in Base Band shelf, units SYSCO, SERV, PSF1 and PSF2 are always equipped
b)
the number associated to RRA, MD and PSU groups is related to physical (but not necessarily also
logical) channel (0 9). The same number identifies the associated TRI
PHYSICAL CHANNEL
c)
BASE BAND SHELF
TR SHELF
RRA0
MD0
PSU0
TRI0
RRA1
MD1
PSU1
TRI1
....
....
....
....
....
RRA9
MD9
PSU9
TRI9
only 8 RRA, MD and PSU groups and the associated TRI can be equipped at most. The slot positions
that must be used depend on the system configuration; in particular:
1)
with single polarization configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups must be equipped in
the logical number sequence 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 (see Fig. 74. on page 156).
Thus, in these configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups 8 and 9 are never equipped, as
depicted in Fig. 72. herebelow;
S R
R
R
E R
D
D
S R
D
D
A
A
A
A
3
0
C V
1
2
2
1
3
0
O
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
R M R M R M
R D R D R D
D
A 5 A 6 A 7
A
4
5
7
4
6
R M R M
R D R D
A 8 A 9
9
8
R
R
UNITS
NEVER
EQUIPPED
Fig. 72. Layout of max 8 channels in single polarization configurations
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
154 / 542

22.3.2.1 General equipping rules
with double polarization configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups must be equipped in
the sequence 0, 8, .... (see Fig. 75. on page 157, Fig. 76. on page 158 and Fig. 77. on page
158).

2)
Thus, in these configurations, RRA, MD, PSU and TRI groups 4 and 5 are never equipped, as
depicted in Fig. 73. herebelow;
S R
R
R
R
E R
D
D
S R
D
D
A
A
A
A
3
0
C V
1
2
2
1
3
0
O
R M R M
R D R D
R
D
A 5 A 6
A
4
5
4
6
R
R M
R D
A 7
7
R M R M
R D R D
A 8 A 9
9
8
UNITS
NEVER
EQUIPPED
Fig. 73. Layout of max 8 channels in double polarization configurations
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
d)
ED
in the unused slots, dummy plates mus be equipped to ensure EMC performance as well as
equipment correct ventilation;
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
155 / 542
9600 LSY is a fully expansible radio system. It means that, starting from the minimum 1+1 / 2+0
configuration, it is possible to increase the traffic capacity adding to the station the units necessary to
increase the number of radio channels up to the maximum allowed by the configuration.
Hereafter the expansion procedure is reported with the help of some figures illustrating the slots to be used
to house the added transceivers inside the mechanical assembly. Please, keep in mind that for the
RRA/modem units the same procedure is still valid; it means that the Base Band shelfs slots
corresponding to those utilized for the transceiver will host the associated RRA/modem units. In this way
the connections between transceivers and relevant modem units is realized by vertical parallel coaxial
cables, without cable crossconnections.
a)
If the branching unit utilizes a single polarization, the transceivers and the branching unit will be
added using the slots starting from left and going toward the right side of the subrack, as shown in
the next Fig. 74.
The maximum channel number depends on the channel plan. In every case the maximum number
of transceiver that can be housed in the subrack is 8.
The slot used for the protection transceiver (slot 1) is fixed and it is the first on the left of the subrack.
The example reported in the figure is limited to 4 channels.
1+1/2+0 configuration
expansion to 2+1/3+0
H (V)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 74. Single polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
156 / 542

22.3.2.2 Channel provisioning/expansion guideline
If the branching unit utilizes two antenna polarizations , the transceivers and the branching unit
will be added installing them stating from the side walls and filling the subrack going toward the
subrack centre, in position left or right depending on the polarization of each transceiver, as shown
in the next figure.

b)
The slot used for the protection transceiver (slot 1) is fixed and it is the first on the left of the subrack.
So, the antenna polarization of the radio channel used for protection (H or V) defines which branching
(H or V) will be installed at the left side of the rack. For the above reason, it is important to keep
in mind that H or V positions are not strictly associated to the left or right side of the subrack.
The maximum channel number depends on the channel plan.
The example reported in Fig. 75. is limited to 4 channels. It refers to a system with spare channel on
H antenna polarization and, consequently, with transceivers and branching connected to H
polarization on the left side of the subrack.
(adding 1 RT on V pol)
(adding 1 RT on H pol)
2 4
V V
H
2
2
1
4
1
4
5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 75. Two polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with the H channels
on the left side
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
157 / 542
The next Fig. 76. shows the other possibility, in which the spare channel (2) utilizes the V polarization
and, consequently, the transceivers and branching are connected to V polarization and are
installed on the left side of the subrack.
(1 RT on H pol and
1 RT on V pol)
Fig. 76. 2 polarization per rack expansion procedure in the transceiver subrack with V channel on the
left side
The above figure shows only two of the possible expansions that depend on the mixing of (H) and
(V) transceivers that must be utilized.
d)
The next Fig. 77. gives an example of the installation of the units in case of frequency reuse
technique utilization in a 7+1 protected terminal. At first, the terminal utilizes the first 4 channels (with
channel 4 V as spare channel). The successive expansion of the system is performed adding the
channels working on the same frequencies but transmitted on the opposite antenna polarization.
1 3
4 2
3 1
V V
H H
H H
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 77. Expansion procedure with reused channels
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
158 / 542

c)
22.3.3 Base Band shelf

The following Fig. 78. shows the boardunequipped shelf layout.
SUBD CONNECTORS
2MB WST CONNECTORS
ACCESS
AREA
BOARD
EQUIPMENT
AREA
Fig. 78. Unequipped Base Band shelf layout

The board equipment area is described in para.22.3.3.1 on page 160.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The access area is described in:
para.24.2.2 on page 206 as far as SUBD connector area is concerned
para.24.2.3 on page 208 as far as 2Mbit/s WST connector area is concerned
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
159 / 542
Please refer to para.22.3.2 on page 154, for Board provisioning and expansion guideline in BB & TR
shelves
2 3
S
Y
S
C
O
S
E
R
V
R
M
R
D
A
0
1
M
D
1
R
M
R
D
A
2
2
R
M
R
D
A
3
3
R
M
R
D
A
4
4
R M
R D
A 5
5
R
R
A
6
R
R
A
0
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
M
D
6
R M
R D
A 7
7
R M
R D
A 8
8
R M
R D
A 9
9
B
P
S
F
1
F
24 25
P
S
U
0
E
P
S
U
1
E
P
S
U
2
E
P
S
U
3
E
P
S
U
4
E
P
S
U
5
E
P
S
U
6
E
P
S
U
7
E
P
S
U
8
E
P
S
U
9
E
P
S
F
2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
Fig. 79. Base Band shelf board equipment (slot numbering and board type and numbering)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For:
slot (A) equipment, refer to para.22.3.3.1.1 on page 161
slot (B) equipment, refer to para.22.3.3.1.3 on page 161
slots (C) + (G) + (D) + (E) equipment, refer to para.22.3.3.1.4 on page 161
slot (F) equipment, refer to para.22.3.3.1.5 on page 164.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
160 / 542

22.3.3.1 Base Band shelf unit layout and equipping rules
22.3.3.1.1 System Controller card

Tab. 14. System Controller card equipping rules

SLOT IN BASEBAND SHELF (see Fig. 79. on page 160)
The SYStem COntroller (SYSCO) card contains the subunit ESCON (in its turn, housing
the equipment configuration data memory device FLASH CARD) and the external
connectors for the QB3 and F interfaces.
UNIT
P/N
(REF in Tab. 11. on page 146)
Label for
Remote
Inventory
SYSCO
[27]
SYSCO
FLASH CARD
[28]
MEMDEV
(A)
Refer to para.23.3.2 on page 172 for the unit physical views and operative information.
N.B.
22.3.3.1.2 Additional Housekeeping unit

Tab. 15. Additional Housekeeping unit equipping rules
POSITION IN RACK (see Fig. 71. on page 152)
The Additional Housekeeping unit is an optional module to expand the number of
housekeeping (up to 40 input contacts in all).
(C)
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
[29]
HKDEV
ADDITIONAL
HOUSEKEEPING
Refer to para.23.8 on page 203 for the unit physical views and operative information.
N.B.
22.3.3.1.3 Service card

Tab. 16. Service card equipping rules
The SERVice (SERV) card contains the auxiliary AUX/EOW service channels, the
protection of the WST channels and the service channels, the switch logic of the RPS
protection (used only in case of 1+1 and N+1 configurations) and it can host (as option) a
module (TPHDEV), adding a voice channel.
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
SERV
[25]
SERV
ADDITIONAL VOICE
[26]
TPHDEV
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(B)
N.B.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
161 / 542
22.3.3.1.4 RRA, MD and PSU card groups and dummy plates

RRA
Tab. 17. RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY cards equipping rules

(C)
and
(G)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
RRA CHANNEL
all slots (C)
[17]
RRA
RRA STANDBY
slot (G) only
[18]
RRAS
S1.1 OPTIC.
INTER.FC/PC
[32]
IS1.1
S1.1 OPTIC.
INTER.SC/PC
[33]
IS1.1
For the unit physical views and operative information, refer to para.23.3.4 on page 178 for
the RRACHANNEL, and to para.23.3.5 on page 180 for the RRASTANDBY.
N.B.
ED
Read carefully General equipping rules on page 154.

The RRA units are connected to the transmission line through one optical or electrical
interface. The electrical interface is placed directly on RRA units, instead the optical one
on a optical module placed inside the RRA unit itself (a drawer into the front panel).
Slot 3 of Base Band shelf can be used as a standby radio channel in N+1 and 1+1
configurations; otherwise it is used as a main radio channel in N+0 configuration. In N+1
and 1+1 configurations, this slot can be equipped by a RRAS (RRA standby) unit and only
in N+1, the same interface previously described for the RRA (optical) can be provided, if
extra traffic is actuated; in N+0 configuration, this slot can be equipped by a RRA unit, in
this case the optical interface module can be provided.
Just one physical RRA unit exists both for transmission of STM1 signal or subSTM1 one.
The same thing is applied to the RRAS unit.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
162 / 542

a)
b)
MD

Tab. 18. Modem cards equipping rules

The MoDem (MD) card types contain the modulator and demodulator function units.
128QAM and 64QAM are supported according to Tab. 2. on page 30. For each type of MD
(supporting STM1 or STM0 signal), an IF module is used in case of space diversity
configuration as daughter board of the MD board. The same physical module is used also
in case of frequency reuse configuration, always as a daughter board, but only for MD
supporting STM1 signals. In case of space diversity with frequency reuse configuration
with MD supporting STM1 signals, two of these daughter boards are used.
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
MODEM LHSTM11WST
[21]
RRAMD1280W0
CANCCOMB 128QAM STM1
[22]
IF1WCX
MODEM LHSTM00WST
[19]
RRAMD1281W1
CANCCOMB STM0
[24]
IF0WC
MODEM 32/64QAM LH
[20]
MD3264W1
CANCCOMB 32/64
[23]
IF3264CX
(D)
N.B.
c)
PSU
Tab. 19. PSU cards equipping rules

The PSU boards power the Base Band shelf. Usually PSU units are equipped in pairs
(PSU0 + PSU1, PSU2 + PSU3, etc.), because each PSU pair gives power supply in
protected mode to a pair of MD and RRA, that are so protected from the failure of a single
PSU:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(E)
PSU0 + PSU1
PSU2 + PSU3
PSU4 + PSU5
PSU6 + PSU7
PSU8 + PSU9
(MD0+RRA0) + (MD1+RRA1)
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
DC/DC CONVERTER
BB 2G LH
[30]
PSL4860
N.B.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
163 / 542
d)
Dummy plates

When a group of RRA, MD and PSU is not equipped, the corresponding slots must be
closed by dummy plates, to ensure EMC performance as well as equipment correct
ventilation.
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
(C)
+
(D)
DUMMY PLATE W40

(RRA + MD)
[35]
(E)
DUMMY PLATE L40

(DC/DC CONV.)
[36]
22.3.3.1.5 PSF cards

Tab. 21. PSF cards equipping rules
The PSF boards contain the filter for the PSU boards and the DC/DC converter to supply
System Controller and SERVICE boards; the two PSF boards are in protection between
them.
(F)
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
FILTER P.S.U. 5.3/3.4V
[31]
PSF
N.B.
22.3.3.1.6 Kit Loudspeaker

Tab. 22. Kit Loudspeaker equipping rules
POSITION IN RACK (see Fig. 71. on page 152)
The Kit Loudspeaker is an optional unit to be inserted inside TRU. The kit includes the cable
for its connection to the system.
(J)
UNIT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
KIT LOUDSPEAKER
Label for
Remote
Inventory
[39]
N.B.
ED
P/N
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
164 / 542

Tab. 20. Dummy plates for RRAModem and PSU equipping rules
22.3.4 Transceiver shelf

22.3.4.1 Transceiver shelf unit layout

The Transceiver shelf unit layout is depicted in the following Fig. 80. herebelow:
T
R
I
3
T
R
I
0
T
R
I
1
T
R
I
2
T
R
I
4
T
R
I
5
T
R
I
6
T
R
I
7
T
R
I
8
T
R
I
9
10
Fig. 80. Transceiver shelf equipment (slot numbering and board types and numbering)
22.3.4.2 Equipping rules of Transceiver units or substitutive Dummy Plates
Tab. 23. Transceiver units and substitutive dummy plates equipping rules
SLOT IN TRANSCEIVER SHELF (see Fig. 80. on page 165)
TRANSCEIVER
Each Transceiver is an assembly made up by components that, from item provisioning and
maintenance points of view, are independent items that are equipped, for types and
number, according to the system configuration, as shown herebelow:
COMPONENTS TYPES AND NUMBER
DIVERSITY
FREQUENCY
REUSE
TRI
LO
FR KIT
1 or 0
1 or 0
(A)
Refer to para.23.4.1 on page 185 for details.

N.B.
For the P/Ns and Remote Inventory Labels of TRI units and modules, please
refer to the specific chapter between those listed in Tab. 46. on page 246.
DUMMY PLATE
When a transceiver is not equipped, the corresponding slot is closed by a dummy plate.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
UNIT
RT FRONT PLATE KIT
ED
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
[37]
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
165 / 542
22.3.5 FANS shelf and FANS assembled units
Presently, there can be either one or two FAN shelves, see pos. (E) and (L) in Fig. 71. on page 152:
FAN shelf pos. (E) is mandatory in all configurations
FAN shelf pos. (L) is mandatory whenever the 1650SMC shelf is equipped.
22.3.5.2 FANS assembled unit equipping rules

The FANS SHELF contains one or two independent FANS ASSEMBLED units, as depicted in following
Fig. 81. :
FANSL
A
FANSL
B
Fig. 81. Fan shelf (slot numbering and board types)

Tab. 24. Fans unit & cover equipping rules
SLOT IN FAN SHELF (see Fig. 81. on this page)
Each fan unit contains four fans, a DC/DC converter and an internal control unit.
When one of the FANS ASSEMBLED is not equipped, the corresponding slot must be
closed by COVER to guarantee correct ventilation.
(A)
(B)
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory
FANS ASSEMBLED
[8]
FANSL
COVER
[38]
N.B.
Rules and indications for fan utilization associated to different temperature ranges, terminal configurations
and eventual ADM 1650 presence are hereafter reported:
For temperature range 5C to +50C (standard temperature range):

for radio regenerator cooling:
for 1+1/2+0 copolar and heteropolar configurations: no fans are needed.
for 2+1 and higher copolar and heteropolar configurations : one subrack with two fan
plugins.
for ADM cooling (if present): always one fan subrack with one fan plugin, installed just below
the ADM (FANSL B, on the rack right side).
For temperature range 5C to +55C (extended temperature range):

for radio regenerator cooling:
all configurations : one subrack with two fan plugins.

for ADM cooling (if present): always one fan subrack with one fan plugin, installed just below
the ADM (FANSL B, on the rack right side).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
166 / 542

22.3.5.1 FANS shelf equipping rules
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

23 OPERATIVE INFORMATION ON EQUIPMENT BOARDS

Please refer to chapter 24 on page 205 detailed operative information regarding:
system cabling
pinout description of connectors for Customer usage
23.1 Introduction
This chapter gives detailed operative information regarding:
the unit assembly/subassembly and front panel drawings, with the usage description of the access
points (connectors, visual indicators, buttons)
hardware setting description
for all installation, commissioning and maintenance purposes, and is organized as follows:
on page 168
Cautions to avoid equipment damage
Boards of BaseBand shelf

PSU and PSF units operative information

on page 171
SYSTEM CONTROLLER and FLASH CARD unit operative information on page 172
SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit operative information

on page 176
RRACHANNEL unit operative information

on page 178
RRASTANDBY unit operative information

on page 180
MODEM unit operative information

on page 181
TRANSCEIVER unit operative information
Branching
Branching drawings and BranchingTransceivers connections

on page 196
Branching Front Plate Kit (Rx branching area)

on page 196
FANS SHELF and FANS assembled unit operative information
Boards of TRU shelf
Top Rack Unit operative information
Kit Loudspeaker operative information

on page 200
on page 202
Additional Housekeeping unit operative information
on page 203
ED
on page 184
on page 197
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
167 / 542
23.2 Cautions to avoid equipment damage

Antistatic protection device kit
When operating on boards out of the equipment shelf, this kit (see Fig. 200. on page 501) must be
always warn and its termination must be connected to a grounded structure, to avoids the possible
damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges.
b)
Boards extraction/insertion levers

Most equipments boards are provided with levers to facilitate their extraction and insertion from/into
the shelf. In turn, such levers are provided with screws that:
must be loosened, before operating on levers for the unit extraction from the shelf; this prevents
breakage of levers
must be tightened, after the unit insertion in the shelf; this ensures the equipment EMIEMC
performance.
Please refer to pages 169170 for more information [ points h ) , i ) and j ) ].
c)
Unit assemblies and transceiver subassemblies

As a general rule, each unit assembly (main board + baby board(s) + front plate) must be
considered an unique item from the service and maintenance points of view. Such an assembly is
supplied by Alcatel as it is and must never be disassembled.
Exceptions to this general rule are represented by transceiver assemblies each of which is composed
by the following subassemblies (for more details, please refer to para.23.4 on page 184):
TRI (Transmitter)
LO (Local Oscillator module)
R (Receiver module)
FR KIT (Frequency Reuse kit)

In this case the general rule becomes: each transceiver subassembly must be considered an unique
item from the service and maintenance points of view. Such a subassembly is supplied by Alcatel
as it is and must never be disassembled.
d)
Screw fixing
All boards and dummy plates are provided with screws that, in normal operation conditions, must be
always tightened onto the shelf to avoid their detachment and to ensure the equipment EMIEMC
performance and correct ventilation.
The screw tightening torque for fixing the units to the subrack must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) 10 %
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
168 / 542

a)

e)
PSU and Transceiver insertion/extraction

Before to extract or insert a PSU or Transceiver unit from/into the shelf, verify that its ON/OFF switch
is in O position.
f)
Craft Terminal connection

To connect the CT cable (at IDUs F interface and/or PC side):
verify that the PC is switched off (if switched on, close all running applications, then switch off
it)
connect suitable cable to IDUs F interface and PC side
now the PC can be safely switched on.
g)
Craft Terminal disconnection

To disconnect the CT cable (at IDUs F interface and/or PC side):
perform the logoff, exiting from the CT applications
close all other running applications, if any
switch off the PC
now the cable can be safely disconnected.
h)
Right operations for board insertion in the subrack
1) Open the levers

before to plug the
unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
3) Push on the levers

in order to finish the
connector mating.
ED
2) To mate the plastic body of

the connectors: push on
the front panel, balancing
the strain without push on
the levers.
4) Fix the unit to the subrack by means

of screws (max tightening torque
specified in point d ) on page 168
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
169 / 542
Forbidden operations for board insertion in the subrack
NO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
j)
ED

i)
Dont push just on one lever only.
NO
Dont force the units.
NO
Avoid impact during the units handling.
To populate an empty subrack

1 ) insert one unit at a time
2 ) fix the unit to the subrack by means of screws, before to insert another unit.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
170 / 542
23.3 Boards of BaseBand shelf
Refer to:
para.12.4.4.9 on page 48 for a brief functional description of the PSU unit
point c ) on page 163 for physical composition and P/Ns of the PSU unit
para.12.4.4.10 on page 48 for a brief functional description of the PSF unit

para.22.3.3.1.5 on page 164 for physical composition and P/Ns of the PSF unit
chapter 52, and in particular para.52.2 on page 426, for the detailed functional description of the
units
(1) ON/OFF
switch
(3) Input
Power
Supply
A1
A3

23.3.1 PSU and PSF units operative information
(2) PSU switched

on
(green)
(4) PSF powered

on
(green)
PSF
PSU
23.3.1.1 Power supply connector pinout (on PSF unit)
Pins
Meaning
A1
+BATT
+BATTERY
A2
GND
Ground
A3
BATT
Battery
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 82. PSU and PSF units front view

23.3.1.2 Front connector on PSF unit usage
Refer to para.24.4 on page 218.

23.3.1.3 Hardware settings
None
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
171 / 542
Refer to:
para.12.4.4.7 on page 47 for a brief functional description of the unit
para.22.3.3.1.1 on page 161 for physical composition and P/Ns.
chapter 52, and in particular:
para.52.3.2 on page 435, for the detailed functional description of the SYSCO unit
para.52.3.3 on page 441, for the detailed functional description of the Flash Card
The following information is given hereafter:
Fig. 83. herebelow shows the unit assembly view
Fig. 84. herebelow shows the FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction
Fig. 85. on page 173 depicts the unit front view :

for the front connectors usage, please refer to para.24.8.6 on page 235.
the usage of the pushbuttons Lamp Test (7) and Reset (9), is explained in para.24.8.6 on page
235 and section MAINTENANCE.
the usage of the other pushbuttons and leds is explained in section MAINTENANCE.
para.23.3.2.2 on page 174 describes the hardware setting options dependent on SWP and
system configuration.
Subunit
ESCON
J1
J3
J2
M1
Flash Card
M2
System Controller
main board (ESC)
M3
Fig. 83. System Controller assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view
TOP SIDE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
INSERTION
Fig. 84. FLASH CARD profile and insertion direction
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
172 / 542

23.3.2 SYSTEM CONTROLLER and FLASH CARD unit operative information

(9) Reset Button

J1
J2
M1
J3
I/O RJ45 for

QB3 10 BASE T
and DEBUGN or
local EC debug
M3
I/O for
QB3 10 BASE 2
(2 BNCs in parallel)
I/O RJ45 for

CAN 0 BB and
local EC debug
M2
F interface
for ECT
(1) OR of all URGENT alarms (red)

(2) OR of all NOT URGENT alarms (red)
(3) ATTENDED alarm (yellow)
(4) OR of all ABNORMAL conditions (yellow)
(5) OR of all INDICATIVE alarms (yellow)
(7) Lamp Test Pushbutton
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(8) Alarm storing Pushbutton

(Attended)
(6) bicolor led:

red on: Card failure alarm
green flashing: SW download in progress (internal or toward other boards)
off: normal condition
Fig. 85. System Controller front view
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
173 / 542
With reference to Fig. 85. on page 173, the pushbuttons Lamp Test (7) and Reset (9) allow the following
operations:
Lamp test
Reset
Effect
System lamp test of all the leds in all units of Baseband shelf
(Transceivers not affected)
EC (Equipment Controller) reset
RC (Radio Controller) reset

N.B. to perform this operation, hold Lamp Test pushed and
contemporarily push Reset
For the meaning of EC and RC, make reference to para.52.3.1.1.2 on page 430.

Refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the System Controller unit for the TC and DipSwitch physical
position on the board (refer to handbook 9600LSY Hardware setting documents REF.[K] on page 527).
In the following, only the DipSwitch banks associated to software configurations are taken into
consideration (for other DipSwitch banks and TC meaning, please refer to the above cited documents).
a)
on subunit ESCON (see Fig. 83. on page 172) :

a Dipswitch bank allows to clear (erase) the System Configuration memory. The use of this
dipswitch bank is explained in the 9600LSY Operators Handbook.
ATTENTION
(caution to avoid equipment damage)
These dipswitches must be usually in OFF position.
If unproperly set, these dipswitches will reset the FLASH CARD content, and you will loose all the
software herein contained (programs and system configuration data)
b)
on main board ESC (see Fig. 83. on page 172) :

1)
Equipment Type:
EQTYPE field is fixed to 0110 (Dec. 6) to indicate Long Haul system (there are no Dipswitch
banks to set).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
continues..
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
174 / 542

23.3.2.1 Lamp Test & Reset buttons

N.B.
Before using Tab. 25. or Tab. 26. for configuration setting/change purposes, verify that
the values correspond to those stated in the CT Operators Handbook associated to the
Software Package (SWP) running on your system. In the case of conflict between the
values stated in this manual and those indicated in CT Operators Handbook, these latter
will prevail.
2)
BKPV (BacKPanel Version) field

according to following Tab. 25.
Tab. 25. ESC DipSwitch Bank I4 setting

BKPV
I4 switches
Dec
Description
LHRC Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Compact
LHR Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator
LHRR Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Repeater
DipSwitch I4 /45678 must be set to 1 (Open or Off).

3)
SLOTID field for LHR

according to following Tab. 26.
Tab. 26. ESC DipSwitch Bank I1 setting
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SLOTID
I1 switches
Dec
10
11
Equip.
Type
Subrack
BB
Subrack TRI
SRTRI 1HET
SRTRI1HET
1+1
HET
SRBB 11
SRBB11
SRTRISD 1HET
SRTRISD1HET
SRTRI N
SRTRIN
N+1
SRBB N1
SRBBN1
SRTRISD N
SRTRISDN
SRTRI N
SRTRIN
N+0
SRBB N0
SRBBN0
SRTRISD N
SRTRISDN
STM0/
STM1
Space
Diversity
STM0
STM1
STM0
SD
STM1
SD
STM0
STM1
STM0
SD
STM1
SD
STM0
STM1
STM0
SD
STM1
SD
DipSwitch I1 /78 must be set to 1 (Open or Off).
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
175 / 542
Refer to:
chapter 52, and in particular para.52.4.8 on page 464, for the detailed functional description of the
unit
Fig. 86. herebelow shows the unit assembly view
Fig. 87. on page 177 depicts the unit front view :
for the front connectors (J1) (J2) usage, please refer to para.24.8.4 on page 230.
the usage of the front connector (J5) and leds in LINE O.W. area is explained in para.42.2 on
page 315.
the usage of leds in LINE TPH area is explained in para.42.3 on page 316.
the led (3) and pushbutton (4) are used only if the KIT LOUDSPEAKER is equipped (see
para.23.7.2 on page 202)
the other indications are selfexplaining.

For hardware setting options, please refer to MSZZQ documents relative to the Service unit
for the TC and DipSwitch physical position on the board and their meaning (refer to handbook
9600LSY Hardware setting documents REF.[K] on page 527).
N.B.
Optional subunit
ADDITIONAL VOICE
(TPHDEV)
J1
J2
J3
J4
SMA
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
J5
Fig. 86. Service unit assembly, front connector numbering and and internal view
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
176 / 542

23.3.3 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit operative information

J1
J2
PROTECTED WST 2 Mbit/s

N.B.1: in case of unprotected WST, these
connectors must not be used, but those
on Base Band shelf access panel (see
Fig. 110. on page 208)
J3
NOT OPERATIVE IN
CURRENT RELEASE
J4
(1) Indication of the No
of the Rx
protected channel
(1 digit display) N.B.2
(2) Manual operation
of N+1 logic
(yellow led) N.B.2
J5
(6) line busy (yellow)

(7) line free (green)
Telephone jack
N.B.3
(8) line busy (yellow) (*)

(9) line free (green) (*)
(3) Loudspeaker
activated (green)
(*)
N.B.3
operative only
with TPHDEV
equipped
(4) Pushbutton for

loudspeaker
activation/deactivation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(10) Card failure alarm (red)
For details, refer to Tab. 60. on page 338.

For usage, refer to para.42.2 on page 315 and para.42.3 on page 316.
N.B.2
N.B.3
Fig. 87. Service unit front view
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
177 / 542
Refer to:
point a ) on page 162 for physical composition and P/Ns.
chapter 52, and in particular:
para.52.4.4 on page 454, for the detailed functional description of the unit
para.52.4.6 on page 459, for the detailed functional description of the optical module
The following Fig. 88. shows:
the protection cap (fixed by a screw) that must be removed to access the unit front panel, and must
be repositioned after having connected the cables
the drawer (fixed by two screws) that must be removed only in case an optional a STM1 optical
module has to be equipped.
J1
J2
Protection cap
Drawer extractable for the insertion of a STM1 optical module

Fig. 88. RRACHANNEL assembly view and front connector numbering
23.3.4.1 Front connectors usage
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Refer to para.24.8.2 on page 230.

Other information in Fig. 89. on page 179.
None
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
178 / 542

23.3.4 RRACHANNEL unit operative information

STM1
ELECTR.
INTRF.
J1
yellow marker
INPUT
OUTPUT
green marker
Hole for drawer

extraction
(present also in
optical modules)
J2
ALS restart key
OPTIONAL
STM1 OPTICAL
MODULE
SC/PC
INPUT
OUTPUT
ALS restart key

FC/PC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 89. RRACHANNEL unit front view
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
179 / 542
Refer to:
point a ) on page 162 for physical composition and P/Ns.
unit
As far as the protection cap and extractable drawer are concerned, the assembly view is as in Fig. 88. on
page 178.
The front view is as in Fig. 89. on page 179, with a difference in the lower part, where there is the display
shown in Fig. 90. herebelow:
Indication of the No
of the Tx protected channel
(1 digit display) N.B.
Tx
For details, refer to Tab. 61. on page 338.
N.B.
Fig. 90. RRASTANDBY unit front view (particular)

Refer to para.24.8.2 on page 230.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
None
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
180 / 542

23.3.5 RRASTANDBY unit operative information

23.3.6 MODEM unit operative information

Refer to:
point b ) on page 163 for physical composition and P/Ns.
unit
The following Fig. 91. shows the protection cap (fixed by a screw) that must be removed to access the unit
front panel, and must be repositioned after having connected the cables:
J1
J2
J3
J4
J5
MODEM
mother
board
Protection cap
Fig. 91. Modem unit assembly view and front connector numbering
Other information in Fig. 92. on page 182 and Fig. 93. on page 183.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

They are on the mother board. Refer to MSZZQ documents (refer to handbook 9600LSY
Hardware setting documents REF.[K] on page 527) relative to the Modem unit for the TC and
DipSwitch physical position on the board and their meaning (choosing the unit type according
to the P/N . WARNING: there are different Modem units).
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
181 / 542
depicts the internal connections between IF2 and IF3 inputs and the corresponding CANCCOMB
submodules
describes the equipping rules of CANCCOMB submodules in the various configurations.
POS.A
IF INPUT MAIN
IF2 INPUT
POS.B
IF3 INPUT
STM0 CASE
CONFIGURATION
NO SPACE DIVERSITY
SPACE DIVERSITY
POS.A
POS.B
UNEQUIPPED
UNEQUIPPED
CANCCOMB STM0
UNEQUIPPED
N.B. : XPIC not envisaged with STM0
STM1 CASE
CONFIGURATION
POS.A
POS.B
UNEQUIPPED
UNEQUIPPED
SPACE DIVERSITY OR XPIC
CANCCOMB STM1
UNEQUIPPED
SPACE DIVERSITY AND XPIC
CANCCOMB STM1
CANCCOMB STM1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NO SPACE DIVERSITY AND NO XPIC
Fig. 92. Modem unit assembly internal view and CANCCOMB equipping rules
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
182 / 542

The following Fig. 92. :

Modulator output
J1
blue marker
Modulator output monitoring
red marker
Main demodulator input
IF2 input
J2
J3
J4
see Fig. 92.

on page 182
IF3 input
J5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 93. Modem unit front view
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
183 / 542
23.4 TRANSCEIVER unit operative information
previous para.22.3.4.2 and 23.4.1 for physical composition and P/Ns.
chapter 52, and in particular para.52.5 on page 469, for the detailed functional description of the
unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Composition of transceiver units
on page 185
Assembly views
on page 186
Internal composition
on page 187
Hardware settings
on page 189
Internal interconnection diagram
on page 190
Front connectors usage
on page 193
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
184 / 542

Refer to:
23.4.1 Composition of transceiver units

a)
TRI (Transmitter)
The transceiver units have different P/Ns for the following characteristics (N.B.):
frequency range
This P/N is comprehensive of the Transceiver box (see Fig. 94. on page 186) and the following
internal components (see Fig. 95. on page 187):
RT control
Amplifier
Up Converter
Delay Line
DC/DC Converter
together with the associated internal cabling and the cabling relevant to the connection of Rx and Tx
LOs.
This P/N does not include the LO, R and FR KIT components, that are defined as separate items.
Moreover, the transmitter (more precisely its RT control subunit) contains the fixed data that
specialize the transceiver for a specific frequency plan (for details, see para.31.2 on page 247).
b)

There are always two Local Oscillators modules inside a transceiver, one for the Rx section, the other
for the Tx section (see Fig. 95. on page 187).
The Local Oscillator modules have different P/Ns for the following characteristics (N.B.):
frequency range
possible application for a particular channel plan

Inside a TRI, these Local Oscillators must have the same P/N.
c)
R (Receiver module)
There can be one or two receiver modules inside a transceiver:
in the case the Transceiver is used without the Space Diversity configuration, there is only one
Receiver (named Main Receiver) as shown in Fig. 95. on page 187 and Fig. 96. on page 188,
and the unit front connectors are those depicted in Fig. 100. on page 193;
in the case the Transceiver is used with the Space Diversity configuration, two Receivers
(respectively named Main Receiver and Diversity Receiver) are equipped as shown in
Fig. 97. on page 188 and Fig. 98. on page 189, and the unit front connectors are those depicted
in Fig. 101. on page 194.
The Receiver Modules have different P/Ns for the following characteristics (N.B.):
frequency range
The Receiver P/N includes the associated internal cabling.
Inside a TRI, the Main Receiver and Diversity Receiver must have the same P/N.
d)

Only in case of Frequency Reuse systems:
one Frequency Reuse kit is equipped inside the transceiver housing the Rx Local Oscillator
defined as Master, as depicted in Fig. 96. on page 188 and Fig. 98. on page 189.
inside the transceiver housing the Rx Local Oscillator defined as Slave, the Frequency Reuse
kit is not equipped .
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Frequency Reuse kit has the same P/N for all frequency bands.
The Frequency Reuse kit P/N includes the module and the associated internal cabling.
The P/Ns of TRI units and modules must belong to the same Frequency Plan group: please refer
to the specific chapter between those listed in Tab. 46. on page 246.
N.B.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
185 / 542

23.4.2 Assembly views
COVER PLATE A TO
REMOVE FOR
INTERNAL SERVICE
(HARDWARE SETTING
OR REPAIR).
Arrows show screws
for cover remove/fix.
COVER PLATE B
NEVER TO
BE REMOVED
TRI P/N and Remote Inventory
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 94. Transceiver assembly physical views
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
186 / 542
23.4.3 Internal composition

DIVERSITY
FREQUENCY REUSE
USAGE
TR HOUSING
LO MASTER
LO SLAVE
N
Y
INTERNAL COMPONENTS
Fig. 95. herebelow
Fig. 96. on page 188, in addition to those shown in Fig. 95.
Fig. 95. herebelow
LO MASTER
LO SLAVE
MAIN RECEIVER
PLATE COVERING
MAIN RECEIVER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DC/DC CONVERTER
RX LOCAL
OSCILLATOR
TX LOCAL
OSCILLATOR
RT CONTROL
DELAY LINE
UP CONVERTER
AMPLIFIER
Fig. 95. Transceiver internal view: standard components and Main Receiver
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
187 / 542

TR.FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
Fig. 96. Transceiver internal view: without Diversity Receiver and with TR.Frequency Reuse Kit
DIVERSITY RECEIVER
MAIN RECEIVER
(inside)
The Diversity Receiver is mounted on the PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER (see
Fig. 95. page 187)
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 97. Transceiver internal view: with Diversity Receiver and without TR.Frequency Reuse Kit
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
188 / 542
TR.FREQUENCY REUSE KIT

DIVERSITY RECEIVER
MAIN RECEIVER
(inside)
The Diversity Receiver is mounted on the PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER (see
Fig. 95. page 187)
N.B.
Fig. 98. Transceiver internal view: with Diversity Receiver and with TR.Frequency Reuse Kit
23.4.4 Hardware settings
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
They are on subunit RT CONTROL (see Fig. 123. on page 249) and are accessible removing
the cover plate A depicted in Fig. 94. on page 186. Please refer to para.31.3 on page 248
for detailed description of setting options.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
189 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
N.B.
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542

23.4.5 Internal interconnection diagram
Letters denote particulars enlarged on following pages
Fig. 99. Transceiver internal connection diagram
05
190 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
continues ..
Enlarged particulars of Fig. 99. page 190
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
191 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
955.203.292 Q
.. continues
Enlarged particulars of Fig. 99. page 190
05
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
192 / 542
23.4.6 Front connectors usage

DIVERSITY
DESCRIPTION
Fig. 100. herebelow
Fig. 101. on page 194
Y or N
Fig. 102. on page 195 (meaning of access points)
For connection with Modem and Branching, refer to para.24.7 on page 221.
N.B.
J9
J10
J11
J12
M2
J5
I1
J6
J7
J8
J13
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
J14
Fig. 100. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR without Rx diversity)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
193 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
J1
ED
J2
J10
J3
J11
J4
J12
M1
955.203.292 Q
M2
J5
I1
3DB 02839 AA AA
542

J9
J6
J7
J8
J13
J14
Fig. 101. Transceiver front connector numbering (TR with Rx diversity)
05
194 / 542
Rx diversity
section N.B.1
J1
J2
J3
J4
Input RF Rx diversity
Rx main
section
Input RF Rx main
J9
Output 1 IF Rx divers.
red marker
Output 1 IF Rx main J10
Output 2 IF Rx divers.
Output 2 IF Rx main J11
Output IF Rx divers.
monitoring
M1
Output IF Rx main
monitoring
N.B.2
N.B.2
blue marker
J5
I1
(1) Unit switched on

(green)
LO Rx Remote
(Input or Output)
J6
M2
ON/OFF switch
Input IF Tx
J12
J7 LO Rx monitoring
(2) OR of internal alarms
(red)
J8 LO Tx monitoring
N.B.1 Rx diversity sections elements are

present only in units equipped with Rx
diversity (see Fig. 101. on page 194)
N.B.2 Socket to connect a recording instrument,
to monitor the Rx input field value
(see Fig. 129. on page 320)
RF Tx output
monitoring
J13
RF Tx output
J14
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 102. Transceiver front view meaning of access points
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
195 / 542
23.5.1 Branching drawings and BranchingTransceivers connections

Detailed block diagrams of branching in the various configurations are given in chapter 21 starting on
page 135.
Detailed branching drawings, organized per frequency bands and type (with/without Frequency
Reuse/Diversity) are given in the handbook 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Branching drawings REF.[B]
on page 524.
These drawings indicate also the connections among the branching and the Transceivers.
As far as the number of channels are concerned, such drawings show only some of the possible
configurations.
23.5.2 Branching Front Plate Kit (Rx branching area)

Tab. 27. Branching Front Plate Kit equipping rules
SLOT IN RACK (see Fig. 71. on page 152)
BRANCHING FRONT PLATE KIT

Equipping this kit, after having set up the connections involved in Rx branching area, is
mandatory in operating conditions to ensure correct equipment ventilation.
UNIT
P/N
Label for
Remote
Inventory

KIT
[34]
(F)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 103. Branching Front Plate Kit
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
196 / 542

23.5 Branching
23.6 FANS SHELF and FANS assembled unit operative information

Please refer to para.22.3.5 on page 166 for equipping rules.

Fig. 104. herebelow and Fig. 105. on page 198 show the physical views of the FANS shelf and FANSL unit
and substitutive COVER assemblies.
FANS SHELF
FRONT PLATE
COVER
(must be equipped in not used
FANS ASSEMBLED slots to
guarantee correct ventilation)
FANS ASSEMBLED
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 104. FANS SHELF, FANS ASSEMBLED and substitutive COVER assembly views
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
197 / 542

Hole for unit extraction
(1) LED
Can Bus
Connector
M3
M1
Power supply input
DIPSWITCH
I
O
O
I
M2
Can Bus
Connector
I1
I2
Power supply input
M4
Legend on page 199

Fig. 105. Front view of FANS SHELF equipped with both FANS ASSEMBLED units
Hardware settings
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
see point c ) on page 199
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
198 / 542
Legend for Fig. 105. :

a)
(M1) (M4) Power supply connectors :

Usage and connection: in case your system is equipped with the:
Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook (REF.[L] on page 527)
former version TRU P/N 3DB00734AA (factory P/N 593.230.032), please make
reference to the Appendix B on page 511.
Pinout:
Pins
b)
c)
d)
ED
Meaning
A1
+BATT
+BATTERY
A2
GND
Ground
A3
BATT
Battery
(M2) (M3) CANBUS connectors:

see Tab. 32. on page 219
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
new enhanced TRU (P/N REF.[3] in Tab. 11. on page 146), please make reference to the:
(I1) (I2) DIPSWITCHES : to be set according to the position in the rack:

I1
I2
Subrack No
Usage
Baseband shelf
future use
ADM shelf
future use
LED (red): indicating a failure in the FANS ASSEMBLED unit
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
199 / 542
23.7 Boards of TRU shelf

23.7.1 Top Rack Unit operative information

The T.R.U. subrack is located at the rack top area of the rack and appears as follows:
RED (1)
RED (2)
YELLOW
GREEN
1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B
BREAKERS
BATTERY A
BREAKERS
BATTERY B
Fig. 106. Top Rack Unit front view

The main functions are:
a)
Power supply distribution to all the functional blocks present in the rack.
It is possible to distribute the two battery voltages up to 6 functional blocks installed into the rack.
All the output voltages are protected by automatic circuit breakers (up to 12).
In general, the choice of the breakers, existing also for lower current ranges, has to be chosen
following the effective current consumption needed by the subracks.
Maximum current supplied by each battery shall not exceed 60 A.
Tab. 28. TRU breaker utilization in 9600 LSY/LHR
BREAKER
NUMBER
USAGE
MAX
ABSORBED
POWER (W)
NOMINAL
ABSORBED
CURRENT (A)
CIRCUIT
BREAKER
(A)
1A and 1B
transceiver slot 1 to 5
340
12.75
20
2A and 2B
transceiver slot 6 to 10
340
12.75
20
3A and 3B
baseband subrack
135
5.06
10
4A and 4B
ADM 1650 SMC
5A and 5B
FANS for BB subrack
6A and 6B
FANS for ADM subrack
N.B.
40
1.5
N.B.
N.B. refer to Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook REF.[L] on page 527
N.B.
The value of circuit breakers is determined as follows:
Circuit Breaker (A) = [ (Max Absorbed Power (W)) / (Nominal Battery Voltage (48V)) * 1.5 * 1.2]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For circuit breaker and Fuserbreaker P/Ns see REF.[4] in Tab. 11. on page 146
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
200 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

b)
Station alarm management

A rack lamp unit is inserted in the TRU box to display the rack alarm general indications.
For the lamp meaning description, please refer to para.53.3 on page 482.
c)
Breaker failure alarm management

An alarm is embedded inside each breaker unit and is automatically activated in case of breaker
failure. The notification to these alarms is obtained by utilization of housekeeping alarms that can be
detected either in the local or remote stations on ECT or in the supervision centre.
d)
Extension Q2 bus unit or rack alarm distribution unit (optional units, in alternative).
Detailed information regarding TRU connectors, installation, connections with LHR shelves, please refer
to the Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook REF.[L] on page 527
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
201 / 542
23.7.2 Kit Loudspeaker operative information
The Kit Loudspeaker is an optional unit to be inserted inside TRU and connected to the system as depicted
in Fig. 107. herebelow.
Refer to para.22.3.3.1.6 on page 164 for physical composition and P/Ns.
To equip the Kit, remove the TRU

plate (4 screws) and fix the kit
with the same screws
To be connected to
BB connector M190
(see Fig. 109. on page
206)
Fig. 107. Kit Loudspeaker

None
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
23.7.2.3 Usage
With reference to Fig. 87. on page 177 (Service unit front view):
Pushbutton (4) activates/deactivates the loudspeaker
Green led (3) on indicates the loudspeaker activation.

For further information, please refer to the Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook
REF.[L] on page 527
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
202 / 542

23.7.2.1 Installation

23.8 Additional Housekeeping unit operative information

Refer to:
unit
M1
M2
(1) LED
Fig. 108. Additional Housekeeping unit assembly view
23.8.1 Legend and connectors usage
a)
(M1) SUBD25 pins female connector pinout: see Tab. 45. on page 241.
b)
(M2) SUBD9 pins male connector: see Tab. 34. on page 220.
c)
LED (red): indicates the failure of Additional Housekeeping unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
None
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
203 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
204 / 542

24 SYSTEM CABLING
24.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the 9600LSYLHR system cabling with the following information:
location of access points for cabling, with the exception of those present on the units front plates,
that are described in chapter 23 on page 167.
types of cables used for internal connections
pointtopoint cabling of internal connections
description of pinout of connectors for external connections.
This chapter does not describe:
the effective cable routing inside the equipment for internal connections. Notice that the
internal connections must be done taking into account the need of extracting any board
without removing cables not strictly relevant to it.
the kinds of cables used for external connections

For detailed installation information like cable P/Ns, connectors, cabling rules, etc.,
please refer to the:
LHR Installation Handbook (REF.[C] on page 524)

and
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Shelves connectors,
TRU connectors,
on page 206
Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout,

on page 206
Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST connectors layout,

on page 208
Transceiver shelf connectors,

on page 209
Cable kits and cable types,
on page 211
Power supply distribution connections,
on page 218
Connections between TRU and input housekeepings,
on page 218
Signal connections between shelves,
on page 219
ModemTransceiverBranching connections,
on page 221
External interfaces,
Power Line Interface,
SDH interfaces,
Input / Output Unprotected WST,
Input / Output Protected WST,
Auxiliary Channels,
Management interfaces,
Station Alarms,
Summarizing / Housekeeping alarms,
General characteristics,
Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms,
Input Housekeeping alarms,

on page 230
on page 230
on page 230
on page 230
on page 231
on page 235
on page 236
on page 236
on page 237
on page 240
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
205 / 542
24.2.1 TRU connectors

In case your system is equipped with the:

former version TRU P/N 3DB00734AA (factory P/N 593.230.032), please make reference to the
Appendix B on page 511.
24.2.2 Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout
M179 M180
M194
M187
M185 M193
M183
M186
M192
M190
M191 M182
M188 M184
M189
Legend: see Tab. 29. on page 207

Dot in connector front view indicates Pin 1
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 109. Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors layout
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
206 / 542

24.2 Shelves connectors
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Tab. 29. Base Band shelf access panel: SUBD connectors usage
CONN. CONN. TYPE
SIGNALS
USAGE
Can 0 B.B Terminator
or
p
SUBD9 pins
female
M179
ED
see Fig. 118. on page 217
Additional Housekeeping
M180
SUBD25 pins female
Can Bus RT
M182
SUBD25 pins female
Aux channel G703 and RS232
see Tab. 35. on page 231 and

Tab. 36. on page 232
M183
SUBD25 pins female
Out Remote alarms

(GA21GA40)
M184
SUBD9 pins male
Rack lamps
M185
SUBD25 pins female
Input Housekeeping
M186
SUBD25 pins female
RT missing connections
M187
SUBD9 pins female
Can 0 bus extension toward

FAN Shelf 0
M188
SUBD9 pins female
CAN 1 (Download) Terminator
M189
SUBD9 pins female
CAN 1 (Download) Terminator
M190
SUBD25 pins female
Out party line OW,TPH and

loudspeaker

M191
SUBD25 pins female
Aux channel V11

M192
SUBD25 pins female
Out Housekeeping and

Remote alarms (GA41GA48)
M193
SUBD25 pins female
Out Remote alarms

(GA1GA20)
M194
SUBD25 pins female
Rel command HST
for future use
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
207 / 542
green markers
OUT
J1
IN
J2
OUT
J3
IN
J4
CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
yellow markers
In current release only connectors (J1) and (J2) are used for the connection of the 2Mbit/s WST
of the corresponding channel. Connectors (J3) and (J4) are not used.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 110. Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST front connector layout and numbering
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
208 / 542

24.2.3 Base Band shelf access panel: 2Mb/s WST connector layout

24.2.4 Transceiver shelf connectors
M2
M4
M5
M7
M6
BATT.A
M3
M1
BATT.A
BATT.B
FOR TRANCEIVERS
04
BATT.B
FOR TRANCEIVERS
59
Legend on page 210
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 111. Transceiver shelf connector numbering at reartop side
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
209 / 542

Power supply connectors (M2)
(M3) (M5) (M6) :
Usage and connection: see para.24.4 on page 218
Pinout:
Pins

a)
Meaning
+BATT
+BATTERY
A2
GND
Ground
A3
BATT
Battery
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A1
A
A3
A1
b)
(M1) (M4) connectors: for usage see Tab. 31. on page 219.
c)
(M7) connector: CAN RT bus terminated by a CAN bus terminator (see Fig. 118.
ED
on page 217).
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
210 / 542

24.3 Cable kits and cable types

The following Tab. 30. lists the cable kits envisaged for 9600LSY system and indicates the cable types
used in such kits, the drawing of which are given in the associated figures.
Notes for figures:
a)
b)
c)
the writings on cable connectors (like (A1) , (A2) , etc.) are used as CABLE SIDE information in the
following paragraphs, to point out the correct cable connections;
some labels are colored. In conjunction with the colored markers present on some units, this
facilitates cabling, matching the colour on cable label with that of colored marker on the unit front
plate;
in the CannonCannon cables the pin connection is 1:1 (i.e. pin 1 left connected to pin 1 right, pin
2 left connected to pin 2 right, etc.).
Tab. 30. Cable kits and cable types

P/N (REF. in
Tab. 11. on
page 146)
CABLE
TYPES
CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS
REF.[9]
A, B, C, D, E
Fig. 112. page 212
CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL NO SPACE

DIV.
REF.[10]
F, G
Fig. 113. page 213
CABLE KIT 1 CHANNEL WITH SPACE

DIV
REF.[11]
Fig. 113. page 213
CABLE KIT FOR REUSE (1 RACK)
REF.[12]
K, N, P
Fig. 114. page 214
CABLE KIT FOR

REUSE (2 RACKS) (N.B.1)
REF.[13]
KK, NN, PP
Fig. 115. page 215
CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL

FOR WMSN
REF [14]
REF.[14]
A, D
Fig. 112. page 212
Fig. 117. page 217
FANS UNIT CABLE KIT
REF.[15]
REF [15]
Fig. 112. page 212
Fig. 116. page 216
FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT
REF [16]
REF.[16]
Fig. 112. page 212
Fig. 116. page 216
ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING
REF.[29]
Fig. 112. page 212
Fig. 118. page 217
CABLE KIT
Canbus Terminator (N.B.2)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
1
2
FIGURE
the use of this kit is not specified in current edition of this handbook.
Each Can bus line must be terminated by a plug with two load resistors (120 ohm resistors
mounted on SUBD9 pins male connectors inserted on female connectors).
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
211 / 542

A: 3pins female for power supply
A1
N.B.
A2
B: 3pins female 450 for power supply
B1
B2
N.B.
C: 9pins Cannon male / 9pins Cannon male
C2
N.B.
C1
D: 9pins Cannon female / 9pins Cannon male
D2
D1
N.B.
E: 25pins Cannon male / 25pins Cannon male
E1
E2
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
Labelling depending on cable usage
N.B.
Fig. 112. System cabling: types of used cables (A, B, C, D, E)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
212 / 542

F: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
RT n
J10
F1
signal flow
MODEM n
J3
F2
red label
blue label
G: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
RT n
J5
G1
signal flow
red label
MODEM n
J1
G2
blue label
H: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
RT n
J2
H1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
white label
signal flow
MODEM n
J4
H2
white label
Fig. 113. System cabling: types of used cables (F, G, H)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
213 / 542
RT n
J11 V (H)
K1
signal flow
white label
RT n
J11 H (V)
MODEM n
J4 H (V)

K: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
K2
white label
signal flow
white label
MODEM n
J4 V (H)
white label
P: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
RT n
J11 V (H)
P1
signal flow
white label
RT n
J11 H (V)
MODEM n
J5 H (V)
P2
white label
signal flow
white label
MODEM n
J5 V (H)
white label
N: SMA.M. 900 / SMA.M. 900
RT n
J6 H (V)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N1
white label
signal flow
RT n
J6 V (H)
white label
N2
Fig. 114. System cabling: types of used cables (K, N, P)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
214 / 542

KK: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
RT n
J11 V (H)
(RACK1)
KK1
signal flow
white label
RT n
J11 H (V)
(RACK1)
MODEM n
J4 H (V)
(RACK2)
KK2
white label
signal flow
white label
MODEM n
J4 V (H)
(RACK2)
white label
PP: Siem.M. 1.02.3 900 / Siem.M. 1.02.3 900
RT n
J11 V (H)
(RACK1)
PP1
signal flow
white label
RT n
J11 H (V)
(RACK1)
MODEM n
J5 H (V)
(RACK2)
PP2
white label
signal flow
white label
MODEM n
J5 V (H)
(RACK2)
white label
NN: SMA.M. 900 / SMA.M. 900
RT n
J6 H (V)
(RACK1)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NN1
white label
signal flow
RT n
J6 V (H)
(RACK2)
white label
NN2
Fig. 115. System cabling: types of used cables (KK, NN, PP)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
215 / 542

Q: 9pins Cannon male 300 / 9pins Cannon male
Q2
Q1
R: 9pins Cannon male 300 / 9pins Cannon male 300
R2
R1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 116. System cabling: types of used cables (Q, R)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
216 / 542
S: 1channel extension
S1
signal flow
S2
Sub.ADM STM n
J1
Sub.ADM STM n
J2
yellow label
green label
RRA n
J2
yellow label
S3
signal flow
RRA n
J1
green label
S4
Fig. 117. System cabling: types of used cables (S)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
T: CANbus terminator
Fig. 118. System cabling: types of used cables (T)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
217 / 542
24.4 Power supply distribution connections
24.5 Connections between TRU and input housekeepings

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
former version TRU P/N 3DB00734AA (factory P/N 593.230.032), no connections of this type are
envisaged.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
218 / 542

24.6 Signal connections between shelves

For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.24.3 on page
211.

N.B.
Tab. 31. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS
CABLE 1st. SIDE
N.
CABLE
SIDE
E1
Sub. RT / M4
(N.B.1)
E2
Sub. BB / M186
(N.B.2)
C1
Sub. RT / M1
(N.B.1)
C2
Sub. BB / M180
(N.B.2)
D1
Sub. BB / M184
(N.B.2)
D2
TRU Alarm ext. / M7 (N.B.3)
LABEL & CONNECTION
CABLE
SIDE
LABEL & CONNECTION
Tab. 32. Signal connections: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT and FANS UNIT
EXTENSION CABLE KIT
a)
Configuration: BB FAN shelf only

CABLE 1st. SIDE
CABLE 2nd SIDE
CABLE
TYPE
N.
CABLE
SIDE
LABEL & CONNECTION
CABLE
SIDE
Q1
Fans Unit down (up) / M2

(N.B.4)
Q2
Sub. BB / M187

(N.B.4)
b)
LABEL & CONNECTION

(N.B.2)
Configuration: BB FAN shelf + ADM FAN shelf

CABLE 1st. SIDE
CABLE 2nd SIDE
CABLE
TYPE
N.
CABLE
SIDE
LABEL & CONNECTION
CABLE
SIDE
Q1

(N.B.4)
Q2
Sub. BB / M187
R1

(N.B.4)
R2

(N.B.5)

(N.B.5)
N.B.
1
2
3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
CABLE 2nd SIDE
CABLE
TYPE
ED
LABEL & CONNECTION

(N.B.2)

in case your system is equipped with the:
connected to connectors M2/M3 (see Fig. 105. page 198) of BBs FANS shelf
(see POS.(E) in Fig. 71. on page 152)
connected to connectors M2/M3 (see Fig. 105. page 198) of ADMs FANS shelf
(see POS.(L) in Fig. 71. on page 152)
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
219 / 542
CABLE 1st. SIDE
CABLE
TYPE
N.
CABLE
SIDE
D1
ADM CONGI / C3
N.B.
CABLE 2nd SIDE

CABLE
SIDE
LABEL & CONNECTION
(N.B.1)
D2
TRU Alarm ext. / M6 (N.B.2)
S1
Sub.ADM STMn / J1 (N.B.1)
S4
RRAn / J2
(N.B.3)
S2
Sub.ADM STMn / J2 (N.B.1)
S3
RRAn / J1
(N.B.3)
LABEL & CONNECTION
refer to 1650SMC documentation

in case your system is equipped with the:
1
2
Tab. 34. Signal connections: Cables belonging to ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING

N.
CABLE
SIDE
D1
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
CABLE 1st. SIDE
CABLE
TYPE
ED
1
2
CABLE 2nd SIDE
LABEL & CONNECTION

Housek. / M2
(N.B.1)
CABLE
SIDE
D2
LABEL & CONNECTION

Sub. BB / M179
(N.B.2)

05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
220 / 542

Tab. 33. Signal connections: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL FOR
WMSN
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

24.7 ModemTransceiverBranching connections

The connections among Modems, Transceivers and Branching depend on the following possible
configurations:
case a ) : without Reuse and without Diversity

see page 222
case b ) : without Reuse and with Diversity

see page 224
case c ) : with Reuse and without Diversity

see page 226
case d ) : with Reuse and with Diversity

see page 228
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
221 / 542
a)
Without Reuse and without Diversity
In this figure, the writings near the arrows (that show the signal direction) on the cable indicate the
CABLE TYPE and the CABLE SIDE information.
E.g. G2 near MODEM J1 means that:
cable type G is used
and that its side G2 has to be connected to MODEMs connector J1
signal flows out from connector J1

For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.24.3 on
page 211.
N.B.
To locate the front connectors indicated in such figure, use:
for MODEM unit: Fig. 93. on page 183
for TRANSCEIVER unit: Fig. 100. on page 193
For the connections between TRANSCEIVER unit and Rx / Tx Branching, refer to documents cited
in para.23.5.1 on page 196.
Requirements:
MODEM does not need any CANCCOMB module (see Fig. 92. on page 182)
TRANSCEIVER:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
internal components: standard configuration (see Fig. 95. on page 187).
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
222 / 542

See Fig. 119. on page 223.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TX
BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
RX
BRANCHING
BASE BAND SHELF

G2
MODEM n
ED
G1
955.203.292 Q
J1
J2
J3
J14
F2
J4
J5
J9
J10
F1
J11
J5
J6
TRANSCEIVER n
Fig. 119. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: without Reuse and without Diversity
05
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
223 / 542
b)
Without Reuse and with Diversity

page 211.
N.B.
Requirements:
MODEM needs one CANCCOMB module (see Fig. 92. on page 182)
TRANSCEIVER:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
internal components: configuration with Diversity Receiver, in addition to standard

components (see Fig. 97. on page 188).
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
224 / 542

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TX
BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
RX
BRANCHING
BASE BAND SHELF

G2
MODEM n
ED
J1
J2
J3
H2
H1
G1
J14
955.203.292 Q
F2
J4
J5
J1
J9
J2
J10
J3
J11
F1
J5
J6
TRANSCEIVER n
Fig. 120. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: without Reuse and with Diversity
05
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
225 / 542
c)
With Reuse and without Diversity

page 211.
N.B.
The connections must be done between two contiguous pairs of channels, i.e.:
(MODEM 0 + TRANSCEIVER 0) connected to (MODEM 1 + TRANSCEIVER 1)
....

Requirements:
both MODEMs need one CANCCOMB module (see Fig. 92. on page 182)
TRANSCEIVERs: the two transceivers are configured differently from each other:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
one Transceiver as follows:
internal components: configuration with TR.Frequency Reuse Kit, in addition to

standard components (see Fig. 96. on page 188)
hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator must be configured as MASTER
the other Transceiver as follows:
internal components: standard configuration (see Fig. 95. on page 187)
hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator must be configured as SLAVE
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
226 / 542

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TX
BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
ED
F2
J4
J10
K1
955.203.292 Q
J11
G1
N1
J5
J6
J14
TRANSCEIVER V (H)
BASE BAND SHELF
G2
TRANSCEIVER H (V)
RX
BRANCHING

MODEM EVEN
H (V)
MODEM EVEN +1
V (H)
J1
J1
J2
J2
J3
J3
K2
K2
J5
J9
J6
G2
F2
J4
J5
J9
F1
J10
F1
J11
K1
J5
G1
N2
J14
Fig. 121. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: with Reuse and without Diversity
05
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
227 / 542
d)
With Reuse and with Diversity

page 211.
N.B.
The connections must be done between two contiguous pairs of channels, i.e.:
....

Requirements:
both MODEMs need two CANCCOMB modules (see Fig. 92. on page 182)
TRANSCEIVERs: the two transceivers are configured differently from each other:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
one Transceiver as follows:
internal components: configuration with Diversity Receiver and with

TR.Frequency Reuse Kit, in addition to standard components (see Fig. 98. on page
189)
hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator must be configured as MASTER
the other Transceiver as follows:
internal components: configuration with Diversity Receiver, in addition to standard

components (see Fig. 97. on page 188)
hardware setting: the Rx Local Oscillator must be configured as SLAVE
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
228 / 542

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TX
BRANCHING
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
ED
F2
H2
F1
H1
P1
G1
N1
955.203.292 Q
J1
J9
J1
J9
J2
J10
J2
J10
J3
J11
J3
J11
J5
J6
J14
TRANSCEIVER V (H)
BASE BAND SHELF
G2
TRANSCEIVER H (V)
RX
BRANCHING

MODEM EVEN
H (V)
MODEM EVEN +1
V (H)
F2
J1
J1
J2
J2
J3
J3
J4
J4
J5
P2
P2
G2
H2
J5
H1
F1
P1
J5
G1
J6
N2
J14
Fig. 122. ModemTransceiverBranching connections: with Reuse and with Diversity
05
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
229 / 542
24.8.1 Power Line Interface

The Power Line interface is located on the TRU unit; in case your system is equipped with the:
The main characteristics are reported in para.13.2.3 on page 91.

24.8.2 SDH interfaces
The SDH interfaces (line side) can be electrical or optical.
Their access is on the front panel of units RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY (1 channel per unit); see
para.23.3.4 on page 178 (RRACHANNEL), and para.23.3.5 on page 180 (RRASTANDBY).
Electrical interfaces
The connector used is Siemens, 1.0/2.3 75ohm male coax.
Optical interfaces
The connector used is SC/PC or FC/PC.
For Optical Safety refer to para.13.8 on page 102.
Maximum cables number: N.8 inputs and N.8 outputs.

24.8.3 Input / Output Unprotected WST
The Subrack Access Area provides external access for WST channels by Siemens connectors, 1.0/2.3
75ohm male coax.
Maximum cables number: N.8 inputs and N.8 outputs on BaseBand Subrack access area; see
24.8.4 Input / Output Protected WST
Input /Output WST protected is available on Service unit (see para.23.3.3 on page 176)
The connector used is Siemens 1.0/2.3 75ohm male coax.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Maximum cables number: N.1 input and N.1 output.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
230 / 542

24.8 External interfaces

24.8.5 Auxiliary Channels

The Subrack Access Area provides external access for auxiliary channels by three SUBD 25 pins female
connectors specified in the following.
This table sums up the interfaces available:
Tab. 35. Summary of auxiliary channels
N.
bit/s
Format
inserted/
extracted
9600
asynchronous
V24/V28
(selectable)
RSOH/RFCOH
64k
G703
RSOH/RFCOH
64k
3
or
2+1
RSOH/RFCOH
V11
64K/128K
RSOH/RFCOH
(128 K) only
RFCOH
Speech
telephonic
RSOH/RFCOH
Speech
I/O 3dBm
RSOH/RFCOH
Speech
I/O 3dBm
RFCOH
Speech
Out 400 mW
4 ohm
EOW
(only extract)
64k
G703
RFCOH or ADM
Connector
wires
M182 on BB access
area. See
Tab. 36. on page
232
Notes
2
12
M191 on BB access
area. See
Tab. 38. on page
234
24
(SW configurable)
connected to 1 or
2 bytes
RJ11
Connector (J5) on
Service Unit
(Fig. 87. page 177)
EOW
12
Analog
Party line
TPH
Available on
Remote Unit
to loudspeaker
TPH to ADM
M190 on BB access
area. See
T b 37
Tab.
37. on page
233
M182 on BB access
area. See
Tab. 36. on page
232
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
231 / 542
Tab. 36. Aux channel G703 and RS232 BB shelfs M182 connector pinout
M182 : SUBD25 pins female
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
G703 TX+ (A)
64 kb data channel output port A
G703 RX+ (A)
64 kb data channel input port A
G703 TX+ (B)
64 kb data channel output port B
G703 RX+ (B)
64 kb data channel input port B
G703 TX+ (C)
64 kb data channel output port C
G703 RX+ (C)
64 kb data channel input port C
DATI 9600 TX
9.6 kb data channel output
10
G703 TX+ TPH
64 kb data channel output for VOAD
11
G703 RX+ TPH
64 kb data channel input for VOAD

PIN
7
8
9
14
12
25
13
13
GND
14
G703 TX (A)
64 kb data channel output port A
15
G703 RX (A)
64 kb data channel input port A
16
G703 TX (B)
64 kb data channel output port B
17
G703 RX (B)
64 kb data channel input port B
18
G703 TX (C)
64 kb data channel output port C
19
G703 RX (C)
64 kb data channel input port C
DATI 9600 RX
9.6 kb data channel input
23
G703 TX TPH
64 kb data channel output for VOAD
24
G703 RX TPH
64 kb data channel input for VOAD
20
21
22
25
Connector position in Fig. 109. on page 206.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
232 / 542
Tab. 37. Out party line OW, TPH and loudspeaker BB shelfs M190 connector pinout
PIN
14
25
13
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
VF TX+ A
analog party line output path A
VF TX+ B
analog party line output path B
VF TX+ C
analog party line output path C
VF RX+ A
analog party line input path A
VF RX+ B
analog party line input path B
VF RX+ C
analog party line input path C
WIRE A TPH
output telephone (TPH)
VF TX+ A TPH
analog party line output path B VOAD
VF TX+ B TPH
analog party line output path A VOAD
10
VF RX+ A TPH
analog party line input path B VOAD
11
VF RX+ B TPH
analog party line input path A VOAD
12
LOUDSPEAKER +
output loudspeaker positive
13
GND
14
VF TX A
analog party line output path A
15
VF TX B
analog party line output path B
16
VF TX C
analog party line output path C
17
VF RX A
analog party line input path A
18
VF RX B
analog party line input path B
19
VF RX C
analog party line input path C
20
WIRE B TPH
output telephone (TPH)
21
VF TX A TPH
analog party line output path A VOAD
22
VF TX B TPH
analog party line output path B VOAD
23
VF RX A TPH
analog party line input path A VOAD
24
VF RX B TPH
analog party line input path B VOAD
25
LOUDSPEAKER
output loudspeaker negative
N.B.
ED
SIGNAL NAME
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
233 / 542
Tab. 38. Aux channel V11 BB shelfs M191 connector pinout

14
25
13
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
DATI+ V11 TX (A)
64 kb data channel positive output port A
CK+ V11 TX (A)
TX clock positive port A
DATI+ V11 RX (A)
64 kb data channel positive input port A
DATI+ V11 TX (B)
64 kb data channel positive output port B
CK+ V11 TX (B)
TX clock positive port B
DATI+ V11 RX (B)
64 kb data channel positive input port B
DATI+ V11 TX (C)
64 kb data channel positive output port C
CK+ V11 X (C)
TX clock positive port C
DATI+ V11 RX (C)
64 kb data channel positive input port C
10
DATI+ V11 TX (D)
64 kb data channel positive output port D
11
CK+ V11 TX (D)
TX clock positive port D
12
DATI+ V11 RX (D)
64 kb data channel positive input port D
13
GND
14
DATI V11 TX (A)
64 kb data channel negative output port A
15
CK V11 TX (A)
TX clock negative port A
16
DATI V11 RX (A)
64 kb data channel negative input port A
17
DATI V11 TX (B)
64 kb data channel negative output port B
18
CK V11 TX (B)
TX clock negative port B
19
DATI V11 RX (B)
64 kb data channel negative input port B
20
DATI V11 TX (C)
64 kb data channel negative output port C
21
CK V11 TX (C)
TX clock negative port C
22
DATI V11 RX (C)
64 kb data channel negative input port C
23
DATI V11 TX (D)
64 kb data channel negative output port D
24
CK V11 TX (D)
TX clock negative port D
25
DATI V11 RX (D)
64 kb data channel negative input port D
N.B.
ED
SIGNAL NAME

PIN
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
234 / 542
24.8.6 Management interfaces

The System Controller unit (see Fig. 85. on page 173) provides the following external access points:
I/0 for TMN (QB3)
BNC connector 10BASE2
RJ45 connector 10BASET and EC Debug Network or EC local debug:

Tab. 39. RJ45 Connector for 10baseT interface on System Controller unit
Pin
Signal
TPTXP
TPTXN
TPRXP
4
5
6
TPRXN
7
8
GND
Craft terminal interface (F)

The connection for F interface (RS232 to local PC) is provided on ESC unit through a standard SUB
9pin female connector:
Tab. 40. RS232 for F interface connection table
PAIR
WIRE
RS232
(SAM side)
RJ45
(PC side)
Not used
Not used
White / Blue ring
Not used
Not used
Blue
Not used
Not used
White / Green ring
Green
Not used
Not used
White / Brown ring
Not used
Not used
Brown
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
COLOR
White / Orange ring

Orange
The special cable needed to connect the CRAFT TERMINAL to the system is supplied with
the equipment.
Can Bus and RC debug local access by RJ45

for Alcatel internal use only.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
235 / 542
24.8.7 Station Alarms
For further information, please refer to para.53.3 on page 482.

24.8.8 Summarizing / Housekeeping alarms
24.8.8.1 General characteristics
Standard Housekeeping
I/O
Housekeeping external unit

N
I/O
Input (station alarms)
22
Input (station alarms)
18 (additional)
Output (station controls)
48
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The interface characteristics here indicated apply both to summarizing alarms and housekeeping alarms:
The presence of active alarm correspond to closed relay contact with a common wire available to
the customer.
Electrical characteristics (V is voltage between the warm and the common wires) are:
ED
open contact 72 V 2V
I 0.2mA
closed contact 2 V <= 0V
I 50mA
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
236 / 542

Station alarm interface access is provided in TRU unit; in case your system is equipped with the:

24.8.8.2 Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms

Summarizing and Out Housekeeping interface access is provided by means of three SUBD 25pins
female connectors on Access area subrack specified in the following tables Tab. 41. thru Tab. 43.
For the meaning of the signals, please refer to Tab. 67. on page 483.
Tab. 41. Out Remote alarms (GA1GA20) BB shelfs M193 connector pinout
PIN
14
25
13
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
OUTGA1
output general alarm
OUTGA3
OUTGA5
OUTGA6
OUTGA8
OUTGA10
OUTGA11
OUTGA13
OUTGA15
10
OUTGA16
11
OUTGA18
12
OUTGA20
13
GND
gnd
14
OUTGA2
15
OUTGA4
16
COMA
common rele
17
OUTGA7
18
OUTGA9
19
COMB
common rele
20
OUTGA12
21
OUTGA14
22
COMC
common rele
23
OUTGA17
24
OUTGA19
25
COMD
common rele
N.B.
ED
SIGNAL NAME
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
237 / 542
Tab. 42. Out Remote alarms (GA21GA40) BB shelfs M183 connector pinout
14
25
13
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
OUTGA21
OUTGA23
OUTGA25
OUTGA26
OUTGA28
OUTGA30
OUTGA31
OUTGA33
OUTGA35
10
OUTGA36
11
OUTGA38
12
OUTGA40
13
GND
gnd
14
OUTGA22
15
OUTGA24
16
COME
common rele
17
OUTGA27
18
OUTGA29
19
COMF
common rele
20
OUTGA32
21
OUTGA34
22
COMG
common rele
23
OUTGA37
24
OUTGA39
25
COMH
common rele
N.B.
ED
SIGNAL NAME

PIN
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
238 / 542
Tab. 43. Out Housekeeping and Remote alarms (GA41GA48) BB shelfs M192
connector pinout

PIN
14
25
13
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
OUTHK1
housekeeping output
OUTHK3
housekeeping output
OUTHK5
housekeeping output
OUTHK6
housekeeping output
OUTHK8
housekeeping output
OUTHK10
housekeeping output
OUTGA41
OUTGA43
TAND
10
OUTGA45
11
OUTGA47
12
TOR
13
GND
14
OUTHK2
housekeeping output
15
OUTHK4
housekeeping output
16
COMI
common rele
17
OUTHK7
housekeeping output
18
OUTHK9
housekeeping output
19
COML
common rele
20
OUTHK42
housekeeping output
21
OUTHK44
housekeeping output
22
COMM
common rele
23
OUTHK46
housekeeping output
24
OUTHK48
housekeeping output
25
COMN
common rele
N.B.
ED
SIGNAL NAME
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
239 / 542
Summarizing and Out Housekeeping interface access is provided by means of one SUBD 25pins
female connector on Access area subrack specified in the following Tab. 44. herebelow.
With the use of the Additional Housekeeping unit, it is possible to increase by 18 the HK Inputs. The access
is on the same unit (see Tab. 45. on page 241).
Tab. 44. Input Housekeeping BB shelfs M185 connector pinout
PIN
14
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
INHK1
housekeeping input
INHK3
housekeeping input
INHK5
housekeeping input
INHK7
housekeeping input
INHK9
housekeeping input
INHK11
housekeeping input
INHK13
housekeeping input
INHK15
housekeeping input
INHK17
housekeeping input
10
INHK19
housekeeping input
11
INHK21
housekeeping input
12
25
13
13
GND
14
INHK2
housekeeping input
15
INHK4
housekeeping input
16
INHK6
housekeeping input
17
INHK8
housekeeping input
18
INHK10
housekeeping input
19
INHK12
housekeeping input
20
INHK14
housekeeping input
21
INHK16
housekeeping input
22
INHK18
housekeeping input
23
INHK20
housekeeping input
24
INHK22
housekeeping input
25
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
240 / 542

24.8.8.3 Input Housekeeping alarms
Tab. 45. Input Housekeeping Additional Housekeeping units M1 connector pinout

PIN
14
25
13
SIGNAL NAME
SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
INHK1EXT
housekeeping input
INHK2EXT
housekeeping input
INHK3EXT
housekeeping input
INHK4EXT
housekeeping input
INHK5EXT
housekeeping input
INHK6EXT
housekeeping input
INHK7EXT
housekeeping input
INHK8EXT
housekeeping input
INHK9EXT
housekeeping input
10
INHK10EXT
housekeeping input
11
INHK11EXT
housekeeping input
12
INHK12EXT
housekeeping input
13
INHK13EXT
housekeeping input
14
INHK14EXT
housekeeping input
15
INHK15EXT
housekeeping input
16
INHK16EXT
housekeeping input
18
INHK18EXT
housekeeping input
19
GND
20
XX
internal use
21
XX
internal use
22
XX
internal use
23
XX
internal use
24
XX
internal use
25
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
241 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
242 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

SECTION 3: FREQUENCY PLANS, TRANSCEIVER P/N & HW SETTING

This section gives the Part Numbers and the Remote Inventory Labels of the frequencydependent items
(transceiver components), describes the envisaged channel plans utilized with 9600LSY radios and
explains how to manage the transceiver hardware settings.
PAGE
SECTION CONTENT
ED
Chapter 31 Introduction
245
Chapter 32 9640LSY
259
Chapter 33 9647LSY
267
Chapter 34 9662LSY
271
Chapter 35 9667LSY
275
Chapter 36 9674LSY
279
Chapter 37 9681LSY
291
Chapter 38 9610LSY
299
Chapter 39 9611LSY
301
Chapter 310 9613LSY
305
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
243 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
244 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

31 INTRODUCTION
31.1 Channel plans
Main spectrum utilization characteristics for each frequency band of the 9600 LSY family are summarized
in Tab. 46. on page 246.
The criteria to be taken into account for the use of each specific one are described in following chapters
of this section, according to the following general notes:
the main parameters affecting the choice of radiofrequency channel arrangements, according to
ITUR Rec. F.746, are :
CS
Channel Separation between two consecutive centre frequencies for the related
alternated radiofrequency channel arrangement: it is also considered equal to the
Channel Bandwidth.
XS
defined as the radiofrequency separation between the centre frequencies of adjacent

radiofrequency channels on the same polarization and in the same direction of
transmission: so XS is equal to twice the CS for the alternated radio frequency channel
arrangement and is equal to the CS for the cochannel band reuse radio frequency
channel arrangement (please consider that an alternated frequency channel arrangement
may be further implemented with cochannel band reuse).
DS
Tx/Rx Duplex Spacing, defined as the radiofrequency separation between

corresponding go and return channels, constant for each couple of ith and ith frequencies,
within a given channel arrangement.
f0
defined as the frequency of the centre of the band of frequencies occupied.
fr
reference frequency of the homogeneous pattern.
In general, the equipment of this family may work, in case of for STM1 stream, in cochannel
frequency reuse operation (CCDP), utilizing the XPIC unit, allowing the transmission of 2 x STM1
signals on a single RF channel.
Reused configurations are not foreseen for STM0 capacity.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
245 / 542
SYSTEM
&
chapter
9640 LSY
(L4)
chapter 32
on page 259
9647 LSY
(U4)
FREQUENCY
(GHz)
ITUR
FREQ. PLAN
CHANNEL
SPACING
(MHz)
SDH
TRANSPORT
QAM
64
QAM
128
3.64.2
ITUR F.635 ANNEX 1 fig.3
40
STM1
3.64.2
ITUR F.635 recommends 1

(Finland)
40
STM1
3.84.2
ITUR F.382
29
STM1
3.84.2
ITUR F.382 extended
29
STM1
3.64.2
DTI (United Kingdom)
28
STM1
3.64.2
30
STM1
3.43.9
OIRT
28
STM1
4.45.0
40
STM1
4.45.0
Spain UN56
28
STM1
33
chapter 3
3
on page 267
4.45.0
Austria Defence Department
28
STM1
9662 LSY
(L6)
5.9256.425
ITUR F.383, CEPT T/R

1401
29.65
STM1
chapter 34
on page 271
5.6756.179
OIRT
28
STM1
9667 LSY
(U6)
6.4257.11
ITUR F.384, CEPT T/R

1402
40
STM1
chapter 35
on page 275
6.447.11
ITUR F.384 IRAN STM1 6U
20
STM1
7.117.44
ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3 L
28
STM1
7.447.75
ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3 H
28
STM1
9674 LSY
chapter 36
on page 279
9681 LSY
chapter 37
on page 291
7.4287.897
ITUR F.385 ANNEX 4
14 28
STM0 / STM1
7.4257.725
ITUR F.385 ANNEX 1
28
STM1
7.117.44
ITUR F.385 rec. 1L
14 28
STM0 / STM1
7.247.56
ITUR F.385 rec. 1M
14 28
STM0 / STM1
7.417.74
ITUR F.385 rec. 1H
14 28
STM0 / STM1
7.7258.275
ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1
29.65
STM1
8.2758.5
ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3
14 28
STM0 / STM1
8.2758.5
ITUR F.386 ANNEX3 Poland
28
STM1
8.2758.5
ITUR F.386 ANNEX3 Iran
14 28
STM0
ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4
14 28
STM0 / STM1
28
STM1
7.98.4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
9610 LSY
chapter 38
on page 299
ED
10.02810.630
MEDIASET
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
246 / 542

Tab. 46. Implemented radiofrequency channel arrangements and list of Chapters

CHANNEL
SPACING
(MHz)
SDH
TRANSPORT
QAM
64
QAM
ITUR F.387 rec. 1
40
STM1
ITUR F.387 ANNEX 2
40
STM1
14 28
STM0 / STM1
28
STM0
SYSTEM
&
chapter
FREQUENCY
(GHz)
9611 LSY
10.711.7
chapter 39
on page 301
10.711.7
9613 LSY
12.75 13.25
ITUR F.497 rec. 1
chapter 310
on page 305
12.75 13.25
ITUR F.497 rec. 1 Iran
ITUR
FREQ. PLAN
128
31.2 Transmitter specialization for a frequency plan

As explained in para.23.4.1 on page 185 a transceiver is composed by the following types of modules:
TRI (Transmitter)
R (Receiver module)

Each transmitter sent to the Customer is specialized for the frequency plan required by the Customer
himself. This specialization, carried out by firmware settings inside TRIs subunit RT CONTROL not
manageable by the Customer, includes:
the value of the frequency of the first channel (channel 1 of the lower half of the frequency band) of
the frequency plan
the value of the channel spacing
the value of the frequency shift between the go (Tx) and return (Rx) channels.
This means that a transmitter cannot be used for any other channel plan than that for which it has
been set in factory.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For further propaedeutic explanations , please refer to para.31.3.7 on page 255.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
247 / 542
31.3 Transceiver hardware settings
In general, a Customer who receives a system from Alcatel factory to be installed and put in service, does
not need to change hardware settings, as they have been already set in factory according to Customer
plant specifications.
You must change hardware setting only in case you want to change the system configuration. With regard
to the Tx/Rx frequency change for a transceiver, take into account that you can do it only inside the
frequencies for which the transmitter has been set in factory (see para.31.2 on page 247 and
para.31.3.7 on page 255).
This paragraph describes in detail how to manage the transceiver dipswitches.
Read all paragraphs 31.3.2 to 31.3.5 and understand them before doing anything. An
example of hw setting regarding two transceivers in a link is given in para.31.3.6 on page 254.
Propaedeutic explanations, if necessary, are given in para.31.3.7 on page 255.
31.3.2 Hardware setting dipswitches on transceiver
The transceiver components have been introduced in Tab. 23. on page 165 and described in detail in
para.23.4 on page 184.
N.B.
The quantity of these frequencydependent items depends on the configuration,

according to Chapter 21 on page 121.
The transceiver dipswitches are on subunit RT CONTROL (see Fig. 123. on page 249) and are
accessible removing the cover plate A depicted in Fig. 94. on page 186. The setting tables of these
dipswitches are reported in following Fig. 124. , Fig. 125. and Fig. 126. and their meaning is explained
in the following paragraphs.
Fig. 123. on page 249 is reported here for reader convenience. To be sure to operate correctly,
please refer to hardware setting documents (present in the handbook 9600LSY Hardware
setting documents REF.[K] on page 527) relative to the Transceiver unit for the TC and
dipswitch physical position on the board, choosing the unit type according to the P/N.
WARNING: there are different Transceiver units.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
248 / 542

31.3.1 Introduction
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

HARDWARE SETTING DIP SWITCHES
Fig. 123. Position of Hardware setting dip switches for transceivers
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
249 / 542
Frequency setting by HW is the only modality to be used in this system. Then, according to
Fig. 124. herebelow, the dipswitch [I2]2 must be always be set to 0.
Fig. 124. Choice of frequency setting by HW or SW

The dipswitch bank [I2] contains also the switches [I2]1 and [I2]3, use of which is explained
in para.31.3.5 on page 253
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
250 / 542

31.3.3 Frequency setting by HW
31.3.4 Hardware setting of the transceiver Tx and Rx frequencies

As shown in Fig. 125. on page 252:
dipswitch bank [I5] is used for the frequency setting of go (Tx) channel
dipswitch bank [I3] is used for the frequency setting of return (Rx) channel
The following points a ) , b ) and c ) describe their usage in detail.

a)
usage of dipswitch 6 (lower/upper half band)

As explained in para.31.3.7.1 on page 255, Tx and Rx channels must lay: one in the lower half of
the band, and the other in the upper half of the band, only the following two configurations are correct:
b)
1st Configuration
2nd Configuration
Half Band of:
Half Band of:
Tx channel
Rx channel
Tx channel
Rx channel
lower
upper
upper
lower
set [I5]6 to 0
set [I3]6 to 1
set [I5]6 to 1
set [I3]6 to 0
usage of dipswitch dipswitch 7 (OL +/)

Following the lower/upper half band setting described in previous point a ) , the standard setting of
the OL+ / OL dip switch must be done as follows:
Half Band of:
Half Band of:

Tx channel
Rx channel
Tx channel
Rx channel
lower
upper
upper
lower
set [I5]7 to 1
(OL+)
set [I3]7 to 0
(OL)
set [I5]7 to 0
(OL)
set [I3]7 to 1
(OL+)
for some (very rare) frequency plans, the OL+ / OL dip switches are set in the opposite way
with respect to that depicted in the table above.
N.B.
WORKAROUND AND SUGGESTION

When you receive your system, please verify how the setting of this switch has been done in
factory, and write this information where you can retrieve it, if necessary.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
c)
usage of dipswitches 5 to 1 (channel choice)

As explained in para.31.3.7.1 on page 255, the # of the channel defined for Tx section must be equal
to the # of the channel defined for Rx section. In fact, the definition of the lower/upper half band for
them is defined by the settings explained in previous points a ) and b ) . The # of the channel chosen
must be consistent with the possible numbers envisaged for the channel plan used.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
251 / 542
d)
usage of dipswitch 8
Tx setting by dipswitch [I5]

This switch must be always set to 1, both in Tx and Rx sections.
Rx setting by dipswitch [I3]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 125. HW setting of go and return channel frequencies
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
252 / 542
31.3.5 Settings for reuse configurations

Configurations with reuse are described in:

para.24.7 point c ) on page 226 (with Reuse and without Diversity)
and:
para.24.7 point d ) on page 228 (with Reuse and with Diversity)
As described there:
the transceiver equipped with the TR.Frequency Reuse Kit (and in case d ) with Diversity
Receiver too) must be configured with Rx Local Oscillator set as MASTER
the other transceiver must be configured with Rx Local Oscillator set as SLAVE.
As shown in Fig. 126. herebelow, this setting is performed through the dip switch [I2]3 that must be set
as follows:
Transceiver to be configured with Rx Local
Oscillator set as MASTER
Transceiver to be configured with Rx Local

Oscillator set as SLAVE
set [I2]3 to 1
set [I2]3 to 0
Fig. 126. HW setting of MASTER/SLAVE Rx Local Oscillator

The dipswitch bank [I2] contains also the following switches:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
[I2]1 that must be always set to 1:
[I2]2 use of which is explained in para.31.3.3 on page 250
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
253 / 542
Taking into account the example of frequency plan discussed in next para.31.3.7.1 on page 255, the
following table shows how to set the dipswitches of Tx and Rx sections of the couple of transceivers, in
order to use the channel #2 of the plan itself:
3660
3980
Tx
Tx
Rx
Rx
STATION B
STATION A
STATION A TRANSCEIVER
STATION B TRANSCEIVER
SETTING OF
Tx section
f=3660
Rx section
f=3980
Tx section
f=3980
Rx section
f=3660
HALFBAND
lower
set [I5]6 to 0
upper
set [I3]6 to 1
upper
set [I5]6 to 1
lower
set [I3]6 to 0
OL +/
OL+
set [I5]7 to 1
OL
set [I3]7 to 0
OL
set [I5]7 to 0
OL+
set [I3]7 to 1
channel
[I5]
[I3]
[I5]
[I3]
set 5 4 3 2 1 set 5 4 3 2 1 set 5 4 3 2 1 set 5 4 3 2 1

to 0 1 0 0 0
fixed
settings
to 0 1 0 0 0
to 0 1 0 0 0
to 0 1 0 0 0
set [I5]8 to 1
set [I3]8 to 1
set [I2]1 to 1
set [I2]2 to 0
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Note that the channel # is the same for both Tx/Rx sections of both transceivers.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
254 / 542

31.3.6 Example of hardware setting of two transceivers in a radio link
31.3.7 Propaedeutic explanations

Just for anybody who needs them.

N.B.
31.3.7.1 Choice of go and return channel frequencies

The following diagram shows an example of channel plan:
LOWER HALF OF THE BAND
3700
3620
H (V)
V (H)
3780
2
3
3660
UPPER HALF OF THE BAND
3860
6
5
3740
4020
3940
2
7
3980
4180
3820
4100
4060
4140
f0 = 3900
In this example you can choose 1 out of 14 frequencies as goradio channel. The returnradio channel
is always inside the opposite half of the band (with respect to the goradio channel) and fixed in factory
in the following way:
goradio channel
(Tx)
returnradio channel
(Rx)
....
....
....
....
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This association between the goradio channel frequency and the returnradio channel frequency
cannot be changed in field (because the frequency shift between go and return channels is fixed in
factory, as explained in para.31.2 on page 247). This association is in accordance to ITUR
recommendations.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
255 / 542
31.3.7.2 Alternative center band frequencies (normal and interleaved channels)
This choice depends on Customers specific requirement at the purchase order phase and cannot be
changed in field.
In fact, this corresponds to have different channel plans, each of which require a specific firmware settings
inside TRIs subunit RT CONTROL (as explained in para.31.2 on page 247).
a)
First example
refer to 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR Recommendation F.382 para.32.2.3 on page 262.
The TRI that is ordered can be alternatively set in factory, according to Customer needs:
NORMAL CHANNELS
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
for this usage
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
3824,5
4037,5
3853,5
4066,5
3882,5
4095,5
3911,5
4124,5
3940,5
4153,5
3969,5
4182,5
INTERLEAVED CHANNELS
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
or for this usage
ED
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
3810
4023
3839
4052
3868
4081
3897
4110
3926
4139
3955
4168
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
256 / 542

Many frequency plans envisage normal and interleaved channels.
b)
Second example
refer to 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1L (STM1) para.36.2.4 on page 284.

The TRI that is ordered can be alternatively set in factory, according to Customer needs:
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
Freq.
Channel
[MHz]
for this usage
(
(normal
l channels)
h
l )
7128
7289
7156
7317
7184
7345
7212
7373
7240
7401
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
Freq.
Channel
[MHz]
or for this usage
(interleaved
(i t l
d channels
h
l 1)
7135
1int1
7296
2int1
7163
2int1
7324
3int1
7191
3int1
7352
4int1
7219
4int1
7380
5int1
7247
5int1
7408
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Freq.
Channel
[MHz]
1int2
7142
1int2
7303
2int2
7170
2int2
7331
3int2
7198
3int2
7359
4int2
7226
4int2
7387
5int2
7254
5int2
7415
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
Freq.
Channel
[MHz]
or for this usage
(interleaved
(i t l
d channels
h
l 3)
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Freq.
Channel
[MHz]
1int1
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
Freq.
Channel
[MHz]
or for this usage
(i t l
(interleaved
d channels
h
l 2)
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Freq.
Channel
[MHz]
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Freq.
Channel
[MHz]
1int3
7149
1int3
7310
2int3
7177
2int3
7338
3int3
7205
3int3
7366
4int3
7233
4int3
7394
5int3
7261
5int3
7422
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
257 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
258 / 542

32 9640LSY
32.1 9640LSY part list
Tab. 47. 9640LSY Transceiver Part List
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
NAME
Label for
Remote
Inventory
128
64
QAM
QAM
9640LSY TRANSCEIVER
Refer to Tab. 23. on page 165 and para.23.4 on page 184 for summary information on
transceiver composition and equipping notes
N.B.
3,64,2 GHZ. TRANSMITTER

N.B.
Refer to para.31.2 on page 247 for
explanations on transmitter
specialization for a frequency plan
3DB02524AA
411200543
4L128T
3,44,2 GHZ RECEIVER
3DB02513AA
474210265
4L128R
3,64,2 GHZ RECEIVER
3DB05441AA
474210463
4L064R
9640LSY L.O.
3DB02668AA
474210292
4LLO
9640LSY OIRT L.O.
3DB02667AA
474210291
4LLOOIR
TR. FREQUENCY REUSE KIT
3DB03830AA
299702973
X
X
32.2 9640LSY frequency plans

The possible channel plans to be used with 9640LSY equipment, for the exploitation of the 3.6 to 4.2 GHz
or 3.8 to 4.2 GHz bands, are shown on following pages:
ITUR Recommendation F.635. fig.3/Annex 1

ITUR F.635 recommends 1
ITUR Recommendation F.382
ITUR F. 382 (Extended) Recommendation
DTI channel plan
ITUR Recommendation F.635, Annex I, fig.6 ,
O.I.R.T. (Russia)
page 260
page 261
page 262
page 263
page 264
page 265
page 266
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Please refer to Tab. 46. on page 246 for the possible use of each frequency plan with 128QAM and
64QAM.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
259 / 542
32.2.1 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR Recommendation F.635. fig.3/Annex 1
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
H (V)
V (H)
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
3620
3940
3660
3980
3700
4020
3740
4060
3780
4100
3820
4140
3860
4180
3700
3620
3780
2
3
3660
3860
4020
3940
6
5
3740

STM1
ITUR F 635
CS=40 DS=320
fn=f0320+40n
fn=f0+40n,
f0=3900,
n : from 1 to 7
2
7
3820
4100
3980
4180
6
5
4060
4140
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
f0 = 3900
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
260 / 542
32.2.2 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.635 recommends 1

ITUR F 635
STM1
CS=40 DS=320
fn=f0320+40n
fn=f0+40n,
f0=3890,
n : from 1 to 7
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
3610
3930
3650
3970
3690
4010
3730
4050
3770
4090
3810
4130
3850
4170
3690
3610
H (V)
V (H)
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
3770
4
3
3650
3850
6
5
3730
3970
3810
1
7
4050
3930
4130
4010
5
4
4090
4170
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
f0 = 3890
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
261 / 542
NORMAL CHANNELS
ITUR F.382
STM1
CS=29 ; DS=213
fn=f0208+29n
fn=f0+5+29n
f0=4003.5
n : from 1 to 6
ITUR F.382
STM1
CS=29 ; DS=213
fn=f0208+29n
fn=f0+5+29n
f0=3989
n : from 1 to 6
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
3824,5
4037,5
3810
4023
3853,5
4066,5
3839
4052
3882,5
4095,5
3868
4081
3911,5
4124,5
3897
4110
3940,5
4153,5
3926
4139
3969,5
4182,5
3955
4168
3810 3824.5
H(V )
V( H )
3868 3882.5
2
1
3839 3853.5
3926 3940.5
4139 4153.5
4081 4095.5
4023 4037.5
3897 3911.5
3955 3969.5
4052 4066.5
4
3
4110 4124.5
6
5
4168 4182.5
f0 = 4003.5 or 3989
Note: Dotted arrows indicate interleaved channels. Each channel is 14.5 MHz lower than the
correspondent main plan channel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
262 / 542

32.2.3 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR Recommendation F.382

32.2.4 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR F. 382 (Extended) Recommendation

NORMAL CHANNELS
ITUR F.382 EXTENDED

STM1
CS=29 ; DS=213
fn=f0208+29n
fn=f0+5+29n
f0=4003.5
n : from 1 to 6
ITUR F.382 EXTENDED

STM1
CS=29 ; DS=213
fn=f0208+29n
fn=f0+5+29n
f0=3989
n : from 1 to 6
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
3824,5
4037,5
3810,0
4023,0
3853,5
4066,5
3839,0
4052,0
3882,5
4095,5
3868,0
4081,0
3911,5
4124,5
3897,0
4110,0
3940,5
4153,5
3926,0
4139,0
3969,5
4182,5
3955,0
4168,0
f0=3703,5 MHz
fn=f0121+29n
fn=f0+5+29n
n : from 1 to 3
f0=3689 MHz;
fn=f0121+29n
fn=f0+5+29n
n : from 1 to 3
3611,5
3737,5
3597,0
3723,0
3640,5
3766,5
3626,0
3752,0
3669,5
3795,5
3655,0
3781,0
f0 = 3689
3611.5
H (V)
V (H)
3669.5
B
A
f0 = 3989
3766.5
A
C
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
f0 = 3703.5
3824.5
C
B
3882.5
2
1
3940.5
4
3
4037.5
6
5
4095.5
2
1
4153.5
4
3
6
5
f0 = 4003.5
Dotted arrows indicate interleaved channels. Each channel is 14.5 MHz lower than the
correspondent main plan channel.
N.B.
ED
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
263 / 542
32.2.5 9640LSY Channel plan: DTI channel plan
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
3633
H (V)
V (H)
Freq. [MHz]
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
3633,0
3941,0
3661,0
3969,0
3689,0
3997,0
3717,0
4025,0
3745,0
4053,0
3773,0
4081,0
3801,0
4109,0
3829,0
4137,0
3857,0
4165,0
2
1
3745
4
3
3661
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
3689
3801
3717
3857
3997
2
9
3773
3941

DTI
STM1
CS=28
DS=308
fn=f0294+28n
fn=f0+14+28n,
f0=3899
n : from 1 to 9
4
5
4025
4165
4109
3969
3829
4053
4081
4137
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
f0 = 3899
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
264 / 542
32.2.6 9640LSY Channel plan: ITUR Recommendation F.635, Annex 1, fig.6

ITUR F 635 Annex1 fig.6.

STM1
CS=30 DS=320
fn=f0310+30n
fn=f0+10+30n,
f0=3900
n : from 1 to 9
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
3620
H (V)
V (H)
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
3620
3940
3650
3970
3680
4000
3710
4030
3740
4060
3770
4090
3800
4120
3830
4150
2860
4180
3680
2
1
3740
4
3
3650
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
3800
3710
4000
2
9
3770
3940
6
5
3860
4
5
4030
4180
4120
3970
3830
4060
4090
4150
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
f0 = 3900
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
265 / 542
32.2.7 9640LSY Channel plan: O.I.R.T. (Russia)
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
H (V)
V (H)
Freq. [MHz]
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
3422,5
3688,5
3450,5
3716,5
3478,5
3744,5
3506,5
3772,5
3534,5
3800,5
3562,5
3828,5
3590,5
3856,5
3618,5
3884,5
3506.5
3
2
3422.5
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
3450.5
3562.5
3478.5
1
8
3534.5
3716.5
3618.5

O.I.R.T.
STM1
CS=28 DS=266
fn=f0259+28n
fn=f0+7+28n
f0=3653,5
n : from 1 to 8
3590.5
3772.5
3
2
3688.5
3828.5
5
4
3744.5
3884.5
7
6
3800.5
3856.5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
f0 = 3653.5
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
266 / 542

33 9647LSY
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
NAME
Label for
Remote
Inventory
128
64
QAM
QAM
9647LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B.

N.B.
3DB02526AA
411200545
4U128T
4,35,0 GHZ RECEIVER
3DB02512AA
474210264
4U128R
4,35,0 GHZ RECEIVER
3DB05442AA
474210464
4U064R
9647LSY L.O.
3DB02669AA
474210292
4ULO
3DB03830AA
299702973

bands, are shown are shown on following pages:
ITUR Recommendation F.1099, Annex 1, fig. 2

Spain UN56
Austria Defence
page 268
page 269
page 270
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
64QAM.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
267 / 542
33.2.1 9647LSY Channel plan: ITUR Recommendation F.1099, Annex 1, fig. 2
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
Freq. [MHz]
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
4430
4730
4470
4770
4510
4810
4550
4850
4590
4890
4630
4930
4670
4970
H (V)
(MHz)
V (H)
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
4430
4510
2
1
4590
4
3
4470
4770
4670
6
5
4550

STM1
ITUR F 1099
CS=40 DS=310
fn=f0310+40n
fn=f010+40n,
f0=4700,
n : from 1 to 7
4730
4930
3
2
4630
4850
5
4
4810
7
6
4890
4970
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
f0 = 4700
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
268 / 542
33.2.2 9647LSY Channel plan: Spain UN56

STM1 128 QAM

SPAIN UN56
CS=28
DS=314
fn=f0307+28n
fn=f0+7+28n
f0=4700,
n : from 1 to 9
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
H (V)
V (H)
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
4421
4755
4449
4783
4477
4811
4505
4839
4533
4867
4561
4895
4589
4923
4617
4951
4645
4979
4477
4421
4533
4
3
4449
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
4589
6
5
4505
4645
8
7
4561
4811
4755
2
9
4923
4783
4617
4867
4839
4979
8
7
4895
4951
f0 = 4700
Channels 2, 8, 2, 8 are used for low capacity transmission only.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
269 / 542
33.2.3 9647LSY Channel plan: Austria Defence

ITUR F.7464
STM1
CS=28; DS=312
fn=f0310+28n
fn=f0+2+28n
f0=4700
n : from 1 to 10
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
4418
4730
4446
4758
4474
4786
4502
4814
4530
4842
4558
4870
4586
4898
4614
4926
4642
4954
10
4670
10
4982
STM1
f0 = 4700
H(V )
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
V( H )
ED
2
1
4
3
6
5
10
9
4
3
6
5
10
9
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
270 / 542

34 9662LSY
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
NAME
Label for
Remote
Inventory
9662LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B.

N.B.
Refer to para.31.2 on page 247 for explanations
on transmitter specialization for a frequency plan
3DB01264AA
411200518
6L128T
5,97,1 GHZ RECEIVER
3DB01268AA
474210145
6+128R
9662LSY L.O.
3DB02670AA
474210294
6LLO
3DB03830AA
299702973

The possible channel plans to be used with 9662LSY equipment, for the exploitation of the 5.925 to 6.425
GHz bands, are shown on following pages:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ITUR F 383
O.I.R.T.
page 272
page 273
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
271 / 542
34.2.1 9662LSY Channel plan: ITUR F 383
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
Freq. [MHz]
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
5945,20
6197,24
5974,85
6226,89
6004,50
6256,54
6034,15
6286,19
6063,80
6315,84
6093,45
6345,49
6123,10
6375,14
6152,75
6404,79
H(V)
V(H)
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
5945.20
6004.50
6063.80
1
5974.85
3
6034.15
6197.24
6123.10

ITUR F 383
STM 1
STM1
fn=f0259.45+29.65n
fn=f07.41+29.65n
CS=29.65
DS=252.04
f0 6175
f0=6175
n: from 1 to 8
6315.84
6152.75
6226.89
6375.14
7
6093.45
6256.54
6286.19
6345.49
6404.79
f0 = 6175
5945.20
H(V)
V(H)
6004.50
2
1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
6123.10
5
6034.15
6226.89
4
3
5974.85
ED
6063.80
7
6093.45
6286.19
3
2
6152.75
6197.24
6345.49
7
8
4
6256.54
6404.79
6315.84
6375.14
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
272 / 542

34.2.2 9662LSY Channel plan: O.I.R.T.
NORMAL CHANNELS
O.I.R.T.
STM1
fn=f0259+28n
fn=f0
259+28n
fn=f0+7+28n
036 CS=28
DS=266
f0=5920
n: ffrom 1 tto 8
O.I.R.T.
STM1
fn=f0259+28n
fn=f0
259+28n
fn=f0+7+28n
CS=28
DS=266
f0=5934
n: ffrom 1 tto 8
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
5689
5955
5703
5969
5717
5983
5731
5997
5745
6011
5759
6025
5773
6039
5787
6053
5801
6067
5815
6081
5829
6095
5843
6109
5857
6123
5871
6137
5885
6151
5899
6165
H (V)
(MHz)
V (H)
4
3
6
5
8
7
2
1
4
3
6
5
8
7
f0 = 5920
Dotted arrows indicate interleaved channels. Each channel is 14 MHz higher than
correspondent main channel.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
273 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
274 / 542

35 9667LSY
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
NAME
Label for
Remote
Inventory
128
64
QAM
QAM
9667LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B.

N.B.
3DB01265AA
411200519
6U128T
5,97,1 GHZ RECEIVER
3DB01268AA
474210145
6+128R
5,97,1 GHZ RECEIVER
3DB05443AA
474210465
6U064R
9667LSY L.O.
3DB02671AA
474210295
6ULO
3DB03830AA
299702973

bands, are shown on following pages:
ITUR F.384, CEPT T/R 1402

ITUR F.384 IRAN STM1 6U
page 276
page 277
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
64QAM.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
275 / 542
35.2.1 9667LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.384, CEPT T/R 1402
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND

ITUR F.384
STM1
CS=40 ; DS=340
fn=f0350+40n
fn=f010+40n
f0=6770
n : from 1 to 8
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
6460
6800
6500
6840
6540
6880
6580
6920
6620
6960
6660
7000
6700
7040
6740
7080
Channel plan a)
6540
6460
H (V)
V (H)
6620
4
3
6500
6700
6
5
6580
6840
6740
7000
6660
6920
6800
7080
7
6
6880
6960
7040
f0 = 6770
Channel plan b)
6540
6460
H (V)
V (H)
4
3
6500
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
6620
6700
6
5
6580
6800
8
7
6660
6880
2
1
6740
6960
6840
7040
6920
8
7
7000
7080
f0 = 6770
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
276 / 542
35.2.2 9667LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.384 IRAN STM1 6U

ITUR F.384
STM1
CS=40 ; DS=340
fn=f0350+20n
fn=f010+20n
f0=6770
n : from 1 to 16
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
6440
6780
6460
6800
6480
6820
6500
6840
6520
6860
6540
6880
6560
6900
6580
6920
6600
6940
10
6620
10
6960
11
6640
11
6980
12
6660
12
7000
13
6680
13
7020
14
6700
14
7040
15
6720
15
7060
16
6740
16
7080
6440
H ( V)
V (H )
6480
2
6520
6560
6
4
3
6460
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
5
6500
6600
8
7
6540
6640
6580
12
10
9
11
6620
6680
6720
6660 6700
15
6820
2
16
14
13
6780
3
6800
6940 6980 7020
6900
6
1
6740
6860
5
6840 6880
8
7
10
9
6920
6960
12
11
7060
16
14
13
7000 7040
15
7080
f0 = 6770
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
277 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
278 / 542

36 9674LSY
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
NAME
Label for
Remote
Inventory
9674LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B.
7,17,7 GHZ TRANSMITTER

N.B.
3DB02531AA
411200547
07128T
7,18,5 GHZ RECEIVER
3DB02533AA
474210268
7+128R
9674LSY L.O.
3DB02672AA
474210296
07LO
3DB03830AA
299702973

band, are shown on following pages:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ITUR F.385 Annex 3 L&H

ITUR F.385 Annex 4
ITUR F.385 Annex 1
ITUR F.385 Rec. 1L
ITUR F.385 Rec. 1M
ITUR F.385 Rec. 1H
page 280
page 281
page 283
page 284
page 286
page 288
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
279 / 542
ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3 L

STM1
CS=28 DS=196
fn=f0182+28n
fn=f0+14+28n
f0=7275
n: ffrom1
1 to
t 5
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3 H

STM1
CS=28 DS=168
fn=f0168+28n
fn=f0+28n
f0=7597
n: ffrom1
1 to
t 5
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
1i
7107
1 i
7303
1i
7443
1 i
7611
7121
7317
7457
7625
2i
7135
2 i
7331
2i
7471
2 i
7639
7149
7345
7485
7653
3i
7163
3 i
7359
3i
7499
3 i
7667
7177
7373
7513
7681
4i
7191
4 i
7387
4i
7527
4 i
7695
7205
7401
7541
7709
5i
7219
5 i
7415
5i
7555
5 i
7723
7233
7429
7569
7737
ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3L

7107
7163
7121
H (V)
7303
7317
7191
7149
7359
7205
7429
4
3
7331
f0 = 7275
7415
7373
7135
7233
V (H)
7219
7177
7387
7345
7401
ITUR F.385 ANNEX 3H

7443
H (V)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
V (H)
7555
7513
7485
7569
7611
7625
4
3
7471
ED
7499
7457
7541
f0 = 7597
7723
7681
2
5
7527
7667
4
3
7639
7653
7737
7695
7709
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
280 / 542

36.2.1 9674LSY Channel: ITUR F.385 Annex 3 L&H
36.2.2 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Annex 4

ITUR
ITU
R F.385 ANNEX 4
STM0
f f0 241 5 14
fn=f0241.5+14n
fn=f0+3 5+14n
fn=f0+3.5+14n
CS=14 DS=245
f0=7662.5
n: from1 to 16
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
ITUR
ITU
R F.385 ANNEX 4
STM1
f f0 248 5 28
fn=f0248.5+28n
fn=f03 5+28n
fn=f03.5+28n
CS=28 DS=245
f0=7662.5
n: from1 to 8
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
7435
7680
7449
7694
7463
7708
7477
7722
7491
7736
7505
7750
7519
7764
7533
7778
7547
7792
10
7561
10
7806
11
7575
11
7820
12
7589
12
7834
13
7603
13
7848
14
7617
14
7862
15
7631
15
7876
16
7645
16
7890
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
7442
7687
7470
7715
7498
7743
7526
7771
7554
7799
7582
7827
7610
7855
7638
7883
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
continues ...
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
281 / 542
... continues
7435 7463 7491 7519 7547 7575
H (V)
V (H) 1
4
3
10
6
7
7603
12
11
7631
7449 7477 7505 7533 7561 7589
15
7617
16
14
13
7680 7708 7736 7764 7792 7820
7645
4
3
10
6
7
7848 7876
12
11
13
7694 7722 7750 7778 7806 7834
16
14
15
7862 7890
f0 = 7662.5
STM1
7498
7442
H (V)
V (H)
7554
2
3
7470
7610
6
5
7526
7687
8
7
7582
7743
2
1
7638
7799
4
3
7715
7855
6
5
7771
8
7
7827
7883
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
f0 = 7662.5
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
282 / 542

STM0
36.2.3 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Annex 1

ITUR F.385 ANNEX 1

STM 1
STM1
fn=f0161+28n
fn=f07+28n
CS=28 DS=154
f0 7575
f0=7575
n: from1 to 5
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
7442
7596
1i
7456
1 i
7610
7470
7624
2i
7484
2 i
7638
7498
7652
3i
7512
3 i
7666
7526
7680
4i
7540
4 i
7694
7554
7708
5i
7568
5 i
7722
7442
7498
7456
H (V)
V (H)
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
7554
7512
7596
7484
7526
7652
7610
7470
7568
7624
7722
7540
7708
7666
7638
7680
7694
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
f0 = 7575
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
283 / 542
ITUR F.385 rec. 1 L

STM0
STM
0
fn=f0161+14n
fn=f0+14n
CS=14 DS=161
f0 7275
f0=7275
n : from 1 to 10
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
ITUR F.385 rec. 1 L

STM1
STM
1
fn=f0175+28n
fn=f014+28nn
CS=28 DS=161
f0 7275
f0=7275
n : from 1 to 5
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
7128
7289
7128
7289
1i
7135
1 i
7296
1int1
7135
1int1
7296
7142
7303
1int2
7142
1int2
7303
2i
7149
2 i
7310
1int3
7149
1int3
7310
7156
7317
7156
7317
3i
7163
3 i
7324
2int1
7163
2int1
7324
7170
7331
2int2
7170
2int2
7331
4i
7177
4 i
7338
2int3
7177
2int3
7338
7184
7345
7184
7345
5i
7191
5 i
7352
3int1
7191
3int1
7352
7198
7359
3int2
7198
3int2
7359
6i
7205
6 i
7366
3int3
7205
3int3
7366
7212
7373
7212
7373
7i
7219
7 i
7380
4int1
7219
4int1
7380
7226
7387
4int2
7226
4int2
7387
8i
7233
8 i
7394
4int3
7233
4int3
7394
7240
7401
7240
7401
9i
7247
9 i
7408
5int1
7247
5int1
7408
10
7254
10
7415
5int2
7254
5int2
7415
10 i
7261
10 i
7422
5int3
7261
5int3
7422
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
continues ...
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
284 / 542

36.2.4 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1L
... continues

STM0
7128
7135
7156
7184
7212
7163
7191
7219
7240
7247
7289
7296
7317
7345
7373
7324
7352
7380
7401
7408
H (V)
V (H)
7142
7149
7170
7198
7177
7205
7226
7233
7303
7310
7254
7261
7331
7359
7338
7366
7387
7394
7415
7422
STM1
7128
7135
7142
7149
7184
7191
7198
7205
7240
7247
7254
7261
7289
7296
7303
7310
7345
7352
7359
7366
7401
7408
7415
7422
H (V)
V (H)
7156
7163
7170
7177
7212
7219
7226
7233
7317
7324
7331
7338
7373
7380
7387
7394
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
f0 = 7275
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
285 / 542
ITUR F 385 rec. 1 M

STM1
fn=f0175+28n
fn=f014+28n
CS=28 DS=161
f0=7400
n : from 1 to 5
ITUR F 385 rec. 1 M

STM0
fn=f0161+14n
fn=f0+14n
CS=14
DS=161
f0=7400
n : from 1 to 10
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
7253
7414
7253
7414
1i
7260
1 i
7421
1int1
7260
1int1
7421
7267
7428
1int2
7267
1int2
7428
2i
7274
2 i
7435
1int3
7274
1int3
7435
7281
7442
7281
7442
3i
7288
3 i
7449
2int1
7288
2int1
7449
7295
7456
2int2
7295
2int2
7456
4i
7302
4 i
7463
2int3
7302
2int3
7463
7309
7470
7309
7470
5i
7316
5 i
7477
3int1
7316
3int1
7477
7323
7484
3int2
7323
3int2
7484
6i
7330
6 i
7491
3int3
7330
3int3
7491
7337
7498
7337
7498
7i
7344
7 i
7505
4int1
7244
4int1
7505
7351
7512
4int2
7351
4int2
7512
8i
7358
8 i
7519
4int3
7358
4int3
7519
7365
7526
7365
7526
9i
7372
9 i
7533
5int1
7272
5int1
7533
10
7379
10
7540
5int2
7379
5int2
7540
10 i
7386
10 i
7547
5int3
7386
5int3
7547
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
continues ...
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
286 / 542

36.2.5 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1M
... continues

STM0
7253
7260
7281
7309
7337
7288
7316
7344
7365
7372
7414
7421
7442
7470
7498
7449
7477
7505
7526
7533
H (V)
V (H)
7267
7274
7295
7323
7302
7330
7351
7358
7428
7435
7379
7386
7456
7484
7463
7491
7512
7519
7540
7547
STM1
7253
7260
7267
7274
7309
7316
7323
7330
7365
7372
7379
7386
7414
7421
7428
7435
7470
7477
7484
7491
7526
7533
7540
7547
H (V)
V (H)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
7281
7288
7295
7302
ED
7337
7344
7351
7358
f0 = 7400
7442
7449
7456
7463
7498
7505
7512
7519
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
287 / 542
ITUR F 385 rec. 1 H

STM1
fn=f0175+28n
fn=f014+28n
CS=28
DS=161
f0=7575
n : from 1 to 5
ITUR F 385 rec. 1 H

STM0
fn=f0161+14n
fn=f0+14n
CS=14
DS=161
f0=7575
n : from 1 to 10
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
7428
7589
7428
7589
1i
7435
1 i
7596
1int1
7435
1int1
7596
7442
7603
1int2
7442
1int2
7603
2i
7449
2 i
7610
1int3
7449
1int3
7610
7456
7617
7456
7617
3i
7463
3 i
7624
2int1
7463
2int1
7624
7470
7631
2int2
7470
2int2
7631
4i
7477
4 i
7638
2int3
7477
2int3
7638
7484
7645
7484
7645
5i
7491
5 i
7652
3int1
7491
3int1
7652
7498
7659
3int2
7498
3int2
7659
6i
7505
6 i
7666
3int3
7505
3int3
7666
7512
7673
7512
7673
7i
7519
7 i
7680
4int1
7519
4int1
7680
7526
7687
4int2
7526
4int2
7687
8i
7533
8 i
7694
4int3
7533
4int3
7694
7540
7701
7540
7701
9i
7547
9 i
7708
5int1
7547
5int1
7708
10
7554
10
7715
5int2
7554
5int2
7715
10 i
7561
10 i
7722
5int3
7561
5int3
7722
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
continues ...
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
288 / 542

36.2.6 9674LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.385 Rec. 1H
... continues

STM0
7428
7435
7456
7484
7512
7463
7491
7519
7540
7547
7589
7596
7617
7645
7673
7624
7652
7680
7701
7708
H (V)
V (H)
7442
7449
7470
7477
7498
7526
7554
7505
7533
7561
7603
7610
7631
7659
7638
7666
7687
7694
7715
7722
STM1
7428
7435
7442
7449
7484
7491
7498
7505
7540
7547
7554
7561
7589
7596
7603
7610
7645
7652
7659
7666
7701
7708
7715
7722
H (V)
V (H)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
7456
7463
7470
7477
ED
7512
7519
7526
7533
f0 = 7575
7617
7624
7631
7638
7673
7680
7687
7694
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
289 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
290 / 542

37 9681LSY
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
NAME
Label for
Remote
Inventory
9681LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B.

(N.B.1) (N.B.3)
3DB02532AA
411200548
08128T

(N.B.2) (N.B.3)
3DB04243AA
411200589
08128T
7,18,5 GHZ RECEIVER
3DB02533AA
474210268
7+128R
9681LSY L.O.
3DB02673AA
474210297
08LO
3DB03830AA
299702973
N.B.1
For 7.78.3 GHz band both STM0 and STM1 capacity (F386 annex 1) all channels, and
for OIRT (F386 annex 4) only lower halfband channels.
N.B.2
For 8.28.5 GHz band both STM0 and STM1 capacity (F386 annex 3) all channels, and
for OIRT (F386 annex 4) only upper halfband channels.
N.B.3
Refer to para.31.2 on page 247 for explanations on transmitter specialization for a

frequency plan

The possible channel plans for the 9681LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of the 7.7 to 8.5
GHz band are shown on following pages:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1

ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3
ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 POLAND
ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 IRAN
ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4
page 292
page 293
page 294
page 295
page 296
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
291 / 542
37.2.1 9681LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
H (V)
Freq. [MHz]
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
7747,70
8059,02
7777,35
8088,67
7807,00
8118,32
7836,65
8147,97
7866,30
8177,62
7895,95
8207,27
7925,60
8236,92
7955,25
8266,57
V (H)
7807.00
7866.30
2
1
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
7747.70
7777.35
7925.60
6
5
7836.65

ITUR F.386 ANNEX 1

STM1
fn=f0281.95+29.65n
fn=f0+29.37+29.65n
CS=29.65 DS=311.32
f0=8000
n : from 1 to 8
8059.02
7895.95
7955.25
8177.62
8
7
8118.32
8088.67
8236.92
8147.97
8
7
8207.27
8266.57
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
f0 = 8000
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
292 / 542
ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3

STM1
fn=f0122.5+28n
fn=f03,5+28n
CS=28 DS=119
f0=8387.5
n : from 1 to 3

ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3

STM0
fn=f0108.5+14n
fn=f0+10.5+14n
CS=14 DS=119
f0=8387.5
n : from 1 to 6
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
8293
8412
8293
8412
8307
8426
1i
8307
1 i
8426
8321
8440
8321
8440
8335
8454
2i
8335
2 i
8454
8349
8468
8349
8468
8363
8482
STM0
8321
8293
H (V)
V (H)
8349
8307
8440
8412
8363
8335
8468
8426
8454
8482
f0 = 8387.5
STM1
8293 8307
H (V)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
V (H)
8349
2
1
2i
2
3
1i
8468
8412 8426
8321 8335
2i
3
1i
8426 8454
f0 = 8387.5
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
293 / 542
37.2.3 9681LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 POLAND

ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3

STM1
fn=f0108.5+14n
fn=f0+10.5+14n
CS=14
DS=119
f0=8387.5
n : from 1 to 6
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
8293
8412
8307
8426
8321
8440
8335
8454
8349
8468
8363
8482
STM1
8293
H (V )
V( H )
8321
8349
1
8307
5
8335
8363
8468
8440
8412
3
8426
8454
8482
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
f0 = 8387.5
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
294 / 542
37.2.4 9681LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 IRAN

ITUR F.386 ANNEX 3 IRAN

STM0
CS=7
DS=126
f0=8387.5
n : from 1 to 12
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
8286
8412
8293
8419
8300
8426
8307
8433
8314
8440
8321
8447
8328
8454
8335
8461
8342
8468
10
8349
10
8475
11
8356
11
8482
12
8363
12
8489
STM0
8286
8300
8314
2
1
3
8293
8328
6
5
8307
8342
8
7
8321
8356
8335
12
10
9
8412
1
8363
8440 8454
11
8349
8426
3
8419
6
5
8433
8468
8
7
8447
8482
8461
12
10
9
8475
11
8489
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
f0 = 8387.5
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
295 / 542
ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4

STM1
fn=f0259+28n
fn=f0+7+28n
CS=28 DS=266
f0=8157
n : from 1 to 8
ITUR F.386 ANNEX 4

STM0
fn=f0259+14n
fn=f0+7+14n
CS=14 DS=266
f0=8157
n : from 1 to 16
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
7912
8178
7926
8192
7940
8206
7954
8220
7968
8234
7982
8248
7996
8262
8010
8276
8024
8290
10
8038
10
8304
11
8052
11
8318
12
8066
12
8332
13
8080
13
8346
14
8094
14
8360
15
8108
15
8374
16
8122
16
8388
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
7926
8192
7954
8220
7982
8248
8010
8276
8038
8304
8066
8332
8094
8360
8122
8388
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
continues ...
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
296 / 542

... continues

STM0
7912 77940 7968 7996 8024 8052
H (V)
V (H) 1
4
3
10
6
7
8080 8108
12
11
7926 7954 7982 8010 8038 8066
16
14
13
8178 8206 8234 8262 8290 8318
15
8094 8122
4
3
10
6
7
8346 8374
12
11
14
13
8192 8220 8248 8276 8304 8332
16
15
8360 8388
f0 = 8157
STM1
7982
7996
H (V)
V (H)
8038
2
3
7954
8094
6
5
8010
8192
8066
8248
8122
8304
4
3
8220
8360
6
5
8276
8332
8388
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
f0 = 8157
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
297 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
298 / 542

38 9610LSY
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
NAME
Label for
Remote
Inventory
9610LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B.

N.B.
3DB04131AA
411200588
10128T
10,010,7 GHZ RECEIVER
3DB04126AA
474210183
10128R
9610LSY L.O.
3DB03971AA
474210449
10LO
3DB03830AA
299702973

GHz band, are shown on following pages:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
MEDIASET
page 300
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
299 / 542
38.2.1 9610LSY Channel plan: MEDIASET
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
H (V)
Freq. [MHz]
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
10028
10378
10056
10406
10084
10434
10112
10462
10140
10490
10168
10518
10196
10546
10224
10574
10252
10602
10
10280
10
10630
10084 10140 10196
2
3
V (H)
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
10028
10056
6
5
10112
10168
10434 10490 10546
10378
10252
10
8
7

Channel plan for MEDIASET

STM1
CS=28; DS=350
n : from 1 to 10
10224 10280
10406
6
5
10602
10
8
7
10462 10518
10574 10630
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
f0 = 10329
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
300 / 542

39 9611LSY
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
NAME
Label for
Remote
Inventory
128
64
QAM
QAM
9611LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B.

N.B.
3DB02900AA
411200555
11128T
3DB02895AA
474210414
11128R
3DB06040AA
474210503
11064R
9611LSY L.O.
3DB02674AA
474210298
11LO
3DB03830AA
299702973

GHz band, are shown on following pages:
ITUR F.387 rec. 1

ITUR F.387 ANNEX 2
page 302
page 303
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
64QAM.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
301 / 542
39.2.1 9611LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.387 rec. 1
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
H (V)
Freq. [MHz]
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
10715
11245
10755
11285
10795
11325
10835
11365
10875
11405
10915
11445
10955
11485
10995
11525
11035
11565
10
11075
10
11605
11
11115
11
11645
12
11155
12
11685
4
3
V (H) 1
10755
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
10795 10875 10955
10715
6
5
10835 10915
11035 11115
10
8
7

ITUR F.387 recomm.1

STM1
CS=40; DS=530
fn=f0525+40n
fn=f0+5+40n
f0=11200
n : from 1 to 12
10995 11075
11325
11245
12
11
4
3
11155
11405 11485
11285
6
5
11365
11565 11645
10
8
7
11445
12
11
11525 11606 11685
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
f0 = 11200
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
302 / 542

ITUR F.387 ANNEX 2

STM1
CS=40;
DS=490
fn=f0505+40n
fn=f015+40n
f0=11200
n : from 1 to 12
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
H (V)
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
Channel
10735
10775
11265
10815
11305
10855
11345
10895
11385
10935
11425
10975
11465
11015
11505
11055
11545
10
11095
10
11585
11
11135
11
11625
12
11175
12
11665
10815 10895 10975
10735
4
3
V (H) 1
10775
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
6
5
10855 10935
11055 11135
10
8
7
11015 11095
11305
11225
12
11
11385 11465
4
3
11175
Freq. [MHz]
11265
6
5
11345
11545 11625
10
8
7
11425
12
11
11505 11585 11665
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
f0 = 11200
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
303 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
304 / 542

310 9613LSY
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
NAME
Label for
Remote
Inventory
9613LSY TRANSCEIVER
N.B.

N.B.
3DB02890AA
411200554
13128T
3DB02889AA
474210410
13128R
9613LSY L.O.
3DB02675AA
474210299
13LO
3DB03830AA
299702973

The possible channel plans for the 9613LSY equipment to be used for the exploitation of the 13 GHz band
are shown on following pages:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
ITUR Recommendation F.497

ITUR F.497 rec.1 IRAN
page 306
page 308
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
305 / 542
ITUR F.497 rec.1

STM1
CS=28; DS=266
fn=f0259+28n
fn=f0+7+28n
f0=12996
n : from 1 to 8
ITUR F.497 rec.1

STM0
CS=14;
DS=266
fn=f0252+14n
fn=f0+14+14n
f0=12996
n : from 1 to 16
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
12758
12772
13038
12786
13052
12800
13066
12814
13080
12828
13094
12842
13108
12856
13122
12870
13136
10
12884
10
13150
11
12898
11
13164
12
12912
12
13178
13
12926
13
13192
14
12940
14
13206
15
12954
15
13220
16
12968
16
13234
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
Channel
Freq.
[MHz]
12765
13031
12793
13059
12821
13087
12849
13115
12877
13143
12905
13171
12933
13199
12961
13227
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
continues ...
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
306 / 542

310.2.1 9613LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.497 Rec.1
... continues

STM0
12758 12786 12814 1284212870 12898 12926 12954
H (V)
V (H) 1
4
3
10
6
7
12
11
15
13082 13080 1310813136 13164 13192 13220
16
14
13
13024
12772 12800 12828 1285612884 12912 12940 12968
10
6
7
12
11
16
14
13
15
13038 13066 13094 1312213150 13178 13206 13234
f0 = 12996
STM1
12821
12765
H (V)
4
3
V (H)
12877
12793
12933
6
5
12849
13031
8
7
12905
13087
2
1
12961
13143
13059
13199
13115
13171
13227
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
f0 = 12996
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
307 / 542
310.2.2 9613LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.497 rec.1 IRAN

ITUR F.497 rec.1

STM0
CS=28; DS=268
fn=f0259+28n
fn=f0+7+28n
f0=12996
n : from 1 to 8
LOWER HALF
OF THE BAND
UPPER HALF
OF THE BAND
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
Channel
Freq. [MHz]
12765
13031
12793
13059
12821
13087
12849
13115
12877
13143
12905
13171
12933
13199
12961
13227
STM0
12821
12765
H(V )
V(H)
2
1
12877
3
12849
13031
2
1
7
12905
13087
12793
12933
12961
13143
13199
3
13059
13115
8
7
13171
13227
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
f0 = 12996
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
308 / 542
SECTION 4: MAINTENANCE
It contains the whole logical and operative information for the equipment maintenance.
SECTION CONTENT
PAGE
GENERAL
Chapter 41 Maintenance Policy
It introduces the basic concepts for the equipment maintenance.
311
Chapter 42 Set and use of EOW functions

It explains how to configure and use the Engineering OrderWire functions of the
equipment.
313
Chapter 43 Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts

It describes the instruments, accessories and the equipment spare parts that are
envisaged to carry out the routine and corrective maintenance of the equipment.
317
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
Chapter 44 First Level Maintenance
It describes the First Level Maintenance (system state display) of the equipment.
325
SECOND LEVEL MAINTENANCE (PREVENTIVE)

331
Chapter 45 Preventive Maintenance
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SECOND LEVEL MAINTENANCE (CORRECTIVE)
ED
Chapter 46 Troubleshooting
It describes how to perform troubleshooting.
333
Chapter 47 Unit replacement

It explains how to replace all units, except transceivers.
347
Chapter 48 Transceiver repair and replacement

It explains how to repair and replace transceivers.
369
Chapter 49 Faulty unit repair and repair form

It explains what to do in order to send faulty units to the authorized repair centers.
395
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
309 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
310 / 542
41 MAINTENANCE POLICY

This chapter introduces the basic concepts for the equipment maintenance.
41.1 Classification of maintenance levels and operators

The maintenance procedures described in following chapters have been conceived taking into account
the following considerations:
The twostation layout typical of a radio link requires often that different operators can communicate
with each other to solve problems. The EOW functions of this equipment give a simple way for this
communication need.
This matter is described in chapter 42 on page 313.
The possibility of carrying out routine and corrective maintenance is based on the existence of:
a suitable set of instruments and accessories
a suitable set of spare parts

These matters are described in chapter 43 on page 317.
Maintenance can be classified as :

First Level Maintenance :
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
First level maintenance consists of a set of simple operations by means of which a First
Level Maintenance Operator can acknowledge the state of the system and decide whether
or not the intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is required in order to
bring back the assembly to optimum operating conditions by troubleshooting and unit
replacement, if necessary. In this philosophy:
First Level Maintenance Operator should not be authorized to change the equipment status;
he should be only authorized to display it or to make some simple tests through the Craft
Terminal, if expressly authorized by the Station Manager.
These actions are described in chapter 44 on page 325.
Second Level Maintenance can be classified as:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Preventive maintenance is a periodic set of measurements and checks. This maintenance
discovers those devices whose function has deteriorated with time and therefore need
adjustment or replacement.
These actions are described in chapter 45 on page 331.
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE (troubleshooting and repair)

Corrective maintenance consists of a set of operations which bring back the assembly to
optimum operating conditions in a very short time, with the aim of obtaining maximum
operational availability.
These actions are split as follows:
chapter 46 on page 333 describes how to perform troubleshooting
chapter 47 on page 347 explains how to replace all units, except transceivers
chapter 48 on page 369 explains how to repair and replace transceivers
chapter 49 on page 395 explains what to do in order to send faulty units to the
authorized repair centers.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
311 / 542
With regard to the access to the Craft Terminal functionalities, notice that, according to point [3] on
page 82 (Security management) it is possible to use the following operator profiles:
Viewer for the First Level Maintenance Operator
Operator for the Second Level Maintenance Operator.
41.2 First Level Maintenance Personnel skill

First Level Maintenance Personnel must have got:
an adequate technical training on telecommunications. Experience in first level maintenance

activities is a must;
an adequate presentation on the equipment this handbook refers to;
detailed instructions on what to do and/or who must be contacted in the case he finds the
equipment out of its normal conditions.
41.3 Second Level Maintenance Personnel skill

Second Level Maintenance Personnel must have been an adequate technical training on
telecommunications. Experience in maintenance activities is a must.
In particular, Second Level Maintenance Personnel must be familiar:
with the equipment this handbook refers to
and with the use of the Craft Terminal applications of the equipment this handbook refers to.
Without these prerequisites, reading this handbook and the associated handbooks indicated in para.C.2
on page 522 is usually not enough to properly maintain equipment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Additional skills required for transceiver repair are specified in point a ) on page 374.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
312 / 542

Second Level Maintenance Operator is authorized to make all actions necessary to repair
the system; moreover he only should be authorized to carry out preventive maintenance.

42 SET AND USE OF EOW FUNCTIONS

Please refer to chapter 41 on page 311 for an introduction to the basic concepts of equipment
maintenance.
This chapter explains how to configure and use the EOW (Engineering OrderWire) function of the
equipment.
42.1 Telephone kit and telephone set operative information

The DTMF telephone kit (P/N REF.[40] in Tab. 11. on page 146) allows to carry out EOW in/out calls. As
shown in Fig. 127. herebelow, it is composed by a Telephone set (A) and its holder (B) to be mounted,
through the accessories depicted in the figure, on the rack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 127. DTMF Telephone kit
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
313 / 542
Fig. 128. herebelow shows one of the possible versions of supplied Telephone sets.
(4)
(2)
1

rear
front
(3)
PAUSE FLASH REDIAL
(1)
if present, these keys have no use
(1)
ON/OFF switch (must be set to ON when the Telephone is used)
(2)
PULSE/TONE switch (must be set to TONE)
(3)
DIAL/LOCK switch (must be set to DIAL when the Telephone is used)
(4)
Led (lights on when the Telephone set jack is connected to TPH connector of SERVICE unit and
switch (1) is set to ON)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 128. Telephone set
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
314 / 542

42.2 EOW Channel use

42.2.1 General Information
a)
Connection diagram
STATION A
STATION B
TRANSCEIVER
TRANSCEIVER
SERVICE
SERVICE
Telephone set
Telephone set
Telephone kit/set drawings are given in Fig. 127. on page 313 and Fig. 128. on page 314.
each Telephone set has its own phone number. Phone number can be in the range 10 to
99. Telephone sets must have phone numbers different from each other.
N.B.
Physical connections on equipment: connect Telephone set jack to to the telephone jack of SERVICE
unit (connector (J5) in Fig. 87. on page 177).
b)
Telephone set phone number display/change

Display/setting is done by Craft Terminal by the following menus:
display: Configuration Overhead OH Phone Parameters
change:Configuration Overhead OH Phone Parameters phone number Apply
Refer to CT Operators Handbook for details

c)
Telephone set settings (on rear side)
P T
DIAL LOCK
OFF ON
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
d)
ED
P = Pulse, T = Tone.
Set to T prior to making a call.
Set DIALLOCK switch to LOCK,
and OFFON switch to ON
prior to making a call.
Ways of Calling : two different ways of calling are possible:
SELECTIVE: a connection between two users (dial a number 10 to 99)
OMNIBUS:
a unidirectional connection with all the users (dial digits 00)
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
315 / 542
f)
Leds indication: LINE O.W. area in Fig. 87. on page 177:
(7) EOW (GREEN):
free line
(6) EOW (YELLOW:
busy line
(6) Flashing YELLOW:
received and recognized call

e)
Telephone set keyboard

HANDSET
MEANING
Force unlocking of the line
Engage line
42.2.2 Call Setup/End by Telephone Set

a)
To Call From Handset:

1. Check that line is free (EOWfree green LED on SERVICE is on).
2. Handset OFF/ON switch to ON.
3. On keypad, press # to engage line.
4. Check that EOWbusy yellow LED on SERVICE is on.
5. On keypad, dial twodigit number of station to be called (or 00 for omnibus call)
b)
To Answer Call At Handset:

1. SERVICE EOWbusy yellow LED flashes and audible tone is present.
2. Connect handset to SERVICE, set ON/OFF switch to ON, press # on keypad.
c)
To End Call From Handset:

1. On keypad, press *.
2. Move ON/OFF switch to OFF.
42.2.3 Additional standard Party lines

Three PartyLine (VF TX/RX A,B and C) paths are available on BB shelfs connector M190 (see
Tab. 37. on page 233).
42.3 TPH Channel use (Additional Voice)

42.3.1 General Information and usage
It is possible only with subunit TPH equipped inside SERVICE board.
The DTMF Telephone Kit (Ref.[40] in Tab. 11. on page 146) must be connected to the system through
pins 7 and 20 of BB shelfs connector M190 (see Tab. 37. on page 233).
The call procedure is equal to that explained in para.42.2 above but, in this case, the leds in LINE
TPH area are used instead.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
42.3.2 Additional Party lines

Two PartyLine (VF TX/RX A and B TPH) paths are available on BB shelfs connector M190 (see
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
316 / 542

43 MAINTENANCE TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS

43.1 Introduction
maintenance.
This chapter describes the instruments, accessories and the equipment spare parts that are envisaged
to carry out the routine and corrective maintenance of the equipment, and and is organized as follows:
herebelow, including:
herebelow
on page 318
Instruments and accessories
Software tools
System and Maintenance Tool Kits
Set of spare parts

Types of Spare Parts

on page 322
Number of Spare Parts

on page 324
General rules on spare parts management

on page 324
Spare Flash Card management

on page 324
43.2 Instruments and accessories

43.2.1 Software tools
There is a local terminal (PCECT) which permits to display all the alarms and manages the Equipment.
The relative processing is described in the relevant Craft Terminal Operators Handbook (see Tab. 81. on
page 527).
When a TMN is implemented, an Operation System will display alarms and manage all the connected
Equipment of the network. Refer to the relevant handbooks.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
With reference to Fig. 85. on page 173:
connection with the PC is achieved through connector (M3) available on the System Controller unit
through connectors (J1) to (J3), the same unit can be connected to an Operations System associated
to the Transmission Management Network in order to execute operations similar to those carried out
by the PC.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
317 / 542
The following Tab. 56. lists the items contained in the LSY SYSTEM TOOL KIT (for P/N see REF.[41] in
Tab. 11. on page 146). Drawings and descriptions are given for special items.
Tab. 56. LSY System Tool Kit
ITEMS
FACTORY P/N
NOTES
BAGS
Tool bag
810.704.305
Maintenance Tool bag
870.704.306
STANDARD TOOLS & MISCELLANEOUS
Fixed spanner 8 x 10
870.952.110
Fixed spanner 6 x 1
870.952.106
Fixed spanner 12 x 13
870.952.119
Screwdriver 3 x 100
870.959.130
Screwdriver 3.5 x 100
870.959.140
Screwdriver 5.5 x 200
870.959.166
Crosshead Screwdriver 3 x 60
870.959.530
Crosshead Screwdriver 4.5 x 80
870.959.540
Crosshead Screwdriver 4.5 x 250
870.959.565
Socket wrench
870.952.800
Socket wrench
870.952.995
Special screwdriver
870.959.815
Torque wrench
870.952.302
Insulating plug with pliers
041.720.010
COMPONENTS OF ANTISTATIC WRISTBAND
Antistatic wristband
041.172.011
Antistatic applications cord
041.911.001
Plug with crocodile pliers
041.172.010
Female button termination
248.501.099
see Fig. 200.

on page 501
SPECIAL EXTRACTORS
Cables 1.0/2.3 extractor
245.701.842
Electrical/Optical module / Fans assembled extractor
241.901.305
Extractors holder bracket
241.901.306
see para. 43.2.2.2

4 3222
on page 321
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LABELS
Label for codebar
268.001.431
Label for codebar
268.001.702
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
318 / 542

43.2.2 System and Maintenance Tool Kits

The following Tab. 57. lists the items contained in the LSY MAINTENANCE TOOL KIT (for P/N see
REF.[42] in Tab. 11. on page 146). Drawings and descriptions are given for special items.
Tab. 57. LSY Maintenance Tool Kit
ITEMS
FACTORY P/N
NOTES
BAGS
Maintenance Tool bag
870.704.306
75ohm Transition
018.860.001
Coax. transition75 plugplug
018.860.002
Coax. transition 50 female Nmale SMA
040.198.018
Coax. transition 75 male BNCfemale1.6/5.6
040.198.103
Coax. cord
041.962.184
Coax. cord
041.962.264
Coax. cord
041.962.276
Cord
041.997.010
Bipolar cord fitted with male connectors
049.911.081
SPECIAL CORDS
Special cord for PRx measurement
041.992.608
see Fig. 129.

on page 320
Cord for use with SIBDL
041.992.617
see Fig. 130.

on page 320
SPECIAL EXTRACTORS
Cables 1.0/2.3 extractor
245.701.842
Electrical/Optical module / Fans assembled extractor
241.901.305
see para. 43.2.2.2

4 3.2.2.2
on page 321
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LABELS
Label for codebar
268.001.431
Label for codebar
268.001.702
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
319 / 542

43.2.2.1 Special cords
plug M1 or M2
in Fig. 102. on page 195
Fig. 129. Special cord for PRx measurement
Fig. 130. Cord for use with SIBDL

For the use of this cord to carry out the NE software download via SIBDL, according to the
SWP used, please refer to the:
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 Line Up guide (REF.[D] on page 524)

or:
9600LSY/LHR Rel.2.0 Line Up guide (REF.[E] on page 524)

or:
9600LSY Rel.1.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0 (REF.[N] on page 527) from ED.07.
or:
9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 from V2.0.2 (REF.[P] on page 527)
from ED.03.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
320 / 542
43.2.2.2 Special extractors

See Fig. 131. herebelow.

[1]
Positioning of the tools support

Fasten the adhesive tools support (1) on a free surface near the subrack (for example on the rack
mechanical structure or on the subrack connection flange).
[2]
Special extractors usage

Two extractors are available on the tools support:
extractor (2) is used to remove the optical/electrical modules from the units housing them or to
remove a Fans Assembled Unit from the Fans Shelf. To carry out remotion:
unscrew the fixing screws of the module/unit to the front panel of the group/Fans Shelf
insert and rotate the extractor (2) in the suitable hole of the optical/electrical module or
Fans Assembled Unit
pull out the module/unit
extractor (3) is used to remove the coaxial cables.
3
1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Factory code 245.701.842

Fig. 131. Special extractors and holder bracket
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
321 / 542
43.3.1 Types of Spare Parts

The set of spare parts is inclusive of a minimum number of spares for each type of replaceable plugin
unit, as detailed in following:
para.43.3.1.1 herebelow
(all units, with exception of Transceivers)
para.43.3.1.2 on page 323 (Transceivers)

The unit replacement procedures described in relevant chapters of this section Maintenance
in this handbook presume that the units present in the sparepart stock correspond exactly to
the plugin replaceable units that are equipped in the system, i.e.:
with the same Part Numbers (N.B.1)
and including the same babyboards (with the same Part Numbers) (N.B.2)
with the aim of speedingup the corrective maintenance and to avoid complex unit manipulation
(baby board mounting/dismounting on/from the main board) which could result in unit and/or
babyboard damage.
N.B.
43.3.1.1 All units, with exception of Transceivers

Tab. 58. Spare parts list
UNIT
SYSCO
DETAILS FOR P/Ns

AND
EQUIPPING RULES
BABY BOARDS
N.B.3
Tab 14
Tab.
14. on page 161
FLASH CARD (see para.43.3.4 page 324)

SERVICE
ADDITIONAL VOICE
(optional)
RRA CHANNEL
RRA STANDBY (if used)
OPTICAL MODULE (if used)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MODEM (STM0 or STM1)
1 or 2 CANCCOMB
(STM0 or STM1) (optional)
PSU
PSF
ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING (if used)
FANS ASSEMBLED (if used)
N.B.1
As far as transmitters are concerned, take into account that they are also specialized for a
particular frequency plan (see para.31.2 on page 247).
N.B.2
According to the sparepart policy, Customers are supplied with spare units already equipped
with front plates and baby boards, according to Customers System configuration.
N.B.3
As spare part, SYSCO is shipped from factory always with its subunit ESCON already mounted.
Customer is never allowed to dismount it from the main board. Conversely, the SYSCO spare
part is usually shipped from factory without the Flash Card, that is available as individual item.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
322 / 542

43.3 Set of spare parts
43.3.1.2 Transceivers

Please refer to para.23.4.1 on page 185 for the detailed description of the Transceiver composition in
the various possible configurations.
a)
Spare Transmitter subassembly

Fig. 147. on page 383 shows the Transceiver assembly supplied as spare part. The assembly is
shown with the cover plate removed (see Fig. 94. on page 186).
There are two possibilities:
1)
Transmitter + Main Receiver

This assembly includes the following components:
2)
standard components:
Transceiver box with covers (see Fig. 94. on page 186)
RT control
Amplifier
Up Converter
Delay Line
DC/DC Converter
The P/N of this assembly is frequency dependent.
Main Receiver
The P/N of this component is frequency dependent.
Transmitter only
This assembly includes the standard components cited above, but does not contain the Main
Receiver, whose spare must be provisioned as individual item (see point c ) herebelow).
This assembly (Transmitter + Main Receiver or Transmitter only does not include the following
subcomponents:
b)
RX Local Oscillator
TX Local Oscillator
see point b ) herebelow
Diversity Receiver
see point c ) herebelow
Frequency Reuse kit module
see point d ) herebelow
Spare Local Oscillator subassembly

Fig. 144. on page 377 shows the Local Oscillator subassembly supplied as spare part.
The P/N of this component is frequency dependent. (N.B.).
c)
Spare Main and Diversity Receiver subassembly

The Main Receiver subassembly is necessary as spare part in the case the spare Transmitter
subassembly is supplied without the Main Receiver already assembled inside.
The Diversity Receiver subassembly is necessary as spare part only in Diversity configurations.
Fig. 145. on page 379 shows the Receiver subassembly supplied as spare part.
The P/N of this component is frequency dependent. (N.B.).
d)
Spare Frequency Reuse kit module subassembly
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This spare is necessary only in Frequency Reuse configurations.

Fig. 146. on page 382 shows the Frequency Reuse kit module subassembly supplied as spare part.
The P/N of this component is frequency independent. (N.B.).
For the item P/Ns and other notes, please refer to section 3 on page 243, choosing the chapter
relevant to your specific radio system.
N.B.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
323 / 542
The overall number of spares depends on Customer requirements, and should be based on the average
amount of transmission circuits available to be accounted for not only during MTBF but also during MTTR;
the latter depending on the amount of spare parts available.
43.3.3 General rules on spare parts management
Before storing the spare units make sure that they are working by inserting them in an operating equipment
It is suggested to periodically check those spare units that have not been utilized for over a year.
If the spare parts and the equipment are stored in the same environment, make sure that the spare parts
are placed in cabinets to safeguard them from dust and damp.
Moreover, they should also be well grounded to avoid electrostatic discharges.
If the spare parts are stored in another room, or have to be moved from another place, building or site,
make sure that the following is observed:
the spare parts must be wrapped in antistatic and padded envelopes;
the spare parts must not touch wet surfaces or chemical agents that might damage them (e.g. gas);
if during transportation the temperature is lower than that of the room where they had been kept,
make sure that before using them they pass a certain period in a climatic chamber to prevent thermal
shocks and/or the possibility of steaming up.
When replacing a unit/subunit, make sure that the spare unit/subunit is set exactly as the
replaced one.
43.3.4 Spare Flash Card management

Please refer to para.52.3.3 on page 441 for the Flash Card description.
The Flash Card supplied as spare part is empty (i.e. without SW) and must be left as it is for its possible
use as spare part.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ATTENTION
Do not use a Flash Card already loaded with SW as spare part, unless you use the specific
instructions (that include the Flash Card reset and the SW download through SIBDL application)
given, according to the SWP used, in the:

or:

or:
or:
9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 from V2.0.2 (REF.[P] on page 527) from
ED.03.
You must be aware that if a Flash Card with a SWP (different from that running in the system) is
inserted as it is in the System Controller (and the System Controller is inserted in its shelfs slot),
the software download will be automatically carried out from the Flash Card toward the Systems EC,
RC and SUs, thus causing a complete system crash.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
324 / 542

43.3.2 Number of spare parts

44 FIRST LEVEL MAINTENANCE

44.1 Introduction
maintenance.
This chapter describes the First Level Maintenance of 9600LSY equipment, and and is organized as
follows:
herebelow
on page 326
on page 328
Procedure summary
System state display by visual indications
Checks by Craft Terminal
44.2 Procedure summary

START
SYSTEM STATE DISPLAY BY VISUAL INDICATIONS
check TRU lamps, if equipped
(para 44.3.1 page 326)
MAJOR
ALARM
CONDITION
MINOR
ALARM
CONDITION
perform system lamp test

(para 44.3.2.1 page 327)
check alarm leds on SYSCO unit
(para 44.3.2.2 page 327)
NO ALARM CONDITIONS
IMMEDIATE intervention of a
Second Level Maintenance Operator
is required
DELAYED intervention of a
Second Level Maintenance Operator
is required
END
END
CHECKS BY CRAFT TERMINAL

if expressly authorized by the Station Manager
(para 44.4 page 328)
END
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 132. First Level Maintenance procedure summary
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
325 / 542
44.3.1 Inspection of station alarm lamps on TRU (if equipped)

RED (1)
RED (2)
YELLOW
GREEN
LED ON
MEANING
ACTION
RED (1)
Detection of an URGENT alarm: it means that there is at least one alarm

(internal and/or external) for which traffic is affected.
RED (2)
Detection of a NOT URGENT alarm: it means that there is at least one alarm
(internal and/or external) for which traffic is not affected (e.g. something is
wrong, but the traffic is recovered by an automatic protection switch).
Alarm condition ATTENDED: it means that an Operator [by pushbutton (8)

on SYSCO unit, see Fig. 134. on page 327 or by Craft Terminal] has
attended the alarm (for details, see para.46.3.2 on page 335).
If also SYSCO units led ABN (4) [see Fig. 134. on page 327] is on, there is
an ABNORMAL operative condition: usually it means that there is a
condition forced by an Operator (e.g. a manual switch regarding the
protection system), or a SW download is in progress.
It is activated by the buzzer input.
YELLOW
GREEN
ACTION:
A
The immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is required.
Wait 10 minutes. If persists, the immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator
is required only if Red LED (1) URGENT is on
The immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is not required
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 133. Station Alarms on TRU
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
326 / 542

44.3 System state display by visual indications
44.3.2 Inspection of alarm lamps on SYSCO unit

44.3.2.1 Lamp test

To be sure to have correct indications, carry out the lamp test, pushing pushbutton (7) in Fig. 134. below:
while pushed, all leds of all units should be turned on, with the exception of those of the transceivers.
(Attended)
(6) bicolor led:

green flashing: SW download in progress
(internal or toward other boards)
Fig. 134. System Controller front view (particular)

44.3.2.2 Check alarms lamps
With reference to Fig. 134. above:
LED ON
MEANING
ACTION
(1) URG
Detection of an URGENT alarm: it means that there is at least one alarm

(internal and/or external) for which traffic is affected.
(2) NURG
Detection of a NOT URGENT alarm: it means that there is at least one alarm
(internal and/or external) for which traffic is not affected (e.g. something is
wrong, but the traffic is recovered by an automatic protection switch).
(3) ATTD
Alarm condition ATTENDED: it means that an Operator (by pushbutton (8)

or by Craft Terminal) has attended the alarm (for details, see para.46.3.2
on page 335).
(4) ABN
Detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition: usually it means that there

is a condition forced by an Operator (e.g. a manual switch regarding the
protection system), or a SW download is in progress.
(5) IND
Detection of an INDICATIVE alarm: it means that the possible equipment

alarmed condition can be due to an external alarm.
(6) red
SYSCO unit is faulty
SW download in progress (internal or toward other boards)
(6) green
flashing
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ACTION:
A
The immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is required.
Wait 10 minutes. If persists, the immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator
is required only if Red LED (1) URG is on
The immediate intervention of a Second Level Maintenance Operator is not required
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
327 / 542
This paragraph explains how to login the CT application and sums up the common used commands for
system status display and checks. For screen details, please refer to the CT Operators Handbook.
These operations can be done by the First Level Maintenance Operator only if expressly
authorized by the Station Manager.
N.B.
a ) Craft Terminal (CT) connection and startup

1)
connect Craft Terminal (CT) to Equipment

plug CT suitable cable to PC and to CRAFT TERM connector on SAM module (see (M3) in
Fig. 85. on page 173).
2)
CT start
power on CT and wait for PC startup
Start 1320CTQ3CTP v.x.x.x ; notes:
if choice 1320CTQ3CTP v.x.x.x is not available, PC is not configured as Craft

Terminal: Software Package loading is necessary
x.x.x depends on Software Package loaded

after a while, the Network Element Synthesis screen will appear, showing all Network
Elements that can be selected. After this Start operation, all NEs appear with symbol ?
(it means they are not supervised)
b ) Start supervision on a selected Network Element (NE)

From screen Network Element Synthesis ( see point a ) 2 ) ) :
1)
select interested Network Element (NE) clicking once left mouse button on it
2)
while NE selected, with right mouse button choose Start Supervision , and with left mouse
button execute it (click once)
wait until the symbol ? becomes colored (it means NE in supervised state)
c ) Alarm Surveillance
From screen Network Element Synthesis with NE in supervised state ( see point b ) 2 ) ):
1)
2)
while NE selected, with right mouse button choose Show NE alarms , and with left mouse
button execute it (click once)
(note: if Show NE alarms does not appear, wait few seconds, then try again)
after a while, alarm screen will appear showing alarms. At the end close all alarm screens.
d ) Network Element login
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
From screen Network Element Synthesis with NE in supervised state ( see point b ) 2 ) ):
ED
1)
2)
while NE selected, with right mouse button choose NE login , and with left mouse button
execute it (click once)
(if NE login does not appear, wait some seconds, then try again).
The login screen appears. Type:
in Login field:
as communicated by the Station Manager
in Password field: as communicated by the Station Manager

Then click OK with left mouse button
3)
if the login is accepted, the USM screen appears. The following checks are now possible.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
328 / 542

44.4 Checks by Craft Terminal
e ) Radio Frequency check

From USM screen of the NE ( see point d ) 3 ) ):

menu: Radio Frequency
after a while, Frequency screen will appear showing Transmitted and Received frequencies.
At the end close the Frequency screen
1)
f ) Transmitted and Received power levels

1)
menu: Radio Power Measurement Graphic Power Measurement

after a while, Graphic Power Measurement screen will appear
2)
on Graphic Power Measurement screen, select channel to be measured with left mouse
button, then click OK
after a while, Measure screen will appear
3)
on Measure screen, click with left mouse button on j Show Details to see detailed power
measures. At the end close all measure screens
g ) Performance Monitoring
1)
menu: Rack SubRack Board

wait for Board screen opening
2)
select the circuit Regenerator Section Termination ( RST radio or RST line )
3)
menu: Port Performance Display History Data

after a while, measure screen will appear showing RadioSide Performance Monitoring data.
At the end close measure screen.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
It is assumed that PM has already been launched and that at least 15 minutes or 24 hours
(according to the set PM period) have been passed from the launch.
PM launch can be carried out on port view screen as follows:
with left mouse button, select the block RST on the right
menu: Port Performance Configure Performance Monitoring
select NE 15 m or NE 24 h
click on Data Collection
click on Apply
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
329 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
330 / 542

45 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
maintenance.
Preventive maintenance is a periodic set of measurements and checks. This maintenance discovers those
devices whose function has deteriorated with time and therefore need adjustment or replacement.
Typically, digital equipment requires no routine maintenance.
The equipment allows to assess the quality of the connection links or counting the errored events and
obtaining performance data.
The Performance Monitoring Application, described in para.46.5.7 on page 345, allows this function.
45.1 Preventive Maintenance every year

It is suggested to carry out the following operations yearly:
[1]
Mechanical checks
Check that:
the power supply units,
the coaxial cables,
the waveguides,
the mounting fixtures

are connected correctly.
[2]
Grounding check
Check that the racks, subracks, and modules are grounded.
[3]
Power cables check

SAFETY RULES
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by
48 V dc.
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Short circuiting, low-voltage,
low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in burns
and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before
working with primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input
terminals.
Make these operations:
Check that the power cable is perfectly safety grounded.
Make sure that the subrack has been tightly fastened to the rack with screws, to guarantee
grounding (the rack is connected to the station ground).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[4]
Operative checks
Visual check:
During the normal operation, check the led normal condition, as specified in Tab. 59. on
page 337
Checks by Craft Terminal
Refer to the specific attachment of the LineUp guide (REF.[D] or [E] on page 524)
N.B.
ED
some suggested checks are indicated in para.44.4 on page 328.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
331 / 542
The MTBF of the Fans Assembled Unit equipped below BaseBand shelf (and, if equipped, below
1650SMC shelf) is about 20 years, provided that Environmental Conditions regarding sand and dust are
in the limits specified by Recc.ETS 300 019 Class 3.1 (see point 13.7.2 on page 101). Even though the
operating environment is compliant with these limits, it is suggested to carry out the following operation
every three years:
pull out Fans Assembled Unit and clean fans removing dust and sand.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In the case of worse environmental conditions, perform this operation more frequently.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
332 / 542

45.1.1 Preventive Maintenance for Fans Assembled Units (if equipped)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

46 TROUBLESHOOTING
46.1 Introduction
This chapter explains the troubleshooting operations to be carried out to identify faulty units:
General flowchart of corrective maintenance
on page 334
Alarm acknowledgment and attending
on page 335
TroubleShooting starting with visual indications
on page 336
TroubleShooting via Craft Terminal
on page 340
If not yet done, please read N.B. in para.43.3.1 on page 322.

The Corrective Maintenance general flowchart (Fig. 135. on page 334) includes both troubleshooting
operations and replacement/repair procedures described in following chapters of this section.
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this chapter are:
System Description
System configurations, to take into account the actual system

configuration
Operative information on equipment boards
System cabling (if problems on cabling can be suspected)
Maintenance Policy
Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts
First Level Maintenance
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
333 / 542
46.2 General flowchart of corrective maintenance

START
Alarm acknowledgment and attending
(para.46.3 page 335)
TroubleShooting starting with visual indications

(para.46.4 page 336)
Other measures
TroubleShooting starting via Craft Terminal

(para.46.5 page 340).
Identification of a unit to be replaced.
Unit replacement
transceiver
(chapter 48 page 369)
all units except transceiver

(chapter 47 page 347)
System check via Craft Terminal

try again with
another unit
Fault repaired ?
Y
If possible, restore replaced unit in the system
and perform system check via Craft Terminal,
to verify that is really faulty
possible intermittent
failure
Fixed fault ?
Y
Restore spare part in the system and perform

system check via Craft Terminal
Send back faulty unit to Repair Centre together with
Repair Form compiled (chapter 49 page 395)
END
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 135. Corrective Maintenance general flowchart
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
334 / 542

46.3 Alarm acknowledgment and attending

Please refer to Fig. 135. on page 334, for the position of this step inside the corrective maintenance
general flowchart.
(Attended)
(6) bicolor led:

green flashing: SW download in progress
(internal or toward other boards)
Fig. 136. System Controller front view (particular)

46.3.1 Alarm acknowledgment
The need for Operator intervention is notified:
locally (in front of the equipment or in the station) when:
on SYSCO board (see Fig. 136. above) one of the leds (1) (2) (3) (4) (URG/NURG/IND/ABN)
lights up
or the same alarms, propagated through the Station Alarms cable, operate the TRU lamps (see
para.44.3.1 on page 326) or similar remote device
and/or when the alarm LEDs listed in Tab. 59. on page 337 are not in normal status.
remotely (in a TMN maintenance center) when the OS acknowledges the presence of problems in
the station.
When the local Operator decides to manage the problem, he should carry out the alarm attending
operation (see para.46.3.2 below). This operation has the scope to notify locally in the station and
remotely to the TMN maintenance center that a local operator is attending the problem.
46.3.2 Alarm Attending
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
See Fig. 136. above:
the detected alarm condition can be stored through pushbutton (8) on the System Controller unit.
This operation will turn OFF the LEDs URG/NURG (1) (2) and will light up the yellow LED ATTD (3)
on the System Controller unit (Attended).
a possible new alarm condition (following the Attending) will turn on the LEDs URG (1) or NURG (2).
when the fault has been repaired, the yellow lamp (if the alarm had been attended) or the red ones
(if the alarm had not been attended and no further alarms had occurred in the mean time) will turn
off.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
335 / 542
general flowchart.
Some problems may be localized looking the LEDs indicated in following Tab. 59.
Refer to Fig. 137. herebelow to carry out this procedure.
In any case, the inspection through the Craft Terminal (if possible) is recommended before doing any unit
replacement.
Before starting this inspection, perform lamp test (para 23.3.2.1 page 174).
N.B.
START
N
any PSU green

led off ?
one or both PSF

green led off ?
verify circuit breakers on TRU

(see para.23.7.1 on page 200)
PSU switch on ?
problem solved?
N
N
PSF probably faulty
PSU probably faulty
why ?
solve problem
SYSCO card fail on

(led (6) red)?
N
perform lamp test
(para 23.3.2.1 page 174)
OK ?
carry out procedure in

try login NE by Craft Terminal
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N
login successful ?

para.46.5 page 340
Fig. 137. TroubleShooting starting with visual indications
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
336 / 542

46.4 TroubleShooting starting with visual indications
Tab. 59. Normal condition (no alarms) of LEDs on equipments units

TRU SHELF
UNIT
TRU
FIGURE
LED
all
NORMAL
STATUS
OFF
BASE BAND SHELF board area

UNIT
FIGURE
LED
NORMAL
STATUS
System Controller
(6) bicolor
OFF
Service
(10) red
OFF
RRACHANNEL and
RRASTANDBY (09)
(1) red
OFF
Modem (09)
(1) red
OFF
PSU (09)
(2) green
ON
PSF (01)
(4) green
ON
BASE BAND SHELF access area

UNIT
Additional Housekeeping
FIGURE
LED
(1) red
NORMAL
STATUS
OFF
TRANSCEIVER SHELF
UNIT
Transceiver (09)
(0 9)
FIGURE
LED
Fig.
102. on page 195
Fig 102
NORMAL
STATUS
(1) green
ON
(2) red
OFF
FAN SHELF (01)

UNIT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FANS Assembled (01)
ED
FIGURE
LED
(1) red
NORMAL
STATUS
OFF
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
337 / 542

Tab. 60. , Tab. 61. and Fig. 138. herebelow sum up the information that can be seen on SERVICE and
RRASTANDBY units with regard to the status of protections at radio side (refer to para.52.4.2 thru
52.4.3 (pages 445 on, for details).
Tab. 60. Indications on SERVICE for Rxside protections
INDICATION
(1)
MEANING (Rx section)
(2)
off
Rx ch n in service and no manual operation active (automatic switch active).

There is a problem (local or remote) on the link.
on
Rx ch n (MAIN) in service for Lockout local manual command
off
Rx ch 0 (SPARE) in service and no manual operation active (automatic switch

active).
on
Rx ch 0 (SPARE) in service for Force_Switch local manual command
Tab. 61. Indications on RRASTANDBY for Txside protections

INDICATION
MEANING (Tx section)
(3)
n
Tx ch n (MAIN) protected by Tx ch 0 (SPARE). Occasional traffic not transmitted
All Tx ch n (MAIN) in service.

Tx ch 0 (SPARE) in service: free or engaged by occasional traffic
SERVICE

of the Rx
protected channel
(1 digit display)
(2) Manual operation
of N+1 logic
(yellow led)
RRASTANDBY
Tx

of the Tx protected channel
(1 digit display)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 138. Indications on SERVICE and RRASTANDBY for protections
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
338 / 542
46.4.1 Problems with the Craft Terminal

Whenever the login with the Craft Terminal does not work, proceed with the following checks:
Restart the Craft Terminal (logout and switch off/on).
With the Craft Terminal connected to the equipment Finterface, open the Alcatel Lower Layer
Manager screen (by clicking with the mouse pointer on the Alcatel symbol
menu bar). The fields to be verified in this screen are:
Port
Physical
COM1
ON
in the MSWindows
OSI or
Logical
ON
Verify that the CT port is effectively that connected by cable to equipments F interface
If Physical is OFF, the problem can be due to:
CT physical port faulty
SYSCOs Finterface port faulty
the cable
If possible, verify the correct working of the Craft Terminal and of the CTF interface cable using them
with another Alcatel equipment. If the problem persists also with it, solve the problem.
Otherwise, proceed with the SYSCO unit replacement, or perform steps indicated in para.46.4.2
herebelow.
If OSI/Logical is OFF, the problem can be due to:
FLASH CARD missing on SYSCO unit (verify) or FLASH CARD/SYSCO faulty
SYSCOs Radio Controller section faulty or in abnormal condition.

Proceed with the SYSCO unit replacement, or perform steps indicated in para.46.4.2 herebelow.
46.4.2 CARD FAIL red led on SYSCO Unit turned on
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
If the bicolor LED CARD FAIL on SYSCO unit is redon (led (6) in Fig. 136. on page 335), (or it is off, but
lamp test does not work) and the Craft Terminal application:
responds (login successful), proceed investigating the problems through the Craft Terminal
application
does not respond (login unsuccessful):
ED
1)
push the RESET button on SYSCO unit (button (9) in Fig. 85. on page 173) and wait 3 minutes;
2)
if, within 3 minutes, the Craft Terminal application responds, open the Alarm status procedure
and proceed investigating the system state;
3)
if, after 3 minutes, the Craft Terminal application does not respond, replace the SYSCO unit,
as described in para.47.3.6 on page 354;
4)
if the problem persists also after the SYSCO unit replacement, the failure or content corruption
of the FLASH CARD must be suspected (a very extraordinary event); proceed with its
replacement, as indicated in para.47.3.7 on page 356.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
339 / 542
general flowchart.
The ECT/RECT application (see para.12.8.6 on page 81) includes several types of functions for system
maintenance (used in lineup operations, too), as depicted in following table:
FUNCTION
Alarm Surveillance
Operators Controls of the protection switches
Loopbacks
TX mute function (local and remote)
Not Intrusive BER measurements
J0 Section Trace management
Performance Monitoring
Radio Performance Monitoring
Event Log
Additional information on other handbooks
The actual availability of some of functions listed above depend on the SWP release and version
used. F or further information, please refer to the CT Operators Handbook associated to the
SWP release and version you use.
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FUNCTION DESCRIPTION
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
340 / 542

46.5 TroubleShooting via Craft Terminal

46.5.1 Alarm Surveillance (1330AS)

The 1330AS application embedded in the 9600LSY SWP allows the Operator to examine the alarms
currently present in the equipment or in the radio link or in the SDH / PDH network. They can be selected
through suitable SW filters in order to discriminate them according to the subset the Operator wants to see
(e.g. NE alarms, Equipment alarms, Transmission alarms, External Points alarms, etc.).
The troubleshooting operating instructions and details of the alarms for each card and relevant
indications are included in the section Maintenance of the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
The operating instructions make it possible to identify the faulty unit for all assemblies of the system.
Having located the suspected faulty unit/module, replace it with a spare one (see para.47 on page 347).
On the Craft Terminal (C.T.) and on the Operation System (O.S). application the URGENT
(URG), NOT URGENT (NURG) and INDICATIVE alarm are named in a different way; the
relationship between this two terminologies is explained in Tab. 62. herebelow.
N.B.
Tab. 62. Relationship between Alarm severity terminology displayed on C.T./O.S. and alarm severity
terminology used for the System Controller unit remote alarm connector pins.
Alarm severity terminology
on C.T. and O.S.
Alarm severity terminology used for SYSTEM

CONTROLLER UNIT remote alarm connector
pins
CRITICAL or MAJOR
URG , T*URG, T*RURG,
MINOR
NURG, T*NURG, T*RNURG
WARNING
INDICATIVE
INDETERMINATE (not used)
46.5.2 Operators Controls of the protection switches

In certain troubleshooting conditions, changing the state of the protection switches can be useful to fix
problems.
Details on protection switches and on relevant Operators Controls, for each system configuration, are
given in following paragraphs:
N+1 switch logic
1:N switch logic
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Such paragraphs describe the actions that can be carried out from the logical point of view. For actual
operative procedures, please refer to the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
341 / 542
Loopbacks give the possibility of executing some system functional tests, like the BER test using a pattern
generator connected to the equipment input/output ports, thus making fault locations and maintenance
tests fast and simple. The following loopbacks can be performed:
Line loopback (RRA)

A Line Loopback is a loopback where the incoming signal to a physical port is looped back onto the
outgoing signal (see Fig. 139. )
Internal loopback (RRA RFCOH)

An Internal Loopback is a loopback where the internal outgoing signal of a port is looped back onto
its internal incoming signal (see Fig. 140. and Fig. 141. )
All of these are loop and continue loopbacks (the signal is sent back and continues its path).
RST
SPI
RPS
RST
RFCOH
MODEM
RT
RSPI
RRA
MD
TRI
Fig. 139. RRA line loopback
RST
SPI
RST
RPS
RFCOH
MODEM
RT
RSPI
RRA
MD
TRI
Fig. 140. RRA internal loopback
SPI
RST
RST
RPS
MODEM
RFCOH
RSPI
RSPI
RRA
RT
MD
TRI
Fig. 141. RFCOH Internal loopback

the residual BER values (RBER) are not guaranteed in Radio Local Loop condition on.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For further information, please refer to the C.T. Operators Handbook.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
342 / 542

46.5.3 Loopbacks

46.5.4 TX mute function (local and remote)

With the Tx Mute function, the facility to switch off a transmitter is provided to the ECT. This facility is not
available with the RECT.
Operator Commands
The ECT operator has the possibility to manage this functionality on the two stations of a radio link,
switching off a local transmitter (belonging to the NE physically connected to the ECT) or a remote
one (belonging to the farend NE).
In all configurations (N+0, N+1), each transmitter is switched off independently with a dedicated ECT
command.
When a switch off command is executed, an indication of abnormal condition will be notified to
ECT/RECT.
Functional Description
Both for local and remote switch off commands, the request is addressed to the local station. In order
to perform this functionality on remote station, a 64Kb/s Radio Frame Complementary Overhead
(RFCOH) byte is used as communication channel between the stations of the radio link. In the N+1
and N+0 configurations this communication channel is protected (1+1), as well as all the other radio
service channels.
The switchoff request, received by the remote station, is sent to the relevant transmitter for
execution.
When the ECT removes the command, the transmitter returns to be managed according to the
modality active when the switchoff was been activated (with the configured power level if the ATPC
is disabled, according to the standard ATPC way of working if the ATPC is enabled).
Commissioning Phase
In order to make the commissioning phase easier and to avoid to produce interference if the
frequency is not yet properly set, the status of all the transmitters out of the factory is forced to
switched off (default value).
When the commissioning phase is completed, by means of ECT, it is possible to switchon each
transmitter.
The status of each transmitter (switched on or off) is stored in the EC Data Base and in EEPROM
of the RT. Then in case of substitution of the RT, the new RT will be automatically configured with the
Transmitter status stored in the EC Data Base. This configuration does not take place in case of
absence of the SYSCO and the RT is switched on or off, according to the related transmitter status
stored in the RT EEPROM.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For further information and operative procedures about TX mute function, please refer to the CT
OPERATORS HANDBOOK (squelch management).
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
343 / 542
This feature provides a radio side BER evaluation by means of B1 mismatch computation externally to
the radio switching section, without any degradation on the main signal.
A hop BER measurement is provided on the selected channels and on onesecond basis. This
measurement is activated and deactivated explicitly by the operator. When the measurement is activated
a temporal window is opened during which the number of violations are computed in order to define the
BER.
The temporal duration of this window is not definable a priori, it should be closed when the number of
violations detected from the opening of the temporal window, are sufficient to determine the BER. When
this number of violations is reached, the BER can be calculated. The parameters that the NE has to provide
on request, when the current temporal window is opened, are:
the duration of the current measure period

the number of violations detected till the moment of the reading
A new method has been implemented to support this function. A single time interval is managed, opened
and closed by the operator.
BER is evaluated in this interval using as a reference period the time between the opening of the
measurements and the request for reporting.
Actions supported via ECTUSM
Measurement Start (Open the time interval)
Readout of the data (can be repeated until the interval is closed)
Measurements Stop (Close the time interval).

Data provided from the Equipment at the request
No. of Violations in B1 since the opening of the time interval
BER evaluated in the same period
Elapsed time between opening of the measurement and request of readout. Time when
measurements is not possible are not accounted for
For further information and operative procedures about not intrusive BER measurements, please refer to
the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
46.5.6 J0 Section Trace management

This feature provides the ability to setup the section trace handling on the STM1 interface at Regenerator
layer. The J0 byte of the RSOH is used, according to the standard 16 bytes multiframe format defined
in the G.707 recommendation. The equipment supports setup, validation and monitoring of the section
trace identifiers under control of the CT/OS systems interfaces.
The Section trace monitoring can be enabled/disabled by operator.
A single byte format is optionally supported.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For further information and operative procedures about J0 Section Trace management, please refer to
the CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
344 / 542

46.5.5 Not Intrusive BER measurements
46.5.7 Performance Monitoring

The Performance Monitoring is responsible for quality events counting and reporting.
This paragraph concerns the monitoring of the common functional blocks supported by the LHR/LHRC
NE. For the specific radio blocks: RSPI and RPS, refer to the next para.46.5.8.
LHR/LHRC NE supports only the performance monitoring process with the maintenance purpose:
unidirectional performance monitoring of RS
associated collection periods are 15 minutes and 24 hours.

For each channel both line and radio side performance monitoring are supported in the current release
(in case of N+1 configuration the monitoring of the RRA spare channel is possible only if extra traffic is
supported).
Types of counters:
Errored Second (ES)
Severely Errored Second (SES)
Background Block Error (BBE)
Unavailable Second (UAS)
Out of Frame Second (OFS)

For further information and operative procedures about Performance Monitoring, please refer to the CT
OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
46.5.8 Radio Performance Monitoring

The radio specific performance monitoring defines new radio specific performance primitives, events and
parameters with associated requirements for data collection, threshold and history treatment. It covers the
following items:
the performance monitoring of the RSPI functional block;
the performance monitoring of the RPS functional block;
the monitoring of the RPS criteria; it is used as an estimation of the radio hop quality monitoring.
Performance monitoring of the RSPI functional block
Performance monitoring of the RSPI functional block is not supported by the current release.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Performance monitoring of the RPS functional block

Performance monitoring of the RPS functional block is not supported by the current release.
Monitoring of the RPS criteria
The hop section performance monitoring gives the quality of service of the radio section inside the
protection one. Due to the RPS location in the second generation radio NEs, it is not possible to
perform the monitoring of the hop section by means of standard methodologies. In order to provide
the possibility to compare the performance of the hop section of different radio channels, a RPS
Criteria Monitoring is provided.
This monitoring is based on the following primitives:
Early Warning
Low BER
High BER
Signal Fail, it is generated by the RSPI functional block alarms (rx side) and by the fail of the
cards that handle the signal inside the radio section (i.e. RX, DEM).
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
345 / 542
A second is declared EWS, LBERS, HBERS or SFS according to the occurrence of the primitive with
higher priority (i.e. in contemporary presence in one second of EW, LBER, HBER, SF occurrences
only a SFS event is declared).
Monitoring of the RPS criteria is supported by the current release.
N.B.
The RPS criteria can be monitored also in the N+0 configuration, even if in this
configuration, the hop and link (outside the protection) sections are coincident.
Performance data collection and history treatment

For each radio specific type of performance monitoring the performance data collection and history
management are performed according to the ITUT Recc. G.784. One current register is required
for 15 minutes and one for 24 hours. At least 16 recent registers are required for 15 minutes and one
for 24 hours.
For further information and operative procedures about Radio Performance Monitoring, please refer to the
CT OPERATORS HANDBOOK.
46.5.9 Event Log

The generic events occurred and discriminated by the LHR/LHRC NE are stored in one or more Event Log
files.
The ELM (Event Log Manager) application embedded in the 9600LSY SWP allows the Operator to read
such log files, in order to have historical data that can be useful to troubleshoot the equipment or the radio
link or the SDH / PDH network, in case of multiple alarm conditions or intermittent alarms.
The event log file examination is quite complex; it is reserved to Alcatel skilled personnel as a
debug tool (only using filters on the unmeaningful events, it is possible to understand the
meaning of the stored data).
For further information and operative procedures about Event Log, please refer to the CT OPERATORS
HANDBOOK
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
46.5.10 Additional information on other handbooks
Lineup Guide (REF.[D] or [E] on page 524) gives summary instructions on how to use many of the
functions explained before, in order to carry out equipment functional checks as a whole, in particular
as far as checks on radio hop are concerned.
Interference investigation procedure (REF.[M] on page 527) describes in detail how to test the
radio hop in order to find possible interferences.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
346 / 542

The one second performance events are the following (listed with increasing priority):
Early Warning Second (EWS)

This event is defined as a one second period with at least one occurrence of EW.
Low BER Second (LBERS)

This event is defined as a one second period with at least one occurrence of LBER.
High BER Second (HBERS)

This event is defined as a one second period with at least one occurrence of HBER.
Signal Fail Second (SFS)

This event is defined as a one second period with at least one occurrence of SF.

47 UNIT REPLACEMENT
47.1 Introduction
maintenance.
This chapter describes replacement procedures for all the units (except transceivers) of 9600LSY
equipment in the LHR configuration, and and is organized as follows:
herebelow
Summary information on FPGA upgrade
Warnings
EMC norms
Safety rules
Cautions to avoid equipment damage
Unit replacement procedures , according to the following list:

UNIT TYPE
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE ON PAGE
PSU
350
PSF
352
SYSCO
354
FLASH CARD
356
SERVICE
357
RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY
359
OPTICAL MODULE
362
MODEM
364
FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT
367
TRANSCEIVER
refer to chapter 48 on page 369
47.2 Summary information on FPGA upgrade

Please refer to the chapter FPGA UPGRADE in section Installation of C.T. Operators Handbook for the
description of this feature and its operative instructions by Craft Terminal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Some of these descriptions and instructions are repeated here for reader convenience.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
347 / 542
Tab. 63. herebelow points out the units involved.
FPGA
HOUSED ON UNIT
DAIANA
SYSCO
ENTONI
SMA subunit of SERVICE
SCIARON
RRASBY
NUNZIA
RRACHANNEL
SANDRA
MODEM 128QAM
WILLY
MODEM 32/64QAM
a)
Activation of FPGA automatic upgrade condition

The FPGA automatic upgrade condition set up is performed through the following commands by
Craft Terminal:
select LHRC subrack
select SYSCO board
execute Equipment Reset
b)
The execution of the upgrade procedure (FPGA download in progress) is pointed out by the following
indications:
the SEP (*) indication is displayed on ECT

(*) SEP stands for Sfwr Environment Problem, that in this case means Firmware download
in progress.
the greenflashing of the bicolor led (6) on SYSCO board (see Fig. 134. on page 327)
that will last until the procedure ends.
The procedure can last from few minutes (no FPGA upgraded) to some hours (all FPGAs upgraded
in a LHRC fully equipped system).
c)
Upgrade command survival

After the FPGA upgrade procedure launch, the command remains always active, even after the
upgrade procedure has been completed. It means that, if you insert into the system one of the boards
listed in Tab. 63. above, it is automatically subject to the FPGA upgrade process.
Special conditions:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
d)
Upgrade command is lost in the following cases:
system power off/on
RC reset
SYSCO board extraction/insertion
Upgrade command survives in the following cases:
EC reset
NE restart
FPGA version check (available starting with SWP 2.0)

1)
2)
3)
ED
execute Diagnosis Log Browsing Software Trace Log

confirm to see the produced log
compare logged versions with those stated in the chapter V.xxx specific information of the
Operators Handbook.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
348 / 542

Tab. 63. FPGA list

47.3 Warnings
47.3.1 EMC norms
ATTENTION
EMC NORMS
WHEN CARRYING OUT THE GIVEN OPERATIONS OBSERVE THE NORMS STATED IN PARA.
A.4.3 ON PAGE 500
47.3.2 Safety rules
The Safety Rules stated in para.A.3 on page 492 thru 498 describe the operations and/or precautions
to observe to safeguard operating personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment
safety.
Please read them with accuracy before to start every action on the equipments.
SAFETY RULES
General
Carefully observe the frontpanel warning labels prior to working on optical
connections while the equipment is inservice.
Should it be necessary to cut off power during the maintenance phase, proceed
to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station upstream
(rack or station distribution frame)
Electrical safety
DANGER: Possibility of personal injury. Personal injury can be caused by
48 V dc.
terminals.
Optical safety
DANGER: Possibility of eyes damage: read carefully and strictly observe the
rules pointed out in para.A.3.4.2 on page 496.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
47.3.3 Cautions to avoid equipment damage

Please refer to para.23.2 on page 168.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
349 / 542
47.3.4 PSU replacement procedure
1)
get the spare from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the unit to be
replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do not touch the electronic components.
ATTENTION
do not extract the spare unit from its antistatic envelope, until you have worn the antistatic
protection device kit
2)
turn off (position O) the switch on the PSU unit front panel:
of the spare PSU unit
and of the PSU unit to be replaced

ATTENTION
For the high current absorbed by the unit, its extraction/insertion with its switch in open position
could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the units and backpanels
connectors.
extract the faulty PSU unit as follows:
3)
wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 200. on page 501) and connect its
termination to a grounded structure
ATTENTION
this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic discharges
turn off the screws (one present into the extraction/insertion lever of the board, the other
at bottom of the board)
ATTENTION
this avoids the breakage of lever
4)
operate the lever to extract the board
insert the spare PSU unit

ATTENTION
Please read carefully pages 169170 for the right operations and forbidden operations to
carry out in order to insert the unit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
5)
ED
now you could wear off the antistatic protection device kit
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
350 / 542

For PSU view, see Fig. 82. on page 171.
6)
if not yet done, turn on the screws fixing the board to the rack

ATTENTION
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) 10 %

7)
turn on (position I ) the switch on the new PSU unit front panel
8)
wait some minutes (software download is usually carried out toward Supervisory Units)
N.B.
9)
software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare units SU
is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.
check the system status by LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal.
ATTENTION
To connect the CT cable (at SYSCOs F interface and/or PC side):
verify that the PC is switched off (if switched on, close all running applications, then switch
off it)
connect suitable cable to SYSCOs F interface and PC side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
10 ) fill the Repair Form and return the faulty unit together with such Repair Form to the Alcatel
authorized repair center (see para.49.2 on page 395)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
351 / 542
47.3.5 PSF replacement procedure
1)
get the spare PSF board from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the
unit to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do not touch the electronic
components.
ATTENTION
2)
if possible, switch off the TRUs circuit breaker that gives power supply to the cable connected
to the PSF unit to be replaced.
3)
disconnect the power supply cable from the PSF front connector
SAFETY RULES
If operation indicated in previous point 2 ) has not been carried out, a TNV2
(battery) voltage is present on the interface connector (cable side); do not touch
the pins when unplugged.
terminals.
4)
extract the faulty PSF unit as follows:
ATTENTION

turn off the screws (one present into the extraction/insertion lever of the board, the other
at bottom of the board)
ATTENTION

this avoids the breakage of lever
operate the lever to extract the board
insert the spare PSF unit
5)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ATTENTION
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
352 / 542

For PSF view, see Fig. 82. on page 171.

6)
7)
if not yet done, turn on the screws fixing the board to the rack
ATTENTION
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) 10 %

8)
connect the power supply cable to the PSF front connector

N.B.
9)
SAFETY RULES: see point 3 ) on page 352
if switched off in step 2 ) above, switch on the circuit breaker giving power supply to the cable
connected to the new PSF unit
10 ) check the system status by LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal.
ATTENTION
off it)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
353 / 542
47.3.6 SYSCO replacement procedure
1)
get the spare SYSCO board from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of
the unit to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do not touch the electronic
components.
N.B.
The P/Ns matching of the ESCON subunit is not important.
ATTENTION
2)
if the CT is connected to the SYSCOs F interface:

ATTENTION
perform the logoff, exiting from the CT applications
close all other running applications, if any
switch off the PC
3)
disconnect all cables from the faulty unit front plate. Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are
present on the cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly;
4)
extract the faulty SYSCO unit as follows:
ATTENTION
turn off the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board
ATTENTION
this avoids the breakage of levers
extract the FLASH CARD from faulty SYSCO (see Fig. 83. on page 172)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
5)
ED
operate the levers to extract the board
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
354 / 542

For SYSCO views, see Fig. 83. and Fig. 84. on page 172.
spare SYSCO unit hardware presetting:

6)
accessing the handbook Hardware setting documentation (REF.[K] on page 527), get
the relevant MSZZQ documents
get the spare unit SYSCO and, using the above said documents to locate switches:
a)
set the dipswitches on ESCON subunit exactly as those of the replaced unit
ATTENTION
These dipswitches must be usually in OFF position. If unproperly set, these
dipswitches will reset the FLASH CARD content, and you will loose all the software
herein contained (programs and system configuration data)
b)
set the dipswitches on SYSCO main board exactly as those of the replaced unit
ATTENTION
some of these dipswitches (that define the system configuration), if unproperly set,
will cause system malfunction even though hardware is not faulty. Care must also be
taken to switch defining service battery voltage
7)
reinsert the FLASH CARD into the spare unit SYSCO (in case of doubts see Fig. 84. on page
172)
8)
insert the spare SYSCO board in the system

ATTENTION
9)
10 ) if not yet done, turn on the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board
ATTENTION
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) 10 %
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
11 ) reconnect all cables on the front plate exactly as they were connected before the unit
extraction.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
355 / 542
N.B.
software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the spare units SC,
RC and SU, is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.
13 ) FPGA automatic upgrade condition setting & SYSCOs FPGA upgrade

Please refer to para.47.2 on page 347 for summary and detailed information on this feature.
After the bicolor LED redflashing condition (led (6) in Fig. 85. on page 173) ends, you
must launch the FPGA automatic upgrade condition to upgrade the SYSCOs FPGA
as explained in point a ) on page 348 (automatic FPGA upgrade condition, even if set
previously, is always lost every time SYSCO is extracted/inserted).
14 ) check the system status by LED visual inspection

15 ) connect Craft Terminal and check the system status by its Alarm application.
ATTENTION
off it)

47.3.7 FLASH CARD replacement procedure

For views, see Fig. 83. and Fig. 84. on page 172.
The need for this replacement is described in para.46.4.2 on page 339.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The FLASH CARD contains all system software.

Its replacement with an empty spare FLASH CARD (see para.43.3.4 on page 324) must be done
following the specific instructions (NE software download via SIBDL) given, according to the SWP
used, in the:

or:

or:
or:
9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 from V2.0.2 (REF.[P] on page 527) from
ED.03.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
356 / 542

12 ) wait some minutes (software download is usually carried out toward Supervisory Units)
After the unit insertion, you should wait about 10 minutes for the completion of software
download from FLASH CARD toward the new boards SC, RC and SU (N.B.); this phase is
notified by bicolor LED redflashing condition (led (6) in Fig. 85. on page 173). At the end, all
red LEDs on SYSCO unit should be off.
47.3.8 SERVICE replacement procedure

For SERVICE views, see Fig. 86. and Fig. 87. on pages 176177.
1)
present on the cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly;
N.B.
to extract Cables 1.0/2.3, use the special extractor [see (3) in Fig. 131. on page 321]
2)
extract the faulty SERVICE unit as follows:
ATTENTION
ATTENTION
3)
get the spare SERVICE unit from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of
the board to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do not touch the
electronic components.
If the SERVICE to be replaced houses the ADDITIONAL VOICE babyboard, verify that the
spare part does really have the same babyboard (see Tab. 58. on page 322).
4)
spare SERVICE unit hardware setting:
5)
locate the position of setting switches using the appropriate MSZZQ documents
set these switches on the spare part exactly as they are set on the unit to be replaced
insert the spare SERVICE board in the system

ATTENTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
6)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
357 / 542
7)
if not yet done, turn on the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the board

2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) 10 %

8)
reconnect all cables on the front plate exactly as they were connected before the unit
extraction.
9)
download from FLASH CARD toward the new boards SU (N.B.); this phase is notified by
SYSCOs bicolor LED redflashing condition (led (6) in Fig. 85. on page 173).
N.B.
10 ) spare FPGA upgrade

After the SYSCOs bicolor LED redflashing condition (led (6) in Fig. 85. on page 173) ends,
there are two cases:
the automatic FPGA upgrade condition is active: in this case you have nothing to do,
because the spare FPGA, if necessary, has already been carried out
the automatic FPGA upgrade condition is not active: in this case you must launch the
FPGA automatic upgrade condition to upgrade the spares FPGA , as explained in
point a ) on page 348
ATTENTION
off it)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
358 / 542

ATTENTION
47.3.9 RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY replacement procedure

For RRACHANNEL and RRASTANDBY views, see Fig. 88. , Fig. 89. and Fig. 90. on pages
178180.
1)
get the spare RRACHANNEL or RRASTANDBY from the spare part stock verifying that its
P/N is equal to that of the unit to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do
not touch the electronic components.
ATTENTION
2)
remove protection cap, if present, from the faulty board front plate
3)
disconnect all cables from the faulty board front plate or from the optical module, if equipped.
Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are present on the cables, put labels with writings to be
able to reconnect them correctly;
N.B.
SAFETY RULES IN CASE OF OPTICAL MODULES
Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by the fiber
optic transmitters can cause eyes damages. Carefully observe the specific
procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of units
containing laser devices or cables transporting optical signals, described in the
relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance documents
and the general rules pointed out in para.A.3.4.2 on page 496.
4)
extract the faulty RRA unit as follows:
ATTENTION
ATTENTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
359 / 542
if the unit is equipped with Optical module to be recovered and mounted on the spare part,
extract it from the faulty RRA board and mount it on the spare RRA board as follows:
a)
turn off the two screws fixing the module to the faulty RRA board: these screws are the
same depicted for the module drawer in Fig. 89. on page 179 (do not unscrew the other
two screws of the module)
b)
extract the optical module from the faulty RRA board using the special extractor [see (2)
in Fig. 131. on page 321]
c)
dismount the module drawer, if present, from the spare RRA board using the same special
extractor
d)
insert the optical module (you have taken from the faulty RRA board) into the spare RRA
board
e)
turn on the two screws to fix the module onto the spare RRA board
ATTENTION
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) 10 %
6)
insert the spare RRA board in the system

ATTENTION
7)
8)
ATTENTION
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) 10 %

9)
extraction.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
360 / 542

5)

download from FLASH CARD toward the new boards SU (N.B.); this phase is notified by
SYSCOs bicolor LED redflashing condition (led (6) in Fig. 85. on page 173).
N.B.

12 ) mount the protection cap, if was present, on the front plate

ATTENTION
off it)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
361 / 542
47.3.10 OPTICAL MODULE replacement procedure
In order to replace an Optical module without replacing the RRA unit housing it, it is not
necessary to extract the RRA unit from the shelf.
N.B.
1)
get the spare module from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the module
to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do not touch the electronic
components.
ATTENTION
2)
remove protection cap, if present, from the RRAs front plate
3)
disconnect cables from the module. Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels are present on the
cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly
SAFETY RULES IN CASE OF OPTICAL MODULES
Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by the fiber
optic transmitters can cause eyes damages. Carefully observe the specific
procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of units
containing laser devices or cables transporting optical signals, described in the
relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance documents
and the general rules pointed out in para.A.3.4.2 on page 496.
4)
extract the faulty optical module from the RRA board in the following way:
ATTENTION
5)
turn off the two screws fixing the module to the faulty RRA board: these screws are the
same depicted for the module drawer in Fig. 89. on page 179 (do not unscrew the other
two screws of the module)
extract the faulty module, using the the special extractor [see (2) in Fig. 131. on page 321]
insert he spare module into RRA slot
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ATTENTION
carry out in order to insert the unit (in this case there are no levers)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
362 / 542

For OPTICAL MODULE views, see Fig. 88. and Fig. 89. on pages 178179.
6)
if not yet done, fix the module to RRA turning on the two screws

ATTENTION
The screw tightening torque for fixing the modules to the unit must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) 10 %

7)
reconnect cables to the module

N.B.
8)
mount the protection cap, if was present, on the front plate
9)
N.B.
ATTENTION
off it)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
363 / 542
47.3.11 MODEM replacement procedure
1)
turn off (position O ) the switch on the PSU unit front panel (see Fig. 82. on page 171) of the
PSU corresponding to the MODEM unit to be replaced, i.e.:
PSU0 for MD0
PSU1 for MD1
....
PSU9 for MD9

according to following Fig. 142.
ATTENTION
The successive insertion of the spare MODEM must be done without voltage at its connector
on the backplane. Only the powering on of the MODEM already pluggedin guarantees the
correct startup powering timing. If you insert the MODEM with its PSU switched on, you run
the risk of having subsequent indeterminate (and in some case unrecoverable) unit states.
1
2 3
S
Y
S
C
O
S
E
R
V
P
S
F
1
24 25
R
R
A
0
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
R
M
R
D
A
0
1
M
D
1
R
M
R
D
A
2
2
R
M
R
D
A
3
3
R
M
R
D
A
4
4
R M
R D
A 5
5
R
R
A
6
M
D
6
R M
R D
A 7
7
R M
R D
A 8
8
R M
R D
A 9
9
P
S
U
0
P
S
U
1
P
S
U
2
P
S
U
3
P
S
U
4
P
S
U
5
P
S
U
6
P
S
U
7
P
S
U
8
P
S
U
9
P
S
F
2
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 142. PSU to be switched off/on for MODEM replacement
ED
2)
remove protection cap, if present, from the faulty board front plate
3)
disconnect all cables from the faulty board front plate. Suggestion: before doing it, if no labels
are present on the cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly;
N.B.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
364 / 542

For MODEM views, see Fig. 91. , Fig. 92. and Fig. 93. on pages 181183.
4)
extract the faulty MODEM unit as follows:

ATTENTION
ATTENTION
5)
get the spare MODEM unit from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the
board to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do not touch the electronic
components.
If the MODEM to be replaced houses one or more CANCCOMB babyboards, verify that the
spare part does really have the same babyboards as far as quantity and P/Ns (see Tab. 58. on
page 322).
6)
spare MODEM board hardware setting:
7)
locate the position of setting switches using the appropriate MSZZQ documents
set these switches on the spare part exactly as they are set on the unit to be replaced
insert the spare MODEM board in the system

ATTENTION
8)
9)
ATTENTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) 10 %
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
365 / 542

12 ) mount the protection cap, if was present, on the front plate

13 ) turn on (position I ) the switch on the PSU unit previously switched off
N.B.
ATTENTION
off it)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
366 / 542

10 ) reconnect all cables on the front plate exactly as they were connected before the unit
extraction.
47.3.12 FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT replacement procedure

[1]
Considerations about MINOR and MAJOR alarms

Whenever the alarm regarding Fans Assembled Unit arises, you should be aware of the following:
the alarm can be:
MINOR for the failure of one fan only of the unit;
MAJOR for the failure of two, three or of all the fours fans of the unit;
this condition should be considered in conjunction with:
the rackhousingroom effective environmental temperature, taking into consideration

that the loss of all fans can produce an overtemperature of about 20 0C inside the rack;
and the temperature limits specified in para.13.7.1 on page 101.
because an excessive internal temperature could decrease the equipment overall MTBF.
In conclusion:
[2]
the Fans Assembled Unit MINOR alarm usually does not require an immediate intervention;
nevertheless, in case of alarm, it is suggested to carry out the unit replacement without waiting
a very long time.
the Fans Assembled Unit MAJOR alarm requires an immediate intervention.
Replacement procedure
1)
get the spare FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal
to that of the unit to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do not touch the
electronic components.
ATTENTION
2)
Remove FANS SHELFs front plate (see Fig. 104. on page 197) turning off the six screws
3)
wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 200. on page 501) and connect its termination
to a grounded structure
ATTENTION
Extract the faulty FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT operating the suitable extractor [see (2) in
Fig. 131. on page 321] inside the units suitable hole (see Fig. 105. on page 198)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
4)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
367 / 542
5)
Insert the spare FANS ASSEMBLED UNIT

carry out in order to insert the unit (in this case there are no levers)
6)
7)
Restore FANS SHELFs front plate (see Fig. 104. on page 197) turning on the six screws
ATTENTION
The screw tightening torque must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) 10 %

8)
check the system status by LED visual inspection and through the Craft Terminal.
ATTENTION
off it)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
9)
ED
fill the Repair Form and return the faulty unit together with such Repair Form to the Alcatel
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
368 / 542

ATTENTION

48 TRANSCEIVER REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT

48.1 Choice of the procedure
Two cases must be distinguished:
a spare Transceiver already assembled is available, fully equipped with internal parts exactly equal
(types and P/Ns) to those of the Transceiver unit to be replaced.
In this case proceed as specified in para.48.2 on page 370.
Transceiver components are available as individual spare parts, as explained in para.43.3.1.2 on

page 323.
In this case proceed as specified in para.48.3 on page 373.
48.1.1 Transmitter specialization for a frequency plan
In both cases cited above, you must be aware that the spare
transceiver/transmitter used to replace a faulty transceiver/transmitter
must have the the same specialization for the frequency plan required by
the Customer.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For further information, please refer to:
ED
para.31.3.7.2 on page 256
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
369 / 542
This procedure can be followed if a spare Transceiver is available, fully equipped with internal
parts exactly equal (types and P/Ns) to those of the Transceiver unit to be replaced.
N.B.
get the spare from the spare part stock (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions) verifying:
that its P/N is equal to that of the unit to be replaced
that its specialization for frequency plan is equal to that of the unit to be replaced (see
para.48.1.1 on page 369)
1)
ATTENTION
2)
turn off (position O ) the switch on the TRANSCEIVER unit front panel (pos. (I1) in Fig. 102. on
page 195):
of the spare TRANSCEIVER unit

and of the TRANSCEIVER unit to be replaced
ATTENTION

For the high current absorbed by the unit, its extraction/insertion with its switch in open position
could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the units and backpanels
connectors.
3)
present on the cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect them correctly
4)
to extract the faulty board:
ATTENTION
ATTENTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
370 / 542

48.2 Transceiver replacement with a preassembled transceiver assembly
5)
spare unit check and hardware presetting:

verify the correspondence between the spare unit with that to be replaced as follows:

a)
if not yet done, wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 200. on page 501) and
connect its termination to a grounded structure
ATTENTION
b)
put both Transceivers on a work bench
c)
remove COVERPLATE A of both transceivers (see Fig. 94. on page 186). Store tidily
cover and screws for successive mounting
d)
compare internal composition of transceivers (same types and same P/Ns)

Detailed internal drawings of transceiver in the various configurations envisaged are given
e)
verify that dipswitches of spare unit are set as those of the replaced unit (see Fig. 123. on
page 249); if different, modify settings of spare unit
f)
restore COVERPLATE A of both transceivers

ATTENTION
The screw tightening torque for fixing the coverplate to the unit must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) 10 %
Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking or unit damage.

6)
insert the spare board in the system

ATTENTION
7)
8)
ATTENTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %
2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) 10 %
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
371 / 542
extraction.
10 ) turn on (position I ) the switch on the new TRANSCEIVER unit front panel (pos. (I1) in
N.B.

ATTENTION
off it)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
372 / 542

9)
48.3 Transceiver repair and replacement procedure

This procedure must be followed if Transceiver components are available as individual spare
parts, as explained in para.43.3.1.2 on page 323.

N.B.
For the P/Ns of Transceiver internal components and other notes, please refer to section 3 on page
243, choosing the chapter relevant to your specific radio system.
CONVENTIONS
In the following Fig. 147. thru Fig. 154. the following conventions have been applied:
connectors and cables: each connector is denoted by a number and letter (e.g. 11A); the two
ends of a cable have the same number (e.g. 11A and 11B are the two connectors of the same
cable); all cables are twoconnector cables, with the exception of connector depicted in
The instructions given in the following for the replacement of internal components require that
you consult the correct internal cabling diagram, that depends on the configuration:
Tab. 64. Transceiver internal cabling diagram according to configuration

FREQUENCY REUSE
DIVERSITY
TR HOUSING
LO MASTER
LO SLAVE
LO MASTER
LO SLAVE
Y
N
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
the letter T indicates a screw metallic tap on an unused SMA connector.
ED
INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM
USAGE
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
373 / 542
The following rules must be strictly followed:

a)
Operator skills
For the operations described hereafter, repair Operator must have deep knowledge
and experience of electronic repair through subcomponents replacement.
b)
Protection against electrostatic discharges

During operations described hereafter, repair Operator must always wear the
antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 200. on page 501) and connect its
termination to a grounded structure.
c)
The screw tightening torque for fixing the subcomponents to the unit must be:
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %

Exceeding this value may result in screw breaking or unit damage.
d)
The SMA connector tightening torque for fixing coaxial cables to the
subcomponents must be:
812 kg x cm (0.8 1.2 Newton x m)

Exceeding this value may result in subcomponents connector breaking.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
e)
ED
Coaxial cable handling

Coaxial cables should be handled carefully avoiding any excessive bending which
could compromise their functionality.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
374 / 542

ATTENTION: CAUTIONS TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE
GENERAL FLOW CHART

a ) Start of procedure (page 376):
Faulty Transceiver extraction from shelf
Faulty Transceiver opening
Replacement of
b ) Rx or Tx Local Oscillator (page 377)

c ) Diversity Receiver (page 379)
d ) Main Receiver (page 381)
e ) Frequency Reuse kit module (page 382)
f ) Transmitter + Main Receiver (page 383)
g ) Transmitter (page 388)
h ) End of procedure (page 389):
Repaired Transceiver preparing for insertion in shelf
Repaired Transceiver insertion in shelf and functional checks
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 143. General flow chart of Transceiver repair procedure
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
375 / 542
a)
Start of procedure
Proceed as follows:
1)
on the TRANSCEIVER to be repaired, turn off (position O ) the switch on the unit
front panel (pos. (I1) in Fig. 102. on page 195)
ATTENTION
For the high current absorbed by the unit, its extraction with its switch in open position
could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the units and
backpanels connectors.
1)
disconnect all cables from the unit front plate. Suggestion: before doing it, if no
labels are present on the cables, put labels with writings to be able to reconnect
them correctly
2)
to extract the TRANSCEIVER to be repaired:
wear the antistatic protection device kit (see Fig. 200. on page 501) and
connect its termination to a grounded structure
ATTENTION
this avoids the possible damage of the electronic devices for electrostatic
discharges
ATTENTION
FAULTY TRANSCEIVER OPENING

3)
put the Transceiver to be repaired on a work bench
4)
remove COVERPLATE A (see Fig. 94. on page 186) of the Transceiver to be

repaired. Store tidily cover and screws for successive mounting.
NEXT STEP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
5)
ED
the procedure proceeds according to the component to be replaced:
Rx or Tx Local Oscillator
go to step b ) on page 377
Diversity Receiver
go to step c ) on page 379
Main Receiver
go to step d ) on page 381
Frequency Reuse kit module go to step e ) on page 382
Transmitter + Main Receiver
go to step f ) on page 383
Transmitter
go to step g ) on page 388
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
376 / 542

FAULTY TRANSCEIVER EXTRACTION FROM SHELF
b)
Replacement of Rx or Tx Local Oscillator

The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 144. herebelow.

CONNECTOR FOR FLAT CABLE (10B or 12B)
P/N and
Remote Inventory
SMA CONNECTORS
A1
A3
A2
MMCX CONNECTOR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 144. Spare Local Oscillator subassembly

N.B.
A1, A2, A3 show the position of the three screws fixing the Local Oscillator to
the Transmitter.
The SMA connectors are used differently according to the use as Rx or Tx LO

and according to the Transceiver configuration. SMA connectors are for
mounting coaxial cables by screwed connectors.
The unused SMA connectors must be closed by suitable metallic screw taps.
MMCX connector is used to house a cable connector that is inserted/extracted

simply pushing into or pulling out.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
377 / 542
Proceed as follows:
1)
according to Tab. 64. on page 373, get the correct transceiver internal cabling
diagram according to configuration and use it as reference for successive steps
CHOICE OF UNIT TO REPLACE

2)
verify which LO must be replaced (Rx or Tx). Operate on that, in the following steps
FAULTY UNIT EXTRACTION

3)
turn off cables connectors present on LOs SMA connectors (but, do not dismount
metallic screw taps present on unconnected SMA connectors)
4)
pull out cable from MMCX connector
5)
pull out flat cable from suitable connector
6)
turn off screws A1, A2, A3 and extract the LO; store tidily screws for successive
mounting
SPARE UNIT PREPARATION

7)
get the spare LO from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that of the
component to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do not touch
the electronic components.
N.B.
8)
Rx and Tx Local Oscillators must have the same P/N
dismount the metallic screw taps present on SMA connectors of faulty LO and mount
them on the same SMA connectors of the spare LO
See point d ) on page 374 for tightening torque
SPARE UNIT INSERTION

9)
position spare LO inside transmitter and fix it through screws A1, A2, A3
10 ) push flat cable into LOs suitable connector

11 ) push cable into MMCX connector (there is a locked position)
12 ) turn on cables connectors on LOs SMA connectors
NEXT STEP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
13 ) go to step h ) on page 389
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
378 / 542

REFERENCE INTERNAL CABLING DIAGRAM
c)
Replacement of Diversity Receiver

CONNECTOR FOR FLAT CABLE

SMA CONNECTOR
A2
A1
A4
A5
A3
A6
A8
A7
A9
P/N and
Remote Inventory
Fig. 145. Spare Receiver subassembly
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
A1 to A9 show the position of the three screws fixing the Diversity Receiver
to the PLATE COVERING MAIN RECEIVER
The SMA connector is for mounting coaxial cable by screwed connector.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
379 / 542
Proceed as follows:
1)

2)
turn off cables connector present on Diversity Receivers SMA connector (6A)
3)
pull out flat cable from suitable connector (7A)
4)
turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Diversity Receiver; store tidily screws for
successive mounting

5)
get the spare Receiver from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that
of the component to be replaced (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions); do not
touch the electronic components.

6)
position spare Receiver inside transmitter and fix it through screws A1 ... A9
7)
push flat cable into Receivers suitable connector (7A)
8)
turn on cables connectors on Receivers SMA connector (6A)

NEXT STEP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
9)
ED
go to step h ) on page 389
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
380 / 542

d)
Replacement of Main Receiver

The spare subassembly is as in Fig. 145. on page 379.

Proceed as follows:
1)
EXTRACTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER (if equipped)

2)
turn off cables connector present on Diversity Receivers SMA connector (6A)
3)
pull out flat cable from suitable connector (7A)
4)
turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Diversity Receiver; store tidily the Diversity
Receiver and its screws for successive mounting
FAULTY MAIN RECEIVER EXTRACTION

5)
remove the plate covering main receiver (8 screws); store tidily cover and screws for
successive mounting
6)
turn off cables connector present on Main Receivers SMA connector (4B)
7)
pull out flat cable from Main Receivers suitable connector (5A)
8)
turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Main Receiver; store tidily screws for
successive mounting
SPARE MAIN RECEIVER PREPARATION

9)
get the spare Receiver from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that
N.B.
Main Receiver and Diversity Receiver must have the same P/N
SPARE MAIN RECEIVER INSERTION

10 ) position spare Main Receiver inside transmitter and fix it through screws A1 ... A9
11 ) push flat cable into Main Receivers suitable connector (5A)
12 ) turn on cables connectors on Main Receivers SMA connector (4B)
13 ) position and fix the plate covering main receiver (8 screws)
INSERTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER (if equipped)
With reference to transceiver internal cabling diagram of step 1 ) above:
14 ) position Diversity Receiver inside transmitter and fix it through screws A1 ... A9
15 ) push flat cable into Diversity Receivers suitable connector (7A)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
16 ) turn on cables connectors on Diversity Receivers SMA connector (6A)

NEXT STEP
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
381 / 542
e)
Replacement of Frequency Reuse kit module

P/N
CONNECTOR FOR
FLAT CABLE (10C)
A3
A2
SMA CONNECTOR (8B)
SMA CONNECTOR (9A)
A4
Fig. 146. Spare Frequency Reuse kit module subassembly

N.B.
A1 to A4 show the position of the screws fixing the Frequency Reuse kit
module to to the Transmitter
The SMA connectors are for mounting coaxial cables by screwed connector.
Proceed as follows:
1)

2)
turn off cables connectors present on Frequency Reuse kit modules SMA
connectors (8B and 9A)
3)
pull out flat cable from suitable connector (10C)
4)
turn off screws A1 .. A4 and extract the module; store tidily screws for successive
mounting

5)
get the spare module from the spare part stock verifying that its P/N is equal to that
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

6)
position spare module inside transmitter and fix it through screws A1 ... A4
7)
push flat cable into modules suitable connector (10C)
8)
turn on cables connectors on modules SMA connectors (8B and 9A)

NEXT STEP
9)
ED
go to step h ) on page 389
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
382 / 542

A1
f)
Replacement of Transmitter + Main Receiver


1A
2A
PLATE COVERING
MAIN RECEIVER
MAIN RECEIVER
(inside)
4A*
5B*
3A*
1B
12A
10B
10A
12B
2B
* For 3B, 4B and 5A see Fig. 149. on page 391

Fig. 147. Spare Transmitter + Main Receiver subassembly
This subassembly includes just the internal cabling necessary for the basic configuration
(i.e. without diversity and without frequency reuse); this internal cabling corresponds to
that depicted in Fig. 149. on page 391.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In few words, the procedure (that is detailed in the following) consists of:
ED
remotion from the faulty transmitter of the standard components:
Rx and Tx Local Oscillators
remotion from the faulty transmitter of the optional components, if equipped:
Diversity Receiver and associated cabling
Frequency Reuse kit module and associated cabling
insertion into the spare transmitter and cabling of:
the standard components
and the optional components, if were equipped in the faulty transmitter
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
383 / 542
Proceed as follows:
1)
PREPARATION OF SPARE TRANSMITTER + MAIN RECEIVER

2)
get the spare spare Transmitter + Main Receiver (Fig. 147. on page 383) from the
spare part stock (see para.43.3.3 on page 324 for cautions) verifying:
that its P/N is equal to that of the unit to be replaced (N.B.)
that its specialization for frequency plan is equal to that of the unit to be replaced
(see para.48.1.1 on page 369)
N.B.
the P/N label position is shown in Fig. 94. on page 186. This P/N is just
that of the Transmitter only. If you wish to verify also the Main Receiver
P/N, you should dismount it and then remount as indicated here, with
reference to Fig. 149. on page 391:
remove the plate covering main receiver (8 screws); store tidily cover and
screws for successive mounting
turn off cables connector present on Main Receivers SMA connector (4B)
pull out flat cable from Main Receivers suitable connector (5A)
turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Main Receiver; store tidily screws
for successive mounting
now you can check the Main Receiver P/N (see Fig. 145. on page 379)
position Main Receiver inside Transmitter and fix it through screws A1 ...
A9
push flat cable into Main Receivers suitable connector (5A)
turn on cables connectors on Main Receivers SMA connector (4B)

position and fix the plate covering main receiver (8 screws)
3)
remove spare Transceivers COVERPLATE A (see Fig. 94. on page 186). Store
tidily cover and screws for successive mounting.
4)
spare transmitter hardware presetting:
verify that dipswitches of spare unit are set as those of the replaced unit (see
Fig. 123. on page 249); if different, set these switches on the spare transmitter
exactly as they are set on the faulty transmitter
REMOTION OF LOCAL OSCILLATORS FROM FAULTY TRANSMITTER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
With reference to Fig. 144. on page 377 (LO drawing) and Fig. 149. on page 391
(transceiver standard internal cabling) operate on both Rx and Tx Local Oscillators as
follows:
5)
turn off cables connectors present on LOs SMA connectors (but, do not dismount
metallic screw taps present on unconnected SMA connectors)
6)
pull out cable from MMCX connector
7)
pull out flat cable from suitable connector
8)
turn off screws A1, A2, A3 and extract the LO
9)
store tidily Rx and Tx Local Oscillators and their screws for successive mounting
N.B.
ED
Distinguish Rx from Tx LOs, because the use of SMA connectors is

different from each other
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
384 / 542

REMOTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER FROM FAULTY TRANSMITTER (if equipped)

With reference to Fig. 145. on page 379 (Receiver drawing) and transceiver internal
cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 384, operate on faulty Transmitter as follows:
10 ) DO NOT remove cables connector present on Diversity Receivers SMA connector
6A
11 ) DO NOT remove flat cable from connector 7A
12 ) turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Diversity Receiver together with the flat
cable 7A7B and the cable 6A6B connected to it; store tidily the assembly and
screws for successive mounting
INSERTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER INTO SPARE TRANSMITTER + MAIN
RECEIVER (if equipped)
With reference to Fig. 145. on page 379 (Receiver drawing) and transceiver internal
cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 384, operate on spare Transmitter + Main Receiver
as follows:
13 ) position the Diversity Receiver (together with the flat cable 7A7B and the cable
6A6B connected to it) inside Transmitter and fix it through screws A1 ... A9
14 ) position the flat cable 7A7B and insert its connector 7B according to cabling diagram
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
15 ) position the cable 6A6B according to cabling diagram
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
385 / 542
REMOTION OF FR KIT FROM FAULTY TRANSMITTER (if equipped)
16 ) DO NOT remove cables connectors present on Frequency Reuse kit modules SMA
connector (8B and 9A)
17 ) pull out flat cable from connector10C
18 ) disconnect connector 8A from Transmitters front plate
19 ) turn off screws A1 .. A4 and extract the module together with cables 8B8A and
9A9B connected to it
20 ) extract the 3connector flat cable 10A10B10C shown in Fig. 148. :
10C
10B
10A
Fig. 148. Spare Frequency Reuse kit 3connector flat cable subassembly
21 ) if present (see Fig. 153. and Fig. 154. on page 394) disconnect connector 11A from
Transmitters front plate
22 ) store tidily for successive mounting:
the module together with cables 8B8A and 9A9B connected to it
its screws
the flat cable 10A10B10C
the cable 11A11B (if equipped)

INSERTION OF FR KIT INTO SPARE TRANSMITTER + MAIN RECEIVER (if equipped)
Operate on spare Transmitter + Main Receiver as follows:
23 ) With reference to Fig. 149. on page 391, remove flat cable 10A10B (it is no longer
necessary)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
24 ) With reference to transceiver internal cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 384:
ED
a)
insert flat cable 10A10B10C on Transmitters connectors 10A and 10B and
position cable end 10C according to cabling diagram
b)
if cable 11A11B was equipped, mount its connector 11A on Transmitters front
plate and position cable end 11B according to cabling diagram
c)
position module (together with cables 8B8A and 9A9B connected to it) inside
transmitter and fix it through screws A1 ... A4
d)
push flat cable into modules connector 10C
e)
mount connector 8A on transmitters front plate
f)
position cable end 9B according to cabling diagram
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
386 / 542

With reference to Fig. 146. on page 382 (FR module drawing) and transceiver internal
cabling diagram of step 1 ) on page 384, operate on faulty Transmitter as follows:
INSERTION OF LOCAL OSCILLATORS

RECEIVER
INTO SPARE TRANSMITTER + MAIN

With reference to Fig. 144. on page 377 (LO drawing) and transceiver internal cabling
diagram of step 1 ) on page 384, mount the Rx and Tx Local Oscillators (previously
removed from faulty Transmitter) on the spare Transmitter + Main Receiver as follows:
N.B.
Distinguish Rx from Tx LOs, because the use of SMA connectors is different

from each other
25 ) position LO inside transmitter and fix it through screws A1, A2, A3

26 ) push flat cable into LOs suitable connector
27 ) push cable into MMCX connector (there is a locked position)
28 ) turn on cables connectors on LOs SMA connectors
NEXT STEP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
387 / 542
Replacement of Transmitter
The spare subassembly is similar to that shown in Fig. 147. on page 383. With respect to
it, the missing items are:
the Main Receiver
and the cables 4A4B and 5B5A that belong to the Receiver own part list
Proceed as follows:
1)
as step 1 ) on page 384
PREPARATION OF SPARE TRANSMITTER

2)
as steps 2 ) to 4 ) on page 384
REMOTION OF LOCAL OSCILLATORS FROM FAULTY TRANSMITTER

3)
REMOTION OF DIVERSITY RECEIVER FROM FAULTY TRANSMITTER (if equipped)

4)
REMOTION OF MAIN RECEIVER FROM FAULTY TRANSMITTER

With reference to Fig. 145. on page 379 (Receiver drawing) and and Fig. 149. on page
391 (transceiver standard internal cabling) operate on faulty Transmitter as follows:
5)
remove the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws); store tidily cover and screws
6)
DO NOT remove cables connector present on Main Receivers SMA connector 4B
7)
DO NOT remove flat cable from connector 5A
8)
turn off screws A1 ... A9 and extract the Main Receiver together with the flat cable
5A5B and the cable 4B4A connected to it; store tidily the assembly and screws
9)
restore the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws)
INSERTION OF MAIN RECEIVER INTO SPARE TRANSMITTER

With reference to Fig. 145. on page 379 (Receiver drawing) and and Fig. 149. on page
391 (transceiver standard internal cabling) operate on spare Transmitter as follows:
10 ) remove the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws); store tidily cover and screws
11 ) position the Main Receiver (together with the flat cable 5A5B and the cable 4B4A
connected to it) inside transmitter and fix it through screws A1 ... A9
12 ) position the flat cable 5A5B and insert its connector 5B according to cabling diagram
13 ) position the cable 4B4A according to cabling diagram
14 ) restore the plate covering Main Receiver (8 screws)
NEXT STEPS
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
15 ) as steps 13 ) (page 385) thru 29 ) (page 387)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
388 / 542

g)
h)
End of procedure
Proceed as follows:

REPAIRED TRANSCEIVER PREPARING FOR INSERTION IN SHELF

1)
restore COVERPLATE A of repaired Transceiver (see Fig. 94. on page 186)
2)
verify that, on the repaired Transceivers front panel, the switch pos. (I1) in
Fig. 102. on page 195 is turned off (position O )
ATTENTION
For the high current absorbed by the unit, its insertion with its switch in open position
could produce electrical arcs that would result in the damage of both the units and
backpanels connectors.
REPAIRED TRANSCEIVER INSERTION IN SHELF AND FUNCTIONAL CHECKS

3)
insert the repaired board in the system

ATTENTION
Please read carefully pages 169170 for the right operations and forbidden
operations to carry out in order to insert the unit
4)
5)
if not yet done, turn on the screws present into the extraction/insertion levers of the
board
ATTENTION
2.8 kg x cm (0.28 Newton x m) 10 %

2.4317 in lb (0.2026 ft lb) 10 %
6)
reconnect all cables on the front plate exactly as they were connected before the
unit extraction.
7)
turn on (position I ) the switch on the TRANSCEIVER unit front panel (pos. (I1) in
8)
wait some minutes (software download is usually carried out toward Supervisory
Units)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
software download is carried out only if the SW version present in the

spare units SU is different from that present in the FLASH CARD.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
389 / 542
spare FPGA upgrade

Please refer to para.47.2 on page 347 for summary and detailed information on this
feature.
After the SYSCOs bicolor LED redflashing condition (led (6) in Fig. 85. on page
173) ends, there are two cases:
the automatic FPGA upgrade condition is active: in this case you have nothing
to do, because the spare FPGA, if necessary, has already been carried out
the automatic FPGA upgrade condition is not active: in this case you must
launch the FPGA automatic upgrade condition to upgrade the spares
FPGA , as explained in point a ) on page 348
ATTENTION
verify that the PC is switched off (if switched on, close all running applications,
then switch off it)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
11 ) fill the Repair Form and return the faulty unit together with such Repair Form to the
Alcatel authorized repair center (see para.49.2 on page 395)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
390 / 542

9)

WITHOUT DIVERSITY AND WITHOUT FREQUENCY REUSE
main receiver
1A
2A
T1
4A
T3 T4
3A
4B
5A
5B
1B
T7
T8
Tx LO
Rx LO
plate covering
main receiver
T6
10A
10B
2B
12A
12B
3B
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 149. Transceiver internal connectors for repair 1/6
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
391 / 542
T3
1A
2A
6B
4A*
T4
T6
3A*
T7

WITH DIVERSITY AND WITHOUT FREQUENCY REUSE
T8
6A
Tx LO
Rx LO
diversity receiver
7A
1B
5B*
10B
7B
10A
2B
12B
12A
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
392 / 542
WITHOUT DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO MASTER

9A
8A
1A
2A
10C
T1
4A*
9B
3A*
T6
T3
T8
T7
8B
Tx LO
Rx LO
5B*
1B
10A
10B
2B
12A
12B

WITH DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO MASTER

(differences with Fig. 151. above)
6B instead of T1
6A
Rx LO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
diversity receiver
7A
Tx LO
7B
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
393 / 542
WITHOUT DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO SLAVE
11A
1A
2A
T1
T4
4A*
Rx LO
5B*
1B
T6
3A*
T7

11B
T8
Tx LO
10A
10B
2B
12A
12B
WITH DIVERSITY AND WITH FREQUENCY REUSE, RX LO SLAVE

(differences with Fig. 153. above)
6B instead of T1
6A
Rx LO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
diversity receiver
7A
Tx LO
7B
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
394 / 542

49 FAULTY UNIT REPAIR AND REPAIR FORM

49.1 Faulty unit sending back to repair center
Faulty unit repair must be done by authorized repair centers only.
According to the policy described in para.43.3.1.1 on page 322, the units with babyboards (see
Tab. 58. on page 322) must be sent back to the repair center together with their babyboards, without
dismounting them from the assembly.
As far as Transceivers are concerned, please refer to para.43.3.1.2 on page 323 for the definition of
internal components that must be considered as replaced parts to be sent back to the repair center.
49.2 Repair Form filling

To facilitate repair operation, data on the faulty unit must be reported on the form shown in Fig. 155. on
page 396.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The repair form must be filledin with as much data as possible and returned to Alcatel together with the
faulty unit.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
395 / 542
ALCATE L
REPAIR FORM
CUSTOMER NAME
ORDER NUMBER/CONTRACT NUMBER
SITE
BRANCH/UNIT/COUNTRY
SYSTEM/EQUIPMENT
PRODUCT RELEASE
STATION/RACK
TO BE FILLED IN BY THE SENDER

Fill in this form and affix it to the faulty unit to be returned to Alcatel
EQUIPMENT SOFTWARE PART NUMBER
SUBRACK
SLOT
MNEMONIC
ALCATEL PART NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
FAULTY UNIT SOFTWARE VERSION
FAULT PHASE
REASON FOR REPAIR
PRESUMED CAUSE
INSTALLATION /
TURN ON
CLEAR FAULT
DROP IN PERFORMANCE
OPERATION
INTERMITTENT FAULT
UPGRADE/QUALITY ALERT
INTERNAL
LIGHTNING
EXTERNAL
MAINTENANCE
AIR COND.
TEMPERATURE FAULT
OTHER
DATE
NAME OF SENDER
FAULT STILL PRESENT

AFTER REPAIR
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TO BE FILLED IN BY THE REPAIR OPERATOR
COMMENTS
PROCESSING
NO FAULTS FOUND
FAULTS DETECTED
UPGRADE
A
STANDARD REPAIRING
SOLDERING /
WIRING
I
NOT REPAIRABLE
(REJECTED)
BD
FL
MECHANICAL
M
PRINTED
CIRCUIT BOARD
V1
P
DIRT
V1
SUBSTITUTED
QUALITY ALERT
ADJUSTMENT
COMPONENT
C
CORROSION
V2
OTHER
SX
V3
NOTE : LETTERS ARE FOR FACTORY USE
COMMENTS
DATE
REPAIRING NUMBER
REPAIRING CENTRE
NAME OF REPAIR OPERATOR
Fig. 155. Repair form
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
396 / 542
SECTION 5: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

It provides the secondlevel description of 9600LSY/LHR equipment.

SECTION CONTENT
ED
PAGE
Chapter 51 Signal management

It describes the signal management performed by equipment.
399
Chapter 52 Hardware description

It gives the detailed hardware description of the system that have not been given in
the previous part of this handbook.
425
Chapter 53 Alarm Management

It gives summary and detailed information regarding the alarm management carried
out by the system (Alarms provided by item HW, Remote Alarms, Station Alarms,
Housekeeping).
481
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
397 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
398 / 542
51 SIGNAL MANAGEMENT

This chapter describes the signal management performed by 9600LSY equipment.
51.1 STM1 frame structure and WST mapping

STM1 + WST (4 columns) + RFCOH (2 columns)
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
B1
MD
MD
E1
D1
MD
MD
D2
A2
J0
NU
NU
MD
F1
NU
NU
MD
D3
ADMINISTRATIVE UNIT OVERHEAD

B2
B2
B2
K1
K2
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
S1
M1
E2
NU
NU
1xWST channels
(4 columns)
RFCOH channel
(2 columns)
MD: Media dependent bytes
NU: Bytes reserved for national use
MSOH bytes are in bypass condition
51.2 STM0 frame structure
STM0 + RFCOH (2 columns)

A1
B1
A2
E1
J0
F1
D1
D2
D3
H1
H2
H3
B2
K1
K2
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
S1
M1
E2
1xWST channel
(4 columns)
RFCOH channels
(2 columns)
The Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication (MSREI) M1 is rerouted inside the STM0 frame
from byte #(9,6) of STM1 frame.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
MSOH bytes are in bypass condition.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
399 / 542
A single WST channel (2.048 Kbit/s) is composed by 36 bytes as described in the following:
Information (1 byte)
1st byte
WST_POH (1 byte)
Information (8 bytes)
P_WST
Sg_stn
Sg_stp
P_WST
Sg_stn
Sg_stp
stn
stp
Sg_stn
Sg_stp
Information (7 bits)
36th byte
WST (2.048 Kbit/s)

WST_POH:
P_WST:
Sg_stn:
Sg_stp:
Information:
global SDH plus WST parity (BIP8 operation)

dedicated WST parity (BIP2 operation)
negative stuffing opportunity
positive stuffing opportunity
32 bytes
The STM1 signal with 0 WST channel is used only for special application (frequency reuse operation
in 28 channel spacing).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The STM0 signal with 1_WST is derived directly from the STM1 frame with 2_WST channels dividing
by three.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
400 / 542
51.3 RFCOH services structure

The structure of SERVICE CHANNELS inside the RFCOH area is the following:
RFCOH
column xx
column yy
DSI
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
ATPC
1.9
1.10
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
D1
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
D2
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
4.1
4.2
D3
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
E1
5.1
5.2
K0
F1
reserved for service channel
Monitoring channel management:

1.X EWL alarm
2.X EWH alarm
3.X HBER alarm
4.X ATL alarm
[X=1 to 10number of channel]
5.1 FAIL service 0 (ATL_rfcoh1)
5.2 FAIL service 1 (ATL_rfcoh2)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The decision to select the MC signal coming from ch_ 0 or ch_1 is implemented according to the local DEM
alarms (and BIP4 parity code).
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
401 / 542
51.4 SOH management
the SOH_BUS (5.1 Mb/s) thats used to transport the RSOH bytes information from all the lineside
channels (0,1,2, , N) towards AUX board.
the RFCOH_BUS (1.152 Mb/s) towards channel_0 and channel_1 (radioside)
Available bytes with standard interface (NxG.703) and with RS385 interface (NxV11).
CH_0
CH_1
Crossconnection matrix
RFCOH
CH_0
CH_2
CH_1
BYPASS FUNCTION
CH N
SOH BUS
E1
F1
1.8
1.9
2.2
2.3
2.5
2.6
2.8
2.9
3.2
3.3
3.5
3.6
3.8
3.9
ATPC
DSI
MC
E1
F1
D1
D2
D3
CH1 (#)
CH2 (#)
CH3 (#)
CH4 (#)
CH5 (#)
EXTERNAL INTERFACES
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 156. SOH management
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
402 / 542

This block diagram of Fig. 156. herebelow shows some connection for SOH bytes management:

In case of RRA application, the access to SOH bytes is provided by RRA itself; in case of WADM and WLT
application, the access to SOH bytes is concentrated in the baseband part implementing WADM/WLT
functionality.
Each RSOH_byte, if terminated, must be terminated and accessible both at radioside and lineside. The
managed bytes (lineside) are the following:
E1
F1
#1.8, #1.9,
#2.2, #2.3, #2.5, #2.6, #2.8, #2.9,
#3.2. #3.3, #3.5, #3.6, #3.8, #3.9
E1 and F1 are always connected (radioside) to specific RFCOH channels.
The other ones can be connected (radioside) to 5 available interfaces.
In terminaltoterminal application the passthrough mode for each RSOH_byte is provided.
In WADM/WLT terminal application with radio repeater, when a specific service channel must be dropped
in the regenerator, the interested RSOH byte is rerouted in the RFCOH area according with the service
channel columns format (1152 Kbit/s stream):
Column 2
Column 1
DSI
MC
ATPC
MC
D1
MC
D2
MC
D3
MC
E1
FAIL serv + K0
F1
Channel #3
Channel #1
Channel #4
Channel #2
Channel #5
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The selection of byte rerouting is performed by ECT/OS.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
403 / 542
RST

RSOH standard_bytes
passthrough function
RFCOH
RSOH termination
E1
USER INTERFACES
F1
D1, D2, D3
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CROSS CONNECTION
MATRIX FOR
SERVICE CHANNELS
ATPC
DSI
MC
RSOH termination
RST
RFCOH
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RSOH standard_bytes
passthrough function
Fig. 157. Service channels functional block diagram
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
404 / 542

The line side SOH bytes can be managed on the ten RST sections available in the maximum system
configuration ( 8+0 or 7+1 ).
SOH bytes handling:
Byte
Handling type
Access type
User interface
E1
terminated
Voice channel DTMF or 64 Kbit/s
G.703 or V.11
F1
terminated
64 Kbit/s
G.703 or V.11
MSU_RSOH
terminated
64 Kbit/s
G.703 or V.11
N.U._RSOH
terminated
64 Kbit/s
G.703 or V.11
D1:D3
terminated
192 Kbit/s
Internal towards SC
J0
terminated
64 Kbit/s
Internal towards SC
MSOH
bypassed
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Inside the RRA unit the passthrough function of RSOH bytes is provided, in order to transmit
channels coming from ADM line equipment in transparent mode through the radio system.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
405 / 542
The DCCR are managed by EC both in lineside and radioside.

The DCCR towards lineside are provided by the connection for all the channelunits, but are managed
by EC only the streams towards CH_0 and CH_1 on radioside, where they are inserted inside the RFCOH
bytes.
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION
CH_0
Radioside
Lineside
CK+SYNC REF
EPLD
CK+SYNC
DCCR extraction
lineside
& mapping in
6.48 Mb BUS
DCCR
extraction
RSOH
insertion
LOGIC
CK+SYNC
from RFCOH
radioside
CK+SYNC
EPLD
RST SECTION
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION
RFCOH SECTION
CH_1
CH_9
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 158. DCCR management (ADM towards RADIO)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
406 / 542

51.5 DCCR Management

CK+SYNC
CH_0
RST SECTION
RFCOH SECTION
Lineside
Radioside
EPLD
DCCR extraction
DCCR
mapping
CK+SYNC REF
DCCR demapping
from 6.48 Mb BUS
& insertion line side
EPLD
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION
CH_1
CK+SYNC
RFCOH SECTION
RST SECTION
CH_9
Fig. 159. DCCR management (RADIO towards ADM)

Notes (see Fig. 160. on page 408):
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
On RST section the DCCR are inserted/extracted by dedicated pins (192 Kbit/s) on
contradirectional interface.
The DCCR extracted from RST on channels 0, 1, 2 and the DCCR radioside are mapped inside
the first 6.48 Mbit/s DCC frame (link 1).
The DCCR extracted from RST on channels 3, 4, 5, 6 are mapped inside the the second 6.48 Mbit/s
DCC frame (link 2).
The DCCR extracted from RST on channels 7, 8, 9 are mapped inside the the third 6.48 Mbit/s DCC
frame (link 3).
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
407 / 542
RST section
(channels 0)
RST section
(channels 1)
MUX/DEMUX
6.48 Mb/s [link 2]

6.48 Mb/s [link 1]
SC
6.48 Mb/s [link 3]
RST section
(channels 9)
RFCOH section
(channel 0)
SWITCH
RFCOH section
(channel 1)
Fig. 160. DCCR management

Tab. 65. DCC Mapping & Interleaving
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The DCC frame is composed by 101.25 bytes (6.48 Mbit/s), and takes into account the information from/
to four STM1 channels:
ED
CR
CR
CR
CR
DR
DR
DR
DR
D1(#1)
D1(#2)
D1(#3)
D1(#4)
D2(#1)
D2(#2)
D2(#3)
D2(#4)
D3(#1)
D3(#2)
D3(#3)
D3(#4)
CM
CM
CM
CM
DM
DM
DM
DM
D4
D4
D4
D4
D5
D5
D5
D5
D6
D6
D6
D6
D7
D7
D7
D7
D8
D8
D8
D8
D9
D9
D9
D9
D10
D10
D10
D10
D11
D11
D11
D11
D12
D12
D12
D12
CF2
CF2
CF2
CF2
DF2
DF2
DF2
DF2
F2
F2
F2
F2
CF3
CF3
CF3
CF3
DF3
DF3
DF3
DF3
F3
F3
F3
F3
xx
DR, DM, DF2, DF3:

D1, D4, F2, F3:
CR, CM, CF2, CF3:
X:
x
positive stuffing opportunity bytes
negative stuffing opportunity bytes
colored stuffing bytes
empty bytes
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
408 / 542
51.6 ATPC Management

The ATPC functionality is fully described in para.12.5.3.2 on page 57.

Fig. 161. herebelow depicts the internal processing block diagram.
RRA1 unit
RX1 unit
RX0 unit
RRA0 unit
Rx failure
PRX DETECTION
From AGC VOLTAGE
RFCOH EXTRACTION
MICROPROCESSOR
CAN_BUS
EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
SERVICE
UNIT/ATPC
64 Kb/s
TX1 unit
TX0 unit
RFCOH INSERTION
MOD
On/off
MICROPROCESSOR
Rx failure
CAN BUS
EQUIPMENT
CONTROLLER
SERVICE
UNIT/ATPC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 161. ATPC management
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
409 / 542
In case of multiplexing of an AU4 via AUG, the position and the justification of AU4 structure is managed
by octets H1H2H3 type:
H2
H1
NDF
H3
POINTER
Negative justification
because the other part of the AUOH area:

Y
H1
H2
H3
H3
H3
is filled with octets:

Y = 1001nn11 (where n is a nonspecified value)
U = 11111111
In this sense, we can assume that the only managed transport situation is for an AU4 structure inside
an STM1 signal, and the STM0 design is mapped with 3xVC3 structures (partially filled with the first
container only) into an AU4 unit (European standard).
The demultiplexing operation from an STM1 signal to an STM0 signal can be provided taking one
column for each three columns group, considering that only the first VC3 inside the AU4 structure of
STM1 frame contains the significant payload.
The VC4 POH is maintained in STM0 frame.
The fixed stuffing columns (11, 12) of STM1 frame are removed in STM0 frame.
When the STM1 standard interface is formed by an STM0 signal, the AUOH row is mapped according
to the previous description (H1, H2 and H3 are extracted from the STM0 format), and B2 parity
calculation has to be recomputed with the following criteria:
B2(#1) = B2 coming from STM0 frame
B2(#2) = Y U H3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
B2(#3) = Y U H3
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
410 / 542

51.7 Sub STM1 framing processing
Starting from three TUG3 units, it is possible to generate the VC4 structure with the mapping of
3xTUG3, 18 bytes of fixed justification and the VC4 POH as described below:
86 bytes
TUG3
86 bytes
86 bytes
TUG3
TUG3
VC4
261 bytes
VC4 POH
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FILLED BYTES
ED
Fig. 162. VC4 generation from 3 TUG3
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
411 / 542
STM1
AUG
AU4
VC4
3rd TUG3
3rd TU3: unequipped
2nd TUG3
2nd TU3: unequipped
TUG3
TU3
VC3
C3 = 34.368 Kbit/s
TU12
VC12
C12 = 2.048 Kbit/s
X7
TUG2
So, when we speak of STM0 signal transmission we intend a nonstandard interface, based on a single
TUG3 container (the first) coming from the mapping of an AU4 partially equipped.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The 2nd and 3rd TUG3 are always considered as filled with TU3s unequipped container.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
412 / 542

During the multiplexing/demultiplexing of the STM0 signal for the transmission in the radio section of the
first TUG3 tributary, it is necessary to consider the following multiplexing structure, provided in SDH
European hierarchy:
STM1 multiplexing structure with 3xTUG3 carrying VC3 container inside an AU4 unit
1st TU3 pointer

VC4 POH
H1
H2
H3
H3
1st VC3 POH
H1
H1
H1
H2
H2
H2
H3
H3
H3
H3
3xVC3 (interleaved)
H1
H2
H3
H1
H2
H3
1st VC3
VC 3
Where:
Y=10010011
U=11111111
Fixed stuffing bytes
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTE:
In case of AU4 pointer = 0 (NDF=0110 and SS_bits=10) the default value for AUOH row is:
AUOH = H1 Y Y H2 U U H3 H3 H3 = 68 93 93 00 FF FF 00 00 00
In case of 3xVC3 mapping structure, the TU3 pointers for the unequipped containers are fixed to:
H1 H2 H3 = 68 00 00 (NDF=0110, SS_bits=10, pointer=0, pointer offset=0)
The STM0 frame is defined as that frame obtained from the STM1 one, by reducing its capacity to one
third of it.
The SOH bytes are divided into triplets, and the first byte is taken while the other two discarded.
The Higher Order container is a VC4/3, carried in an AU4/3.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
413 / 542
The most important advantage of this solution is the possibility to transmit only the significant part of an
STM1 signal sub equipped on a radio equipment, without any multiplexing/demultiplexing operation or
pointer processing; using the radio network element as a pure regenerator NE.
RST
RREI
NNI:
RST:
RREI:
RPI:
RPI
RF
branching
RF
branching
RPI
RREI
RST
network node interface

regenerator section termination
radiorelay equipment interface
radio physical interface
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 163. Sub STM1 terminal functional block diagram
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
414 / 542

For hardware convenience it is defined a new entity: AU4/3 carrying a VC4/3, being them structured as
an one third of an AU4.
The AU4/3 mapping carries VC3, VC2, VC12 by two pointer levels (AU_level and TU_level, cascaded);
moreover, fixed stuff columns in their mapping into AU4/3 are in fixed position with respect to the VC4/3
carrier.
STM1 / STM0 frame processing algorithm:

RPS
RSOH
termination
MUX
B1
calculation:
WST & services

Insertion on
STM1 frame
the calculation is
made over all bytes of
the
frame
after
scrambling and the
result is inserted in
the next frame before
scrambling.
Filling all 0 bytes for

columns Nx2 & Nx3
(except A1, A2 and
AUOH row)
M1 change position
B2(#5.1) compensation
B2 compensation
B3 compensation
RPS
Div by 3
Services insertion
on STM0 frame
RST section
RFCOH section
STM0 / STM1 frame processing algorithm:
RPS
WST & services
extraction on
STM1 frame
Services
extraction on
STM0 frame
MUX
Interleaving of all 0
bytes for columns
Nx2 & Nx3
Rewriting A1, A2
Rewriting AUOH
B1 handling:
the byte is recovered from
the SDH frame after
and is
descrambling
compared
with
the
the
calculation over
previous elapsed frame
RSOH
insertion
and B1
calculation
RPS
M1 change position.
(M1 is moved in the original position
[#9.6] and 00 configuration is inserted
in [#9.4] byte)
B2 compensation
B3 compensation
B2 (#1, #3) compensation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RFCOH section
ED
RST section
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
415 / 542
51.8 SOH handling in normal operation condition
SOH BYTES
TX SIDE
RX SIDE
A1 A2
Refresh
Refresh
B1
Refresh
Refresh
E1
insert
insert
F1
insert
insert
D1 D2 D3
insert
insert
J0
insert
character or
multiframe
insert
character or
multiframe
M.S.U.
insert
insert
NU_RSOH
insert
insert
MSOH
Bypass
Bypass
NOTE
All the RSOH bytes are managed one by one
All the MSOH bytes are in a fixed bypass

condition without any possibility to be
managed.
This operation is involved in Radio Section Termination area (RST) as in the following block diagram:
TX_SIDE SIGNAL FLOW
Line side
RST
RPS
RFCOH
RSPI
RRA
Radio side
RADIO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RX_SIDE SIGNAL FLOW
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
416 / 542

SOH handling in normal operation condition according to the default hardware configuration:
51.9 Alarms detected in RST section

Alarm
Consequent action
LOS (loss of signal)
MSAIS
LOF (loss of frame)
MSAIS
TIM (trace identifier mismatch)
MSAIS
OOF (out of frame)
OFS count
MSAIS (multiplex section AIS)

MSRDI (multiplex section remote defect indication)
TIM:
when J0 byte, extracted from SDH stream received, is different from the data written in
J0_register by microprocessor interface (according to the regenerator section trace
algorithm), Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) alarm is detected and the AIS condition is
activated.
MSRDI:
the Multiplex Section Remote Defect Indication is used to return an indication to the
transmit end that the received end has detected an incoming section defect or is receiving
MSAIS.
MSRDI is generated by inserting a 110 code in positions 6, 7 and 8 of the K2 byte before
scrambling.
MSAIS:
the Multiplex Section AIS indication detect an incoming AIS signal.

MSAIS is generated by inserting a 111 code in positions 6, 7 and 8 of the K2 byte before
scrambling.
the Out of Frame Second (OFS) is declared when the STM1 frame alignment process is in the
OOF state.
This parameter is used as additional performance parameter.
N.B.
The proprietary management of K0 channel (Radio Channel Identification) inside the RFCOH section is
the same of J0 in RST section. The detected alarm is the following:
Alarm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RCIM (Radio Channel Identifier Mismatch)
ED
Consequent action
MSAIS
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
417 / 542
LOS
LOF
SPI
TX_LOS
TX_FAIL
MOD_LOS
MOD_FAIL
TIM (JO)
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH
RSPI
MOD + TX
RRA channel
RADIOSIDE
LINESIDE
TX FAIL (#)
TX DEGRADED (#)
SPI
RST
LOS
LOF
RCIM (K0)
TIM (JO)
RST
RPS
RFCOH
RX_LOS
RX_FAIL
DEM_LOS
DEM_FAIL
RSPI
RX + DEM
RRA channel
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(#) referred to optical interface.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
418 / 542

In the following diagram is indicated the functional representation of the system with the alarms indication
as reported to ECT/OS:

In the following diagram is indicated the functional representation of the system with the primitives for the
performance monitoring as reported to ECT/OS.
OOF
SPI
TL
EB (B1)
RST
RST
RPS
RFCOH
RSPI
RRA channel
MOD + TX
RADIOSIDE
LINESIDE
EB (B1)
SPI
RST
RST
PSA
RL
PSR
RPS
OOF
FEC
RFCOH
RSPI
RRA channel
RX + DEM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Legend:
EB:
Errored Block
OOF:
Out of Frame
TL:
Transmitted level, is the level of the estimated transmitter power at the transmitter output.
The parameter is represented by two values:
an integer fixed value expressed in [dBm] defining the transmitted power value;
an integer offset value expressed in [dB] representing the variation with respect to the
nominal value.
RL:
Received level, is the level of the estimated received power at the input of the receiver. In 2
release both value will be reported. The parameter unit shall be expressed in [dBm] and
represented by the rounded nearest integer.
PSA:
Protection Switch Actual, represents any actual switch from a protected (working) channel to
a protecting (standby) channel
PSR:
Protection Switch Request, represents any activation of a switch initiation criteria which may
lead to automatic switches from a working channel to a standby channel and viceversa.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
419 / 542
K0 expected
(radio side)
J0 expected
(line side)
J0 transmitted
(line side)
K0 transmitted
(radio side)
J0 transmitted
(radio side)
RST
sink
RST
source
RPS
J0 expected
(radio side)
RFCOH
source
RFCOH
source
RRA channel (TX side)
Action to P:
J0 mismatch alarm (with MSAIS insertion in frame)
J0 received value
RPS
RST
sink
RST
source
RRA channel (RX side)
Action to P:
K0 mismatch alarm (with MSAIS insertion in frame)
K0 received value
J0 mismatch alarm (with MSAIS insertion in frame)
J0 received value
NOTES:
J0 is represented by an integer of 15 digits (multiframe mode9 or one byte (insert character mode).
The default value for J0 is 0000 0001 (unspecified Regenerator Section Trace).
The methodology of J0 management is described in the following para.51.10.1 on page 421.
K0 is represented by 6 bits (inside a RFCOH byte).
K0_mismatch alarm is detected after 3 consecutive frame of erroneous K0 received, and it is used as
channel switching criteria.
In the system without protection, J0 only is managed.
K0 transmitted and K0 expected are fixed to the default value (K0 = 000000).
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In a repeater configuration only K0 management is performed.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
420 / 542

51.10 Regenerator Section trace management

51.10.1 J0 management
The J0 byte located at # (1, 7) byte in an STM1 is allocated to a Regenerator Section Trace. This byte
is used to transmit repetitively a Section Access Point Identifier so that a section receiver can verify its
continued connection to the intended transmitter. Within a national network, or within the domain of a
single operator, this Section Access Point Identifier may use either a single byte (containing the code
0255) or the Access Point Identifier format as defined in clause 3/G.831. At international boundaries, or
at the boundaries between the networks of different operators, the format defined in clause 3/G.831 shall
be used unless otherwise mutually agreed by the operators providing the transport.
A 16byte frame is defined for the transmission of Section Access Point Identifiers where these conform
to the definition contained in clause 3/G.831. The first byte of the string is a frame start marker and includes
the result of a CRC7 calculation over the previous frame. The following 15 bytes are used for the transport
of 15 T.50 characters (international Reference Version) required for the Section Access Point Identifier.
The 16byte frame description is given in Table 4/G.707 reported herebelow:
TABLE 4/G.707
16byte frame for Trail APId
Byte #
Value (bit 1, 2, ,8)
C1
C2
C3
C4
C5
C6
C7
16
:
X
NOTES
1
C1C2C3C4C5C6C7 is the result of the CRC7 calculation over the
previous frame. C1is the MSB.
2
0XXXXXXX represents a T.50 character.
In the case of interworking of equipment implementing the STM identifier functionality (see N.B.) and
equipment employing the Regenerator Section Trace function, the latter shall interpret the pattern
0000001 in J0 as Regenerator Section Trace unspecified. This unspecified Regenerator Section
Trace can also be used if no use of the Regenerator Section Trace is made.
STM identifier: C1
In earlier versions of the Recommendation, the content of bytes located at S (1, 7, 1) or [1,
6N+1] to S (1, 7, N) or [1, 7N] was defined as a unique identifier indicating the binary value of
the multicolumn, interleave depth coordinate, c. It may have been used to assist in frame
alignment.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
421 / 542
The Trail Trace Identifier is a 16_BYTE or 1_BYTE string used in SDH to detect misconnections inside
a communication network. A receiver has to validate the received string, in order to be sure that it has not
been corrupted by line errors, and compare it with an expected value, in order to verify that it is connected
with the right transmitter. If this is not the case, the receiver has to declare a TIM (Trace Identifier Mismatch)
alarm.
The 1_BYTE string is made by a single byte (containing the code 0255), while the 16_BYTE frame is
structured as previously described.
In the following, the algorithm to detect the TIM condition is described: this algorithm is applied at all SDH
layers in which Trail Trace Identifier feature is defined, so it is suitable for processing byte J0 (section trace)
and bytes J1, J2 (VCi path trace).
The algorithm behavior is shown in the following Fig. 164. :
DATA
16_BYTE
t, f, d
COMB
t, f, d
TIM1/16 machine
TIM 1/16
alarm
t, f, d
1_BYTE
1/16
t = true
f = false
d = dontcare
TIM
valid CRC7
TIMX machine
TIMX
alarm
valid CONST
Fig. 164. TIM algorithm

Incoming data are at the same time checked in order to find the standard 16_BYTE string with multiframe
alignment word and CRC7, or a fixed 16 times repeating 1_BYTE string. The preset 16/1 is needed to
tell the system if a 16_BYTE or a 1_BYTE string is expected. After validation process (correct CRC7 and
multiframe for the 16_BYTE string, same value 16 times for the 1_BYTE string), the received string is
compared with the expected one. If the preset 16/1 is set to 16, the comparison with 1 is always false;
if the preset 16/1 is set to 1, the comparison with 16 is always false.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Each output (that can assume three possible values: false, true, dontcare if the received string has
not been validated) of the two comparisons is sent, through a COMB function, to a state machine (the
TIM1/16 machine) with four states: alarm, not alarm, and two intermediate states. False causes the state
machine moving towards the alarm state, true causes the state machine moving towards the not alarm
state, dontcare leaves the machine in the state it is.
In parallel, further control is performed by the TIMX machine, in such a way that if for 8x16 times neither
a fixed string nor a correct multiframe alignment word plus CRC7 can be found, the TIM alarm is anyway
declared (this feature is not required by standards at now).
The TIM algorithm described is fully compliant with the standard promptness requests about maximum
detection time and is able to detect all possible crossmisconnections:
expected 1_BYTE string, with a different 1_BYTE or a 16_BYTE string received;
expected 16_BYTE string, with a different 16_BYTE or a 1_BYTE string received;
expected 1_BYTE or 16_BYTE string, with a random string received.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
422 / 542

51.10.2 Trace Identifier Mismatch (TIM) detector
Here below, TIM algorithm is described in more details:

a)
16_BYTE DETECTOR
As it can be seen in the following Fig. 165. , the 16_BYTE detector internally consists of four
functions:
a multiframe aligner in order to synchronize the machine itself to the 16_BYTE frame;
a CRC7 extractor, in order to calculate the CRC7 from the received frame;
a mismatch detector, in order to determine whether a received 16_BYTE frame is different from
the expected string;
a command generator, which drives the TIM1/16 machine, depending on the outputs of the
preceding two functions.
valid CRC7
CRC7 detector
8
DATA
sync
Multiframe Aligner
Command Generator
t, f, d
match
Mismatch detector
8
1/16
DATA EXP
Fig. 165. The 16_BYTE machine

b)
1_BYTE DETECTOR
The 1_BYTE detector internally consists of four functions:
a mod 16 counter, in order to generate an independent sync;
a 16 byte integrator, which detects whether the received bytes are of the 1_BYTE type;
a mismatch detector, in order to determine whether a received 1_BYTE is different from the
expected one;
a command generator, which drives the TIM1/16 machine, depending on the outputs of the
preceding two functions.
8
valid const
16 byte integrator
DATA
sync
MOD 16 counter
Command Generator
Mismatch detector
t, f, d
match
8
DATA EXP
1/16
Fig. 166. The 1_BYTE machine
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
51.10.3 K0 management
The K0 bits were defined in RFCOH section to perform a proprietary regenerator section trace internally
to the switching section.
K0 is represented by 6 bits (inside a RFCOH byte).
K0_mismatch alarm is detected after 3 consecutive frame of erroneous K0 received, and it is used as
channel switching criteria.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
423 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
424 / 542
52 HARDWARE DESCRIPTION

52.1 Introduction
This chapter describes in detail the functional operation of 9600LSY/LHR equipment.
This handbook gives no detailed information on 1650SMC equipment. For this purpose,
please refer to 1650SMC specific documentation (see para.C.2.4.2 on page 530) with the
following exception:
In the application for 9600 LSY, the FAN SHELF used for 1650SMC is not
that described in the 1650SMC documentation, but that described in this
handbook.
The handbook parts that should be read before starting this chapter are:
System description
Information given in this chapter is organized as follows:
Power Supply subsystem:
Equipment Control subsystem

that includes:
Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture:
System Controller unit description:
Flash Card description:
Additional Housekeeping unit description:
Baseband subsystem:
that includes:
Interconnection general block diagrams:

N+1 switch logic

1:N switch logic

RRACHANNEL STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST : para.52.4.4 on page 454
RRASTANDBY STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST : para.52.4.5 on page 456
STM1 optical module:

MODEM STM1 1WSTandSTM0 0WST:

Service and Additional Voice unit:

Transceiver subsystem:
that includes:
Interconnection general block diagrams:
DC/DC converter module:
Transmit and Service module:
Receive & IF Rx module:
Local Oscillator module:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Fans subsystem:

References to 32QAM modulation present in this chapter are for general information purposes.
9600LSYLHR version is not meant to support it.
N.B.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
425 / 542
The Power Supply subsystem distributes both batteries BATT.A and BATT.B voltages to each user circuit
in the following way:
a)
Primary voltage distribution with rack and TRU

Fig. 167. herebelow shows the block diagram. For physical implementation, refer to:
9600LSY/LHR Installation Handbook REF.[C] on page 524
Enhanced TRU Installation and Configuration Handbook REF.[L] on page 527.

Primary sources BATT.A and BATT.B are connected to TRU distribution frame.
From TRU box, BATT.A and BATT.B are distributed by individual cables, each one protected by circuit
breakers, to the subracks (Tab. 28. on page 200 indicates the TRU breaker utilization).
b)
Power Supply distribution in the Transceiver shelf (see Fig. 167. herebelow and Fig. 111. on
page 209).
Power supply cables from TRU are connected to following connectors:
(M2) for BATT.A and (M3) for BATT.B, by means of which transceivers TR0 to TR4 receive
power through the shelf backpanel
(M5) for BATT.A and (M6) for BATT.B, by means of which transceivers TR5 to TR9 receive
power through the shelf backpanel
BATT. A
BATT. B
TR0
TR9
TOP RACK UNIT
TRX BACK PANEL

B.B. BACK PANNEL
FAN SUBRACKS
ADM BACK PANEL
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 167. Power Supply distribution from Top Rack Unit and Transceiver shelf Power Supply
distribution
The ON/OFF position of circuit breakers of Enhanced TRU can be checked by system software connecting
their monitoring points to some housekeeping inputs. For details, refer to the Enhanced TRU Installation
and Configuration Handbook REF.[L] on page 527.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
426 / 542

52.2 Power supply subsystem
c)
Power Supply distribution in the Baseband shelf

Power supply cables from TRU (see Fig. 167. on page 426) are connected to following connectors:
BATT.A cable connected to Power Supply Input connector of PSF1 unit equipped in slot 25 (i.e.
on the left) of Baseband shelf
BATT.B cable connected to Power Supply Input connector of PSF2 unit equipped in slot 36 (i.e.
on the right) of Baseband shelf
PSF unit front view is depicted in Fig. 82. on page 171
PSF1 and PSF2 position in the shelf is shown in Fig. 79. on page 160
N.B.
The distribution of Power supply from PSF units to the subrack is depicted in following Fig. 168. :
each PSF unit receives also the power supply voltage from the other PSF; after filtering:
BATT.A and BATT.B primary voltages are distributed through the backpanel toward the Power
Supply units PSU0 .... PSU9 (slots (E) in Fig. 79. on page 160)
converted voltages are distributed through the backpanel to units SERVICE and SYSTEM
CONTROLLER in the shelf (respectively in slot (A) and (B) in Fig. 79. on page 160), and,
through its cable, to ADDITIONAL HOUSEKEEPING unit (see para.23.8 on page 203)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The distribution of Power supply from PSU units to the units MODEM and RRA/RRAS is depicted
in following Fig. 168. :
ED
PSU units are grouped in even/odd 2units groups (i.e. PSU0+PSU1 , PSU2+PSU3 , ..).
Each PSU pair converts and then distributes, through the backpanel, power supply to the
correspondent pair of RRA and MODEM. In particular:
RRA/RRAS units receive power supply from both PSU units; if equipped, optical module
receives power supply from the RRA/RRAS where it is equipped;
each MODEM unit receives power supply only from correspondent PSU unit ( where n =
even and n+1 = odd):
MODEMn from PSUn
MODEMn+1 from PSUn+1.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
427 / 542
+5.3 V
MODEM0
+ 3.5 V
+5.3 V
RRA0
(or RRAS)
OPT
MODULE
RRA1
OPT
MODULE

PSU0
+ 3.5 V
PSU1
+5.3 V
+ 3.5 V
MODEM1
+5.3 V
MODEM8
+ 3.5 V
PSU8
battery A
BATT.A
battery B
+5.3 V
OPT
MODULE
RRA9
OPT
MODULE
+ 3.5 V
PSF1
BATT.B
RRA8
PSU9
+5.3 V
+ 3.5 V
MODEM9
BATT.A
BATT.B
ADDITIONAL
HOUSEHEEPING
PSF2
SERVICE
+ 3.5 V
+5.3 V
M184
SYSTEM
CONTROLLER
SERVICE BATTERY
dashed elements are optional or depending on the configuration
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 168. Power Supply distribution in Baseband shelf
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
428 / 542

d)
Service Battery to System Controller unit

In addition to the voltage distributed by PSF1 and PSF2 units, the System Controller unit receives
also the battery voltage by means of the cable used for Station Alarms management (see Tab. 31. on
page 219). This allows the System Controller unit to manage the TRU lamps also in case of power
supply missing from both PSF1 and PSF2 units.
e)
Power Supply distribution to Additional Housekeeping unit

The Additional Housekeeping unit is powered as the System Controller unit (of which it must be
considered an extension), as depicted in Fig. 168. on page 428. From the physical point of view,
power supply is lead on the cable connecting the Additional Housekeeping unit to the BB shelf (see
f)
Power Supply distribution in the Fans shelves

Power supply cables from TRU (see Fig. 167. on page 426) are connected to following connectors
of Fans shelf (see Fig. 105. on page 198):
(M1) for BATT.A
(M4) for BATT.B

As depicted in Fig. 197. on page 479, both BATT.A and BATT.B voltages are distributed to both FANS
ASSEMBLED units.
Inside each FANS ASSEMBLED unit, as depicted in Fig. 198. on page 480, there are two power
supply units (one receiving BATT.A power supply voltage, the other receiving BATT.B power supply
voltage) from which, diodedecoupled, power supply is distributed to the four fans of the assembly.
g)
Power Supply distribution in the 1650SMC (ADM) shelf
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Please make reference to 1650SMC specific documentation (see para.C.2.4.2 on page 530).
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
429 / 542
52.3.1 Control Subsystem Hardware Architecture

This paragraph describes the control subsystem hardware architecture, defines the control elements, the
function partitioning among them and the external and internal interfaces managed by this subsystem.
For reader convenience, the content index of this part is detailed herebelow:
herebelow:
herebelow
herebelow
on page 432
LHR control subsystem architecture
Function partitioning
Control elements
Communication interfaces
WMSN control subsystem architecture
on page 434
52.3.1.1 LHR control subsystem architecture

52.3.1.1.1 Function partitioning
The functionalities performed by the control subsystem can be summarized as follows:
Message Communication Function (MCF)
Synchronous Equipment Management Function (SEMF)
Virtual Machine Management Function (VMMF)
Physical Machine Management Function on whole equipment basis (PMMF/E)
Physical Machine Management Function on unit basis (PMMF/U)
Basic Functions (BF)

52.3.1.1.2 Control elements
The control elements supporting the functionalities described above are:
Equipment controller (EC)
Radio Controller (RC)
Supervisory Units (SU)

The control elements logical hierarchy is depicted in Fig. 169. on page 431.
The functionalities are splitted on the control elements composing the control subsystem architecture.
Equipment Controller
One EC has in charge the MCF and VMMF: it provides resources (physical interfaces and protocol
stack) required for the communication between NE and the management systems (OS and ECT),
it performs all the control and management functions of the virtual machine (info model).
No protection of this control element is performed. The EC is physically located aboard the System
Controller board.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Radio Controller
One RC has in charge the PMMF/E: it provides the resources to support the control and management
functions related to the real physical machine.
No protection of this control element is performed. The RC is physically located aboard the System
Controller board.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
430 / 542

52.3 Equipment Control Subsystem
Supervisory Units

The SUs have in charge the PMMF/U and the AF. This function requires a real time processing of
the data coming from the ASICs. The SU on board of each unit has the aim to provide an uniform
interface towards the RC avoiding a RC dependency from the HW where the SUs are
accommodated. One SU is accommodated in each unit.
OS
QB3
ECT
F
EC
ISSB
RC
System Controller
CAN
Rem
Inv
Local
uP
SU
Rem
Inv
Local
uP
SU
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 169. LHR control subsystem architecture
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
431 / 542
A set of (serial and parallel) interfaces are defined as part of the control subsystem to support the
communication task.
They can be classified as system internal or external interfaces.
All the communication links used by the different processing functions (RC and EC) to exchange data each
other or to read/write data from/to the controlled objects (ASICs or other devices on board the different
cards in the equipment) are defined as internal interfaces.
External interfaces are defined as the communication links provided by the control subsystem towards
external devices used for Operation and Maintenance functions or system debug activities.
All the interfaces are reported in Fig. 170. with the association of the units supporting these interfaces.
EC
ISSB
RC
SC
CAN
Inv.
Mem.
Inv.
Mem.
RRA
uP
SW
uP
Inv.
Mem.
SPI
SERV
Inv.
Mem.
uP
MOD
uP
SPI
SPI
SW
ASIC
ASIC
RRAn
SERV
RT
uP
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ASIC
MODn
Inv.
Mem.
RTn
Fig. 170. LHR communication interfaces
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
432 / 542

52.3.1.1.3 Communication interfaces
External Interfaces
The control subsystem provides the following external communication interfaces:
QB3 interface
F interface
Qecc interface
DBG interface
HK/RA interface
QAUX interface
All the above interfaces are supported, at the NE level, by the EC processor, as part of its MCF and
VMMF.
The QB, F, Qecc, Qaux interfaces are available as communication links between the NE
and external control equipments, as required by the TMN environment.
The QB3 protocol stack requires a 10BASE2 (or 10BASET) physical layer and IEEE 802.2 / 802.3
for the data link layer. Through this interface the NE is connected to a LAN for message exchange
with the OS station.
The F interface is a local communication port provided to connect the NE to a local Craft Terminal
station (PC or WS); this interface is implemented as a low speed RS232 port (bit rate is 38,4 Kbit/s
max). Remote CT functionality is performed by routing CT messages to DCCs and viceversa.
The Qecc interface is defined as a TMN related communication interface based on the use of the
Embedded Communication Channels, available in the SOH portion of the SDH frame, as physical
layer. Through the Qecc interface the NE can exchange management messages with a remote OS
(or Craft Terminal) station.
Qecc interface is implemented as a TDM serial link between the EC function and the ASICs on board
of port units. The TDM channel is terminated by the MHDLC, providing for the selection of the
channels to terminate and performing the standard HDLC functions. This interface uses the LAPD
(ITUT Q.921) as data link layer protocol, this protocol is performed by the MCF inside the EC
function.
The Qaux interface is provided as an additional TMN communication interface for message
exchange between the NE and a remote OS station, based on the use of a 2 Mbit/s proprietary
channel.
The DBG interface is a proprietary interface available for software debug activities. A local
communication port for debug is required for each processor (EC and RC) on board the System
Controller. The local debug ports are a low speed RS232 UART based interface, available for VT100
or equivalent debug console.
An equipment network interface for debug activities should be provided as well, implemented as a
10BASE2 Ethernet channel. The EC function should provide a router function between this port and
the internal ISSB bus to allow the use of this port for debugging of RC processor too.
A set of traditional parallel I/O interfaces for local signaling of alarm presence, such as rack lamps,
front panel LEDs and so on are provided by the EC processor.
Internal Interfaces
The control subsystem provides the following internal communication interfaces:
ISSB (Intra Shelf Serial Bus) interface
CAN interface
SPI interface
The ISSB (Intra Shelf Serial Bus) interface is basically an equipmentinternal Local Area Network
for communications among the different microprocessors in the same shelf: the EC processor and
the RC processor and other possible processors. It is a multimaster HDLCbased backplane serial
bus.
The CAN interface allows to connect the RC processor to the microprocessor on board the units.
It is a serial broadcast bus, each node connected to the bus receives all the messages sent by the
other ones. A local filtering mechanism on each node permit to manage only the messages related
to the node. The maximum speed is 1 Mbit/s up to 40 meters length.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
433 / 542
The main characteristics of the WMSN control subsystem architecture are the following (see
Fig. 171. herebelow):
LHR and ADM equipments (1650SMC) control architecture reuse

This means that from the management system point of view this equipment is seen as two different
network elements (both of them with an own address). In this way the LHR and ADM hardware control
architecture are reused without any modification, allowing to preserve the independence of the
software developments of the ADM and radio parts.
Only one F and QB3 interface

The F and QB3 interfaces are present on the ADM part. The radio part sees the TMN information
by means of Qecc interfaces. RECT application is used to manage both the ADM part (directly
connected) and the radio part (via Qecc).
RECT
QB3
QECC
ISSB
EC
SC
OS
ISSB
EC
ADM Controller
RC
System Controller (radio)
SPI
ISPB
Rem
Inv
ASIC
Unit
ADM part
CAN
Rem
Inv
Unit
ASIC
Rem
Inv
Local
uP
Unit
Rem
Inv
Local
uP
Unit
RADIO part
Legend :
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
EC : Equipment Controller (MCF, SEMF: Virtual Machine)

RC : Radio Controller (SEMF: Physical Machine)
SC : Shelf Controller (SEMF: Physical Machine)
ISSB : Intra Shelf Serial Bus
SPI : Serial Peripheral & Inventory
CAN : Controller Area Network bus
ISPB : Intra Shelf Parallel Bus
Fig. 171. WMSN control subsystem architecture
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
434 / 542

52.3.1.2 WMSN control subsystem architecture
52.3.2 System Controller unit description

The Equipment System Controller (ESC) unit is made with two boards: the mother board and the subunit
ESCON.
The block diagram of Fig. 172. is relevant to the whole unit (mother board and the subunit ESCON).
The subunit ESCON performs the main functions:
Equipment controller
Radio controller
DCCR management
Remote Inventory management
Station alarms management
Summarizing alarms management
Housekeeping alarms management
The mother board performs the following main functions:
DCCR Mux /demux

Alarm expansion
I/0 Housekeeping /Station alarms/ Summarizing alarms with relays to Access area subrack
Management of CANBUSes of baseband shelf and RT shelf
Management of parallel missing card alarms
Drivers and connectors for Equipment controller and Radio controller I/O circuits
Management of Power Supply and Battery alarms
ANDOR function
Routering of SPRI register with a dedicate microcontroller.
On the board there is an 8bits microcontroller, to convert the bus SPI of ESCON into CAN 0 BBBUS,
Can 1 BBBus and CanRT bus.
[1]
Equipment Controller and Radio Controller
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The functions of Equipment Controller and Radio Controller are described in para.52.3.1 on page
430.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
435 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
SERVICE WEST and HST DRIVER not present in current release
Fig. 172. System Controller block diagram
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
436 / 542
Resistive
Load
Resistive
Load
CAN0 BB
SERVICE
SERVICE Extension
HST
HKHK
DRIVER
WEST
CAN 1 Download FPGA
CH0CH1 CH1CH2 CH2CH3CH3 CH4CH4 CH5CH5CH6CH6CH7CH7 CH8CH8CH9CH9
Resistive
Load
MD2MD2MD3 MD3
MD4MD4MD5MD5MD6MD6
MD7 MD7MD8MD8MD9MD9
MD0MD1MD1
Resistive
Load
RTX1RTX1
RTX2RTX2
RTX3RTX3
RTX4RTX4
RTX5RTX5
RTX6RTX6
RTX7RTX7
RTX8RTX8
RTX9RTX9
RTX0
Resistive
Load
SPI
CAN0 BB
CAN RT
EC
EN
HC12
Router
EXP.
ALARM
SPI
Local
bus
FPGA
MPC860
FPGA
SPIL
SPRI
ISS
B
Remote
Inventory BB
Power Supply
and
Battery filter
Card Missing
and RT Power
Supply Alarms
UART
P I O/HK
QB3 (10base T
and Debug_N
or EC debug local)
QB3 (10base 2)

HC12
Can 0 Can 1
Control. Control.
FPGA
RC
EN
MPC860
CAN0 BB
CAN 0 BB
and
RC local
debug
ocal
[2]
DCCR Management

The System controller manages the DCCR at line side and radio side.
In order to connect DCCR to the Controller, the FPGA inside ESCON board requires a particular
bidirectional link working at 6.48 Mhz.
In order to avoid slips on dropped DCCR byte, due to different frequency between the clock extracted
from STMj (j=0 to 9) and the local timing used to resynchronize the resulting DCCR subframe, a
stuffing mechanism is realized.
The DCC mapping and interleaving is described in Tab. 65. on page 408.
An EPLD performs three bidirectional links in order to insert/extract the DCCR line side of the all
RRA units, and DCCR radio side from/to Service unit:
[3]
On the first link 6.48.48 Mbit/s are mapped :
DCCR 192Kbit from/to Service units
DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRASTB0
DCCR 192Kbit from/to RRA 1
On the second link 6.48 Mbit/s are mapped:
On the third link 6.48 Mbit/s are mapped:
Summarizing/Housekeeping Alarms
The ESCON subunit manages 9 Input and 14 Output signal alarms. By means of the alarms
expansion circuit located on ESC mother board, there are 22 Input and 56 Output signals available.
In 9600LSY application the following number of alarms are managed:
22 HK input
10 HK output
46 output alarms
In order to reduce the power consumption, all relays are switched off in normal conditions; the
presence of active alarms corresponds always to closed contact with a common wire available to
the Customer.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The electrical characteristics of relays are: (V is voltage between the warm wire and the common
one).
open contact 72 V 2V
closed contact 2 V 0V
ED
I 0.2mA
I 50mA
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
437 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
RRA 0,1,2,8,9
Ck + SY from
4
4
4
4
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRASTBY0 )
IN 912
IN 68
IN 14
ESCONX
LogicLogic
Dip Switch
Ck + SY from
Sby channel
Ck + Sy
from
MUXMUX
main channel
Ck + SY from
main
channel
Sy
from
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA 7)
EPLD
Daina
EPLD
6.48
Mbit
OUT 2
OUT 1
OUT 14
CK 38.88 + SY
Stuffing
Stuffing
el.store
el.store
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA8 )
DCCR mappingDCCR mapping
DCCR extractingDCCR extracting
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA9)
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA6
Stuffing
Stuffing
el.store
el.store
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA4 )
DCCR mappingDCCR mapping
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA5)
DCCR extractingDCCR extracting
DCCR TO/FROM RST (RRA 3)
DCCR TO/FROM
DCCR TO/FROM
Lamp OUT 11
alarms OUT 12
OUT 13
Stuffing
el.store
DCCR mapping
RST (RRA1)
DCCR extracting
DCCR extracting
RST (RRA2
SEL
158
SEL
158
SEL
158
DCCR TO/FROM RFCOH ( Service)
PWANDOR
GA 912
GA 21,22
ORALIM
HK 58
HK 1720
HK 1316
HK 14
Link 1
Link 2
955.203.292 Q
Link 1
Link 3
ED
Link 2
Link 3
Fig. 173. DCCR and summarizing/housekeeping alarms management block diagram
05
438 / 542
E
N
SPI
Can 0
Can 1
Can 0
Can 1
Control. Control.
FPGA
GA1 FREE
GA2 TUP
Vcc
0
1SEL
2
138
OE
G
CK
374
OE
F
CK
374
OE
E
CK
374
OE
D
CK
374
OE
C
CK
374
OE
B
CK
374
OE
A
CK
374
GA41
GA42
GA43
GA44
GA45
GA46
GA47
GA48
GA33
GA34
GA35
GA36
GA37
GA38
GA39
GA40
HK5
HK6
HK7
HK8
HK9
HK10
GA31
GA32
GA23
GA24
GA25
GA26
GA27
GA28
GA29
GA30
GA15
GA16
GA17
GA18
GA19
GA20
GA21
GA22
GA7
GA8
GA9
GA10
GA11
GA12
GA13
GA14
HK1
HK2
HK3
HK4
GA3
GA4
GA5
GA6
TUP
INT
Service Battery
From Battery
Filter 1 and 2
Alarms battery
Rack lamps
to M184
connector of
M184
toarea
Access
(BB shelf)
ANDOR

[4]
Remote Inventory management


The Remote Inventory function permits the operator to retrieve information about any card or module
present on the equipment.
The available information, written in a 64x16 bit EEPROM on board (RI device), is: construction date,
code number, maker name, Cardtype, etc. (see details in the Operator Handbook).
The Remote Inventory function is present in all the cards.
The RI can be also present on some submodules assembled on the board (such as optical modules,
microcontrollers and so on).
The relevant data are transported by the CAN bus and are managed by the System Controller unit,
which, besides the information retrieved from the units RI device, add the slot identifier (ID)
information.
The System Controller unit can also manage the visual indications of the board (LEDs) and some
I/O parallel commands/contacts/alarms that can eventually be transferred by means of the CAN bus.
The agent microcontroller on each unit manages the Remote Inventory, with the exception of Power
Supply Units (PSU) and Battery Filter units (PSF), that are supported by ESC Agent.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Remote Inventory of units submodules (CANCCOMB modules, Additional TPHDEV and
Optical interface) are supported by the respective Agent Unit.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
439 / 542
SERVICE
WEST
SERVICE
Add.
IfTPH
unit
MD1
HST
DRIVER
additional
TPHDEV
Add.
IfTPH
unit
MD0
Extension
HK
MD2
MD3
MD4
MD5
MD6
MD7
MD8
MD9
CANCCOMB
MODULES
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit If
IF unit
unit
If
CH0
Optical
If unit
interface
CH1
Optical
If unit
interface

CAN 0 BB
CH2
Optical
If unit
interface
CH3
Optical
If unit
interface
CH4
Optical
If unit
interface
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
Optical
If unit
interface
Optical
If unit
interface
Optical
If unit
interface
Optical
If unit
interface
Optical
If unit
interface
OPTICAL
MODULES
HC12
ESC
Agent
N.12 Enable
PSU0
PSU1
PSU2
PSU3
PSU4
PSU5
PSU6
PSU7
PSU8
PSU9
ESC
Unit
Battery filter 1
Battery filter 2
CAN 0 BB
Remoty inventory
Bus
Enable
Clock
Data input
Data output
EEPROM
+3.3V
gnd
Missing
SERVICE WEST and HST DRIVER not present in current release
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 174. Remote inventory subsystem architecture
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
440 / 542
52.3.3 Flash Card description

The FLASH CARD contains, after the system SW loading and system configuration carried out through
the Craft Terminal:
a)
the whole Equipment software programs (susceptible to be downloaded toward the Supervisory
Units);
b)
the software images of FPGAs housed in the following boards: SYSCO, SMA subunit of SERVICE,
RRA (CHANNEL and STANDBY) and MODEM, susceptible to be downloaded toward them; refer
to para.47.2 on page 347 for details;
c)
the system configuration data. Such configuration data set is named MIB and can be saved as a
file in the Craft Terminal (or OS) environment, as well as can be restored in the Flash Card retrieving
this file from the Craft Terminal (or OS);
d)
the routing configuration data, that is, according to the Craft Terminal Men (N.B.):
Configuration Comm.Routing
1.
Local configuration Systems local address
2.
OS. configuration
3.
NTP server configuration
4.
Interface configuration
LAPD configuration
Ethernet configuration
5.
OSI configuration
RAP configuration
MESA configuration
6.
IP configuration
IP Static Routing configuration

OSPF AREA configuration
IP Address configuration of point to point configuration
7.
Tunneling configuration
OSI over IP
IP over OSI
All those listed parameter are NOT stored into the MIB file because considered unique to a
particular system in a network and are NOT meant to be reproduced on other systems in the
same network because will cause conflicts in the supervision network centre.
This list is merely for general information only. Refer to the C.T. Operators Handbook for a more
precise list.
N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The presence of the FLASH CARD as individual part simplifies the maintenance procedure in case of
failure of the System Controller, as explained in para.47.3.6 on page 354 and para.47.3.7 on page 356.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
441 / 542
52.3.4 Additional Housekeeping unit description
The Additional Housekeeping (HKDEV) is an optional unit.

By its use, other 18 HK Inputs become available, besides those already available with the System
Controller unit.
Fig. 175. herebelow shows the unit block diagram.
(M1) is the connector for getting the 18 HK Inputs (for pinout see Tab. 45. on page 241).
The connector (M2) is linked by cable to connector (M179) of Baseband shelf (see Fig. 109. on page 206).
By this cable the unit:
receives power supply

is connected to the System Controller unit by CAN 0 BB bus
sends the Card Fail and Card Missing signals to the System Controller
A red led on the front indicates the failure of Additional Housekeeping unit
M1
18 Housekeeping
Inputs
CEPT
INTERFACE
SUBD 25 pins
female
3.45 V
5.3 V
M2
SUBD 9 pins
male
Remote
Inventory
HC12
mP
HKDEV Card Fail

led
HKDEV Card Missing

Can 0 BB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 175. Additional Housekeeping block diagram
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
442 / 542

ED
955.203.292 Q
STM1
F
QB3
PIO
STM1
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
O/E
DCCR
RRA
RST
SRS
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
Ktx
FPGA
IF to TR
SERVICE
MOD
0
IF 0 to TR0
DSI,MC,ATPC
Protected second WST

use
with Modem/ RRA
Protected
1x2Mb/s
in future release
EOW
64 Kb
HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/s from Access Area

NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s from Service
RRA Stby
MOD
The RFCOH and one WST can be protected

only two channels
HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/s from Access Area

NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s from Service
9
Switch logic
N+1
RFCOH
5.1 Mb
5.1 Mb
From RRA 2/8/9
5.1 Mb
RFCOH
Select by ECT
MUX
5.1 Mb
DCCR
RST
SC
DCCR
O/E
FPGA
Select by ECT

52.4 Baseband subsystem
52.4.1 Interconnection general block diagrams
The following Fig. 176. and Fig. 177. show the unit interconnection block diagram respectively for Tx
side and Rx side configurations, with regard to the transmitted/received signals and the internal signal
and message exchange.
Fig. 176. Block diagram of Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Tx side
05
443 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 177. Block diagram of Up to 7+1 Terminal configuration Rx side
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
444 / 542
DEM
Protected
1x2Mb/s
IF from TR
DSI,MC,ATPC
64 Kb
EOW
Protected second WST

Modem/ RRA
in future release
DEM
SERVICE
The RFCOH and one WST can be protected

only two channels
IF from TR
Select by
ECT
Select by
ECT
FPGA
RFCOH
5.1 Mb
Switch logic
N+1
5.1 Mb
RFCOH
FPGA
RST
RST
DCCR
O/E
DCCR
SC
O/E
PIO
QB3
STM1
STM1

NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s to Service
HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/sto Access Area
RRA Stby
MATRIX
5.1 Mb
DCCR
5.1 Mb
RRA 2/8/9
APSE
RRA
HDB3 unprotected 1x2Mb/sto Access Area

NRZ Protected 1x2Mb/s to Service
52.4.2 N+1 switch logic

Please refer to para.12.2.3 on page 39 for an introduction to N+1 protection architecture.

[1]
Block diagrams
Following Fig. 178. and Fig. 179. show the switch logic block diagram respectively at Tx and Rx
section.
DL1_Tx
IN CH 1
Delay
0255 bit
LRST1
to Sciaron
IN CH 2
to Sciaron
IN CH 4
to Sciaron
IN CH 6
Delay
0255 bit
Delay
0255 bit
to Sciaron
IN CH 7
Delay
0255 bit
to Sciaron
IN CH 8
to Sciaron
IN CH 9
Delay
0255 bit
Delay
0255 bit
to Sciaron
DLA_Tx
RFCOH3
MOD 3
TX 3
RFCOH4
MOD 4
TX 4
RFCOH5
MOD 5
TX 5
RFCOH6
MOD 6
TX 6
RFCOH7
MOD 7
TX 7
RFCOH8
MOD 8
TX 8
RFCOH9
MOD 9
TX 9
RFCOHA
MOD A
TX A
N.U.
DL8_Tx
Delay
0255 bit
N.U.
DL9_Tx
Delay
0255 bit
LRST9
TX 2
N.U.
DL7_Tx
Delay
0255 bit
LRST8
MOD 2
N.U.
DL6_Tx
Delay
0255 bit
LRST7
RFCOH2
N.U.
DL5_Tx
Delay
0255 bit
LRST6
TX 1
N.U.
DL4_Tx
Delay
0255 bit
LRST5
MOD 1
N.U.
DL3_Tx
Delay
0255 bit
LRST4
to Sciaron
IN CH 5
Delay
0255 bit
Delay
0255 bit
LRST3
RFCOH1
N.U.
DL2_Tx
Delay
0255 bit
LRST2
to Sciaron
IN CH 3
Delay
0255 bit
Delay
0255 bit
N.U.
Sciaron
Delay
0255 bit
N.U.
IN OCC
Delay
0255 bit
LRSTA
Delay
0255 bit
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.U.
Fig. 178. Switch logic at Tx section
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
445 / 542
LRST1
M.E.
Delay 0/255
M.E.
Delay 0/255
da DTxRx
RFCOH1
DEM 1
RX 1
RFCOH2
DEM 2
RX 2
RFCOH3
DEM 3
RX 3

KR_SWC 1
OUT CH 1
KR_SWC 2
OUT CH 2
LRST2
M.E.
Delay 0/255
M.E.
Delay 0/255
da DTxRx
KR_SWC 3
OUT CH 3
LRST3
M.E.
Delay 0/255
M.E.
Delay 0/255
da DTxRx
KRA_SWC 4
OUT CH 4
LRST4
M.E.
Delay 0/255
M.E.
Delay 0/255
da DTxRx
RX 4
RFCOH4
DEM 4
RFCOH5
DEM 5
RX 5
RFCOH6
DEM 6
RX 6
RFCOH7
DEM 7
RX 7
RFCOH8
DEM 8
RX 8
RFCOH9
DEM 9
RX 9
KR_SWC 5
OUT CH 5
LRST5
M.E.
Delay 0/255
M.E.
Delay 0/255
da DTxRx
KR_SWC 6
OUT CH 6
LRST6
M.E.
Delay 0/255
M.E.
Delay 0/255
da DTxRx
KR_SWC 7
OUT CH 7
LRST7
M.E.
Delay 0/255
M.E.
Delay 0/255
da DTxRx
KR_SWC 8
OUT CH 8
LRST8
M.E.
Delay 0/255
M.E.
Delay 0/255
da DTxRx
KR_SWC 9
OUT CH 9
LRST9
M.E.
Delay 0/255
M.E.
Delay 0/255
da DTxRx
KR (09)
Allarmi
SWC
Sciaron
OUT OCC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
LRSTA
M.E.
Delay 0/255
M.E.
Delay 0/255
RFCOHA
DEM A
RX A
Fig. 179. Switch logic at Rx section
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
446 / 542
[2]
Switching criteria

Switching criteria are the pieces of information that the switching logic is able to get, reading them
directly from channels or demodulators, and that describe the status and functionality of the channel
itself and the signal processed by them.
These criteria (for MAIN and SPARE) are:
EW
criterion arising for line error rate= 106>EW>109 . It is generated by the

local demodulator and/or by remote regenerators by which it is
retransmitted
LBER
criterion arising for line error rate= 103>LBER>106. It is generated by the

local demodulator and/or by remote regenerators by which it is
retransmitted
HBER
criterion arising for line error rate >103 originated by Demodulator
DEM Pfail
criterion arising for line error rate 103
DEM Card fail
criterion arising for internal failure of DEM unit
MODEM Missing
MODEM unit missing
RRA Fail_i
criterion arising for LOF_R (Loss Of Frame at radio side) and LOS from
DEMi
RRA Fail STBY
criterion arising for

DEMstandby
RRA Card fail
criterion arising for internal failure of RRA unit
RRA Missing
RRA unit missing (alarm that inhibits the switch)
LOS_STBYn
loss of received signal. Detected by RRA, Rx side (via StBy from Spare)
MOD Card fail
criterion arising for internal failure of MOD unit
LOS_M
loss of received signal. Detected by MOD on signal from RFCOH
LOS_RRAn
loss of received signal. Detected by DTxRx on signal incoming from CHTn
OCC_KO
Only for 1:N configuration (N+1 & Occasional).

OR of TIMA + LOFA_L + LOSA_L (criterion used to switch the reference
signal on the spare)
LOF_R (Loss Of Frame at radio side) and from
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Following Fig. 180. and Fig. 181. show alarm detection respectively at Rx and Tx section.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
447 / 542
RRA1 Card fail
KR_1
LOS1_R
LRST1
OUT CH 1
M.E.

DEM1 Card fail

Delay 0/256
RX n
DEM n
M.E.
RFCOH
LOF1_R
LOS1_R
EW1
Delay
0/256
LBER1
RRA1 fail
HBER1
LOS_STBY
DEM1 P fail
RRA n
KR (09)
Alarms
SWC
Sciaron
RRA
Card fail
LOS
_R
DEM
OUT OCC
LRSTA
M.E.
Delay 0/256
M.E.
Delay 0/256
RFCOHA
LOF
KRRA_RIS
RRA SPARE
RRA
DEM 0
A
fail
_R
Card fail
RX 0
EW A
LBER A
HBER A
DEM A P fail
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 180. Rx section alarms
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
448 / 542
INIG1

CRC1 fail
ENTONI
RRA n
TIM1
LOS1_L
LOF1_L
O/E Card fail

LOF1_L
TIM1
IN CH 1
MOD1 Card fail
Delay
0 255 bit
LRST1
RFCOHn
TX n
MOD n
Delay
0 255 bit
LOS1_L
LOS1_M
A Sciaron
SCIARON
LOS_RRA 9
LOS_RIF
LOS_RRA 8
LOS_RRA 7
LOS_RRA 6
LOS_RRA 5
LOS_RRA 4
LOS_RRA 3
LOS_RRA 2
LOS_RRA 1
K_OP_n
LOS_RRA 1
INIG 1
OCC_KO
LOS_RRA 2
INIG 2
INIBER
LOS_RRA 8
INIG 8
2
1
9
Delay
0 255 bit
K_OP (0 9)
LOS_RRA 9
INIG 9
MODA Card fail

TIM
IN OCC
LOF A _L
Delay
0 255 bit
LRSTA
RFCOHA
MOD 0
TX 0
Delay
0 255 bit
LOS A _L
OCC_KO
LOSA_M
LOF A _ L
TIM A
LOS A _ L
O/E Card fail
RRA SPARE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 181. Tx section alarms
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
449 / 542

Forwarding of switching criteria to switching logic is carried out through a serial frame and according
to the block diagram of Fig. 182. herebelow.
Modem 1
DATA
DATA
SYNCH
MD C.F.
CK
MD Missing
RRA 1
RRA 1 Missing
Modem n
DATA
DATA
MD C.F.
SYNCH
CK
MD Missing
RRA n
RRA n Missing
Modem
Stby
DATA
DATA
SYNCH
MD C.F.
CK
MD Missing
RRA Stby
RRA Stby Missing

RRA n Missing
RRA 1 Missing
ENTONI
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 182. Switching criteria forwarding to switching logic
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
450 / 542
[3]
Operators control at Rx side

Definitions (see also Fig. 178. on page 445):
Ch n = MAIN channel (RXn)
Ch 0 = SPARE channel (RX0)

On protection switch the control by operator (O.C.) is envisaged through commands Lockout,
Force_Switch and Manual_switch via Craft Terminal:
Command
Priority
Lockout
Force_switch
Automatic_switch
Manual_switch
Command Lockout is connected to the status of channel MAIN efficient, therefore this is put in
service independently from the alarm criteria status.
Command Force_Switch is connected to the status of channel SPARE efficient, therefore this is put
in service independently from the alarm criteria status.
Command Manual_switch forwarded to SPARE channel puts channel 0 in service.
N.B.:
Command Lockout has greatest priority with respect to command Force_switch; therefore it
forces Ch n in service even if command Force_Switch is active for it and/or any switching criteria
are present.
Command Force_Switch has greatest priority with respect to automatic operation; therefore
it forces Ch 0 in service, independently from any active alarms, through a nonhitless switching.
Command Manual_switch has low priority and is executed only if there are no alarms on the
channel to be put in service.
Commands Lockout and Force_Switch activates ABN condition. Command Manual_switch
does not activate ABN condition.
[4]
Displays for Operator (Rx section)

In N+1 configuration, with reference to Fig. 138. on page 338:
[5]
execution of command Lockout causes display (1) to show n and led (2) to turn on
execution of command Force_Switch causes display (1) to show 0 and led (2) to turn on
Operators control at Tx side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Not envisaged
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
451 / 542
52.4.3 1:N switch logic
[1]
Block diagrams
As point [1] on page 445
[2]
Switching criteria
As point [2] on page 447
[3]
Operators control at Rx side

On received channels the control by operator (O.C.) is envisaged through commands Lockout,
Force_Switch and Manual_switch via Craft Terminal:
Command
Lockout
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Force_switch
ED
Prio
rity
Description
Command connected to the status of channel EFFICIENT, therefore

the channel put in lockout is NOT protected by spare.
Furthermore, if lockout command is sent to a channel presently spare,
this is immediately unswitched with no alignment check by the following
modality: when Rx section of switch logic receives the lockout
command on channel n it can perform two actions:
1 ) if channel n is presently not protected, the system configuration
changes dynamically excluding such channel n from the list of
protectable channels.
2 ) if channel n is presently protected, the protection is removed,
after which action 1 ) is performed.
The dynamic configuration will be updated as soon as the lockout
condition will be removed.
Command connected to the status of channel FAULTY, therefore the

channel n for which force_switch command is sent, is protected by the
spare, whichever the alarm status of the spare may be.
Command force_switch is carried out as follows: when Rx section of
logic SWC_N1LH receives the force_switch command on channel n
it can perform two actions:
1 ) if channel n is presently not protected, switching channel n to
spare is executed, sending at the same time to the Tx section of
the remote station the command for switching to spare the same
channel n.
2 ) if channel n is presently protected, no other measures are taken.
The force_switch command is not executed if:
the switching logic is frozen
the DSI message exchange with the remote station is unavailable
channel n is inhibited at Tx side.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
452 / 542

Please refer to para.12.2.3 on page 39 for an introduction to 1:N protection architecture.

Command
Prio
rity
Automatic_switch
Normal working condition. No manual operations active.
Command manual_switch is carried out as follows: when Rx section of

logic SWC_N1LH receives the manual_switch command on channel
n it can perform two actions:
1 ) if channel n is presently not protected, switching channel n to
spare is executed, sending at the same time to the Tx section of
the remote station the command for switching to spare the same
channel n.
2 ) if channel n is presently protected, no other measures are taken.
The manual_switch command is not executed if:
the switching logic is frozen
the DSI message exchange with the remote station is unavailable
Manual_switch
[4]
Description
Displays for Operator

In 1:n configuration, with reference to Fig. 138. on page 338:
[5]
display (1) can show:
the No n of the protected channel at Rx side
or 0 when spare is free and/or is used by occasional traffic stream
led (2) can be:
on, to indicate that a manual operation is active (Lockout, Force_switch or Manual_switch)
off, to indicate that automatic switch is operative (absence of manual operations)
display (3) can show:
the No n of the protected channel at Tx side
or 0 when spare is free and/or is used by occasional traffic stream
Operators control at Tx side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Not envisaged
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
453 / 542
52.4.4 RRACHANNEL STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST description

General
RRACHANNEL performs the following main functions:
Electrical CMI NRZ and NRZCMI conversion
RSOH line side Extraction /Insertion from/to Service Unit
DCCR line side Extraction /Insertion from/to Service Unit
RFCOH radio side Extraction/insertion from/to Service Unit
DCCR radio side Extraction /Insertion from/to Service Unit
Unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction
Hitless Switch
Serial BUS (Insertion on parallel wires of Modem/ RRA alarms)

On the front of the board the following interfaces are available:
the STM1 electrical interface (it is fixed on the board and cannot be extracted)
one red led to indicate the card failure

On the RRACHANNEL unit it is possible to insert the optical interface module (refer to para.52.4.6
on page 459 for its description).
[2]
RRACHANNEL description
An electrical CMI /NRZ conversion is performed with LOS input alarm generation in Tx section. In
the receive section the complementary operations are performed.
The RRA uses two ASICs:
one implementing:
the Input/Output RRA Section (Regeneration Termination Adaptation according to G783)
and the Hitless switch, performing the RPS (Radio Protection Switching) function
the other, implementing:
the RFCOH Insertion/Extraction function
and the unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction function.

All these functions are bidirectional.
Delay cells, placed in TX sides, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the
two signals.
The delay can be set with one bit step in the range 0 to 256 bits.
Delay cells, placed in RX side, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the
two signals. The static delay equalization is obtained by means an automatic procedure to facilitate
the approach during field installation.
At RX side, whenever both paths are aligned, the phase comparator generates an OK command,
indicating that a switching operation can be performed.
The Switch command comes from the logic switch placed on the service board.
Inside the ASIC, the loopback connections are present, as described in para.46.5.3 on page 342.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) is managed by the ASIC.

The alarms, commands, and every other information regarding the communication with System
controller are organized in the registers of SPI and converted by Microcontroller in Can 0 BBBus.
The FPGA download uses Can 1 BB bus.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
454 / 542

[1]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
955.203.292 Q
LOS
input
Equalizer
CMI/NRZ
SEL
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
Can 1BB
can
TX
TX
TCXO
RX
RX
DCCR
KRn
ASIC
Pat
Ok
KAIS
12
NRZ/HDB3
From
RRASTBY
Parallel alarms from Modem
TX
RFCOH
TX
Parallel wire alarms
WST1 LOS
RRA MISSING
NRZ
To modem
RRA ALARMS
Red led
NRZ 2Mbit WST

protected.
From/to Service
From Modem
NRZ
CK
Loopback
only local
LOS_ R
RFCOH
vcxo
38.88 Mhz
38.88
Mhz
WST1 FAIL
CK
NRZ
only local
Loopback
RX
From Modem
RFCOH RFCOH
2 * 2Mbit WST
HDB3 1 * 2Mbit WST

unprotected.
RRA ALARMS
Kofin
38.88 Mhz
vcxo
PhasePhase
comparcompar
vcxo
To modem
RFCOH
Vcxo A
RFCOH
2 * 2Mbit WST
Switch
Delay
256 bits
0256
ElasticElastic
memmem
. Delay
Delay
32bit 32bit 256
00256
Elastic Elastic
mem mem
.
32bit 32bit
Ok Bit
To
RRASTBY
Parallel
Serial Fast alarms
155.520
Mhz
TX
RST
RST
Serial Bus To Service
Can 0BB
RSOH
SEL
TX
DEMUX
DEMUX
A.L.S
68HC012
SPI
RXRX
RSTRST
TCXO
38.800
Mhz
loopback
loopback
G.A CERBERO
NRZ+CK
MUXMUX
NRZ+CK
TX fail /degrade
(only optical)version
Optical
Interface
Signal input
Switch Optical
Missing
Optical
STM1
Electrical
STM1
DCCR RSOH

delay
ED
delay
Fig. 183. RRACHANNEL block diagram
05
455 / 542
52.4.5 RRASTANDBY STM1+1WST and STM0+0WST description

[1]
General
The RRASTBY unit performs the following main functions:
Electrical CMI NRZ and NRZCMI conversion
RSOH and DCCR line side Extraction /Insertion to/ from Service Board
RFCOH radio side Insertion/Extraction to/from Service Board
TX/RX distributor
Switch of the reference signal
Unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction

In N+0 configuration there are two possibilities:
1)
2)
RRASTBY unit forced to be used as RRA unit

Use RRA unit instead of RRASTBY
the STM1 electrical interface (it is fixed on the board and cannot be extracted)
a onedigit display to indicate the number of the channel protected (1... 9)
one red led to indicate the card failure

On the RRACHANNEL unit it is possible to insert the optical interface module (refer to para.52.4.6
on page 459 for its description).
[2]
RRASTBY description
An electrical CMI /NRZ conversion is performed with LOS input alarm generation. In the receive
section the complementary operations are performed.
The RRASTBY uses an ASIC and a FPGA:
one implementing:
the Input/Output RRA Section (Regeneration Termination Adaptation according to G783)
and the Hitless switch, performing the RPS (Radio Protection Switching) function
the other, implementing:
the RFCOH Insertion/Extraction function
and the unprotected 1*2Mbit WST Insertion/Extraction function.

All these functions are bidirectional.
Delay cells, placed in TX sides, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the
two signals.
The delay can be set with one bit step in the range 0 to 256 bits.
Delay cells, placed in RX side, compensate the static delays resulting from the different paths of the
two signals. The static delay equalization is obtained by means an automatic procedure to facilitate
the approach during field installation.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Mux insert one of nine streams (38.88Mbit/s) from RRA 1 to RA 9.

From Switch Logic the unit receives the Keta command that selects, by MUX, the transmit channel
to be paralleled toward the standby path.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
456 / 542
At RX side the unit receives a 155 Mbit stream from RFCOH section (this signal comes from standby
demodulator) and sends it by splitter to the respective RRA1/RRA9 unit.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Inside the RRASTBY there are the loopback connections, as described in the Equipment controller
sub system chapter.
The Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS) is managed by the ASIC.
The FPGA download uses Can 1 BB bus.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
457 / 542
ED
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
can
Can 0 BB
68HC012
Can 1BB
Interface
Optical
TX fail/degrade
(only optical version)
Missing
Equalizer
CMI/NRZ
Switch
Optical
Signal I/O
SPI to ASIC & FPGA
Optical
STM1
LOS
input
Electrical
STM1
ASIC
TCXO
RX
RST
TX
Serial Fast alarmsSerial
Phase
compar
delay
Elasticmem Delay
0256
32bit
Elasticmem.
32bit
RRASTBY
ALARMS
Vcxo
A
KAIS
12
Switch
RFCOH
LOS_ R
1 * 2Mbit WST
unprotected.
RRA
MISSING
05
458 / 542

RRASTBY
ALARMS
Red led
RRA CARD fail
NRZ
CK
From modem
Loopback
only local
To modem
NRZ
FPGA
LOS_RIFn
NRZ 2Mbit WST

protected.
From/to Service
38.88
Mhz
vcxo
RX
RFCOH
1 * 2Mbit WST
TX
RFCOH
NRZ/HDB3
Delay
0256
Delay
256
0
38.88 vcxo
Mhz
SeeTable
RRASTBY
DATA ALARMS
Fast alarms
KOP
FPGA
FPGASCIARON
155.520
Mhz
TX
loopback
RX
RST
TCXO
38.800
Mhz
RSOH
RSOH
SEL
DEMUX
MUX
SPLITTER
A.L.S
NRZ+CK
NRZ+CK
SEL
DCCR
From RRA1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9
Serial BusTo Service FPGA Parallel alarms from Modem HDB3 1 * 2Mbit WST
unprotected.
To RRA1..RRA9
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 184. RRA STANDBY block diagram
52.4.6 STM1 optical module description

See Fig. 89. on page 179 (physical view) and Fig. 185. on page 459 (block diagram).
The STM1 optical module is the optical physical interface for the STM1 cards. Different types are
available according to the connector type, fibre and optical power range.
Each module contains two optical components (Tx and Rx), two level adapters, the remote inventory and
the ALSrestart pushbutton.
The RX optical component converts the 155.52 Mb/s STM1 optical signal into electrical, recoveries the
clock, detects the LOS alarm.
The TX optical component converts the electrical signal (data & clock) into optical, detects the
Laserfailure and Laserdegrade alarms. Receives the Lasershutdown command from the controller
and the ALSrestart command from a front pushbutton.
OPTICAL
INPUT
EDR
Rx Opt. Module
DATA RX
Level
ECKR
Adapter
CLOCK RX
LOS
EDT
ECT
OPTICAL
DATA TX
Level
CLOCK TX
Adapter
Tx Opt. Module
OUTPUT
Laser Fail
Laser deg.
Laser
Shutdown
ALSRestart
o
o
Remote
GND
Rinv
Inventory
TO CAN BUS
OPTICAL MODULE
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 185. STM1 optical module block diagram
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
459 / 542
52.4.7 MODEM STM1 1WST and STM0 0WST description

General
The modem performs the following main functions:
Terminal / repeater Modulator
Terminal / repeater Demodulator
XPIC / Base Band Combiner

Demodulator first IF input
Second IF input XPIC or IF diversity
Third IF input XPIC from cross polar receiver (has to be utilized when reuse and diversity are
used contemporaneously)
IF Modulator Output
The second and third IF input are associated to optional baby boards.
One red led is also present to indicate the MODEM card fail.
[2]
Modem description
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
In a single ASIC the following parts are implemented: MLC code and decoder, Mapping
32/64/128QAM (different modems are envisaged for different modulations: one for 32/64QAM. the
other for 128QAM), Digital filter, BSE, FSE, XPIC and Base Band combiner.
The main functions are described in the following, according to MODEM block diagram (see
Fig. 186. on page 463):
I/O
The input/output interface, composed by NRZ signal and CK signal, is internal interface. The
signals come from/to RRA unit / RRA STBY or DROP in repeater configuration, no external
access is available.
The input/output signal is converted in four parallel streams; because of different transmission
capacities planned, the streams have, accordingly, different rates.
MLC code error

The MLC 6,5/7 coding scheme employs a set of binary codes of decreasing Hamming distance
combined with nested signal constellations of increasing Euclidean distance. Each code selects
one of the two subsets into which the corresponding constellation level is portioned. In this way
a more efficient use of redundancy is possible, since more powerful codes protect points a low
Euclidean distance, while less powerful codes are used for points at larger Euclidean distance.
The coding scheme uses both convolutional and blocks code.
The convolutional codes are the powerful ones in the scheme, while the block codes is a simple
parity check.
The first level code/decoder convolutional is obtained by Viterbi decoder for the code 2/3
The second level code /decoder convolutional works with an other Viterbi for the code 7/8
The Third level has a Wagner decoder for code 24,23
To reduce the effects of burst errors due to the convolutional code, a suitable interleaving
technique has been implemented. The structure of the interleaving is based on the introduction
of distinct delay chains on the parallel signal stream.
The two signals, the in phase channel and the quadrature channel, after MLC code QAM
mapping they are sent at 1/T frequency to a 36 taps digital shaping filter. The two filtered signals
come out from the ASIC at 2/T frequency.
ASIC output signals are converted into analog signals by two D/A converters (10 bits) and, then,
a Butterworth filter (7 poles) filters them.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
460 / 542

[1]

BB/IF Side modulation

Two IF (140 MHz) inquadrature carriers are modulated by the two filtered signals by means
of two balanced mixers. Then, modulated carriers are summed in order to generate a 128 QAM
CROSSmodulated signal.
First IF/BB Side demodulation

First IF (140 MHz) signal (from main Transceiver) is BB converted by means of two mixers that
are controlled by a carrier recovery circuit.
Converted signal is, then, filtered by two Butterworth analog filters that have to guarantee proper
NFD for different modulation formats (poles number =9, cutoff frequency fco=0.55 0.65/T).
Two A/D converters sample filters out coming signals.
Second IF and third IF

A baby board called second IF and third IF carry out the same function of the first IF main.
Second IF is applied from diversity or cross polar signal.
When diversity and copolar are contemporaneously used, a third IF input is connected to
crosspolar main receiver.
Clock recovery
A Gardner synchronizer that controls a VCXO, which provides a sampling signal at 2/T
frequency, performs clock recovery.
Gardner algorithm is implemented in ASIC Modem
Equalizer cable for space diversity system
1IF Maim
2IF diversity
Delay 1
The delays
adjustment is
Self acting by
ECT
Delay 2
3 IF cross Main
0 Delay 3
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Every IF can be delayed a maximum 7x Ts/2 at Ts/2 step , compensate the static delays resulting
from the different paths of the two signals diversity.
An automatic procedure by ECT set the difference of the delays respective First and Second
IF.
There is not automatic procedure for delay of the third IF.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
461 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
Equalizer (FSE/DFE)
Into ASIC are implemented a synchronous equalizer (BSE Baud Spaced Equalizer), and a
Fractionally Spaced Equalizer (FSE).
FSE consists of a dual structure FIR filter and two mixers. Filtering section is 4D structured, (i.e.
it consists of four 19 taps filters), DFE consist of four 1 tap decision.
XPIC
When the frequency reuse is requested the XPIC cancellers the crosspolar interference.
On each way in dual polarization the IF signal is baseband converted, filtered and sampled
by A/D converters at 2/T frequency. Samples taken at t=KT are distinguished from those taken
at t=(KT+T/2) by XPIC S/P converters by means of 1/T frequency clock signal.
XPIC is adapted by means of error signals coming from equalizer and its central coefficient is
left spare for phase errors recovering.
XPIC output signal is sent to equalizer way adder.
XPIC way ASIC receives algorithm switch control signal and deep fading reset signal from
equalizer way ASIC.
Base band Combiner

Space diversity is based on the simultaneous reception of the transmitted signal at two vertically
separated antennas, its effectiveness depend on the fact that the correlation between the two
fields is low if the antennas are well separated.
The baseband combiner, which operates on the coherently demodulated signals is based on
the minimization if the mean square error at the decision device.
The scheme is the same of XPIC with these difference: the central coefficient is constrained,
we have one Clock recovery by a Gardner synchronizer for each IF signal. An estimation of the
power of the signal at the output of the two FSE is calculated. The clock that has the grater power
is selected Gardner algorithm is implemented in ASIC Modem
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
462 / 542

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 186. MODEM block diagram
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
463 / 542
Third IF
Second IF
DEM
loss
90
vco
90 90
2 Squelch
3 Squelch
90 90
Second IF loss
Third IF loss
Card fail,missing
and
Remote Inventory
IF
MAIN
T/2
T/2
T/2
Delay
andand
EQUAL.
DELAY
DELAY
DROPDROP
FIR QFIR Q
FIR I
ASIC
CorrCorr.
vcos
TO vcos
TO
carriercarrier
B&W
Decoder
ElasticElastic
P/S
DecisionDecision MLC
memory
SUM
gardner gardner
gardnergardner
Clock
select
T/2
interleaverinterleaver,
Elastic
Rate Rate
encoderMLCencoderMLC,
store
adapter mapper
adapter
mapper
Mir Pseudo Pseudo

random random
S/P S/P
Delay
Delay and
andEqual
Card fail,missing
and
Remote Inventory
A/DA/D
A/DA/D
A/DA/D
A/DA/D
A/D
A/D
Data/ ck
VCXO
B
140Mhz
Squelch Main
From RRA or RRASTBY

or
DROP
Los_M
VCXO A
90
XO
140Mhz
Baby boards
alarms
can
68HC12
spi
CONTROL
ALARMS, SQUELCH
Agent Modem
Mhz
VCXO C
MODEM CARD
fail
to RRA or RRASTBY
or
DROP
Data/ck
D/A
D/A
Electronic
fuses
Can 0BB
Modem Alarms
Red led
DROP MISSING
Mod
IF out
+5.3
+3.45 v

52.4.8 SERVICE and ADDITIONAL VOICE unit description

General
The Service Terminal performs the following main functions:
Insertion/Extraction and termination of RSOH bytes
Rerouting of RSOH bytes on RFCOH bytes
Protection and management of RFCOH bytes
System service channels and telephone services management
I/O service channels and telephone services
I/O DSI, ATPC, MC bytes, DCCR
Switch logic N+1, 1:N
I/O protected WST channel
Switch and SW logic for WST signals
N.B.
The RFCOH bytes and 2 x 2Mbit/s WST can be protected only on the two channels
selected by ECT from the couples shown in the following table:
Tab. 66. Channels protectable for RFCOH bytes and 2 x 2Mbit/s WST
N.B.
N+1 Terminal
2 X (4+1) WEST (N.B.)
2 X (4+1) EAST (N.B.)
0,1
0,1
9,8
0,9
0,4
9,5
1,2
1,2
8,7
8,9
3,4
6.5
1,9
1,4
8,5
Configurations not available in current release
On the front of the board are provided the following connectors and led:
Phone Jack (EOW )
Reset button
One red led that indicates engaged line
One green led that indicates free line
One red led that indicates SERVICE card fail
One display that indicates the protected Rx channel
One yellow led indicating the manual operation of switch logic N+1
Input /output 2 x 2Mbit protected WST
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
464 / 542

[1]
[2]
Service Channels
The characteristics of service channels are given in para.13.2 on page 83.

The service channels (see Fig. 187. on page 466) are managed by a FPGA able to provide on
external interfaces (programmable by ECT) the RSOH bytes from/to line side channel (channel 0 to
9) and also RFCOH bytes protected in 1+1 from RRA units.
Eight channels are be provided towards Users. In particular:
One (omnibus channels on E1 byte), one telephone jack and three analog party lines
3 x 64 kbit/s V11 or 2 x 64 kbit/s and 1 x128 kbit/s , V11 (Sw configurable for connection to 1
or 2 bytes)
3 x 64 kbit/s G703
1 x 9600 kbit/s V24/V28 Data channel
The service unit manages a TPH byte only to/from the RFCOH byte protected in 1+1 or to/from
external connection.
The desk telephone TPH, by HD selection, can be sent either into RFCOH byte or toward ADM in
format G703 (see block diagram).
E1, F1, D1D3 bytes are always accessible both at radio and line side, while a maximum of 5 bytes
line and radio side may be accessed chosen between the remaining RSOH bytes.
At radio side, the service channels (comprehensive of DCCR, monitoring channels, ATPC, DSI
bytes) are dropped/inserted in 1+1 protected mode (splitted at Tx side and switched at RX side).
The Tx service alarm (ATL RFCOH) is remotized by means of monitoring channel (with 1+1
protection) to be used with ATL and HBER remote alarms as minor switching criteria, while
demodulator alarm and HBER alarm are considered major switching criteria.
By means of a matrix function it is possible:
to address to service the lineside user interfaces RSOH bytes from different RRA and/or
RFCOH bytes (7 bytes) on RRA used for 1+1 protection;
to reroute RSOH bytes to RFCOH and viceversa.
For the detailed description of RSOH, RFCOH and DCCR management, please make reference to
para.51 on page 399 (Signal Management).
[3]
2Mbit Way side traffic

The FPGA, after HDB3/NRZ conversion, splits the 2Mbit/s asynchronous digital stream.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The two channels (N.B.) are inserted/extracted to/from a selected couple of RRA units among
the those specified in Tab. 66. on page 464. To minimize the errors during the switching
operation a make before break switch is adopted and particular care is taken in switching logic.
N.B.
ED
In this release, only one channel can be used (see Fig. 87. on page 177).
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
465 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 187. SERVICE block diagram
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
466 / 542
To M190
BB Access
Area
Out
Loudspeaker
RFSOHRX/TX
# 59
V28
NRZ
G703
RZ
COMBO
EOW
RJ11
ANA ANA
LOG LOG
I/O TPH
G703
TPHTPH
To ADM
NRZ
DCCR
192kbit
K
RR
K
RR
WST Los 1and 2
2x2 Mb/s
SERVICE
MISSING
CAN 0 BB
ALARMS,
CONTROL
CAN 1 BB
68HC012
SPI service
To /from RRA 0/1/2/8/9

Like RFCOH frame
RFCOHRX/TX # 9
RFCOHRX/TX # 2
RFCOHRX/TX # 8
RFCOHRX/TX # 1
Red led
SERVICE CARD fail

RFCOHRX/TX # 0
AIS I/O
Insertion
DUAL LINE
INTERFACE 1
M
U
X
//
D
E
M
U
X
Dip switch

Additional
DSI,ATPC,MC
MUXMUX
x Party Lines
3 x 64 kb/s 3 x 64 kb/s TPHTPH
Party
3 3xLine
1x 64 Kb/s1x 64 Kb/s
V11
NRZ
Hd
command
I/O Radio
COMBO
E1E1
DCCR
192kbit
DEMUXDEMUX
FPGA
MATRIX
MATRIX
Radio
Radio side
Rerouting
A
Rerouting
A side
FPGA
NTONI
E
MATRIX
MATRIX
NRZ, CK, 64, SYNC
I/O Line
Lineside
side
Line
Open on 1st SERVICE

unit in 4+0/4+1
E/W configuration
1x 9600Kb/s
# 04
[4]
Switch Logic N+1 and 1:N

For the implementation of N+1 and 1:N Switch Logic at system level, please refer to previous
para.52.4.2 on page 445 and para.52.4.3 on page 452.
This function performs the hitless switch, by processing the propagation alarms coming from
demodulators. The Tx and Rx functions, respectively in station A and station B of the link, must be
connected by 64 Kb/s (DSI channel, see Fig. 188. herebelow) to exchange information for Tx signal
parallel before RX switch. The 64 Kbit signal is processed in Switch logic.
Station A
Station B
SWC A
SWC A
CH 1
5,1 Mb
CH 1
5,1 Mb
DATA IN
DATA OUT
DATA IN
SERVICE
SERVICE
DATA OUT
5,1 Mb
SPARE A
5,1 Mb
SPARE A
Fig. 188. DSI channel implementation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The Switch logic N+1/1:N is carried out inside FPGA and performs the following functions (see
Fig. 182. on page 450 and Fig. 189. on page 468):
ED
gets the switching controls from the regular and standby channels
determines the weights of various channels: priorities and simulations
protects and releases the channels in N+1 configuration, using two service units in 4+1 E/W
configurations (this latter function not used in current release)
performs the lookout and incoming inhibit
manages the freezing operations
manages the manual forcing at the receive side.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
467 / 542
J=0 to 9 channel units

n=1 to 9 channel units
FPGA
Switch commands
Agent
Service
SW forcing
DSI 64 kb/s
to/from EPLD
SWITCH
LOGIC
KOP
Logic
Output
KRPS
Yellow led
Serial/Parallel
RRA fail j
Korifn
To RRA 1/9
Modem
J =0
9
Modem
J =09
DEMfailj
DemCARD fail j
Modem missing j
Los Mod j
KRRA
To RRASTBY
FAST SERIAL BUS
Mod FailJ
EWj
LBERj
HBERj
RRACARD fail j RRA and RRASTBY

RRAmissing
J=0
Los R side Dem j
n=1
LosStbyn
OK pat n
Ok bit n
K_OPMAN
Los_Rifn
RRASTBY
FROM RRAJ
K display RX
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 189. Input/output command signals of the Switch logic
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
468 / 542

The following figure shows the input/output of the switch logic:

52.5 Transceiver subsystem

52.5.1 Interconnection general block diagrams
Please refer to:
para.12.4.3.2 on page 43 for an introductive description

Tab. 23. on page 165 for the transceiver equipping rules
para.23.4 on pages 184 thru 195 for the assembly drawings and operative notes.
The transceiver operates from 4 to 13 GHz. Different P/Ns are envisaged according to the operating
frequency and the modulation (32QAM or 64/128QAM).
Each Radio Transceiver is equipped with the following modules (see Fig. 190. on page 470 for the
transceiver configuration without Rx diversity, and Fig. 191. on page 470 for the transceiver configuration
with Rx diversity):
transmit & service module

receiver & IF Rx module (main & diversity)
DC/DC converter
Local oscillators RX and TX
Fig. 192. on page 471 shows the signals exchanged among Transceiver internal modules.
For maintenance and installation purposes each Radio Transceiver unit must be considered as a unique
block.
A RI (remote inventory) identifies the unit Transceiver, the Local oscillator Tx and the Local oscillator Rx,
via software. RI is housed in the service TX.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A pin No_missing is available.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
469 / 542
+VB
GND
VB
DC/DC
CONVERTER
OL TX
RF TX
RF OUT
RI
RF MON
SERVICE TRX
IF IN
RI
P
OL RX MON
Canbus
No_missing
L.O. Sync
.
RX IN
RF RX
OL RX
RI
IF OUT
Fig. 190. Functional block diagram of Transceiver without Rx Diversity

OL TX MON
+VB
GND
VB
DC/DC
CONVERTER
OL TX
RF TX
RF OUT
RI
RF MON
SERVICE TRX
IF IN
RI
P
OL RX MON
Canbus
No_ missing
L.O. Sync
.
OL RX
RI
RF RX
RF RX
MAIN
RF RX
DIV.
IF OUT
RX IN
RF RX
IF OUT
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
RX IN
Fig. 191. Functional block diagram of Transceiver with Rx Diversity
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
470 / 542

OL TX MON
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
+V Battery
V Battery
+5V
DC/DC
RF
955.203.292 Q
IF
RX
OL
Main
MON
Main
OL
RF
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
+3.3V
+8V
+15V
12V
Alarm loss loop
Alarm low level
3 Bit dati control
4 Bit Remote inventory
Manual gain control

Manual/Auto RX command
OL+/ command
Squelch
+5V
12V
Measurement
+3.3V
+8V
+15V
12V
Squelch
Alarm loss loop
Alarm low level
3 Bit dati control
OL+/ command
Manual gain control

Manual/Auto RX command
Squelch
+5V
12V
PRX Measurement
adj +7V
+8V
4 Bit control for +7V adj

OR alarm module
MW
IF
TX & SERVICE MODULE

RF
Canbus
MON
RX
OL
Diversity
OL
Diversity
OL TX
IF
MON
Fig. 192. Signals exchanged among Transceiver internal modules
52.5.2 DC/DC converter module
DC/DC converter receives primary voltage from the shelf backpanel and supplies to Service module the
following voltages: +5V, +8V, +7Vmax (digitally adjustable from 4V to 7V). See Fig. 192.
05
471 / 542
[1]
General
Transmit and Service module here described includes the following hardware components (depicted
in Fig. 95. on page 187:
RT CONTROL
AMPLIFIER
UP CONVERTER
DELAY LINE
Fig. 193. herebelow shows the module block diagram.
IF input connectors are 75 1.0/2.3 Siemens, microwave output connectors are SMA 50. Coaxial
cable connects Tx output to branching filters. Return loss of TX output is guaranteed by dropin
isolator.
Transmit & service module performs the following functions:
management of all transceiver functions by mean of service module
IF amplification
upconversion of IF input signal to RF frequency
linear microwave amplification

+5V MW
DC/DC
+8V
+5V
Power. red
+8V
Drain fet finale

PTX meas
.
Temp
. Meas
.
+7V adj
4 Bit for 7V
Attenuator
. com
+5V
+3,3V
RXmain
+5V
12V
12V
OL TX
+8V
+5V
+3,3V
+8V
OL+/command
+15V
+15V
12V
Squelch
Remoteinventory
Manual gain control
Manual/auto
Alarm loss loop

Alarm low level
3 bit dati control
Remote. inv
+5V
RX div .
Can bus
IFblock
In IF
OL RX
+8V
+3,3V
12V
OL+/ command
Squelch
Remote inventory
IF detectorlevel
+15V
OL+/OL command
12V
Alarm loss loop
Alarm low level
3 bit dati control
Manual gain control

Manual/auto
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Remote. inv
Squelch
Fig. 193. Transmit and Service module block diagram
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
472 / 542

52.5.3 Transmit and Service module
[2]
RT CONTROL

RT control performs the following functions:

DC power distribution of the following voltages to different modules:
TX amplifier : 12V, +5V, +8V, +15V ,+7Vmax.
RX module: 12V, +5V.
OL module : 12V, +3.3V, +8V, +15V

Gain and output power of amplifying chain control
Cable losses recovering
Input IF level control
OL+/ for upconverter setting
A microprocessor controls all the functions of Transceiver, besides it holds a Remote Inventory made
with an E@PROM. Controlled functions are:
Tx module
linearization and temperature compensation of transmitted power.

warning management
protection vs overtemperature
management of BER measure
management of ATPC function with power consumption control
setting of Tx Pout .
ON/OFF by software command.
Selection of LO+ or LO condition.
In Tx module the signals incoming/outgoing from microprocessor are:

RF detector level output
RF Attenuator command series
RF Attenuator command parallel
PTx Measurement
Temperature Measurement
Manual/Automatic TX command
Tx Temperature alarm
IF Tx detector level
OR alarm module
12V
+8V
+15V
+7V (digitally adjustable)
OL+/OL command
Presence reference negative voltage
Switch command for +8V
ATPC control
LO module
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
warning management.
Selection of frequency.
Selection of Master/Slave condition (for RxLO only)
In LO module the signals incoming/outgoing from microprocessor are:

Alarm loss loop TX
Alarm low level TX
Dati
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
473 / 542
In Rx module the signals incoming/outgoing from microprocessor are:

PRx Measurement
Manual/Automatic RX command
Squelch command
Manual gain command
OL+/OL command
DC/DC converter
[3]
warning management.
voltage control with ATPC command for power consumption reduction.
AMPLIFIER, UP CONVERTER AND DELAY LINE

The block diagram of upconversion and amplification unit is shown in Fig. 194. herebelow.
REVEALED
LO
OUT
RF
xn
IF
Vatt
MONITORED
n = 2 for C band 4 for 11 & 13 GHz

Fig. 194. Block diagram of upconversion and amplification unit
1)
IF TX
The IF amplifier line accepts signal from 120 to 160 MHz with an input matched to 75 W.
It recovers cable losses (up to 30 m), therefore the incoming signal level can change from 12
dBm to 4 dBm ( standard input level is: 5 dBm).
IF signal is splitted and used to drive the circuits of Power consumption reduction. These circuits
include a delay line to synchronize the envelope resulting command with RF signal on final Fet
drain.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The output IF signal is held constant with an AGC circuit and with a power splitter 2 way 90_
is possible to select L.O. condition ( USB or LSB).
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
474 / 542

warning management.
linearization and temperature compensation of field received indication.
Selection of master/slave condition.
Selection of LO+ or LO condition.
squelching.
Rx module
2)
UPCONVERSION
The mixer is implemented in MMIC technology developed in Alcatel.

In the same package are placed an SSB mixer, with four IF quadrature input signals, and a x2
frequency multiplier. The IF input level is 11 dBm +0 / 1 dB, and LO power is 15 dBm 1 dB
For 11 and 13 GHz frequency band the multiplying factor is x4, obtained with a third MMIC
placed in the same package.
On the same substrate and using the same technologies ,the RF chain is completed with an
active variable attenuator and a power amplifier, both realized in MMIC technology.
3)
LINEAR MICROWAVE AMPLIFICATION

The RF output of upconverter is feeded into the input of power amplifier.
This is realized with two discrete transistor (GaAs Mosfets internally matched). Final Fets have
an output power of 4/12 W. At the output, before the dropin isolator, a double microstrip
directional coupler will provide two signals, one for monitoring and one for AGC detector.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The circuits are implemented on a duroid metalbacked substrate.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
475 / 542
52.5.4 Receive & IF Rx module

General
RF
IN

[1]
xn
Vatt
IF
LO
n = 2 for C band 4 for 11 & 13 GHz

Fig. 195. Block diagram of Receive & IF Rx module
Receive & IF Rx module performs the following functions:
low noise amplification of RF incoming signal
signal variable attenuation following the incoming signal variations
downconversion to IF signal
IF amplification.
The RF input of the module is connected to the branching by coaxial cable with SMA connectors/50
.The return losses are guaranteed by dropin isolator. The connectors for IF signals are 75
1.0/2.3 Siemens.
[2]
FRONT END
The RF incoming signal is amplified by a first stage ultra low noise HEMT amplifier.
A variable attenuator, driven by the AGC voltage, allows a protection against up fading propagation.
A second stage contains a GaAs MMIC amplifier.
The downconversion from RF to IF frequency is performed by the same micromodule used in
upconversion function. It has four IF outputs signal in quadrature. A MMIC multiplier x2 doubles the
L.O frequency (x4 in 11 GHz version). The LO power is 15 dBm 1 dB.
The four outputs are connected with hybrid 90_ and 180_ to create IF signal ; by properly connecting
hybrid 90_ is possible to select LSB or USB.
[3]
IF Rx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
IF block amplifier contains two attenuators for AGC, controlled from a filtered detector. Then a IF filter
reduces the signal level of adjacent and alternate channels. The IF section supplies alarms for low
field, for RFRx failure and a measure of received signal level. Another function controlled by IF
section is the squelch of RX for low fields
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
476 / 542
52.5.5 Local Oscillator module

[1]
General

LO scheme for 9600LSY application includes the following functions:
TX LO module
Rx LO module, selectable master or slave option for H/V reuse applications.

A block diagram of the module is shown in the next Fig. 196.
Lock
Alarm
Power
Alarm
Switch
Position
Master
Slave
Output Power Detection
Logic
Ext. VCO Power Detection
VCO
Switch
X2
Multiplier
Splitter
Lock Detect
Switch Position
Diversity
Output
Main
Output
VCO
Output
External
VCO
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 196. Block diagram of Local Oscillator module
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
477 / 542
TRANSMITTER LO MODULE
The module houses on the same multi layer board the Synthesizer, the Switch and the Multiplier.
It has two RF outputs port, named main and diversity and a monitor VCO output, moreover, for the
synchronization in master slave configuration, it makes available its VCO signal and can accept an
external VCO signal.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[3]
ED
1)
Synthesizer
The synthesizer is a single narrow band loop filter with a BiCMOS technology IC used for PLL
function, a low phase noise VCO and a 2 order active loop filter.
The signal is obtained locking the VCO frequency with a stable frequency reference TCXO.
At the output theres RFIC in order to achieve a good isolation from external circuits.
The Synthesizer makes available the Lock Detection status.
2)
Multiplier
The multiplier is composed by monolithic input buffer, a BJT active X2 multiplier, bandpass
filter, RFIC amplifier and power splitter.
To avoid dangerous emission, the output power is delivered only when the VCO is locked.
The unit makes available the output power detection
External VCO Input Power
5 dBm + 5 dBm
3)
Master/Slave Configuration
The Transmitter LO Module can run only in Master configuration, at the start up the Switch is
connected at the external VCO and only when its VCO is locked, the Switch must connect the
internal VCO
RECEIVER LO MODULE
1)
Synthesizer
As that of Transmitter LO Module
2)
Multiplier
As that of Transmitter LO Module
3)
Master/Slave Configuration
In Master configuration the LO runs with its internal VCO .

At the start up, the Switch is connected at the external VCO and there is no power delivered
at the output ports; when its VCO is locked, the Switch must connect the internal VCO and
give power at the outputs.
This setting does not to be modified by alarm during the running condition.
A buffer (Frequency Reuse kit module) is present between the output of the external VCO
and the MASTER/SLAVE input, with the aim of increasing insulation.
In Slave configuration the LO runs with external VCO.

At the start up, the Switch is connected at the external VCO, after the start up time, if is
not detected the VCO external power, the Switch must connect the internal VCO.
During the running condition, in the case of lack of VCO external power, the switch must
connect the internal VCO; when the power of external VCO is back, the Switch must
reconnect the external VCO.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
478 / 542

[2]

52.6 Fans subsystem

The following Fig. 197. shows the block diagram of a fans shelf equipped with two FANS ASSEMBLED
units.
Fig. 198. on page 480 shows the block diagram of one FANS ASSEMBLED unit.
Please refer to:
para.12.4.6 on page 52 for an introductive description

para.22.3.5 on page 166 for equipping rules
para.23.6 on page 197 for assembly drawings and operative notes
point f ) on page 429 for the power supply description.
The FANS ASSEMBLED unit includes a microprocessor to manage together with the System Control
subsystem, through the CAN bus:
the Remote Inventory

its logical address according to the position of the DIPSwitches present on the Fanshelf front panel
the unit alarms (internal PSU failure, individual Fan alarms).
FAN B
FAN D
FAN B
FAN D
FAN A
FAN C
FAN A
FAN C
0/1
0/1
LED
CAN
BATTERYA
LED
CAN TERMINATION
BATTERYB
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 197. Fan subsystem block diagram
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
479 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
CAN
ED
955.203.292 Q
BATT. A
RI
FAN ALARM
PSU
PSU
PSU ALARM
FAN B
FAN D
FAN A
3DB 02839 AA AA
542

BATT. B
FAN C
LED
Fig. 198. FANS ASSEMBLED unit block diagram
05
480 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

53 ALARM MANAGEMENT
This chapter gives summary and detailed information regarding the alarm management carried out by the
9600LSYLHR system:
Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SYSCO)

herebelow
Visual indications
on page 482
Station Alarms
on page 482
Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms

on page 483
53.1 Unit alarms managed by System Controller (SYSCO)

All the alarms detected are collected and processed by the System Controller unit in LHRC shelf.
Alarms provided by item HW

They can be displayed by Craft Terminal as indicated in para.46.5.1 on page 341.
External Alarms
Some input housekeeping signal are available on equipment connector; see para.53.4 on page 483
for details.
By Craft Terminal, each input housekeeping signal can be characterized for severity.
For further information and operative procedures, please refer to the CT OPERATORS
HANDBOOK.
Relationship between Alarms and their severity (Urgent / Not Urgent)

See Tab. 68. on page 487.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
481 / 542
53.2 Visual indications
All the alarms detected on the units are collected and processed by the System Controller unit in
Baseband shelf which gives centralized optical indications by means of LEDs on its front coverplate.
Specifically (see Fig. 134. on page 327):
Red LED URG (1): detection of an URGENT alarm
Red LED NURG (2): detection of a NOT URGENT alarm
Yellow LED ATTD (3): alarm condition ATTENDED (see para.46.3.2 on page 335)
Yellow LED ABN (4): detection of an ABNORMAL operative condition.
Yellow LED IND (5): detection of an INDICATIVE alarm

53.2.2 Alarm visual indications on units
Besides the LEDs of Centralized Equipment Alarms described in para.53.2.1 on page 482, some other
equipment units are provided with specific alarm LED on their front coverplate, indicating the failure of
the unit.
Tab. 59. on page 337 lists such LEDs and indicate their normal status (alarm absence).
53.2.3 Status of radio protections
Visual indications detailed on page 338 allow to check the present status of radio protections.
53.3 Station Alarms

Some equipment alarms processed by the System Controller unit are carried to Baseband shelfs
connector M184 and then lead by a cable to TRUs connector M8 in order to switch on/off the TRU alarm
lamps.
The four alarm lamps on TRU are depicted in Fig. 199. herebelow.
RED (1)
RED (2)
YELLOW
GREEN
Fig. 199. Station Alarms on TRU
Their management is as follows:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The RED (1) lamp is activated in case of urgent (URG) alarm and a relevant telealarm is released
(this last function is excludible).
The RED (2) lamp is activated in case of non urgent (minor) alarm and a relevant telealarm is
released (this last function is excludible).
The YELLOW lamp is lighted up in case of manual storing of alarm events (see para.46.3.2 on page
335). In this case the RED lamps are switched off to be ready to other new alarm indications. This
YELLOW lamp is lighted up in case of ABNORMAL condition, together with led (4) of System
Controller unit (see para.53.2.1 on page 482).
The GREEN lamp is activated by the buzzer input. By presetting, it is possible to change this alarm
criteria and to drive the activation with the presence of the service voltage.
The signals sent to TRU are also available for Customer applications on other TRUs connectors (see
para.24.8.7 on page 236 for connectors, connector pinout and signal description).
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
482 / 542

53.2.1 Centralized Equipment Alarms

53.4 Summarizing / Housekeeping Alarms

Summarizing and Housekeeping alarms, processed by the System Controller unit, are made available to
Customer by means of relay contacts whose interface access is described in para.24.8.8 on page 236.
The following Tab. 67. gives the relationship among remote alarms, housekeeping outputs and alarm
primitives.
Tab. 68. on page 487 gives the relationship between Remote and Station Alarms.
Tab. 67. Relationship among remote alarms, housekeeping outputs and alarm primitives
Remote alarm
Refer.
Remote Alarm primitives
TOR
ANDOR
VBATT1 failure or VBATT2 failure
TAND
ANDOR
VBATT1 failure and VBATT2 failure
TUP
GA2
SYSCO card fail or missing
URG
GA4
or of all urgent alarms
(severity = Major or Critical)
NURG
GA5
or of all not urgent alarms
(severity= Minor)
IND
GA6
or of all indicative alarms
(severity = Warning or
Indeterminate)
ABN
GA7
or of all the abnormal conditions
TORC
GA8
PSF1 or PSF2 card fail
TANC
GA9
PSF1 and PSF2 card fail
Opt STM1
module fail/missing
GA44
or of the following alarms:

STM1 Opt. X (X = 0,..,9) module fail
STM1 Opt. X (X = 0,..,9) module missing
INT
GA10
or of all the internal alarms

card fail, card missing,
equipment mismatch, RC unreachable,
battery fail/missing,
LAN alarm,
transmitter Failure, transmitter Degraded
software mismatch, software processing error,
housekeeping alarm, unconfigured equipment
FANS card fail/

missing
GA12

FANSL X (X = 1,2) card fail (ADM cooling)
FANSL X (X = 1,2) card fail (LHR cooling)
SERV card fail/

missing
GA13

Service card fail
Service card missing
TPHDEV card fail
TPHDEV card missing
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
483 / 542
Remote alarm
Refer.
RRA
card fail/missing
GA16
N+0: or of the following alarms :

RRA X (X = 0,..,9) card fail
RRA X (X = 0,..,9) card missing
N+1: or of the following
g alarms :
RRA X (X = 1,..,9) card fail
RRA X (X = 1,..,9) card missing
RRASBY 0 card fail
RRASBY 0 card missing
MD card fail/missing
GA15
or of the following alarms :

MD X (X = 0,..,9) card fail
MD X (X = 0,..,9) card missing
TRI card fail/missing
GA11
or of the following alarms :

TRI X (X = 1,..,10) card fail
TRI X (X = 1,..,10) card missing
LO Y (Y = 1,..,20) card fail
LO Y (Y = 1,..,20) card missing
RX Y (Y = 1,..,20) card fail
RX Y (Y = 1,..,20) card missing
HBER
GA17
or of highBER of all channel X (X = 0,..,9)
LBER
GA18
or of lowBER of all channel X (X = 0,..,9)
PSF1 card fail/

missing
GA 40

PSF1 card fail
PSF1 card missing
PSF2 card fail/

missing
GA 41

PSF2 card fail
PSF2 card missing
PSU
card fail/missing
GA 30

PSU X (X=0,..,9) card fail,
PSU X (X=0,..,9) card missing
Second IF unit
card fail/missing
GA 42

Second IF X.1 (X=0,..,9) module fail,
Second IF X.1 (X=0,..,9) module missing
Third IF unit
card fail/missing
GA 43

Third IF X.2 (X=0,..,9) module fail,
Third IF X.2 (X=0,..,9) module missing

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
484 / 542

Remote alarm
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

CHX_affect
(X = 0,..,9)
Refer.
CH0 = GA 20 or of all alarms related to channels X (from 0 to 9) and

CH1 = GA 21 affecting the traffic:
CH2 = GA 22
equipment alarms:
CH3 = GA 23
RRA X card fail
CH4 = GA 24
RRA X card missing
CH5 = GA 25
STM1 Opt. X card fail
CH6 = GA 26
STM1 Opt. X card missing
CH7 = GA 27
MD X card fail
CH8 = G A28
MD X card missing
CH9 = GA 29
Second IF (X.1) card fail
Second IF (X.1) card missing
Third IF (X.2) card fail
Third IF (X.2) card missing
TRI X card fail
TRI X card missing
LO X.Y (Y = 1, 2) card fail
LO X.Y (Y = 1, 2) card missing
RX X card fail
RX X card missing
PSU X card fail
PSU X card missing
sfwrEnvironmentProblem (RRA X, MD X, TRI X)
communication alarms:
LOS
(STM1 Opt. X)
LOF
(STM1 Opt. X)
transmitterFailure (STM1 Opt. X)
transmitterDegraded (STM1 Opt. X)
LOF
(RRA X, rsCTPBid line/radio side)
modulationFail (MD X)
modLOS (MD X)
demodulationFail (MD X)
demLOS (MD X)
rxFail
(RX X)
txLOS
(TRI X)
txFail
(TRI X)
incompatibleTxPower (TRI X)
LOF
(RRA X, radioSPITTPBidR1)
HBER
(MD X)
LBER
(MD X)
TIM
(RRA X)
RCIM
(RRA X)
atpcLoop (RRA X)
atpcIdentifierMismatch (RRA X)
rxDivFail (RX Div. X)
demDivLOS (Second IF X.1)
demXpicLOS (Second or Third IF X.1 or X.2)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
485 / 542
CHX on protection
(X = 1,..,9)
Refer.
CH1 = GA 31 for each channel, it will indicate if the switch is on protecting

CH2 = GA 32 channel (in the N+1 configuration only one channel can be on
CH3 = GA 33 protection)
CH4 = GA 34
CH5 = GA 35
CH6 = GA 36
CH7 = GA 37
CH8 = GA 38
CH9 = GA 39
end of Tab. 67.

Concerning the management of the remote alarms for N+1 configuration, only the alarms raised
by the boards of the allowed channels are considered.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
486 / 542

Remote alarm
Tab. 68. Relationship between Remote and Station Alarms

For the alarm meaning refer to Tab. 67. on page 483
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

N.B.
Consequent Remote
Alarms
Remote Alarm
Station Alarm
TOR
HW
NURG
SW
TOR
RNURG
HW
TAND
HW
URG
HW
RURG
HW
TUP
HW
URG
INT
HW
RURG
HW
URG
SW
RURG
SW
NURG
SW
RNURG
SW
IND
SW
ABN
SW
ABN
SW
TORC
SW
NURG
INT
SW
RNURG
SW
TANC
HW
URG
INT
HW
RURG
HW
Opt. STM1
module fail/missing
SW
URG/NURG/IND
INT (note 1)
SW
RURG/
RNURG
SW
INT
SW
FANS
card fail
SW
URG/NURG/IND
INT
SW
RURG/
RNURG
SW
SERV
card fail/missing
SW
URG/NURG/IND
INT
SW
RURG/
RNURG
SW
RRA
card fail/missing
SW
URG/NURG/IND
INT (note 1)
SW
RURG/
RNURG
SW
MD
card fail/missing
SW
URG/NURG/IND
INT (note 1)
SW
RURG/
RNURG
SW
Second IF unit
card fail/missing
SW
URG/NURG/IND
INT (note 1)
SW
RURG/
RNURG
SW
Third IF unit
card fail/missing
SW
URG/NURG/IND
INT (note 1)
SW
RURG/
RNURG
SW
TRI
card fail/missing
SW
URG/NURG/IND
INT (note 1)
SW
RURG/
RNURG
SW
PSF1
card fail/missing
SW
URG/NURG/IND
INT
SW
RURG/
RNURG
SW
PSF2
card fail/missing
SW
URG/NURG/IND
INT
SW
RURG/
RNURG
SW
HBER
SW
URG/NURG/IND
SW
RURG/
RNURG
SW
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
487 / 542

SW
CHX_affect
(X=0..9)
SW
CHX on protection
(X=1..9)
SW
URG/NURG/IND
SW
RURG/
RNURG
SW
end of Tab. 68.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
(note 1) A CHX_affect consequent remote alarm is generated according to the channel affected by the
primary alarm.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
488 / 542

LBER
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

SECTION 6: APPENDICES
ED
SECTION CONTENT
PAGE
Appendix A SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling

It describes the equipment labelling and the norms mandatory or suggested that must
be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment.
491
Appendix B Information on former version TRU

It describes the former version TRU (no longer equipped in new supplies) and the
relevant interconnections with LHR system.
511
Appendix C Documentation guide

It contains all information regarding this handbook (purpose, applicability, history) and
the Customer Documentation set it belongs to, in particular the list of the handbooks
the Operators should have in order to carry out the required operations.
515
Appendix D List of symbols and abbreviations
535
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
489 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
490 / 542

APPENDIX A : SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING
A.1 : Introduction
This appendix describes the equipment labelling and the norms mandatory or suggested (see also point
3 ) on page 17) that must be considered to avoid injuries on persons and/or damage to the equipment.
The stated norms apply both to the operations described in this manual and to those described in the
related manuals listed in para.C.2 on page 522.
Compliance with European Norms
herebelow
Safety Rules
including:
on page 492
on page 492
on page 493
on page 494
on page 495
on page 497
on page 497
on page 498
on page 499
on page 499
General Rules
Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command
Dangerous Electrical Voltages
Harmful Optical Signals
Risks of Explosions
Moving Mechanical Parts
Heatradiating Mechanical Parts
Equipment emitting RF power
Specific safety rules in this handbook
on page 500
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)

including:
on page 500
on page 500
on page 500
EMC General Norms Installation

EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation
EMC General Norms Maintenance
Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges
on page 501
Suggestions, notes and cautions
on page 501
Labels affixed to the Equipment

including:
on page 502
on page 502
on page 503
Labels specific for 9600LSY Equipment

General use labels
A.2 : Compliance with International Standards
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Refer to chapter 13 on page 83.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
491 / 542
A.3.1 : General Rules

Before carrying out any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance operations
carefully read the related Handbooks, in particular:
Installation
LineUp or Commissioning
Maintenance chapter of the Technical Handbook
Observe safety rules
When equipment is operating nobody is allowed to have access inside on the equipment
parts which are protected with Cover Plate Shields removable with tools
In case of absolute need to have access inside, on the equipment parts when it is operating
this is allowed exclusively to service personnel, where for Service Personnel or Technical
assistance is meant :
personnel which has adequate Technical Knowledge and experience necessary to be
aware of the danger that he might find in carrying out an operation and of the necessary
measurements to reduce danger to minimum for him and for others.
The Service Personnel can only replace the faulty units with spare parts.
The Service Personnel is not allowed to repair: hence the access to the parts no specified
is not permitted.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The keys and/or the tools used to open doors, hinged covers to remove parts which give
access to compartments in which are present high dangerous voltages must belong
exclusively to the service personnel.
For the eventual cleaning of the external parts of the equipment, absolutely do not use any
inflammable substance or substances which in some way may alter the markings,
inscriptions etc.
It is recommended to use a slightly wet cleaning cloth.
The Safety Rules stated in the handbook describe the operations and/or precautions to observe
to safeguard service personnel during the working phases and to guarantee equipment safety,
i.e., not exposing persons, animals, things to the risk of being injured/damaged.
Whenever the safety protection features have been impaired, REMOVE POWER.
To cut off power proceed to switch off the power supply units as well as cut off power station
upstream (rack or station distribution frame).
The safety rules described in this handbook are distinguished by the following symbol and
statement:
SAFETY RULES
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
492 / 542

A.3 : Safety Rules
A.3.2 : Labels Indicating Danger, Forbiddance, Command

It is of utmost importance to follow the instructions printed on the labels affixed to the units and assemblies.
The labels are fully compliant with International Norms ISO 38461984. The symbols or statements are
enclosed in geometric shapes: ISO 38641984.
CONTAINS A SYMBOL STATEMENT

INDICATES FORBIDDANCE (WHITE BACKGROUND
WHIT RED RIMBLACK SYMBOL OR STATEMENT)
IT IS A COMMAND (BLUE BACKGROUNDWHITE
SYMBOL OR STATEMENT).
CONTAINS A SYMBOL
INDICATES WARNING OR DANGER (YELLOW
BACKGROUNDBLACK SYMBOL AND RIM)
CONTAINS A STATEMENT PROVIDING INFORMATION

OR INSTRUCTION.
(YELLOW BACKGROUNDBLACK STATEMENT AND RIM)
The labels have been affixed to indicate a dangerous condition. They may contain any standardknown
symbol or any statement necessary to safeguard users and service personnel against the most common
ones, specifically:
dangerous electrical voltages
harmful optical signals
risk of explosion
moving mechanical parts
heatradiating Mechanical Parts
microwave radiations
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Pay attention to the information stated in the following, and proceed as instructed
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
493 / 542

The symbols presented in para.A.3.3 through A.3.8 are all the possible symbols that
could be present on Alcatel equipment, but are not all necessarily present on the
equipment this handbook refers to.
A.3.3 : Dangerous Electrical Voltages

Description specific for 9600LSYLHR/LHRC
A.3.3.1: Electrical safety: Labelling
The following warning label is affixed next to dangerous voltages (>42.4 Vp; >60 Vdc).
As far as electrical safety is concerned, this is a Class I equipment, then the label associated to it states
that the equipment must be grounded before connecting it to the power supply voltage, e.g.:
WARNING !
Ground protect the equipment before
connecting it to manins
Make sure that power has been cut off
before disconnecting ground protection.
A.3.3.2: Electrical safety: general rules
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where a.c. or
d.c. power is present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance
documents and the following general rules:
a)
Personal injury can be caused by 48 V dc (or by 220 V ac if envisaged in the equipment). Avoid
touching powered terminals with any exposed part of your body.
b)
Short circuiting, low-voltage, low-impedance, dc circuits can cause severe arcing that can result in
burns and/or eye damage. Remove rings, watches, and other metal jewelry before working with
primary circuits. Exercise caution to avoid shorting power input terminals.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
494 / 542
A.3.4 : Harmful Optical Signals


A.3.4.1: Optical safety: Labelling
If the assembly or unit is fitted with a laser, the labels comply with the IEC 608251 and IEC 608252
International Norms.
According to the stated norms, the presence of a laser with Hazard Level 3B or higher is indicated
by the following warning label in compliancy with the IEC 82511993 International Norms:
As far as optical safety is concerned, this equipment is fitted with Hazard Level 1 laser type,
thus the above symbol is not present.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
For this equipment (fitted with Hazard Level 1 laser type) no other labels regarding the laser
characteristics are present, with the exception of that (optional) specified in para.13.8.4 on page
103.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
495 / 542
For operations limited to 9600LSYLHR/LHRC equipment, no specific cautions regarding optical safety
must be observed.
Nevertheless, if you operate also on other equipment where laser labels are affixed, observe the following
cautions:
On handling optical equipments or units or cables always check that laser labels are properly affixed
and that the system complies with applicable optical standards.
DANGER! Possibility of eyes damage: invisible infrared radiations emitted by

the fiber optic transmitters can cause eyes damages. Carefully observe the specific procedures for
installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of units containing laser devices or cables
transporting optical signals, described in the relevant installation / turnup and commissioning /
maintenance documents and the following general rules:
a)
Laser radiation is not visible by the naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen,
laser radiation may be present.
b)
Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable,
unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
c)
Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable or connector, unless it is absolutely known that no laser
radiation is present.
d)
All optical connectors, terminating either fibers and transmitters/receivers, are provided with
protective covers that must always be used, as soon as possible, when any optical link is
disconnected for installation/test/maintenance purposes or whatever operation.
e)
Never look directly into an unterminated fiber optic connector or into a broken optical fiber cable by
means of magnifiers/microscopes, unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is present. A
magnifier/microscope greatly increases the damage hazard to the eyes.
f)
Never point an unterminated optical fiber splice, cable or connector to other persons, unless it is
absolutely known that no laser radiation is present.
g)
Always remove electrical power from near and far optical transmitters before disconnecting optical
links between the transmitter and the receiver.
h)
Wearing of laser safety goggles or eyes shields is recommended for every person working on optical
devices, whenever the above listed rules cannot be followed.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A.3.4.3: Optical safety: equipment specific data

ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
496 / 542

A.3.4.2: Optical safety: general rules
A.3.5 : Risks of Explosions

A.3.5.1: Labelling and safety instructions

This risk is present when batteries are used, and it is signalled by the following label:
Therefore, slits or apertures are made to let air circulate freely and allow dangerous gasses to down flow
(batteryemitted hydrogen). A 417IEC5641 Norm. compliant label is affixed next to it indicating that the
openings must not be covered up.
A.3.6 : Moving Mechanical Parts

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
The following warning label is affixed next to fans or other moving mechanical parts:
Before carrying out any maintenance operation see that all the moving mechanical parts have been
stopped.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
497 / 542
A.3.7 : Heatradiating Mechanical Parts

The presence of heatradiating mechanical parts is indicated by the following warning label in compliancy
with IEC 417 Norm, Fig.5041:
DANGER! Possibility of personal injury:
carefully observe the specific

procedures for installation / turnup and commissioning / maintenance of equipment parts where
heatradiating mechanical parts are present, described in the relevant installation / turnup and
commissioning / maintenance documents and the following general rule:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
a)
ED
Personal injury can be caused by heat. Avoid touching powered terminals with any exposed part of
your body.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
498 / 542

A.3.8 : Equipment emitting RF power


Reminder from site preparation procedure:
The site must be compliant with ICNIRP guidelines or local regulation if more restrictive.
The following rules should be strictly applied by Customer:
Non authorized persons should not enter the compliance boundaries, if any, for the general
public.
Compliance boundaries, if any, related to Electro Magnetic Field exposure must be marked.
Workers should be allowed to switchoff the power if they have to operate inside compliance
boundaries
Assure good cable connection.
Install the antenna as high as possible from floor or area with public access (if possible the
cylinder delimitating the compliance boundaries, if any, or the cylinder corresponding to the
transmission area directly in front of antenna with the same diameter as the antenna, more than
2 meters high).
Install the antenna as for as possible from other existing equipment emitting RF power.
Anyway remind that someone standing in front of the 9600LSY antenna may cause traffic
shutdown
Place the relevant stickers:
On the site when applicable (when people can cross the compliance
boundaries and/or the transmission area of the antenna, i.e. roof top
installation):
Warning label Do not stand on the antenna axis
EMF emission
warning sign
On the mast (front side):
EMF emission warning sign (Yellow and black) to be placed at bottom

of antenna, visible by someone moving in front of the antenna (roof top
installation)
On the antenna (rear side):
EMF emission warning sign, placed on the antenna.
A.3.9 : Specific safety rules in this handbook

Specific safety rules are specified in the following chapters:
chapter 45, para.45.1 on page 331
chapter 47:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
499 / 542
The equipments EMC norms depend on the type of installation being carried out (cable termination,
grounding etc.,) and on the operating conditions (equipment, setting options of the electrical/electronic
units, presence of dummy covers, etc.).
Before starting any installation, turnon, tests & operation and maintenance work refer to the
Technical Handbook, specifically to Handbooks:
Installation,
LineUp or Commissioning
Maintenance chapter in this Handbook
The norms set down to guarantee EMC compatibility, are distinguished inside this handbook
by the symbol and term:
ATTENTION
EMC NORMS
A.4.1 : EMC General Norms Installation

All connections (towards the external source of the equipment) made with shielded cables use
only cables and connectors suggested in this technical handbook or in the relevant Plant
Documentation, or those specified in the CustomersInstallation Norms. (or similar
documents)
Shielded cables must be suitably terminated
Install filters outside the equipment as required
Ground connect the equipment utilizing a conductor with proper dia. and impedance
Mount shields (if utilized), previously positioned during the installation phase, but not before
having cleaned and decrease it.
Before inserting the shielded unit proceed to clean and decrease all peripheral surfaces
(contact springs and connection points, etc.)
Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
To correctly install EMC compatible equipment follow the instructions given.
A.4.2 : EMC General Norms Turnon, Tests & Operation

Preset the electrical units as required to guarantee EMC compatibility
Check that the equipment is operating with all the shields properly positioned (dummy covers,
ESD connector protections, etc.)
To properly use EMC compatible equipment observe the information given
A.4.3 : EMC General Norms Maintenance

Before inserting the shielded unit, which will replace the faulty or modified unit, proceed to clean
and decrease all peripheral surfaces (contact springs and connection points, etc.)
Clean the dummy covers of the spare units as well.
Screw fasten the units to the subrack.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
500 / 542

A.4 : Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC norms)

A.5 : Equipment protection against electrostatic discharges

Before removing the ESD protections from the monitors, connectors etc., observe the precautionary
measures stated. Make sure that the ESD protections have been replaced and after having terminated
the maintenance and monitoring operations.
Most electronic devices are sensitive to electrostatic discharges, to this concern the following warning
labels have been affixed:
Observe the precautionary measures stated when having to touch the electronic parts during the
installation/maintenance phases.
Workers are supplied with antistatic protection devices consisting of:
an elasticized band worn around the wrist
a coiled cord connected to the elasticized band and to the stud on the subrack.
ELASTICIZED BAND
COILED CORD
Fig. 200. Antistatic protection device kit
A.6 : Suggestions, notes and cautions

Suggestions and special notes are marked by the following symbol:
Suggestion or note....
Cautions to avoid possible equipment damage are marked by the following symbol:
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
TITLE...
statement....
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
501 / 542
This paragraph indicates the positions and the information contained on the identification and serial
labels affixed to the equipment, with the exception of those already mentioned in para.A.3.2 (page 493)
thru A.5 (page 501).
The label description is grouped as follows:
Label specific for 9600LSY Equipment, herebelow
General Use Labels, starting on page 503.
A.7.1 : Label specific for 9600LSY Equipment

LABEL POSITION
9662 LSY
ALCATEL
1111111
12345
Certificato Omologazione ITALIA
ISCTI/2/1/01/044000
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
SYMBOL OR WRITING
MEANING
Alcatel Logo
ALCATEL
9662 LSY (example)

CE
Equipment Acronym
European Community Logo
12345 (example)
!
Notified body
Not harmonized frequency logo
Electrostatic Device Logo
1111111 (example)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Factory identification
Factory identification bar code 128
ISCTI/2/1/01/044000 (example)
Omologation certificate number (optional)
xxxxxxxxxxxxxx (example)
Fig. 201. LSY equipment identification label
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
502 / 542

A.7 : Labels affixed to the Equipment

A.7.2 General use labels

Fig. 202. thru Fig. 207. illustrate the most common positions of the labels on the units, modules and
subracks.
Fig. 208. thru Fig. 209. illustrate the information (e.g., identification and serial No.) printed on the
labels.
The table below relates the ref. numbers stated on the figures to the labels used.
Labelling depicted hereafter is for indicative purposes and could be changed without any notice.
Tab. 69. Label references

Ref. No.
Name of Label
Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
Item identification label item on catalog
Label identifying the equipment
Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N.) + CE mark
Serial number of item specified on catalogue + Subrack ESD mark
On contract basis, customized labels can be affixed to the equipment.

Standard labels can be affixed to any position on the equipment, as required by the Customer.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
However, for each of the above are applied the rules defined by each individual Customer.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
503 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ABCD
ED
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on Tab. 69. on page 503
Fig. 202. Largesubrack labels
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
504 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
955.203.292 Q
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 69. on page 503.
Fig. 203. Smallsubrack labels
05
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
505 / 542
xxxxxx
xxxxxxxxx
xxxxxx
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ABC
Fig. 204. Labels on units with standard cover plate
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
506 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ABC
NOTE : The above reference numbers are detailed on on Tab. 69. on page 503.
Fig. 205. Modules label
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
507 / 542


NB.1
ABC
NB.1 = The label is present on the p.c.s. component side
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 206. Internal label for Printed Board Assembly
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
508 / 542

NB.1
ABC
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NB. 1 = The label is present on p.c.s. components side or rear side on the empty spaces.
Fig. 207. Back panels internal label
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
509 / 542

FACTORY P/N + CS
FACTORY SERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE

(format 128; Module = 0,166; EN 799; Subset B/C)
Fig. 208. Label specifying item not on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + space + ICS

ANV ITEM PART NUMBER + ICS BAR CODE
(format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2)
ALCATEL FACTORY PART

NUMBER + SPACE + CS
ACRONYM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
SERIAL NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER BAR CODE

(format ALFA 39 (+ * start, stop); Module = 0,166; Ratio = 2)
Fig. 209. Label specifying item on catalogue (P/N. and serial number)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
510 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

APPENDIX B : INFORMATION ON FORMER VERSION TRU

This appendix describes the former version TRU P/N 3DB00734AA (factory P/N 593.230.032) and the
relevant interconnections with LHR system.
This appendix is addressed only to Customers having installed it in their system, instead of the new
enhanced TRU P/N REF.[3] in Tab. 11. on page 146.
In case the new enhanced TRU is installed in your system, ignore this appendix and make
reference, for this kind of information, to the:
N.B.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
511 / 542
B.1 : T.R.U. connectors

M4
M6
M7
M5
Box TRU
M3
Alarm Extension
4A
2A
1A
6A
5A
3A
2B
1B
3B
M2
4B
6B

M8
M1
Front view
5B
T.R.U.
Front view
M9
T.R.U.
Rear view
DC input and distribution

M10
b+
b+
a+
a
a+
Rear view without cover
Legend on page 513
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 210. Former version Top Rack Unit connector numbering
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
512 / 542
(a) (a+) (b) (b+) (a) (a+) (b) (b+) :

a)
Primary BATT.A and BATT.B. Power Supply input and distribution frame (N.B.)
(M7) :
b)
for usage see Tab. 31. on page 219; pins connected in parallel to connector (M8)
(M6) :
c)
for usage see Tab. 33. on page 220; pins connected in parallel to connector (M8)
(M1) to (M5) and (M10) :
d)
RM Interface connections; pins connected in parallel to connector (M8) .

Pinout in Tab. 70. herebelow.
(M9) :
e)
Power Supply, alarm and service connections (N.B.)
(1A) to (6B) :
f)
Output Power Supply connectors/breakers toward the user shelves indicated in Tab. 28. on page
200.
For the physical connection from connector/breakers to the user shelves, make reference to
para.24.4 on page 218.
For further information on TRU unit (in particular for hardware presettings), please refer to
OPTINEX rack specific documentation.
N.B.
B.2 : Station Alarms

Station alarm interface access is provided in TRU unit, connectors (M1) to (M5); see Fig. 210. on page
512.
Tab. 70. Station Alarms Connector pinout of former version TRU for LHR
6
9
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
PIN
ALARM
MEANING
+VSERV
+Service battery
RATTD
ABN
RURG
MANAGED BY
HW/SW
Alarm storing command
HW
Yellow LED switch on Alarm storing

Yellow LED switch on Abnormal condition
HWSW
SW
Red LED (1) switch on Urgent alarm
HWSW
RNURG
Red LED (2) switch on Not Urgent alarm
HWSW
VSERV
Service battery
CH
8
9
Green LED switch on buzzer
HW
TOR
VBATT1 failure or VBATT2 failure
HW
GND
GROUND
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
513 / 542
For CABLE TYPE and CABLE SIDE related information, please refer to para.24.3 on page
211.
N.B.
Tab. 71. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT COMMON PARTS
CABLE
TYPE
N.
CABLE SIDE (A1) & LABEL

(N.B.2)
Sub. RT / M2 Batt.A
(N.B.1)
T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 1A
Sub. RT / M3 Batt.B
(N.B.1)
T.R.U. Fuserbreaker 1B
Sub. RT / M5 Batt.A
(N.B.1)
Sub. RT / M6 Batt.B
(N.B.1)
Sub. B.B. / M1 Batt.A
(N.B.3)
Sub. B.B. / M2 Batt.B
(N.B.4)
Tab. 72. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT
Cables belonging to FANS UNIT CABLE KIT
CABLE
TYPE
B
CABLE SIDE (B2) & LABEL

(N.B.2)
N.
Fans Unit down (up) / M1 Batt.A (N.B.5)
Fans Unit down (up) / M4 Batt.B (N.B.5)
Tab. 73. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to FANS UNIT EXTENSION CABLE KIT
CABLE
TYPE
B

(N.B.2)
N.
Fans Unit down (up) / M1 Batt.A (N.B.6)
Fans Unit down (up) / M4 Batt.B (N.B.6)
Tab. 74. Power supply distribution: Cables belonging to CABLE KIT FOR 1 EXTEN. CHANNEL
FOR WMSN
CABLE
TYPE
N.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
ED

(N.B.2)
ADM CONGI / C1
(N.B.7)
ADM SERGI / S1
(N.B.7)

connected to Power Supply input connector of PSF1 (see Fig. 79. page 160)
connected to Power Supply input connector of PSF2 (see Fig. 79. page 160)
connected to Power Supply input connectors M1/M4 (see Fig. 105. page 198) of BBs
FANS shelf (see POS.(E) in Fig. 71. on page 152)
connected to Power Supply input connectors M1/M4 (see Fig. 105. page 198) of ADMs
FANS shelf (see POS.(L) in Fig. 71. on page 152)
refer to 1650SMC documentation
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
514 / 542

B.3 : Power supply distribution connections

APPENDIX C : DOCUMENTATION GUIDE

This appendix contains all information regarding:
this handbook, herebelow
the Customer Documentation set this handbook belongs to, on page 522
C.1 : Handbook guide

This paragraph contains all information regarding this handbook and is organized as follows:
Handbook applicability
herebelow
Purpose of the handbook
on page 516
Handbook history
on page 517
C.1.1 : Handbook applicability
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
This handbook applies to the following product-releases:

PRODUCT
FREQ.RANGE
9640LSY
364
3.6
4.2
2 GHz
9647LSY
445
4.4
5.0
0 GHz
9662LSY
596
5.9
6.4
4 GHz
9667LSY
647
6.4
7.1
1 GHz
9674LSY
717
7.1
7.7
7 GHz
9681LSY
778
7.7
8.7
7 GHz
9610LSY
10 10.7 GHz
9611LSY
10 7 11
10.7
11.7
7 GHz
9613LSY
12 75 13
12.75
13.25
25 GHz
RELEASE
ANV P/N
FACTORY P/N
1.00.00
3DB 00581 AAAA
522.171.110
2.00.00
3DB 04272 AAAA
522.171.120
1.00.00
3DB 00584 AAAA
522.171.210
2.00.00
3DB 04274 AAAA
522.171.220
1.00.00
3DB 00587 AAAA
522.171.310
2.00.00
3DB 04276 AAAA
522.171.320
1.00.00
3DB 00590 AAAA
522.171.410
2.00.00
3DB 04278 AAAA
522.171.420
1.00.00
3DB 00593 AAAA
522.171.510
2.00.00
3DB 04280 AAAA
522.171.520
1.00.00
3DB 00596 AAAA
522.171.610
2.00.00
3DB 04282 AAAA
522.171.620
2.00.00
3DB 04288 AAAA
522.171.920
1.00.00
3DB 00599 AAAA
522.171.710
2.00.00
3DB 04284 AAAA
522.171.720
1.00.00
3DB 02270 AAAA
522.171.810
2.00.00
3DB 04286 AAAA
522.171.820
in the following configurations:
LHR Regenerator
related WMSN (LHR + 1650SMC)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
515 / 542
This handbook belongs to the Customer Documentation set envisaged for the equipment specified in para.
C.1.1 on page 515.
Please refer to para.C.2 on page 522 to have the list and description of such Customer Documentation
set.
With reference to equipment configuration stated in para.C.1.1 on page 515, this handbook provides the
following pieces of information:
system description on two levels: first level and detailed level, both from system, hardware and
software points of view
system Technical Specifications
system hardware structure: item Part Numbers and equipping rules (provisioning)
unit operative hardware description: access point description (usage of led, pushbuttons, switches
and connectors for Customer use), connection rules
N.B.
hardware setting options, that are included in the handbook 9600LSY Hardware setting
documents (REF.[K] on page 527), that must be always available to the Operator in charge
of the equipment installation, commissioning, troubleshooting and repair, as it contains the
information necessary to carry out the hardware setting of the equipments units
branchings, that are included in the handbook: 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Branching
drawings (REF.[B] on page 524), that must be always available to the Operator who needs
this kind of information
system cabling
spare parts provisioning
preventive maintenance procedures
corrective maintenance and unit replacement procedures (N.B.)

N.B.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
this handbook does not contain detailed information regarding:
ED
In any case, the C.T. Operators Handbook must be always available to the Operator in
charge of the equipment troubleshooting and repair, as it contains the information
necessary to carry out troubleshooting through the Craft Terminal.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
516 / 542

C.1.2 : Purpose of the handbook
C.1.3 : Handbook history

C.1.3.1: List of the editions and modified parts

The following Tab. 75. indicates the handbook parts new and modified with respect to the previous edition.
Legend: n = new part
m = modified part
blank= part unchanged
Tab. 75. Handbook history

HANDBOOK EDITION
02
03
04
Preliminary information
Handbook applicability, purpose and history

Handbook structure
SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling
n
m
SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS
11
Introduction to the 9600LSY radio system family
12
System description
13
Technical specifications
SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATION

22
Equipment part list and provisioning
23
24
System configurations
06
21
05
FRONT MATTER
Quick Guide
n
m
Operative information on equipment boards
System cabling
m
m
SECTION 3: FREQUENCY PLANS, TRANSCEIVER P/N & HW

SETTING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
01
31
Introduction
32
9640LSY
33
m
m
9647LSY
34
9662LSY
35
9667LSY
36
9674LSY
37
9681LSY
38
9610LSY
39
9611LSY
310
9613LSY
table continues
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
517 / 542
table continues
HANDBOOK EDITION
41
Maintenance Policy
42
Set and use of EOW functions
43
Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts
44
First Level Maintenance
45
Preventive Maintenance
46
Troubleshooting
47
03
04
05
n
n
m
Unit replacement
48
Transceiver repair and replacement
49
Faulty unit repair and repair form
51
Signal management
52
Hardware description
53
Alarm Management
SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling
Information on former version TRU
Documentation guide
List of symbols and abbreviations
n
n
n
m
m
n
n
m
m
06
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
02
ED
01
m
n
m
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
518 / 542

Tab. 75. Handbook history

C.1.3.2: Notes on draft editions

Ed.01ADRAFT created on October 23th, 2001 is the first NEITHER validated NOR officially released
issue.
C.1.3.3: Notes on Ed.01
Ed.01 created on November 15th, 2001 is the first validated and officially released issue.
Ed.02 created on April 18th, 2002.
The following main changes have been done:
in Chapter Physical Configuration : Part List has been updated; descriptions regarding equipment
provisioning and unit operative information have been updated and improved
in Chapter Technical Specifications : Branching Interface description has been added, and
Environmental characteristics description has been improved
Chapter Maintenance has been improved with revised and fully new parts, in particular with regard
to information relevant to Spare Part Set, Preventive Maintenance and Corrective Maintenance
(troubleshooting and unit replacement procedures)
the new Chapter Documentation Guide has been updated to list and describe new handbooks
in the new Chapter SafetyEMCESD norms and equipment labelling : information regarding
equipment labelling has been updated
in Chapter Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes : the list of enclosed documents has
been updated
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Ed.03 created on September 27th, 2002.

The following main changes have been done:
throughout the handbook:
new items added: Frequency Reuse kit, Kit Loudspeaker (P/N and operative information)
elimination of High Power Transceivers
important changes and improvements regarding Transceivers:
operative information in chapters Physical Configuration and System Cabling
description in chapter Functional Description
spare part list and fully new repair procedure in chapter Maintenance
in chapter Physical Configuration circuit breaker values updated
Chapter Technical Specifications updated
in section Frequency Plans & Part Numbers: new chapter for 9610LSY, new Transceiver for
9681LSY
in Chapter Hardware Setting Documentation & Annexes : the list of enclosed documents has
been updated.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
519 / 542
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Ed.04 created on June 29th, 2004 is the fourth validated and officially released issue.
This edition has been fully revised; major changes are:
handbook structure has been changed, shifting less used information (from operative point of view)
toward its end, in the new sections FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION and APPENDICES.
all chapters of section SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS have been
modified for:
64QAM modulation, supported starting from SWP 2.0 Version 2.0.2
the use of the new WTD ETSI rack (2200mm or 2000mm high) instead of Optinex rack
in chapter Technical specifications, besides changes for 64QAM modulation, the characteristics
regarding the 99% power channel bandwidth and Emission Designator have been specified
chapter Equipment part list and provisioning has been modified for:
rack, enhanced TRU subrack, items for 64QAM modulation and other items
equipping rules of FANS shelf and FANS assembled units in the rack
chapter Operative information has been modified for:
Cautions to avoid equipment damage information
TRU breaker types
detailed TRU shelf cabling information in chapters Operative information and System cabling has
been removed, because already included in the Installation Handbooks
section Frequency plans, transceiver P/N & HW setting has been updated for the following:
addition of Transmitter specialization for a frequency plan information, previously missing
addition of detailed instructions for Transceiver hardware settings, because the only usage
of their setting documents (MSZZQ documents) was not fully clear to many Customers
the usage of 64QAM modulation in some frequency plans of 9640LSY, 9647LSY, 9667LSY and
9611LSY
correction of some frequency plans (in particular 9647LSY Channel plan Spain UN56)
section Maintenance has been greatly improved, adding and changing the following:
new chapters Maintenance Policy, Set and use of EOW functions, First Level Maintenance
Corrective Maintenance has been split in 4 main chapters, with improved operative
instructions
in whole handbook, the term transceiver has been changed to transmitter, when applicable, to
distinguish the transmitter subassembly from the transceiver assembly.
chapter Documentation guide has been updated for new handbooks
section HW SETTING DOCUMENTATION & ANNEXES has been removed, because the previously
annexed documents are now separately available in the new handbooks 9600LSY HARDWARE
SETTING DOCUMENTATION and 9600LSY/LHR BRANCHING DRAWINGS.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
520 / 542

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10


Ed.05 created on February 8th, 2005 is the fifth validated and officially released issue.
This edition has been done to introduce some corrections and improvements; major changes are:
in section System description and technical specifications :
in chapter Technical specifications, update of Characteristics applicable to 64QAM

systems
in section System composition and configurations :
in chapter Operative information , additional information for Cautions to avoid equipment

damage
in section Frequency plans, transceiver P/N & HW setting :
in chapter Introduction , propaedeutic explanations regarding the Alternative center band

frequencies (normal and interleaved channels) have been improved with additional
examples
in chapter 9674LSY , frequency plans ITUR F.385 Annex 3 L&H and ITUR F.385 Rec. 1L
corrected
in section Maintenance :
chapters Maintenance Tools and Spare Parts and Unit replacement improved
chapter Transceiver repair and replacement corrected and improved
in section Appendices :
in chapter Documentation guide information regarding Documentation set description

updated.
Errors found in previous edition have been corrected.
Revision bars point out major (listed above) and minor (not listed above) modifications with respect to
previous edition.
Revision bars in correspondence of empty lines or empty table rows, point out parts eliminated or shifted
in other places of the handbook.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
521 / 542
The 9600LSY system can be supplied in the basic configurations (LHR, LHRC and WMSN) introduced
in para.11.5 on page 33.
This paragraph contains all information regarding the Customer Documentation set this handbook
belongs to:
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0 productreleaseversion handbooks for LHR version on page 523
9600LSY Rel.2.0 productreleaseversion handbooks for LHRC version
on page 525
Documentation of 9600LSY Rel.2.0 for both LHR and LHRC versions
on page 527
Optional handbooks and CDROMs

including:
on page 529:
1320CT platform additional documentation
on page 529
Handbooks and CDROMs of 1650SMC
on page 530
General on Alcatel Customer Documentation

including:
on page 531
CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation
on page 531
Product levels and associated Customer Documentation
on page 532
Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers
on page 534
The list of handbooks given in the following is valid as at the issue date of
this Handbook and can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL
to update it in this Handbook.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Some of the handbooks listed in the following may not be available as at

the issue date of this Handbook.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
522 / 542

C.2 : Documentation set description

C.2.1 : 9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0 productreleaseversion handbooks for LHR version
This paragraph lists and briefly describes the handbooks making up the documentation set envisaged for
the LHR version of 9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0 product releases.
Please refer to following para.C.3 on page 531 for a general description of Alcatel Customer
Documentation system.
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the LHR version of 9600LSY Rel.1.0
& 2.0 system is modularly composed by different handbooks.
Tab. 76. herebelow lists the handbooks.
The [REF] indication in Tab. 76. is relevant to the handbook brief description given in tables Tab. 77. and
Tab. 80. thru Tab. 82. in the following.
Tab. 76. 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 product release handbooks
TECHNICAL HANDBOOKS
REF
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Technical Handbook
[A]
9600LSY Hardware setting documents
[K]
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Branching drawings
[B]
NOTES
INSTALLATION AND LINEUP HANDBOOKS

9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Installation Handbook
[C]
[L]
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 Line Up guide
[D]
9600LSY/LHR Rel.2.0 Line Up guide
[E]
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Expansion procedures
[F]
Interference investigation procedure
[M]
in alternative according
to SWP version used
OPERATORS HANDBOOKS
9600LSY Rel.1.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0
[N]
9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 V2.0.0/V2.0.1
[O]
9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 from V2.0.2
[P]
to SWP version used
DOCUMENTATION CDROM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
DCP 9600LSY 1.0/2.0 CDROM
ED
[Q]
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
523 / 542
REF
HANDBOOK
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0
Technical Handbook
[A]
ANV P/N
FACTORY P/N
NOTES
3DB 02839 AAAA

955.203.292 Q
this handbook
To be used in the 9600LSY/LHR Regenerator configuration.

Provides information regarding Equipment description, composition and maintenance
(together with handbooks REF.[O] or [P] and REF.[E])
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0
Branching drawings
3DB 02839 CAAA

(without Factory P/N)
Contains the detailed drawings of the various configurations of branching envisaged for
9600LSY/LHR Regenerator configuration.
N.B.
This documentation is integrated in Technical Handbook REF.[A] till its Ed.03. From
its Ed.04 it is no longer present in the Technical Handbook.
[B]
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0

3DB 02840 AAAA

955.203.302 S
To be used in the 9600LSY LHR Regenerator configurations.

The Installation Handbook provides information regarding Equipment installation, according
to Alcatel Installation Engineering Dept. rules.
N.B.
When the TRU P/N REF.[3] on page 146 is employed, the handbook REF.[L] must
be used for proper installation and configuration.
[C]
[D]
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0
Line Up guide
3DB 02841 AAAA

955.203.312 K
[E]
9600LSY/LHR Rel.2.0
Line Up guide
3DB 02841 CAAA
NB
N.B.
N.B.
In alternative according to SWP version used.
The Lineup Guide provides information regarding equipment line up and preventive
maintenance procedures, according to Alcatel Installation Engineering Dept. rules.
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0
Expansion procedures

This handbook explains how to expand the number of channels of a LHR system both from
hardware and software points of view, according to Alcatel Installation Engineering Dept.
rules.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
[F]
ED
3DB 02841 DAAA

05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
524 / 542

Tab. 77. Handbooks related to LHR version only

C.2.2 : 9600LSY Rel.2.0 productreleaseversion handbooks for LHRC version

This paragraph lists and briefly describes the handbooks making up the documentation set envisaged for
the LHRC version of 9600LSY Rel.2.0 product release.
Please refer to following para.C.3 on page 531 for a general description of Alcatel Customer
Documentation system.
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the LHRC version of 9600LSY Rel.2.0
system is modularly composed by different handbooks.
Tab. 78. herebelow lists the handbooks.
The [REF] indication in Tab. 78. is relevant to the handbook brief description given in tables Tab. 79. thru
Tab. 82. in the following.
Tab. 78. 9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 product release handbooks
TECHNICAL HANDBOOKS
REF
9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Technical Handbook
[G]
9600LSY Hardware setting documents
[K]
9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Branching drawings
[H]
NOTES
INSTALLATION AND LINEUP HANDBOOKS

9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Installation Handbook
[I]
[L]
9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0 Line Up guide
[J]
[M]
OPERATORS HANDBOOKS
9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 V2.0.0/V2.0.1
[O]
9600LSY Rel.2.0 CT Operators Handbook SWP 2.0 from V2.0.2
[P]
to SWP version used
DOCUMENTATION CDROM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
ED
[Q]
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
525 / 542
REF
HANDBOOK
9600LSY/LHRC Rel.2.0
Technical Handbook
[G]
3DB 02839 BAAA

955.203.293 R
3DB 02839 DAAA
N.B.
Contains the detailed drawings of the various configurations of branching envisaged for
9600LSY/LHRC Regenerator configuration.
N.B.
This documentation is integrated in Technical Handbook REF.[G] till its Ed.01. From
[H]
3DB 02840 BAAA

955.203.303 T
To be used in the 9600LSY LHRC Regenerator configurations.

The Installation Handbook provides information regarding Equipment installation, according
to Alcatel Installation Engineering Dept. rules.
N.B.
When the TRU P/N REF.[3] on page 146 is employed, the handbook REF.[L] must
be used for proper installation and configuration.
[I]
Line Up guide
[J]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
NOTES
To be used in the 9600LSY/LHRC Regenerator configuration.

Provides information regarding Equipment description, composition and maintenance
(together with handbooks REF.[O] or [P] and REF.[J])
Branching drawings
ED
ANV P/N
FACTORY P/N
3DB 02841 BAAA

955.203.313 L
To be used in the 9600LSY LHRC Regenerator configurations.

The Lineup Guide provides information regarding equipment line up and preventive
maintenance procedures, according to Alcatel Installation Engineering Dept. rules.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
526 / 542

Tab. 79. Handbooks related to LHRC version only
C.2.3 : Documentation of 9600LSY for both LHR and LHRC versions

Tab. 80. Additional handbooks for installation, commissioning and maintenance purposes
REF
HANDBOOK
9600LSY
Hardware setting documents
ANV P/N
FACTORY P/N
NOTES
3DB 02839 EAAA
N.B.
Contains the hardware setting documents for both LHR and LHRC configurations.
N.B.
This documentation is integrated in Technical Handbook REF.[A] till its Ed.03. From
N.B.
This documentation is integrated in Technical Handbook REF.[G] till its Ed.01. From
[K]
Enhanced TRU Installation and

Configuration Handbook
[L]
3DB 02840 CAAA

To be used in the 9600LSY LHR/LHRC Regenerator configurations, when the TRU P/N
REF.[3] on page 146 is used.
[M]
3DB 04165 EAAA

955.203.374 Z
Describes the measurement procedure for the interference searching in the various RF bands
used by Alcatel Radio Transmission products.
Tab. 81. Handbooks related to the specific product SWP management and local product control
REF
HANDBOOK
9600LSY Rel.1.0
CT Operators Handbook SWP 1.0
[N]
ANV P/N
FACTORY P/N
NOTES
3DB 02838 AAAA

957.207.022 A
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
To be used with:
SWP REG.9600LSY R.1.0 (3DB 03179 AAAA)

Provides 9600LSY/LHR screens and operational procedures for Equipment SW management and
maintenance.
[O]
9600LSY Rel.2.0
V2.0.1
[P]
9600LSY Rel.2.0
V2.0.2 on
3DB 02838 BAAA

957.207.023 B
for SWP version

V2.0.1
3DB 02838 CAAA
for SWP versions

V2.0.2
To be used with:
SWP REG.9600LSY R.2.0 (3DB 04401 AAAA)

in association with both LHR and LHRC configurations.
Provides 9600LSY/LHR/LHRC screens and operational procedures for Equipment SW management
and maintenance.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
527 / 542
REF
CDROM TITLE
[Q]
ANV P/N
FACTORY P/N
NOTES
3DB 02831 AAAA

417.200.017 D
Ed.05 on

Tab. 82. Documentation on CDROM
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Contains, in electronic format (Acrobat pdf), handbooks REF.[A] to [P]
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
528 / 542
C.2.4 : Optional handbooks and CDROMs
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

C.2.4.1: 1320CT platform additional documentation

Documentation to be used depends on the Q3CTP/K Version, that is displayed when, on the PC, you
select the 1320CT application for its launch.
The Q3CTP/K Version embedded in the SWP is also specified in the Operator Handbooks paragraph
ECT SW SubComponents of chapter (in Section SWP DESCRIPTION AND VERSIONS) related to the
SWP version you use.
Tab. 83. Handbooks common to Alcatel Network Elements using 1320CT platform
Usage according to
Q3CTP/K Version
HANDBOOK
P/N
1.3.x
and
1.7.x
1.7.x
and
3.0.1
N.B.
3.0.1
ED.03
1320CT Rel.1.x Basic

Operators Handbook
3AL 79186 AAAA
1330AS Rel.5.0 Operators

Handbook
3AL 71079 AAAA
1330AS Rel.5.1 Operators

Handbook
3AL 71109 AAAA
ELM Operators Handbook
3AL 37953 AAAA
1320CT Rel.3.x Basic

Operators Handbook
3AL 79551 AAAA
AS Rel.6.5 Operators
Handbook
3AL 88876 AAAA
ELB Rel.2.x Operators

Handbook
3AL 88877 AAAA
ED.04 on
2,3
N.B.1
Provides general information and operational procedures common to all 1320CT (Craft
terminal) of Alcatel InfoModel Network Elements.
N.B.2
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the alarm Surveillance
software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
N.B.3
In 1330AS Rel.5.1 Operators Handbook, information about Historical Alarms and Network
Element Symbols Management (Physical Network Management) are not valid for Craft
Terminal. They are used by Network Management only.
N.B.4
Provides detailed information and operational procedures regarding the Event Log
Management/Browser software embedded in the 1320CT software package.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
529 / 542
Q3CTP/K
Version
ANV P/N
Factory P/N
HANDBOOK
1.x
DCP1320CT BASIC CDROM
3AL 79549 AAAA

417.100.031
3.x
DCP 1320 CT 3.x CD_ROM EN
3AL 79552 AAAA

417.100.032
Contain, in electronic format (Acrobat pdf), the 1320 CT Operators Handbooks (see Tab. 83. on
page 529)
C.2.4.2: Handbooks and CDROMs of 1650SMC

1650SMC has its own:
Technical Handbook
Commissioning Handbook
CT Operators Handbook
CDROM containing the above cited handbooks.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Their P/Ns are not indicated here, as they depend on the Product release and Software Package version.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
530 / 542

Tab. 84. Documentation on CDROM for 1320CT platform

C.3 : General on Alcatel Customer Documentation

This paragraph describes in general the Alcatel Customer Documentation system, details the association
between the product levels and the associated documentation, and explains Customer Documentation
characteristics as well as the policies for its delivery to Customers.
This paragraph is fully applicable to the 2nd generation Radio Product families of Alcatel WTD (Wireless
Transmission Division) only.
C.3.1 : CustomerIndependent Standard Customer Documentation
a)
Definition
Standard Customer Documentation, referred to hereafter, must be always meant as
plantindependent and is always independent of any Customization.
Plantdependent and/or Customized documentation, if envisaged by the contract, is subjected to
commercial criteria as far as contents, formats and supply conditions are concerned
N.B.
b)
Plantdependent and Customized documentation is not described here.
Aims of standard Customer Documentation

Standard system, hardware and software documentation is meant to give the Customer personnel
the possibility and the information necessary for installing, commissioning, operating, and
maintaining the equipment according to Alcatel Laboratory design and Installation Dept. choices. In
particular:
the contents of the handbooks associated to the software applications focus on the explanation
of the manmachine interface and of the operating procedures allowed by it;
maintenance is described down to faulty PCB location and replacement.
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
N.B.
ED
No supply to Customers of design documentation (like PCB hardware design and

production documents and files, software source programs, programming tools, etc.) is
envisaged.
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
531 / 542
C.3.2 : Product levels and associated Customer Documentation
a)
Products
A product is defined by the network hierarchical level where it can be inserted and by the whole
of performances and services that it is meant for.
E.g. 9600LSY is a product (STM1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Link).
b)
Product-releases
A product evolves through successive product-releases, which are the real products marketed
for their delivery at a certain product-release availability date. A certain product-release performs
more functionalities than the previous one.
E.g. 9600LSY Rel.1.0 and 9600LSY Rel.2.0 are two successive product-releases of the same
product.
A productrelease comprehends a set of hardware components and at least one Software
Package (SWP); as a whole, they identify the possible network applications and the equipment
performances that the specific product-release has been designed, engineered, and marketed for.
c)
Configurations and Network Elements

In some cases, a product-release includes different possible configurations which are
distinguished from one another by different Network Element (NE) types and, from the
management point of view, by different SWPs.
E.g. 9600LSY Rel.2.0 includes various configurations with two NE types: Regenerator 1+0/1+1/2+0
with NE type LHRC; Regenerator N+0 (n=max 8) / N+1 (n=max 7) with NE type LHR.
d)
SWP Releases and Versions

See Fig. 211. herebelow.
A SWP is identified by the configuration name and by the version number (tree digits).
The versions first digit corresponds to the productrelease number first digit; the second digit
identifies, together with the first, the SWP release.
The third digit of the SWP version identifies the Patch Level of the SWP Release.
SWP version
SWP Release
Product
Releases
first digit
SWP evolution for bug fixing purposes
or minor additional features
(same SWP Release within same ProductRelease)
1.
0.
1.
0.
SWP evolution for major additional features

Product Release)
(new SWP Release within same ProductRelease)
(N.B. see next page)
1.
0.
1.
1.
1.
0.
2.
0.
SWP evolution for additional features

(new SWP Release of a new ProductRelease)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Patch Level
Fig. 211. Example of SWP Release and Version numbering
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
532 / 542

Sometimes, different SWP Releases (within the same ProductRelease) are commercially
distinguished by different names, e.g. :

N.B.
e)
SWP version
SWPRelease commercial name
1.0.x
1.0
1.1.x
1.0B
1.2.x
1.0C
Customer Documentation
A product-release(configuration) has its own set of standard Customer Documentation, usually
formed of several handbooks, i.e., in general:
System and Hardware documentation:
one (or more) Technical Handbook(s)
an Installation Handbook
a LineUp Guide or Commissioning Handbook
Software documentation:
a Craft Terminal Operators Handbook, associated to the specific SWPRelease
other Operators Handbooks (typically those associated to the SW platform embedded

in the SWP)
PRODUCT
PRODUCTRELEASE 1.0
evolution
PRODUCTRELEASE 2.0
ALTERNATIVE CONFIGURATIONS
CONFIG.A
SWP REL.1.0
PRODUCT
LEVELS
CONFIG.B
evolution
SWP REL.1.1
DOCUMENTATION
CONFIG.A
System & HW
Documentation
SWP REL.1.0
SW
Documentation
SWP REL.1.1
SW
Documentation
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Fig. 212. Example of Product levels and associated Customer Documentation
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
533 / 542
C.3.3 : Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers

Standard supply
Handbooks and CDROMs are standard commercial items and are ordered and delivered as any
other Alcatel commercial item.
Handbooks and CDROMs are not automatically delivered together with the equipment they refer
to.
The number of handbooks or CDROMs per type to be supplied must be decided at contract level.
b)
Productdocumentation consistency
Equipment description and layout are always general, i.e. they never describe the actual
composition of the equipment supplied to Customer (this task is entrusted to plantdependent
documentation).
Detailed hardware documentation concerns actually supplied units and is coherent with the
production issue of such units.
Softwareassociated handbooks are coherent with the supplied SWP release.
Copies of the handbooks regarding a specific productrelease previously delivered can be required
specifying P/N and edition.
c)
Inadvance supply
Whenever handbooks or CDROMs are delivered before the relevant equipment delivery, there is
the risk that their contents might not agree with the characteristics of the equipment which will be
delivered: the more they are in advance the less are they likely to agree.
d)
Supplying updated handbooks and CDROMs to Customers

Supplying updated handbooks or CDROMs to Customers who have already received previous
issues is subject to commercial criteria.
By updated handbook delivery, we mean the supply of a complete copy of a new issue of the
handbook (supplying erratacorrige sheets is not envisaged).
e)
Copyright notification
The technical information of the handbooks and CDROMs supplied to Customers is the property
of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.
f)
Supply to Customers of Customer Documentation source files
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
Presently not envisaged.
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
534 / 542

a)

APPENDIX D LIST OF SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS

Tab. 85. List Of Symbols
This Table Lists Some Symbols Whose Interpretation Could Be Doubtful.
N.B.
SYMBOL
MEANING AND COMMENTS

In this handbook it is not the division symbol. It means from .. to ...
E.g.:
<value1> <value2>
means:
from <value1> (included) to <value2> (included)
A polarization symbol like this:
POLARIZATION can be assumed as either horizontal

SYMBOLS
Once you have decided a polarization (e.g.
or vertical
H
the opposite direction symbol will be opposite polarization (e.g.
)
V
Tab. 86. List Of Abbreviations

ABBREVIATION
MEANING
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
A
AC
Alternate Current
ACSE
Association Control Service Element
ADC
Analog to Digital Converter
ADM
Add Drop Multiplexer
AE
Access Enable
AF
Atomic Function
AGC
Automatic Gain Control
AIS
Alarm Indication Signal
ALS
Automatic Laser Shutdown
AMI
Alternate Mark Inversion
ANSI
American National Standard Institute
AOW
Additional Order Wire
API
Access Point Identifier
APS
Automatic Protection Switching
ASE
Application Service Element
ASIC
Application Specific Integrated Circuit
AT
Attend alarm
ATL
Far Terminal Alarm
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
ATPC
Automatic Transmitter Power Control
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
535 / 542

MEANING
ATTD
ATTendeD
AUG
Administration Unit Group
AUn
Administrative Unit n (Order)
AUX
AUXiliary
B
BB
Base Band
BBE
Background Block Error
BCA
Common Battery Dial Pulsing (Telephone Set)
BER
Bit Error Rate
BIPx
Bit Interleaved Parity x

C
CAN
Controller Area Network (communication protocol patented by Robert

Bosch GmbH)
CCDP
CoChannel Dual Polarized (Frequency reuse)
CFRD
Component Failure Rate Date
C/I
Carrier to Interference ratio
CK
Clock
CMI
Code Mark Inversion
CMISE
Common Management Information Service Element
CPU
Central Processor Unit
CRCn
Cyclic Redundancy Check n
CRU
Clock Reference Unit
CSW
Common SoftWare
CTP
Connection Termination Point
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
D
DA
Distant Alarm
DC
Direct Current
DCC
Data Communication Channels (D1D12)
DCC/M
Multiplex Section DCC (D4D12)
DCC/R
Regenerator Section DCC (D1D3)
DCN
Data Communication Network
DEFEC
FEC Decoder
DEM
Demodulator
DF
Dialog Failure
DIV
Diversity
DM
Degraded Minute
DS
Defect Second
DTI
Department of Trade and Industry
DTMF
Dual Tone MultiFrequency
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
536 / 542

ABBREVIATION

ABBREVIATION
MEANING
E
EB
Error Block
EBC
Errored Block Count
EC
Equipment Controller
ECC
Embedded Control Channel
ECS
External Communication Service
ECT
Equipment Craft Terminal
EE
Equipment Engineering
EF
Equipment Failure
EIA
Electronic Industries Association
EMC
ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
EMF
Equipment Management Function
EOW
Engineering Order Wire
EPS
Equipment Protection Switching
ES
Error Second
ETR
European Telecommunication Report
ETS
European Telecommunication Standard
ETSI
European Telecommunication Standard Institute
EW
Early Warning
EWH
Early Warning High
EWL
Early Warning Low
EXCBER
Excessive BER
F
FE
Front End
FEBE
Far End Block Error
FEC
Forward Error Correction (Code)
FERF
Far End Receiver Failure
FIT
Failure Unit
FR
Failure rate
FSRC
Failed Switch Request Count
FSRD
Failed Switch Request Duration
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
G
GA
General Alarm
GB
Ground Benign
GF
Ground Fixed
GM
Ground Mobile
H
HBER
High Bit Error Rate
HDLC
High level Data Link Control
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
537 / 542

MEANING
HET
Heterofrequency (Radio system configuration)
HEW
High Early Warning
HK
HouseKeeping
HPT
High order Path Termination
HPC
High order Path Connection
HS
High Speed
HST
Hot StandBy

ABBREVIATION
I
ID
IDentifier
IDU
InDoor Unit
IEC
International Electro technical Commission
IF
Intermediate Frequency
IRC
International Radiotechnical Commission
ISO
International Standard Organization
ISPB
Intra Shelf Parallel Bus
ISSB
Intra Shelf Serial Bus
ITUR
International Telecommunication Union Radiocommunication
ITUT
International Telecommunication Union Telecommunication

L
LAN
Local Area Network
LBER
Low Bit Error Rate
LC
Loss of Configuration
LED
Light Emitting Diode
LEW
Low Early Warning
LHR
Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator
LHRC
Long Haul indoor terminal Regenerator Compact
LO
Local Oscillator
LOF
Loss Of Frame
LOP
Loss Of Pointers
LOS
Loss Of Signal
LPA
Lower order Path Adaptation
LPT
Lower order Path Termination
LS
Low Speed
LSY
Long haul SYstem
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
M
MC
Monitoring Channel
MCF
Message Communication Function
MDT
Mean Dawn Time
MIR
Loss of incoming pulses
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
538 / 542

ABBREVIATION
MEANING
MLC
Multi Level Coding
MMIC
Monolithic Microwave Integrated Circuit
MOD
Modulator
MS
Multiplex Section
MSA
Multiplex Section Adaptation
MSAIS
Multiplex Section Alarm Indication Signal
MSOH
Multiplex Section OverHead
MSP
Multiplex Section Protection
MSRDI
Multiplex Section Remote Defect Indication
MSREI
Multiplex Section Remote Error Indication
MST
Multiplex Section Termination
MTBF
Mean Time Between Failures
MTTR
Mean Time To Repair

N
NA
Not Applicable
NDS
Nearend Defect Second
NE
Network Element
NEBC
Nearend Errored Block Count
NEFA
Network Element Function Application
NF
Noise Figure
NFD
Net Filter Discrimination
NG
Not Urgent
NRZ
Non Return to Zero
NURG
Not Urgent
O
OCT
Office Craft Terminal
ODU
OutDoor Unit
OFS
Out of Frame Second
OH
OverHead
O&M
Operation and Maintenance
OIRT
Russian Regulatory Body
OOF
Out Of Frame
OS
Operation System
OVF
Overflow
OW
Order Wire
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
P
PC
Personal Computer
PDH
Plesiocronus Digital Hierarchy
PI
Physical Interface
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
539 / 542

MEANING
PLL
Phase Locked Loop
PM
Performance Monitoring
POH
Path Overhead
PSA
Protection Switch Actual
PSAC
Protection Switch Count
PSAD
Protection Switch Actual Duration
PSR
Protection Switch Request
PSU
Power Supply Unit

ABBREVIATION
Q
QAM
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QOS
Quality Of Service
R
RAPS
Radio Automatic Protection Switch
RC
Radio Controller
RCIM
Radio Channel Identifier Mismatch
RCT
Remote Craft Terminal
RECT
Remote Equipment Craft Terminal
RES
Radio Equipment and Systems
RF
Radio Frequency
RFCOH
Radio Frame Complementary Overhead
RL
Received Level
RLTS
Received Level Threshold Second
ROSE
Remote Operation Service Element
RPI
Radio Physical Interface
RPS
Radio Protection Switching
RRA
Radio Regenerator Adaptation
RRR
Radio Relay Repeaters
RRT
Radio Relay Terminals
RS
Regenerator Section
RSOH
Regenerator Section Overhead
RSPI
Radio Synchronous Physical Interface
RST
Regeneration Section Termination
RTF
Remote Terminal Failure
RX
Receiver/Received
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
S
SA
Service Alarm
SBL
Security Block
SC
System Controller
SD
Space Diversity
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
540 / 542

ABBREVIATION
MEANING
SDH
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
SEMF
Synchronous Equipment Management Function
SERS
Synchronous E1 Regeneration Section
SES
Severly Errored Seconds
SETS
Synchronous Equipment Timing Source
SF
Signal Failure
SNCP
Sub Network Connection Protection
SOH
Section Overhead
SOHF
SOH Failure
SPI
Synchronous Physical Interface
SPS
Synchronous Path Sink
SR
Synchronous Radio
SRMR
Synchronous Radio Modem (Assembly) for Repeater
SRMT
Synchronous Radio Modem (Assembly) for Terminal
SRST
Synchronous Radio baseband (Assembly) for Terminal
SRSR
Synchronous Radio baseband (Assembly) for Repeater
SSM
Synchronisation Status Message
STBY
Standby
STMN
Synchronous Transport Module N (Hierarchic level)
STM0
51 Mbit transmission bit rate
SU
Supervisory Unit
SW
Switch
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
T
TA
TeleAlarms
TAT
Turn Around Time
TC
Terminal Connector / Tandem Connection
TEM
Transversal Electric Mode
TIM
Trace Identifier Mismatch
TL
Transmitted Level
TLTS
Transmitted Level Threshold Second
TM
Transmission and Multiplexing
TMN
Telecommunication Management Network
TP
Termination Point
TPH
Telephone
TR
TRansceiver
TRU
Top Rack Unit
TTP
Trail Termination Point
TUn
Tributary Unit n (Order)
TUGn
Tributary Unit Group n (Order)
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
541 / 542

ABBREVIATION
MEANING
Transmitter/Transmitted
TX
U
U
Unavailability
UDR
Unpressurized Rectangular Waveguide Type
UG
Urgent Alarm
UHM
Urban Haul split mount terminal Multiplexer
UHR
Urban Haul split mount terminal Regenerator
USK
Stackable Unit
UT
Unavailability Time
V
VCn
Virtual Container n (Order)
VCO
Voltage Controlled Oscillator
VF
Voice Frequency
VHM
Virtual Hardware Machine

W
WADM
Wireless Add and Drop Multiplexer
WLT
Wireless Line Terminal
WST
Way Side Traffic
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
X
XPD
Cross Polar Discrimination
XPIC
Cross Polar Interference Cancelled
XPI
Cross Polar Interference
XPIF
Cross Polar Improvement Factor
XPOL
Cross Polar/Polarization
END OF DOCUMENT
ED
05
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AA AA
542
542 / 542
Technical Handbook
Alcatel 9600LSY
STM1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0
LHR version
955.203.292 Q Ed.05
3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.05
Documentation set for 9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0

ANV P/N
Handbook
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Technical Handbook
3DB 02839 AAAA
9600LSY/LHRLHRC Hardware setting documents
3DB 02839 EAAA
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Branching drawings
3DB 02839 CAAA
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Installation Handbook
3DB 02840 AAAA
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 Lineup Guide
3DB 02841 AAAA
9600LSY/LHR Rel.2.0 Lineup Guide
3DB 02841 CAAA
9600LSY/LHR Rel.1.0 & 2.0 Expansion procedures
3DB 02841 DAAA
3DB 04165 EAAA
3DB 02838 AAAA

(version V2.0.1)
3DB 02838 BAAA

(from version V2.0.2)
3DB 02838 CAAA
this
Handbook
in alternative
(according to
used SWP)
in alternative
(according to
used
d SWP)
For further information and 1320CT handbooks, see chapter DOCUMENTATION GUIDE in section
APPENDICES
When supplied on paper, this handbook is divided by registers, for an easier access to the information
herein contained:
CONTENTS
REGISTER
FRONT MATTER
SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATIONS
SECTION 3: FREQUENCY PLANS, TRANSCEIVER P/N & HW SETTING
955.203.292 Q Ed.05
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N: 955.203.292
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0

LHR version
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
Q Ed.05 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.05
ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (FED/PED)
No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 544+4 = 548

DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du ks): 189.930 kbyte
INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS
COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE:

HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY:
SERVONO 6 SEPARATORI NUMERATI DA 1 A 6
6 REGISTERS NUMBERED FROM 1 TO 6 ARE NECESSARY
STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING
No pagine
(facciate)
No pages
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
fase
step
ED
numerate
numbered
da from
a to
TARGHETTE - LABELS
FRONTESPIZIO - FRONT
PARTE INIZIALE - FRONT MATTER
1/542
24/542
INSERIRE SEPARATORE 1 - INSERT REGISTER 1
SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
25/542
118/542
SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND

CONFIGURATIONS
119/542
242/542
SECTION 3: FREQUENCY PLANS, TRANSCEIVER

P/N & HW SETTING
243/542
308/542
10
11
309/542
396/542
12
13
397/542
488/542
14
15
489/542
542/542
TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES:
544
TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS:
272
05
RELEASED
955.203.292 TQZZA
3DB 02839 AAAA TQZZA

4
1/ 4
QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE
Site
VIMERCATE

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK

WTD
9600LSY REL.1.0/2.0
Originators
E.CORRADINI
LHR
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
Domain
Division
Rubric
Type
Distribution Codes
:
:
:
:
9600LSY REL.1.0 & 2.0

LHR
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
9600LSY/LHR REL.1.0/2.0 TECHNICAL HDBK
Internal :
External
:
Approvals
Name
App.
V.RODELLA
Name
App.
S.SOLIMENA
C.COLOMBO
M.FRECASSETTI
WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY

Labels are done according to A-Italy binder format.
Source files and printable files of this handbook are archived in ePDM:
Source file: ALICE 6.10 ARCHIVED BY GAPI 3.9.1
Printable file: PDF file must be opened with ACROBAT Reader Version 5.0 at least.
(N.B. : it has been created with ACROBAT DISTILLER 6.0)
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
955.203.292 Q
3DB 02839 AAAA
Ed.05
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0
STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System
LHR version
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
ED
05
RELEASED
955.203.292 TQZZA

4
2/ 4
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0

LHR version
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
955.203.292 Q Ed.05
VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0

LHR version
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
955.203.292 Q Ed.05
VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0
LHR version
955.203.292 Q Ed.05
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0
STM 1/0 Long Haul Digital Radio Relay System LHR version
955.203.292 Q Ed.05 3DB 02839 AAAA Ed.05
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
9600LSY Rel.1.0 & 2.0

LHR version
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
955.203.292 Q Ed.05
ED
05
TECHNICAL HANDBOOK
VOL.1/1
RELEASED
955.203.292 TQZZA

4
3/ 4
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10
FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT
ED
05
RELEASED
955.203.292 TQZZA
4/ 4

LHR Technical

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LHR Technical

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

LHR Technical

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

9600LSY/LHR REL.1.0/2.0 TECHNICAL HDBK

HANDBOOK APPLICABILITY, PURPOSE AND HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SAFETYEMCESD NORMS AND EQUIPMENT LABELLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS . .

11 INTRODUCTION TO THE 9600LSY RADIO SYSTEM FAMILY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

12.4.8 Installation materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

SECTION 2: SYSTEM COMPOSITION AND CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

22 EQUIPMENT PART LIST AND PROVISIONING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

23 OPERATIVE INFORMATION ON EQUIPMENT BOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

SECTION 3: FREQUENCY PLANS, TRANSCEIVER P/N & HW SETTING . . . . 243

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

24.4 Power supply distribution connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

35.2.1 9667LSY Channel plan: ITUR F.384, CEPT T/R 1402 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4: MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

42 SET AND USE OF EOW FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

44 FIRST LEVEL MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

43 MAINTENANCE TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

47.3.8 SERVICE replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

48 TRANSCEIVER REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

49 FAULTY UNIT REPAIR AND REPAIR FORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5: FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

53 ALARM MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

SECTION 6: APPENDICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

APPENDIX B : INFORMATION ON FORMER VERSION TRU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX C : DOCUMENTATION GUIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

52.5.5 Local Oscillator module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

APPENDIX D LIST OF SYMBOLS AND ABBREVIATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

C.3.3 : Handbook and CDROM supply to Customers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

Fig. 201. LSY equipment identification label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10